Polavaram Technical Scope

TENDER SPECIFIVATION No.
(TWO PART BID)
BID DOCUMENTS
FOR THE WORK OF
Design, Engineering, Manufacturing, testing at manufacturer’s works

before dispatch, Supply, transportation, storage at site, insurance,
erection, testing and commissioning of 12 Nos., each 80 MW capacity
Vertical full Kaplan Turbine generator units along with all associated
auxiliary and ancillary equipment, 400KV Gas Insulated Switchgear
and civil works of power house, Pressure tunnels, approach channel,
intake pool, intake structure, Tail Race Pool(T.R.P), Tail Race
Channel(T.R.C) and other civil works etc., and Hydro Mechanical
works (Gates, Hoists & Trash Rack etc.) of Polavaram Hydro Electric
Project on EPC (TURN KEY) basis
VOLUME –III Technical Specification of E&M Works

PART-I Scope of contract – Abstract 1
PART-II Guaranteed Technical Particulars 2-58
PART-III Detailed Scope of the Contract and technical specification of 59-367
E&M works including Gas Insulated Switchgear
CONTENTS
SI.No. Description Page No.

VOLUME – 1 General Instructions &Eligility Criteria
PART – I Tender Details (NIT)
PART-II Instructions to Bidders
PART – III Eligibility criteria, Selection Procedure and proof
VOLUME – II General and Financial Terms & Conditions
PART-I General
PART-II Financial
VOLUME –III Technical Specification of E&M Works
PART-I Scope of contract – Abstract
PART-II Guaranteed Technical Particulars
PART-III Detailed Scope of the Contract and technical specification of E&M works
including Gas Insulated Switchgear
VOLUME-IV Detailed Scope of the Contract and technical specification of CIVIL and
H.M.Works
VOLUME-V Attachments
PART- I Attachments for Pre Qualification/ Tech Bid
PART- II Attachments for Price Bid
VOLUME –VI Drawings
CONTENTS
S.No. Item Description
Page No
PART – I OUT LINE FOR SCOPE OF E&M EQUIPMENT AND 1
WOR
PART-II GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 2-58
CRITICAL E&M EQUIPMENT
SCHEDULE – D1 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 2-6
TURBINE
SCHEDULE –D2 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 7-14
GENERATOR
SCHEDULE –D3 11 KV INDOOR BREAKER PANELS/ LOAD BREAK 15-18
SWITCHES
SCHEDULE –D4 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 11KV 19-21
BUS DUCT
SCHEDULE –D5 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 11KV 22
BREKERS FOR INDOOR & OUTDOOR SYSTEM
SCHEDULE –D6 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL SATs (Indoor Type) 23-24
SCHEDULE –D7 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 415 VLT 25-30
BOARDS OF A) UABs, B) SABs and C) RESERVE
BOARDS.
SCHEDULE –D8 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF A) 31-38
GENERATOR TRANSFORMER B) STATION
TRANSFORMEER C) BUS REACTOR
BATTERY, CHARGER, & D.C DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
EOT CRANE
SCHEDULE –D11 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OFAIR 43-44
CONDITIONING & VENTILATION
SCHEDULE –D12 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OFDG SET 45-46
SCHEDULE –D13 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CABLES 47
(FRLS)
SCHEDULE –D14 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GAS 48-56
INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
SCHEDULE –D15 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 57
LIGHTING
SCHEDULE –D16 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF FIRE 58
FIGHTING SYSTEM
PART - III TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF E&M EQUIPMENT
3.0 SPECIFICATION FOR TURBINE AND ITS AUXILIARY 59-
EQUIPMENT
3.1 SCOPE 59
3.2 HYDRULIC & OTHER DATA 59-60
3.3 GUARANTEES 60
3.4 CHECKING GUARANTEES FROM MODEL TEST 60
RESULTS
3.5 PENALTY ON ACCOUNT OF FALL IN EFFICIECY AND 60-61
OUTPUT AT RATED HEAD AND DISCHARGE
3.6 RECTIFICATION TO MEET GUARANTEE 61
3.7 CAVITATION GUARANTEE 61-62
3.8 CRITICAL AND PLANT SIGMA 62
3.9 SPEED RISE, RUNAWAY SPEED AND NOICE LEVEL 62
3.10 MODEL TESTS 62
3.11 MODEL TURBINES 62-63
3.12 MODEL TEST 63
3.13 MODEL ACCEPTANCE 63
3.14 GENERAL ARRANGMENT OF THE TURBINE 64
3.15 TURBINE CONSTRUCTION 64
3.16 RUNNER 64
3.17 RUNNER AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 65
3.18 TURBINE SHAFT, COUPLING AND ALIGNMENT 66
3.19 TURBINE GUIDE BEARING 67
3.20 MAIN SHAFT GLAND (SEALING BOX) 68
3.21 SPIRAL CASING (Semi – Spiral) 69
3.22 STAY RING 70
3.23 BOTTOM RING 71
3.24 RUNNER CHAMBER 71
3.25 DRAFT TUBE AND DRAFT TUBE CONE 71
3.26 GUIDE VANES 72
3.27 TOP COVER 74
3.28 TURBINE PIT LINER 74
3.29 GUIDE VANE SERVOMOTORS 75
3.30 TURBINE PLAT FORM, WALKWAYS, HAND RAILS, ETC 75
3.31 TURBINE FLOW-METER 75
3.32 PIEZOMETER GAUGES 76
3.33 TEMPERATURE DETECTORS AND THERMO- 76
SIGNALISERS
3.34 OIL LEVEL TRANSMITTERS/ GAUGE AND OIL LEVEL 77
RELAYS
3.35 GOVERNING EQUIPMENTT 77
3.36 ELECTRICAL AND HYDRAULIC CABINETS 78
3.37 OIL PRESSURE VESSEL 81
3.38 OIL SUMP-TANK AND PUMPS 82
3.39 LEAKAGE OIL TANK AND PUMPS 83
3.40 GOVERNOR OIL PIPING AND VALVES 83
3.41 HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 83
3.42 COOLING WATER SYSTEM 84
3.43 PARALLEL OPERATION 84
3.44 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR TURBINES 84
ADND GOVERNORS
3.45 SPECIAL TOOLS, SPECIAL SLINGS, EQUIPMENT & 85
CONSUMABLES ETC
3.46 SPARES 85
3.47 SHOP ASSEMBLY AND TESTS 85
3.48 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS 85
3.49 COMMISSIONING TESTS 86
3.50 SUPERVISION OF ERECTION 86
3.51 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS 86
SECTION-IV GENERATOR
4.1 SCOPE 97
4.2 DRIVE 97
4.3 TYPE AND RATING 97
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN 98
4.5 OVER SPEED 98
4.6 NOISE LEVEL 98
4.7 INSULATION 98
4.8 TEMPERATURE RISE 98
4.9 EFFICIENCY AND OUTPUT GUARANTEES 99
4.10 EFFICIENCY GUARANTEES 99
4.11 DETERMINATION OF EFFICIENCIES 99
4.12 OUTPUT AND TEMPERATURE RESES 100
4.13 PENALTY FOR SHORT-FALL IN EFFICIENCY AND 100
OUTPUT
4.14 REJECTION LIMIT 100
4.15 WAVE FORM 100
4.16 PARALLEL OPERATION, STABILITY AND 101
PERFORMANCE
4.17 FLY WHEEL EFFECT 101
4.18 INHERENT REGULATION 101
4.19 SHORT CIRCUITS 101
4.20 EARTHING OF NEUTRALS 101
4.21 PROTECTION 101
4.22 TEMPERATURE DETECTORS 102
4.23 DAMPER WINDING 102
4.24 FANS 102
4.25 VENTILATION 102
4.26 FIRE PROTECTION 103
4.27 CONSTRUCTION 103
4.28 STATOR FRAME 103
4.29 STATOR CORE 103
4.30 STATOR WINDING 103
4.31 ROTOR 104
4.32 FIELD COILS 104
4.33 SHAFT 105
4.34 BEARINGS 105
4.35 H.S.LUBRICATION 106
4.36 OILS 106
4.37 OIL & AIR PIPING 106
4.38 BRAKES AND JACKS 107
4.39 HYDRAULIC POWER PACK 107
4.40 VIBRATION MONITOORING SYSTEM 107
4.41 WINDING HEATERS 108
4.42 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS 108
4.43 PIPING 109
4.44 GAUGES 110
4.45 GENERATOR FOUNDATIONS 110
4.46 DEPARTURES FROM SPECIFICATIONS 110
4.47 TESTES 111
4.48 SHOP ASSEMBLY ADND TESTS 111
4.49 TESTS AT WORKSHOP 111
4.50 TESTS AT SITE 113
4.51 TESTING EQUIPMENT 114
4.52 SUPERVISION OF ERECTION 114
4.53 DRAWING 114
4.54 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR 115
GENERATOR AND AUXILIARIES
4.55 SPARES 115
4.56 SPECIAL TOOLS, SECIAL SLINGS, EQUIPMENT & 116
CONSUMABLES ETC
4.57 TRAINING OF ENGINEERS 116
4.58 Working Model 116
4.58 Indicating Instruments & Safety Devices 117
4.59 Schedule of Spares 119
4.60 List of testing instruments 119
4.61 List of Mandatory Tools and plant 120
SECTION-V STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM AND DVR
5.0 GENERAL 121
5.1 EXCITATION POWER (RECTIFIER) TRANSFORMER 122
5.2 EXCITATION CONTROL 122
5.3 DIGITAL VOLTAGE REGULATORS 122
5.4 FIELD SUPPRESSION 124
SECTION- VI Scope of Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of
Control and Relaying Equipment of complete Scheme
6.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 125
6.2 PROVISIONS 125
6.3 DATA ACQUISITION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 126
6.3.1 BASIC COMPONENTS 126
6.3.2 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY 127
6.3.2.1 UNIT CONTROLLER 127
6.3.2.2 THE UNIT CONTROLLER SHALL CONSISTS 129
6.3.2.3 400KV GIS SWITCHYARD CONTROLLER 129
6.3.2.4 STATION AUXILLIARY CONTROLLER 132
6.3.2.5 LARGE VIDEO SCREEN DISPLAY 133
6.3.3 ARCHITECTURE OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM 135
6.3.4 HMI STATION/ PLANT COMPUTER 137
6.3.5 Visual monitoring system for watch and ward of power station, 138
GIS and surrounding premises
6.3.6 SPARES 138
6.4 PROTECTIVE RELAYING EQUIPMET 139
6.4.1 Generator and Generator Transformer 139
6.4.2 Generator transformer protection 140
6.4.3 400KV Transmission Line protection 140
6.4.4.1 400KV/ 11KV Station Transformer Protection 142
6.4.4.2 400 KV Bus Reactor Protection 144
6.4.4.3 400 KV Bus coupler &Sectionaliser Protection 146
6.4.5 400 KV Bus bar prtection 146
6.4.6 Master Trip Relays for Tripping (86 Gr-A & Gr-B) 147
6.4.7 Fault Locator 148
6.4.8 Fault / Disturbance recorder 148
6.4.9 Sequence OF Event recorder 148
6.4.10 Energy Meters 148
6.4.11 Bay Control Unit 148
6.4.12 Configuration of Control & Relay panels 149
6.4.13 33/ 11 KV Service transformer Control & Protection 156
6.4.14 11KV Switchgear Protection for Indoor and Outdoor including 156
control by bay control unit
6.4.15 Spares 157
6.4.16 Panel Construction 159
6.4.17 TESTS 159
6.4.18 Automatic microprocessor based relay test kit 159
6.4.19 TRAINING FACILITIES 159
6.4.20 IMPLEMENTATION OF SAS AND DISTURBANCE 160
RECORDER EVALUATION
SECTION- VII SUPPLY, ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING 161
OF POWER HOUSE AUXILIARIES
7.1.0 11KV ISOLATED PHASE BUSDUCT 161
7.1.1 Provision of bus ducts for each unit 161
7.1.2 Isolating links shall be provided 161
7.1.3 SPECIFICATION FOR ISOLATED PHASE BUSDUCT 161
7.1.4 BUS COONDUCTOR 162
7.1.5 Disconnect Link 162
7.1.6 Insulators 163
7.1.7 Connections & Terminations 163
7.1.8 Shorting Link 163
7.1.9 Grounding 164
7.1.10 Supporting Structures 164
7.1.11 Current Transformers 164
7.1.12 Neutral side 165
7.1.13 Line side 165
7.1.14 Voltage Transformer and Surge Protection Cubicles (VT & SP)/ 165
Lightning Arrestor and Voltage Transformer cubicles (LAVT)
7.1.15 Potential Transformer 166
7.1.16 Neutral Grounding Cubicle 167
7.1.17 Cubicle and Control Panel/ Cabinet 167
Spares 168
7.2 11/KV SYSTEM 169
7.2.1 11KV OUTDOOR SUB STATION 169
7.2.2 11 KV INDOOR BREAKER PANELS/ LOAD BREAK 177
SWITCHES
7.3.1 STATION AUXILLIARY TRANSFORMERS 181
7.3.2 ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS 183
7.4 33/11KV, 7.5 MVA auxiliary station 186
supply transformer
7.5 415 VOLTS LT DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 187
(UABs, SABs &RBs)
7.6 UNIT AUXILIARY AND STATION AUXILLIARY 193
CONTROL PANELS
7.7 GENERATOR TRANSFORMERS 194
7.8 STATION BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC 214
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
7.9 AC & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS 219
7.10 STATION UPS SYSTEM AND ACDBs 221
7.11 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 221
7.12 POWER HOUSE AND SWITCHYARD LIGHTING 227
7.13 EOT CRANES 230
7.14 POWER & CONTROL CABLES, CABLE TRAYS, LAYING 246
AND TERMINATION
7.15 POWER HOUSE EARTHING & GROUNDING 253
7.16 AIR CONDITIONING & VENITILATION 254
7.17 DG SET 1000 KVA 255
7.18 LIFTS 256
7.19 COMMUNICATION AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 258
7.20 TESTS 260
SECTION – VIII 400 KV GIS SWITCHYARD
8.0 GENERAL 261
8.1.0 SCOPE OF THE CONTRACT 262
8.1.1 TERMINAL POINTS 262
8.1.2 GIS SPECIFICATION 262
8.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 306
8.4 TOWERS & STRUCTURES 307
8.5 Statutory Approvals 307
SECTION – IX Technical specifications for SDH Type Optical Line Terminal 308-356
Equipment (OLTE) with integrated Access Multiplexer equipment
SECTION –IX EPAX (with E1 cards) 357-367
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EPAX& ELECTRONIC PUSH BUTTON
TELEPHONES
VOLUME – III
PART – I
OUT LINE FOR SCOPE OF E&M EQUIPMENT AND WORKS
The Scope of E & M equipment covers supply erection testing & commissioning
of the following equipment in Brief
1) Vertical Kaplan Turbine & Auxiliaries. including Servo valve Digital Governor
2) Generator & Auxiliaries, incl. Static Excitation Equipment & D V R
3) SCADA Control & Protection Relaying Equipment including bay control units.
4) 11 KV Isolated Phase Bus duct.
5) Station supply (Dry type) Transformers. (2.5MVA,5 MVA)

6) 33/11KV Transformer (7.5 MVA)
7) 11 KV Indoor & Outdoor system

8) 415 V L T Distribution Boards. & UPS
9) Unit auxiliary control panels.
10) 100 MVA Generator Transformers with NIFPS.
11) 400 KV Bus Reactors with NIFPS.

12) 20 MVA Station Transformer with NIFPS.
13) 220 V Stn. Battery, Battery charger & DC Distn. Boards.
14) Power House earthing & grounding.
15) 11KV XLPE Cables, LT Power & control cables, cable Trays for PowerHouse&
GIS etc.
16) Fire fighting system of Power House & NIFPR for transformers.
17) Power Housing Lighting
18) A/C & Ventilation for Power House.
19) Internal telephone & Public Address system
20) Lifts
21) 1000 KVA DG set
22) EOT cranes
23) Testing equipment.

24) Special T & P for Operation & Maintenance.
25) 400 KV GIS switchyard
26) 400 KV Isolators with earth switch,CVTs, CTs, LAs.
27) Power evacuation structures..
28) Lightning protection
29) Mandatory & Commissioning Spares
30) Erection, Testing & commissioning of complete PH Equipment & GIS

including cable laying and termination.
Note: The Detailed Scope of the E&M works is depicted in PART-III of Volume-III.
1
VOLUME – III
PART – II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CRITICAL E&M EQUIPMENT
(To be furnished by the Bidder)
SCHEDULE – D 1
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF TURBINE
1 Type Vertical Kaplan Turbine.

2 1) Rated Capacity in KW
2) Maximum Power developed at
i) --- m head (Max) (at guide vane opening %)

ii) --- m head (rated) (at guide vane opening %)
iii) ---- m head (min) (at guide vane opening %)
3 Discharge through each turbine for above conditions
i) ----- m head (Max)

ii) ---- m head (rated)
iii) ---- m head (min)
4 Output
a) Guide vane opening and

corresponding efficiency
at max output and at
rated head
b) Maximum output
c) Rated head
d) Guide vane opening
e) Efficiency
5 Efficiency in percentage at 100%, 80%, 60%, 30% and 110% load at.
i) 31.08 m head ( Maximum)
Output (%) 100% 80% 80% 30% 110%

Output (kw)
Efficiency
(%)
Discharge
(m3/sec)
ii) 27.0 m head (rated)
Output(%) 100% 80% 60% 30% 110%

Output (kw)
Efficiency
(%)
Discharge
(m3/sec)
2
iii) 17.0 m head (Minimum)
Output(%) 100% 80% 60% 30% Max

possible
output
Output (kw) -
Efficiency
(%)
Discharge
(m3/sec)
6 i) Guaranteed best efficiency
i) At head of
ii) At an output of
iii) At guide vane opening
of
ii) Weighted Average Efficiency
iii) Efficiency curve for full range of output and head
7 Speed
i) Rated Speed
ii) Maximum Run away
speedunder transient
conditions
iii) Specific Speed
iv) Steady state runaway speed
at design head
8 Rotation of the turbine when viewed from
generator side
Clockwise when looking from upstream of the
generator
9 a) Guaranteed minimum factor of safety under worst
conditions based on the yield point of material
Please refer to the table of next item (b)
b) Name and location of the part having the factor of safety in (a) above
Design pressure & Safety Factor
condition
Semi-Spiral casing Permeable water
pressure
Draft tube liner water pressure Outlet
pressure
Vertical Kaplan cone (Vertical Kaplan Turbine
Centre
10 Momentary rise in speed and Pressure raise on throw of load to zero
from
Full load %
3/4 load %
½ load %
1/4 load %
Full Load at rated
head
12 Flywheel effect of rotating parts for regulation as stated above.
For entire unit
Generator rotor
Turbine runner
3
13 Stay ring & stay vane.
a) Type (constant velocity, accelerating etc.)
b) Material
c) Construction
d) Thickness :
i) Maximum
ii) Minimum
e) Maximum velocity of water at full load and
rated head
f) Velocity in the concrete casing at inlet
g) Number of stay vanes
h) Weight of stay ring & No. of sections
14 Guide vane
a) Number of guide vanes
b) Material of guide vane
c) Guide vane seal type (Top, middle & Bottom)
d) Type& Material of Bushes
15 Diameter of shaft
16 Material and composition of shaft
17. Type of shaft coupling
18. Weight of shaft
19. Length of shaft
20. Shaft seal :
A) Shaft seal
i) Material of seal/ring
ii) No. of seal rings
iii) Qty. of leakage (max)
B) Maintenance seal
iv) Type,
v) Material,
vi) Air pressure required
21. Turbine gate leakage
Guide vane seal type ( Top& Bottom ),Vertical
Provided and leakage water qty assumed
22. Runner Assembly
a) Runner material and composition.
i) Blade material and composition
ii) Boss material and composition
b) Number of blades
c) Method of attachment to shaft
d) Weight of runner
e) outlet& Inlet dia. of runner
f) Throat dia. of runner
g) Elevation of centre line of runner
h) Velocity of water at runner exit
4
23. Guide bearing Type
a) Bearing area location
b) Type of Bearing & no of pads
c) Method of lubrication
i) Type of cooling
ii) Qty of water and Pressure required
d) Amount of lubricant for one filling
e) Lubricant used
24. Draft tube
a) Type of draft tube
b) Elevation of lowest point in draft tube
liner concrete EXIT
c) Distance from centre line of unit to draft tube exit
(concrete exit)
d) Weight of draft tube liner
e) Thickness of draft tube liners
f) Velocity of water (At full load and rated discharge)
i) At draft tube exit
ii) At draft tube liner
g) Material of the draft tube
25. Guide vane servomotor & Oil Header assy

a) Material of servomotor cylinder
b) Material of servomotor piston
c) Material of servomotor piston ring
d) Diameter of servomotor piston
e) Stroke of servomotor piston
f) Range of oil pressure for operation
g) Maximum velocity of oil in piping to
servomotor
h) Type & Material of oil header and its
Bushes
i) Provision of oil head assy and its details
26. GOVERNORS
Make.
Type
Operating pressure
Method of operation
a) Guaranteed Sensitivity(Min. speed change at
which governor will respond)
b) Range of adjustment of speed droop
characteristic
c) Guaranteed range of speed droop level
setting for which
governor will control turbine effectively.
d) Range of adjustment of gate closing time
e) Range of adjustment of gate opening time

f) Minimum turbine speed at which of rated speed.
governor operation
g) Turbine speed at which mechanical at normal stop :
brakes are first applied. at emergency stop:
5
27. Governor oil system
a) Type of governor main oil pump:
i) Capacity of pump L / min

ii) Speed of pump rpm
iii) Type of drive for each pump
iv) Rating of each pump motor KW
b) Stand by Governor oil pump:
i) Type of pump
ii) Capacity of pump
iii) Type of driving motor
iv) Rating of pump motor
v) Speed of pump
c) Type & Quantity of oil in one filling of governor
oil system (1 machine)
d) Maximum rate of oil consumption from
pressure Accumulator tank
e) Total capacity of pressure tank overall
dimensions
f) Number of complete operation which can be performed by the amount
of oil in the pressure tank with oil pump not working
i. Guide vane strokes

ii. Runner vane strokes
g) Volume and over-all dimensions of sump tank
28. Safety devices provided in the turbine.
29.
i. Weights of turbine rotating Ton
parts
ii. Total net weight of turbine Ton
30. Maximum Hydraulic thrust at
i. Normal speed
ii. Runaway speed
31. Largest package for transport
i. Name
ii. Weight
iii. Dimensions
32. Heaviest assembly to be lifted by cranes, during erection.
i. Name
ii. Weight
6
SCHEDULE – D 2
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GENERATOR
(The items with mark (*) are guaranteed particulars)
1. Type Generator
*2. Rating
a) KW
b) KVA
c) KVAR
*3. Max. continuous rating (10% over load)

*4. Output with one cooler out of service and 10% of
tubes of remaining coolers plugged in
5. Power factor
6. Voltage (Normal) between phases.
a Maximum
)
b Minimum
)
7. Frequency 50 Hz.
8. No. of phases 3
9. Speed
i. Normal
ii. Run away

iii. Specific speed at rated head
*10. Efficiency (%) at 100%, 80%, 60% and 30% of output (The windage friction loss
by the integral parts of generator is included).
a) 0.9 P.F.
i) 100%
ii) 80%
iii) 60%
iv) 30%
7
b) Unity P.F.
i) 100%
ii) 80%
iii) 60%
iv) 30%
c) Weighted Average Efficiency
11. Moment of inertia

12. Inertia constant
13. Voltage increase when load is thrown off (inherent voltage regulation)
i) Full-load, 0.90 P.F.
ii) Full-load, unity P.F.
14. Increase in voltage at constant speed and excitation on taking off of load
a) Full load
b) 75% full load
c) 50% full load
15. Short circuit ratio

16. Line charging capacity
17. Stator winding connection
18. Direction of rotation
19. Insulation class (Both field and armature windings)
a) Armature windings
b) Field windings
20. Temp. rise (over cooling air temp. of 45 Deg.C. at rated output)
a) Stator winding
b) Rotor winding
c) Other parts
8
21. Stator
a) Number of sections
b) Material of stator core
c) Outer diameter of stator core
d) Height of stator core
e) Type of slots in stator core
f) Number of slots in stator core
g) Number of conductor per coil
h) Number of parallel paths in stator
winding.
i) Type of stator winding
j) Stator frame construction.
22. Rotor
a) Rotor diameter
b) Type of pole fixing
c) Number of poles
d) Lowest factor of safety of any part
of rotor, calculated on yield stress
when running at run away speed
e) Part of rotor with lowest factor of
safety
f) Type of pole face damping
windings
g) Air gap width
23. Generator air coolers

a) Type
b) No. of coolers including one spare cooler
c) Maximum safe pressure
d) Cooling water requirements
i) Quantity
ii) Water pressure
iii)Temperature of cooled air
24. Cooling Type

i) Rotor
ii) Stator
9
25. Excitation system
a) Type
b) Rating
c) Excitation power transformer rating and
voltage ratio
d) Direct current requirements of excitation
control system
e) Range of voltage level setting
i)Sensitivity at which Generator voltage is
held
ii)Ceiling voltage of excitation system
f) Excitation system response time
g) Regulator gain
h) Max. change in generation voltage when
DVR is transferred from AUTO to Manual
under all conditions of excitation.
i) Manual control range of excitation
j) Thyristor type, rating and its temp.
limitations
k) Cooling method of thyristors
l) No. of bridges & Redundancy available in
bridges
m) Monitoring arrangement for the
conductivity of thyristors
n) Loss in static excitation system
26. Voltage regulators
a) Name of manufacturer
b) Type
c) *Guaranteed sensitivity
d) Min. time taken to respond at given
sensitivity
e) Range of voltage level setting
f) Range of adjustment of line drop
compensation at full load
27. Nature of Insulation

a) Stator conductors (in core)
i. To earth
ii. Between turns
b) Stator end windings
c) Stator laminations
d) Rotor windings
i. To earth
ii. Between turns
10
28. i) Reactance
a) Synchronous (Direct axis) : (Saturated)
(Unsaturated)
b) Synchronous (Quadrature axis)
(Unsaturated)
c) *Transient (Saturated)
d) Transient (Unsaturated)
e) Sub-Transient (Direct axis) (Saturated)
f) Sub-transient (Quadrature) (Unsaturated)
g) Negative phase sequence
h) Zero phase sequence
ii) Resistances
a) Armature winding per phase(at 20 Deg.C)

b) Field winding (at 20 Deg.C)
29. Symmetrical root mean square short circuit currents with generator isolated.
(Fundamental component)
a. Initial 3 phase
b. Initial single phase
c. Sustained 3 phase
d. Sustained single phase
30. Characteristic curves to be furnished.

a) Open circuit saturation.
b) Saturation at rated KVA and zero power
factor under excited and over excited.
c) Saturation at rated KVA and unity power
factor.
d) Saturation at rated KVA and 0.90 power
factor lagging.
e) Saturated when loaded to requisite temp.
rise at 0.90 power factor.
Synchronous impedance
31. Generator time constant
a) Direct axis transient, open circuit :

b) Direct axis transient, short circuit:
c) Direct axis sub-transient, short circuit:
d) Direct current component
32. Name and location of part having the least factor of

safety under runaway or short circuit conditions
11
33. Voltage wave form
a) Amplitudes of harmonics as a percentage of

fundamental
b) Deviation factor of the wave form
34. NGT & Resistor

a) Approximate rating of transformer for
neutral earthing .
i) Capacity KVA
ii) Ratio
b) Approximate resistance (ohms) of resistance
at the secondary of Transformer
35. Thrust bearing

a) Type of thrust bearing
*b) whether Guarantee to operate success fully
for 15 minutes at the runaway speed of the
turbine with the total load. (yes/no)
c) No. of bearing Pads & size

d) Bearing cooling water
i) Quantity
ii) Pressure
e) Location
36. Guide bearings ( TOP & Bottom )
a) Location
b) Type
c) No. of Bearing pads & size / whether
insulated
d) Cooling water
i) Quantity
ii) Pressure
37. Lubricating system (one machine)
i) Quantity & type of oil in one filling
a) Bottom Guide and Thrust bearing
system
b) Top Guide bearing system
ii) HS Lub system
For thrust bearing
i) Type of oil pumps.& no of pumps
ii) H.P. and speed for each motor.
iii) Qty of oil & pressure
12
38. Weights
a) Total weight of complete generator:
b) Weight of rotor and shaft, tons :
c) Weight of stator
d) Heaviest assembly to be lifted by main
crane.
Name, weight and dimensions.
Name
Weight
Dimensions Approx.
e) Largest assembly to be lifted by main crane.
Name and dimensions.
Name
Dimensions
f) Heaviest package for transport
Name, weight and dimensions.
Name
Weight
Dimensions
g) Largest package for transport
Name, weight, dimensions.
Name
Weight
Dimensions
39. Shafts
i) Material
ii) Dia.
iii) Length
iv) Dia. of coupling flange
v) Dia. of axial holes
vi) Weight
40. Bearing bracket material and construction
i) Material
ii) Construction
13
41. Brakes
i) No of Brake/Jack units
ii) Air pressure
iii) Oil pressure tested
14
SCHEDULE – D 3
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF VARIOUS PANELS
1. Generator Protection & Relay Panels.
2. Sequence control and data acquisition system
3. Unit Auxiliaries Control Panels
4. LAVT Cubicles
5. Auto Synchronising Equipment
6. Station transformer protection panels
7. Generator Transformers Control & Protection Panels
8. Feeder Control & Protection Panels
(Separate Schedule shall be furnished for each of the above equipment).
I. Switchgear Panels / Cubicles:
1. Type.
2. Thickness of sheet metal.
3. a) Front.
b) Back.
c) Side.
4. Dimensions of complete cubicle
5. Total weight of complete cubicle.
6. Features provided to make the cubicle dust
and vermin proof.
II General Data
1) Temperature range
a) Operation range :
b) Storage range.
2) Humidity :
3) Seismic test :
4) Insulation test
a) High voltage test
b) Impulse voltage test.
5) Surge voltage test
6) transient test
7) Electrostatic discharge test
8) Radio frequency interference test (RF)
9) Electromagnetic interference test.
15
III Mechanical design
1) Weight
2) Mounting arrangement
3) Enclosure protection class
(shall be IP54 or Better)
IV For Numerical relays of each type
1. Type
2. Make
3. No. of Protections Available with Technical data
for each protection.
4. Software configuration
5. Setting range may be furnished for each
protection separately.
6. Type of programming Tool.
7. Type of Hardware
8. Sampling frequency
i) Analog
ii)Digital
9. Processor details
a) Type.
b) Make
c) whether 32 bit or 64 bit.
d) Medium of storing application software.
e) Medium of storing data.
f) Medium of storing settings.
10. Interfacing with primary system (CTs, PTs, Aux.
Relays)A
a) No. of CT inputs.
b) No. of PT Inputs A
c) No. of Analog outputs.
d) Whether CT, PT Inputs can be connected
directly.
e) Facility for display of analog &
Digital Inputs/outputs.
f) No. of Digital Inputs
No. of Digital Outputs.
g) No of Tripping Output relays.
h) Types of Input/ Output relays.
11. Communications:
a) Internal:
b) Remote :
12. Auxiliary supplies
13. Method of MMC (Man Machine Communication):
14. Disturbance recorder
15. Event recorder
16. Facility for online measurement of data
17. No. of interfacing ports for connecting
18. Applicable standards.
19. Method of long time storage of software.
20. Whether built in testing facility available.
21. Self diagnostic facilities and frequency of Self
diagnosis for trouble shooting in case of faults.
22. Minimum response time. (may be furnished
separately for each protection if applicable)
23. Degree of redundancy
16
Processor.
Power supply.
24. Whether provision for synchronising with
external clock is available
V For Static Relays
i. Type.
ii. Make.
iii. Technical Particulars.
iv. Auxilary supplies.
Any other particulars not mentioned above and
in the scope of supply shall be given.
VI VI) CONTROL EQUIPMENT(DDCS)
a) Type
b) Make
c) Power supply
d) Processor Details
e) Degree of redundancy
f) No.of processors for controllers
g) Type of data way communication
h) Storage memory particulars
i) Operating Software
j) Programming tool
k) No. of Digital Input/Outputs for each controller
l) No. of Analog Input/Outputs for each controller
m) Output Relays Type
n) Operating station / work station particulars
o) Event printer particulars
p) Report printer particulars
q) Hard copy unit particulars
r) Particulars of Indicators and meters used
s) Operating Temperature range
t) Bay Control Units Details
Transducers particulars for
Currents,voltage,MW,MVAR,PF,Freq,Pressure,speed,Levels etc.
i. Type
ii. Make
iii. No. of Outputs
iv. Auxillairy supply
v. Mounting
vi. Input particulars
UPS Particulars
i. Type
ii. Make
iii. Capacity
iv. Technology adopted
v. Battery particulars
vi. Back up period
17
Chartless recorders
i. Type
ii. Make
iii. Storage capacity
iv. No, of channels
VII MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
a) Control Wiring.
(Type.....Make..........)
Voltage Grade.
Insulation.
Conductor material.
Colour code of wires used.
b) Terminal Blocks (Control wiring)
(Type.............Make...........)
Voltage Grade.
Type of terminals.
18
SCHEDULE – D 4
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 11 KV BUSDUCT
Separate schedule shall be furnished for each type of bus duct.
I. ISOLATED PHASE BUSDUCT
1. Continuous full load current rating at rated Voltage, 50

C/s (Amps).
2. Momentary asymmetrical current rating (Amps) RMS.
3. Sustained symmetrical over current rating (Amps)
4. Rated working Voltage at 50 c/s (KV)
5. Basic inpulse insulation level (1.2 x 50 micro second
wave) (KV)
6. Max. temp. rise of conductor at continuous full load
current over an ambient temp. of outside the enclosure.
(50 deg. C)
7. Max. temp. rise of enclosure at full load rating over an
ambient temp. of 50 deg.C (Deg.C)
8. Conductor Material
9. Bus enclosure material
10. DC Resistance per phase per meter of conductor at 20
deg.C ambient (Ohms)
11. Inductive reactance per phase per metre at 20 deg.C
ambient 50 c/s (Ohms)
12. Capacitance per phase per metre to ground at 20 deg.C
and 50 c/s (Micro farad)
13. Heat loss in the bus duct at full load:
14. Type of duct
15. Shape of duct
16. Phase to ground spacing (mm)
17. Standard section length (mm)
18. Dimension of bus enclosure (mm)
19. Dimensions of bus (conductor)
20. Weight (Kgs/Metre)
21. Type of cooling
22. Minimum recommended clearance between periphery of
the busduct enclosure and structural steel & reinforced
concrete. (mm)
i) Structural steel work parallel with duct. (mm)
ii) Structural steel work perpendicular to duct (mm)
iii) Reinforced concrete (mm)
23. Bus insulator characteristics :
Voltage Class (KV)
Dry withstand Voltage 1 - Min (KV)
Wet-withstand voltage 1 - Min (KV)
Impulse withstand Voltage (KV)
Minimum creepage distance (mm)
Cantilever strength
a. Upright (KG)
b. Under hung (KG)
c. Weight of each insulator (KG)
24. Skin effect factor (for Generator protection)
19
II. Potential Transformer
i) Type and make

ii) Rated primary Voltage
iii) Rated Secondary Voltage
iv) Rating
v) Accuracy classification
vi) HV withstand primary
vii) HV withstand secondary
viii) Rated voltage factor & corresponding rated time
ix) Class of insulation
x) Impulse level
III. FUSES H.V.
i) Type and make

ii) Full load current rating at amps 11 KV, 50 c/s (rms)
iii) Symmetrical fault rating of amps fuses 11 KV, 50 c/s.
IV. FUSES L.V.
i) Type and make

ii) Continuous full load current rating of fuses (Amps)
iii) Symmetrical fault rating of fuses (Amps)
V. LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
i) Type and make

ii) Voltage class (KV)
iii) Dry & Wet Power frequency Voltage (KV (RMS))
iv) Minimum Power frequency spark - over Voltage (KV
(rms))
v) Maximum 1.2 x 50 Micro Sec. impulse spark over
voltage (KV (peak))
vi) Front of wave spark-voltage (KV (Peak))
vii) Residual voltage at 0.5, 1 & 2 times the nominal
discharge current (KV (Peak))
viii) Nominal discharge current (9/20 micro Sec.) (Amps)
ix) High current impulse (4 x 10 micro second) (Amps)
x) Long duration rating :
a) 1000 micro seconds (Amps)
b) 2000 micro seconds (Amps)
VI. CURRENT TRANSFORMER
1. Type and make

2. Voltage Class
3. Transplation ratio (KV)
4. Rated output
5. Class of accuracy
6. Short time thermal current and its duration
7. Accuracy limit factor
8. Characteristics :
i) Ratio & Phase angle curves
20
ii) Magnetisation curve
iii) Ratio correction factor curves
9. One minute power frequency voltage (KV)
10. Impulse level (KV)
VII. CAPACITOR
1. Make and Type

2. Voltage rating (rms) (KV)
3. Capacitance, (Micro farads)
a. DC hold test (10 Secs.)
4. Test voltage between terminal and tank (KV)
5. Impulse Voltage (KV)
6. Compliance with standards
7. Discharge time of discharge resistor (Secs)
21
SCHEDULE D-5
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 11KV BREAKERS FOR INDOOR &

OUTDOOR SYSTEM
1) Type
2) Make
3) Class
4) Rated voltage
5) Rated insulation level
6) Rated frequency
7) Rated normal current
8) Rated short circuit current
9) Rated Opening time
10) Rated closing time
11) Operating mechanism
12) Control supply voltage
13) Noise level
14) Type of insulators
15) Load impact on foundation(Max)
16) Applicable standards
17) Enclosure
18) Wight
19) Dimensions
22
SCHEDULE – D 6
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SATs (Indoor type)
( Each type and capacity shall be furnished separately)
1) Name of the Manufacturer

2) Manufacturer’s type
3) Country of origin
4) Type of construction - core or shell type
5) Standard according to which transformer is
manufactured and guaranteed figures are given.
6) Type of cooling.
7) Rating
a) Rated KVA
b) Rated voltage of HV
c) Rated Voltage of LV
d) Temp. rise by resistance winding
e) Rated frequency
8) No. of Phases
9) Connections
HV
LV
10) Vector group
11) Tappings
High voltage Percentage
Low voltage Percentage
12) No-load losses (core less plus dielectric loss plus stray
losses due to excitation current) at rated frequency at
13) Load losses (copper losses plus stray losses) at rated
current at 75 Deg C winding temperature.
14) Tolerance.
15) Percentage impedance at rated current and frequency
at 75 Deg C on ____MVA basis
a. Positive sequence at principal tap.

b. Zero sequence at principal tap.
c. Positive sequence at maximum voltage tap.
d. Positive sequence at minimum voltage tap.
16) Percentage reactance at rated current and frequency.
17) Efficiency (at 75 Deg C winding temperature 0.9 lag
P.F
a) 100% load
b) 50% load
18) Percentage regulation at full load at 75 Deg C.
19) No-load current at rated frequency at
100% rated voltage
50% rated voltage
20) Power factor of no-load current at 100% rated
voltages and rated frequency
21) Flux density in core at rated frequency at
a) 100% voltage CGS lines/cm2
b) 110% voltage CGS lines/cm2
22) Over load capacity
23
23) Net core area
24) Current density and conductor area
HT winding
LT winding
25) Insulation between laminations:
26) Type of joints between core limb and yoke
27) Bolt insulation flash voltage (one minute)
28) Type of winding
a) HT winding
b) LT winding
29) Winding insulation
a) Type
b) Graded or ungraded
c) Temp rise allowed over ambient
30) Insulation material
a) Turn insulation HV
b) Turn insulation LV
c) Core to low voltage
d) HV to LV
31) Type of joints in winding
32) Type of tap changer
33) Noise level of transformer
34) Test voltages for impulse withstand
HV
LV
Line
Neutral
35) Test voltages for power frequency withstand
HV
LV
Line
Neutral
36) Clearance (in air) to ground between phases.(min mm)
HV
LV
37) Approx. weight in Kgs
a) Core and coils.
b) Total weight.
c) Untanking weight
38) Overall dimensions
a) Length
b) Breadth
c) Height
24
SCHEDULE – D 7
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 415 V LT BOARDS OF
A) UABs, B) SABs and C) RESERVE BOARDS.

(Details shall be provided for each type of panel seperately)
I. Switchgear Cubicles
1. Type.
2. Thickness of sheet metal.
a) Front.
b) Back.
c) Side.
3. Dimensions of complete cubicle
4. Total weight of complete cubicle.
5. Features provided to make the cubicle
dust and vermin proof.
II. Air Circuit Breaker
1. Maker's Name and country of manufacture.

2. Maker's type, designation.
3. Standard applicable.
4. Rated Voltage.
5. Maximum continuous voltage at which breaker
can operate.
6. Current Rating.
a) As per manufacturer's standard.
b) De-rating factor (if any) for site
conditions.
Under site conditions.
7. Rated frequency.
8. Rated voltage.
9. Ultimate breaking capacity (KA Rms), Icu.
10. service breaking capacity (% of ultimate
breaking capacity), Ics (Service breaking
capacity shall not be less than 65 KA).
11. Overload and short circuit protection.
12. Symmetrical interrupting capacity, MVA
13. Symmetrical interruption current, KA
14. Making current, KA (peak).
15. Rated 1 second current, KA (rms) or
16. Main contacts:
i) Material
ii) Whether silver faced.
17. Auxiliary contacts: i) Rated voltage
ii) Material
iii) Whether silver faced.
18. Whether arcing contacts are provided.
19. Material of arcing contacts.
20. Steady state operating temp. of main contacts
when carrying rated current under ambient
conditions specified.
25
21. Standard duty cycle of breaker on which
interrupting rating is based.
22. Voltage withstand levels (One minute
a) For main circuits, KV (rms)
b) For control & Auxiliary circuits KV (rms)
23. Clearance in Air.
a) Between phases.
b) Between Live parts and ground.
24. No. of breaks in circuit per pole
25. Means provided for charging closing spring.
a) Manual
b) Electric Motor.
26. Whether circuit breaker is fixed trip or trip free.
27. Whether circuit breaker is designed to close and
latch on making
28. Rating of motor used to charge closing spring.
a) H.P.
b) Voltage.
c) Speed.
d) Insulation Class.
e) Temperature rise
f) Reference ambient temperature
g) Time required by motor to charge the
spring completely.
29. Closing mechanism:
a) Rated voltage of closing coil.
b) Voltage range over which closing
mechanism would operated satisfactorily.
c) Power required at normal voltage for
closing.
30. Shunt trip coil:
a) Rated voltage of shunt trip coil.
b) Voltage range over which shunt trip
mechanism would operate satisfactory.
c) Power required at normal voltage for
tripping
31. Opening time.
32. Make time.
33. Arc durating.
34. Mechanical and Electrical endurance (i.e., on
load operation.
35. Weight and dimensions of complete circuit
breaker.
36. List of type tests carried out (Certificate to be
attached with the tender) List of routine tests
proposed to carried out.
III. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

4. Rated Voltage..
5. Maximum continuous voltage at which breaker can
operate.
6. Current Rating.
a) As per manufacturer's standard.
26
b) rating factor (if any) for site conditions.
c) Under site conditions.
7. Rated frequency.
8. Rated voltage.
10. Service breaking capacity (% of ultimate breaking
capacity), Ics (Service breaking capacity shall not
be less than 65 KA).
13 Symmetrical interruption current, KA
16. Main contacts:
i) Material
ii) Whether silver faced.
17. Auxiliary contacts: i) Rated voltage
ii) Material
IV. Motor Protection CBs

4. Rated Voltage.
5. Maximum continuous voltage at which breaker can
operate.
6. Current Rating.
a. As per manufacturer's standard.
b. Derating factor (if any) for site conditions.
c. Under site conditions.
7. Rated frequency.
8. Rated voltage.
10. Service breaking capacity (% of ultimate breaking
capacity), Ics (Service breaking capacity shall not
be less than 65 KA).
13 Symmetrical interruption current, KA
V. BUSBARS
1. Material.
2. Size
3. Type of insulation.
4. Minimum clearance : Between Phases.
Phase to nearest earthed part.

5. Continuous current rating.
27
6. 3 second short time current Amps (rms)
7. Momentary current rating Amps (Peak)
8. Temperature .rise over the specified ambient

temp. Deg.C.
9. One minute Power frequency withstand test
voltage.
VI. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Make
2. Type.
3. Applicable Standards.
4. Ratio
5. Accuracy Class.
6. Rated burden.
7. Rated accuracy limit factor.
8. 3 second short time thermal rating KA (rms)
9. Rated dynamic current KA
(peak)
10. Type of insulation
11. Maximum temp. rise of wining above ambient
temp. specified.
12. One minute Power frequency test voltage.
13. List of type tests carried out (test certificate to be
attached with the tender).
14. List of routine tests proposed to be carried out.
VII. RELAY AND AUXILIARY RELAYS AND TIMERS
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Setting range for Over current element.
5. Setting range for instantaneous element.
6. Burden characteristics.
7. Characteristic curves (to be attached with the
tender
VIII. METERS (VOLTMETERS AND AMMETERS)
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Accuracy.
5. Case size.
6. No. digits of display.
7. Burden characteristics.
IX. Potential Transformers
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Ratio
5. Accuracy.
28
6. Burden.
7. Type of insulation
8. List of type tests carried out (Certificate to be
attached with the tender)
9. List of routine tests proposed to carried out.
X. Current Transducers
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Input range
5. Output range.
6. Accuracy.
7. Overload capacity.
8. Details of Auxiliary supply.
XI. Voltage Transducers
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Input range
5. Output range.
6. Accuracy.
7. Overload capacity.
8. Details of Auxiliary supply.
XII. Single Phase Preventor
1. Make
2. Type.
4. Range of U/V and O/V settings.
5. Time delay provided.
6. No. of contacts Provided for external use.
7. Typ of indication for
a) Under voltage
b) Over voltage
c)Reverse sequence.
8. Auxiliary supply
9. Input Voltage (110/415V)
XIII.
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
1. Control Switches and Push Buttons.
Make
Type.
Voltage grade Volts
Current rating Amps.
2. Indicating Lamps:
Make
Type.
Voltage
Power consumption.
29
XIV. WIRING
1. Control Wiring:
(Type.......Make.......)
a. Voltage grade
b. Insulation.
c. Conductor Material.
d. Colour code of wires used.
2. Terminal blocks (control wiring):
(Type.......Make.......)
Voltage grade
Type of terminals.
30
SCHEDULE – D 8
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF
A) GENERATOR TRANSFORMER
B) STATION TRANSFORMER
C) BUS REACTOR
(Separate schedule shall be furnished for each of the above equipment)
1. Name of the Manufacturer

2. Manufacturer’s type
3. Quantity
4. Standard according to which transformer is manufactured and
guaranteed figures are given.
5. Type of cooling.
6. Rating
a. Rated KVA
b. Rated voltage of HV
c. Rated Voltage of LV
d. Rated frequency
e. Max. Temp. rise in oil by
f. thermometer over water inlet temperature of 30 Deg C
g. Max. Temp. rise above design ambient of winding by
resistance method over water inlet temperature of 30
Deg C
h. Overload capacity for specified time
i. Short circuit rating for time
7. Construction details:
7.1 Type of construction

7.2 Flux density in core at rated frequency at
a) 100% voltage CGS lines/cm2
b) 110% voltage CGS lines/cm2
7.3 Net core area
7.4 Insulation between laminations
7.5 Type of joints between core limb and yoke
7.6 Bolt insulation flash voltage (one minute)
8. WINDING:
8.1 No. of Phases

8.2 Connections
HV winding
LV winding
8.3 Vector group reference number and symbol
8.4 Tappings on HV winding
Number
Range
31
Value of each step
8.5 Current density
HV winding Amps/sq mm
LV winding Amps/sq mm
8.6 Conductor area
HV winding Amps/sq mm
LV winding Amps/sq mm
8.7 Type of winding
a) HV winding
b) LV winding
8.8 Winding insulation
a) Type
b) Graded or upgraded
c) Temp rise allowed over ambient
8.9 Insulation material
a) Turn insulation HV
b) Turn insulation LV
c) Core to low voltage
8.10 Terminal arrangement
a) High voltage
b) Low voltage
9. LOSSES:
9.1 No-load losses (core loss plus

dielectric loss plus stray
losses due to excitation
current) at rated frequency
and
a) 100% rated volts
b) Tolerance on ( a ) above
c) 110% rated volts
9.2 Load losses (copper losses
plus stray losses) at rated
current at 75 Deg C winding
temperature and Tolerance
(() on the above
9.3 Cooler losses at rated current
and frequency
9.4 Tolerance on total ( percent)
of no load and load losses
9.5 Guaranteed total losses at At Normal At lowest At highest
rated output, rated voltage, tap tap tap
rated Frequency and 75
deg.C average winding
temperature including
auxiliary losses if any (Max.)
10. Efficiency: 0.9 Lag
10.1 Efficiency at 75 Deg C and

100% full load
75% full load
50% full load
10.2 Maximum Efficiency
32
10.3 Load at which maximum
efficiency occurs (%FL)
11. Transformer constants
11.1 Resistance per phase of (at normal

tap)
a) HV Winding (Ohms)
b) LV Winding (Ohms)
11.2 Reactance per phase of (at normal
tap)
a) HV Winding (Ohms)
b) LV Winding (Ohms)
11.3 Percentage impedance at rated current
and frequency at 75 Deg C on rated MVA
basis
a) Positive sequence at principal tap.
b) Zero sequence at principal tap.
c) Positive sequence at maximum voltage
tap.
d) Positive sequence at minimum voltage
tap.
11.4 Percentage reactance at rated current and
frequency.
11.5 Percentage regulation at full load at 75
Deg C.
11.6 No-load current at rated frequency at
100% rated voltage
50% rated voltage
11.7 Power factor of no-load current at 100%
rated voltages and rated frequency
12. Bushings
a) Type HV LV Neutral
b) Voltage class
c) Rated current
d) Momentary power frequency dry withstand
voltage
e) One minute power frequency withstand
voltage
i) Dry
ii) Wet
f) Under oil flash over or puncture withstand
power frequency voltage
g) Full wave withstand impulse voltage
(1.2/50 micro sec)
i) Positive (KV Peak)
ii) Negative (KV peak)
h) Creepage distance in air
i) Total
ii) Protected
i) Recommended gap setting
j) Weight of assembled bushing (Kg.)
33
13. Details of tank and Accessories
a) Are the following designed for filling under

full vacuum
i) Tank Yes/No
ii) Conservator Yes/No
b) Buchholz relay description, data, range of
settings
c) No. of Breathers provided
d) Type of dehydrating agent used for
Breathers
e) Type and make of pressure relief device
14. On load tap changer:
a) make
b) Type
c) Descriptive bulletin attached,
(Yes/No)
d) Rating
i) Rated voltage KV
ii) Rated Current Amps

iii) Step voltage KV
e) Control functions provided

f) Local manual mechanical operation
h) Non automatic local electrical independent
control
i) Non automatic, remote electrical
independent control
j) Non automatic, remote simultaneous
parallel control
k) Auxiliary supply
l) Protective devices
m Approximate overall weight
n) Approximate overall dimensions (L x W x
H)
o) Approximate overall quantity of oil Ltrs.
15. Cooling equipment for/OFB type transformer
a) Number of group of coolers

b) Number of group of spare coolers
c) Input
d) Type of cooling equipment control
e) cooling water qty and pr required :
34
16. Test voltages for the transformer
i) Test voltages for impulse withstand

a) HV
b) LV
c) Neutral
ii) Test voltages for power Frequency
withstand voltage
a) HV
b) LV
c) Neutral
17. Weights and Dimensions
17.1 Approx. weight in Kgs
a) Total wt. of transformer Kg
b) Without oil Tonne

c) With oil Tonne
d) Crane lift required for untanking above Tonne
rail level.
e) Minimum clearance height for lifting Tonne
core and winding from tank
17.2 Shipping
a) Weight and size of largest packing
b) Gross weight to be handled
c) Gross volume to be handled
18. Outline drawing enclosed ( Yes/ No )
19. Spare parts recommended for normal operating life
of transformer
20. Bushing current transformers, state number of cores,
ratio, V.A. class of accuracy, over current factor.
21. Noise level of transformer db
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SHUNT REACTOR
1. Manufacturer’s Name & Country:

i) Reactor
ii) Bushings
iii) Oil
2. Governing Standards
i) Reactor
ii) Bushings
iii) Oil
3. Type of Reactor
4. Type of Cooling
5. Connection
6. Reactive Power for (MVAR) continuous operation
a) At rated voltage
b) At highest voltage (MVAR)(i.e. 5% higher
than rated)
7. Rated Voltage (kV)

8. Temperature rise of oil above ambient temperature
35
(Deg. C)(indicate ambient tempt. Also)
9. Temperature rise of winding by resistance method

above ambient temperature (Deg. C)(indicate
ambient tempt. Also)
10. Rated frequency (HZ)
11. Number of Phases
12. Amount of unbalanced current in each phase when
connected to symmetrical voltage.
13. Harmonic content in phase current
14. Guaranteed max. losses at (watts) rated voltage and
frequency at rated output and 75 degree C average
winding temperature
15. a) Impedance
i) Positive Sequence (Ohms)

ii) Zero Sequence (ohms)
iii) Tolerance on Impedance
b) Short time rating for 1 Second (KA)

16. Range of voltage upto which impedance will be
constant & magnetization curve upto 2.5
p.u.(Impedance values at 1.3 p.u.,1.5 p.u.,2.0
p.u.,2.5p.u.)
17. XO/XI
18. Maximum permissible duration (Hrs.) of service at
110% of rated voltage, starting from cold without
exceeding permissible temperature rise.
19. Capacitance value (Phase to (pico farads) ground)

20. Noise level and reference standard and (ab) distance
at which measurement done.
21. Vibration level
i) Peak to peak (micrometers)

ii) Average (micrometers)
iii) Maximum stress at any point in tank
(kg/cm2)
22.
Test voltage (for winding) Bus end Neutral end
i. Lightning impulse (kv peak) (1.2 /50 Micro-
secs.) with stand voltage.
ii. Power frequency withstand Voltage (kV rms)
iii. Switching surge withstand Voltage (KV rms)
23. Partial discharge level

24.
i) Type of core
ii) Justification for type of core adopted
iii) Technical details of the core (No. of limbs)
25. Type of oil preservation system

26. Conservator:
i) Total volume
36
ii) Volume between highest and Lowest visible
oil levels.
iii) Type of conservator (Air cells type Oil sealing
/ any other type)
27.
Bushings Line Neutral
i) Make and type
ii) Rated current
iii) Lightning impulse withstand Voltage (KV Peak)
iv) Power frequency withstand Voltage (wet and dry)
(KV rms)
v) Switching surge withstand Voltage (kV peak)
28. Bushing type current transformer

i) Voltage class (volts)
ii) Number of cores
iii) Ratio
iv) Accuracy class
v) Burden (VA)
vi) Accuracy limit factor
vii) Knee point voltage (volts)
viii) Maximum resistance of Secondary winding (Ohms)
ix) Current rating of secondaries (Amps)
29. Tank
i) Type (Bell type tank / conventional Type with welded
cover at top)
ii) Vacuum to which the (torr) tank can be subjected
without distortion.
iii) Continuous internal pressure over Normal hydrostatic
pressure of oil (KN/Sq.m)
iv) Track gauge required for wheels (mm)
v) Pressure relief device provided or not
30. Temperature Indicator
a) OTI & WTI

- make
- Range (deg.C)
- Accuracy class
b) RWTI
- make
- Range (deg.C)
- Accuracy class
- Auxiliary supply required
- Signal transmitter provided or not
31. Weights and Dimensions
i) Weights
a) Core (kg)
b) Winding (kg)
c) Tank & fittings (kg)
d) Oil (kg)
e) Total weight (kg)
ii) Dimensions (metres)
37
a) Over all height above track
b) Over all length
c) Over all breadth
iii) Weight of the heaviest package of the line
reactor arranged for transportation (kg)
32. Quantity of oil (including 10% extra) (litres)

33. Parameters of oil supplied
a) Maximum moisture content (ppm)

b) Maximum tan-delta value at 90 deg.C
c) Minimum break down voltage (kv)
- New untreated oil
- After treatment
d) Resistivity at 27 deg.C. (min.) (ohm-cm)
e) Minimum interfacial tension (N/M)
f) Neutralisation value (Max.), KHV/gm
34. Minimum height clearance for lifting core and winding

above tank (mm)
38
SCHEDULE – D 9
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF BATTERY, CHARGER,& D.CDISTRIBUTION BOARDS
A GENERAL
1 Manufacturer's name and country of
Manufacture
2 Applicable standards
B STATION BATTERY PARTICULARS 220V 48V 24V
1 Type
2 Manufacturer's type designation
3 Ampere-hour capacity at 20 Hr. rate of
discharge.
4 Terminal voltage
5 Capacity in Amperes of the battery for Amps
End cell voltage per
5.1 1 Minute load
5.2 2 Hour load.
5.3 10 Hour load.
6 Short circuit current Amps
7 Material of containers.
8.a Specific gravity of electrolyte 27 deg C with
all cells fully
charged.
8.b Specific gravity of the electrolyte at the end
of discharge at 10 Hour rate:
9 Weight of cell:
10 Dimensions of each cell
10.1 Length mm
10.2 Width mm
10.3 Height mm
10.4 Thickness of container mm
11 Net weight of the cell, complete with acid
12 Expected life of battery Kg.

13 Ventilation required in battery room.
C Battery Charging Equipment.
1 Type :
1.a Boost charger.
1.b Float charger.
2 Manufacturer's type and designation.
3 A.C. supply required
3.1 Voltage.
3.2 Current
3.3 No.of phases
3.4 Frequency
3.5 Power factor.
4 D.C. Output voltage regulation from no load
to full load
5 Maximum ripple content
6 Maximum permissible temperaturerise over
an ambient temperature of 55 deg.C.
7 Overall efficiency
8 Unit shipping weight (Kg.)
9 Load limiting feature (please attach
characteristic showing :
variation of voltage with increase in load).
10 List of Major accessories provided.
11 Recommended spares.
D D.C Distribution MCCBs :
1 Make
39
2 System voltage.
3 Maximum interrupting current.
4 Current rating.
E HRC CARTRIDGE FUSES
1 Make
2 Type
F INSTRUMENTS AND METERS
1 Make
2 Type
40
SCHEDULE – D 10
SCHEDULE OF GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF EOT CRANE
(Separate schedule for each type of crane supplied) – For PH EOT Crane
UnLoading PH EOT GIS Crane

Bay Crane Crane
1 Type and class of crane M5 M5 M5
a Crane structure.
b Main hoist
c Cross traverse
d Long travel
2 Crane capacity
3 Safe working Load in Tonnes :
4 Centre to Centre of Gantry/ Track Rails (S)
5 Operating speeds (Loaded) in M/Min.
a Main Hoist
b Aux Hoist
c Cross travels
d Long travel
e Acceleration values for
i) Cross Travel
ii) Long Travel
6 Material and type of Hook supplied
i) Main Hoist
ii) Aux Hoist
7 Height of Hook above Floor Level in
Metres.
8 Minimum movement in inching operation in
mm
9 Hoisting Rope :
a Diameter in mm
Main Hoist
Aux Hoist
b Construction
Main Hoist
Aux Hoist
c Quality of Steel
Main Hoist
Aux Hoist
d No. of Falls
Main Hoist
Aux Hoist
e Minimum Breaking Load
Main Hoist
Aux Hoist
10 Factor of safety
i) Main Hoist
ii) Aux Hoist
11 Description of Brakes :
a Type
b Diameter
c Make
d Drum
e Torque
f Main Hoist-motion brakes
g Aux Hoist-motion brakes
h Cross travels
i Long travel
41
12 Driver's cabin size (LxBxH)
Provided with Tools Box, extraplug, Horn
Electrical Ventilation fan and
fireextinguisher.
13 Necessary provisions for guarding
14 Bearings :
15 Details of power supply
a AC
b DC
16 Particulars of Safety Devices
17 Net Mass in Tonns
a Complete unladen crane
b Complete unladen crab
18 DSL System Type & material details
19 Remote operation facilities details
20 General Arrangement Drawing Furnished YES/NO
21 Supplier should indicate willingness to YES/NO
submit followingtest certificates
a Wire rope break load test as per IS or BS.
b Hook-load test.
c Steel-Chemical and physical tests.
d Motor insulation high voltage flash test.
22 Supplier agrees or not to conductfollowing YES/NO
tests at site
a Overload tests.
b Moor insulation tests.
c All necessary speed tests.
d Inching tests.
23 Dead weight of the complete crane (kg)
a Dead weight of the crab (kg)
b Dead weight of the trolley (kg)
42
SCHEDULE – D 11
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OFAIR CONDITIONING &VENTILATION
1 ELECTRIC FANS:
a Name of manufacturer.
b Type & Qty of of fan / Blowers.
c Number of stages.
d Capacity (CFM)
e Class of construction
f Volumetric efficiency (%)
g Design Pressure (Kg/Cm)
h Seal system
i Cooling water requirement
j Hydrostatic test pressure (Kg/Cm)
k Any other details
2 INDUCTION MOTORS:
a Name of Manufacturer.
b Rated Output(KW)
c Rated Speed(RPM)
d Suitable for Indoor Operation (Yes/No)
3 FILTERS:
a Name of Manufacturer.
b Type offered (washable/throwaway)
4 METAL AIR DUCTS:
a Material construction
b Thickness of sheet
c Type of construction
5 GRILLES/DIFFUSERS:
a Name of manufacturer
b Capacity of CFM
c Material
d Volume control damper provided
(Yes/No)
7 REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR:
a Manufacturer's Name:
b Type
c No. of Stages.
d Refrigerant
e Type of cooling.
f Capacity at operating conditions (f,g,h)
g Capacity and BHP
h BHP at operating conditions (f.g.h)
43
i Noise level
j Any other data.
8 COOLING COILS:
a Type
b Make
c Capacity
9 REFERIGERANT CONDENSERS:
a Make and Type
b Over all size
c Shell material
d Shell thickness
10 HUMIDIFIER:
a Make
b Type
c Material of construction
d Water Pressure
a Any other information supplied.
44
SCHEDULE – D 12
GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF DG SET
I DIESEL ENGINE
1 Type of engine
2 Manufacturer (Name and place)
3 Design standard
4 Rating at site condition
5 a Continuous rating of engine at rated
R.P.M. and at 50 deg. design
temperature. BHP(KW)
b I.S. Rating "A" of Engine BHP(KW)
c Continuous hours of operation
6 Self starting system
7 Cooling system Engine mounted air
Cooled radiator for cooling system
a Fan cooled Radiator
(i) Type
(ii)Make
b Cooling Fan
(i) Type
(ii) Capacity of fan in mm3 /hr.
8 Exhaust system
a General information
(i)Type
(ii)Height of main exhaust
b (i) Type
(ii) Make
(iii) Maximum noise level (db):
9 Engine protection
Type of engine protection provided
10 Whether emergency stop push button
atthe engine provided YES/NO
11 Whether flywheel with guard provided
YES/NO
12 Weight of the engine (dry)---Kg
13 Whether engine is provided with all
accessories e.g. walkways & stairs,
base plate inlet & exhaust duct with
filters, silencers etc ?
II GENERATOR/ALTERNATOR
1 Manufacturing standard
2 Manufacturer's name and place
3 Type & designation
4 Rated output at rated Voltage for
frequency---KVA
5 Rated voltage---Kv
6 Max. reactive power---KVAR
7 Max. permissible over load capacity--
KVA
8 Rated power factor
9 Rated frequency--Hz
10 Insulation class
45
(i) Rotor winding
(ii) Stator winding
11 Temperature rises at rated output
condition above ambient temperature
of 50 deg. C
12 Type of excitation system
13 Type of auxiliary exciter
14 Percentage efficiencies
a 100% load at rated p.f. of 0.75 lag
Tolerance (if any)
b 75% load at rated p.f. of 0.75 lag
tolerance (if any)
c 50% load at rated p.f. of 0.75 lag.
Tolerance (if any)
15 Weight of Generator
III COMMON EQUIPMENT
A ASSEMBLED D.G. SETS
1. Noise level at full load…..db(A)
2. Vibration at no load……micro mm
3. Vibration at full load…... micro mm
4. Overall dimensions of assembled
DieselGenerating Set complete with
accessories (L X B X H)…..mm
5.Assembled weight of complete
Diesel Generating set along with
accessories…….kgs
6.Transportation weight of the D.G.
Sets…….kgs
7.Weight of heaviest part to be
transported. …….kgs
8.Weight of heaviest part to be
installed at a time…….kgs
B ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
a Details of each Protection relays
provided, shall be mentioned
i) Type
ii) Make
iii) Rating
b Details of electrical panels/boards of
each type shall be given
c Degree of protection class
d Technical specification of CTs, PTs
e Accuracy class of instruments
46
SCHEDULE – D 13
GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF CABLES (FRLS)
A POWER CABLES:
Type
Voltage grade
Conductor material
Insulation
Resistance per KM @20deg c
B CONTROL CABLES
Type
Voltage grade
Conductor material
Insulation
No. of cores
C 11KV XLPE CABLES
Type
Voltage grade
Conductor material
Insulation
D ANY OTHER TYPE
47
SCHEDULE – D 14
GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
1 General
2 Name of manufacturer (OEM)
3 Type & Designation
4 Type tested at
Name of Laboratory
Address of laboratory
5 Installation (indoor or outdoor)
6 Standards applicable
7 Single or Three Phase design
8 Configuration 400 kV Double Bus
Installation (indoor or outdoor)
Standards applicable
i Number of bays( As per SLD)
ii GIS to transformer connection
iii GIS to Feeder connection
vi Number of VT/CVT
vii Number of SA
9 Future extension possibility
10 Service conditions
iAmbiant Air Temp. in Deg. C
ii Max Temp. in Deg. C
iii Min Temp. in Deg. C
iv Daily Average Temp. in Deg. C
v Solar Radiation W/sqmtr
vi Altitude above MSL, in mtr
vii Pollution class
viii Creepage distance, in mm/kV
ix Relative humidity
x Condensation
xi Vibration level
xii Noise level
xiii Induced Electromagnetic Disturbance, in kV
xiv Seismic condition
11 Enclosure
i) Code of pressure vessel
ii) Type of manufacturing
iii) Design temperature in Deg.C
iv) Material
v) Material grade & applicable standard
vi) Outside diameter in mm
vii) Minimum Wall Thickness, in mm
viii) Painting Shade & Thickness
a – External
b – Internal
ix) Degree of Protection
x) Inductance in H/mt
xi) Capacitance in pF/mt
xii) Resistance in Ohm/mt
xiii) Expansion Bellow
48
a )Material
b)Min allowable adjustable displacement
Longitudinal
Transverse
xiv) Sealing system type
xv) Estimated life in years
xvi) Barrier
a) Material
b) Dielectric strength
12 Support Structure
i) Material
ii) Minimum thickness of galvanizing
iii) Foundation channels /Anchor bolts
13 Grounding
i) Grounding Material
ii) Grounding of complete GIS
iii) Grounding of individual compartment
vi) Grounding at flange joints
14 System Parameters 400 kV
i) Highest System voltage in kV
ii) Rated voltage of System in kV
iii) Rated voltage of Equipment in kV
iv) Rated Insulation level Phase to Earth and between
Phases
a)One Min Power Frequency withstand voltage
kVrms
b)Switching impulse withstand voltage, kVp
- Phase to Earth
- Between Phases
c) Lightning Impulse withstand voltage, kVp
v) Rated Frequency
vi) Rated current in Amp
vii) Rated current at 50 °C (equipment) in Amp –
viii) Rated current at 50 °C (bus bar) in Amp –
ix) Rated short circuit withstand current kArms –
a)Duration in sec
b)Peak, kAp
x) Enclosure withstand time for an internal faultin
sec.
xi) Estimated total energy loss at
100 % of rated capacity
xii) Measures taken to minimize Over Voltage
xiii) Phase labelling
xiv) Auxiliary supply (AC Voltage, Frequency;DC
voltage)
- Operation
- Control
- Illumination & heater
15 Delivery conditions
i) Bays fully assembled at works
49
ii) Dimensions of longest section for transportation
iii) Weight of heaviest package
iv) Pressure of SF6 gas during transportation
v) SF6 gas monitoring system provided
duringtransportation
16 Bus Bar 400 kV
i) Configuration (Single / Double)
ii) Nos of Phases
iii) Material
iv) Size
v) Rating
vi) Current density adopted
vii) Current density as per type test report
viii) Short time current withstand rating in kA
ix) Duration
x) Resistance per phase
xi) Surge impedance
xii) SF6 immersed insulator
a Material
b Dielectric strength
xiii) Maximum Partial Discharges measured atHSV
17 SF6 Gas
i) Applicable standard
ii) Quantity of SF6 Gas of complete GIS atfilling
pressure, in kg
iii) Quantity of SF6 Gas of largest compartmentGIS at
filling pressure, in kg
iv) Nos of Gas compartments
v) Quantity of SF6 Gas of individualcompartment
GIS at filling pressure, in kg
v) Maximum permissible dew point, in Deg.C
Composition of Gas
a)SF6 > 99.90 % by weight
b)Air < 500 ppm by weight (0.25 vol.-%)
c)CF4 < 500 ppm by weight (0.1 vol.-%)
d)H2O < 15 ppm by weight (0.012 Vol-%)
e)Mineral oil < 10 ppm by weight
f)Acidity, in terms of HF < 0.3 ppm byweight
g)Hydrolysable fluorides,In terms of HF < 1 ppm
by weight
viii) Design pressure
a) Circuit breaker
b) Other compartments
ix) Rated filling pressure
a) Circuit breaker
x) Type tested pressure
a) Circuit breaker Max. bursting pressure of
enclosure-
b)Other compartmentsMax. bursting pressure of
enclosure
xi) Routine test pressure
a) Circuit breaker
50
xii) Operating pressure of PRD
a) Circuit breaker
xiii) Alarm Pressure
a) Circuit breaker
c) CB lock out Pressure
d) Over pressure signalling
e) Other compartments
xiv) Maximum SF6 Gas leakage rate, in % peryear
xv) Density Monitor to be provided for eachIndividual
gas compartment
18 Circuit Breaker 400 kV
i Applicable standard
ii Type
iii Designation
iv Operating Mechanism type
v Nos. of phases
vi Rated current in Amp
vii Mechanical Endurance class
viii Electrical Endurance class
ix Restrike probability class
x Rated SC breaking current
xi Rated SC breaking current - single p
xii Rated Line charging breaking current
xiii Rated Cable charging breaking current
xiv Capacitor bank switching capability
xv Inductive current
xvi Reactive current
xvii Out of phase making & breaking current
xviii Rated short line fault current
xix TRV characteristic
xx First Pole to Clear factor
xxi Nos. of interrupters per phase
xxii Type of arc control device provide, if any
xxiii Type of arcing contacts
xxiv Material of main contact
xxv Material of Arcing contacts
xxvi Filter material
xxvii Timings of operations
- Opening at nominal control voltage
- Opening at minimum control voltage
- Closing time at nominal control voltage
xxviii Maximum pole discrepancy time
-Tripping
-Closing
xxix Rated operating duty cycle
xxx Tripping Coils
- No of coils
- Rated Voltage
- Rated Current
- Rated Watts
51
- Resistance
xxxi Closing Coil
- Rated Voltage
- Rated Current
- Rated Watts
- Resistance
xxxii Spring Charging Motor
- Rated Voltage
- Rated Current
- Rated Watts
xxxiii Spring charging time at rated Aux supply
xxxiv Spring charging time at min Aux supply
xxxv Maintenance required after nos. of operation at
a)No load
b)Rated current
c)25% of rated SC current
d)50% rated SC current
e)Rated SC current
xxxvi Provision of anti-pumping
xxxvii No of operations after switching off of motorAux.
sup
xxxviii Provision of Manual trip
xxxix Electrical interlocking
19 DISCONNECTORS 400 kV
i Applicable standards
ii Type
iii Rated current in Amp for
- Bus disconnector
- Line disconnector
- Transformer disconnector
- PT disconnector
- Transformer / Reactor disconnector
iv Maximum Current that can be safelyinterrupted by
the Isolator (Amp).
- Inductive
- Capacitive
v Rate Short time withstand Current in kA, for3 sec
vi Rated peak short time Current, kAp
vii Rated bus charging current, in Amp
viii Type of contacts
ix Material of contacts
x Current Density at minimum cross
section(A/mm2)
xi Rated lightning impulse withstand voltageacross
the open gap, kVp
xii Rated Power Freq withstand voltage acrossthe

open gap, kVrms
xiii Mechanical Endurance class
xiv Type of Operating Mechanism
xv Operating Motor details
- Type
- Rated Voltage
52
- Rated Current
- Rated Watts
xvi Operating Time
- Closing
- Opening
xvii Mechanical indication on drive shaft
20 Maintenance Grounding Switch 400 kV
i) Applicable standards
ii) Type
iii) Rated Short time withstand Current in kA, for3 sec
50kA
iv) Rated peak short time Current, kAp
v) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltageacross
the open gap, kVp
vi) Rated Power Freq withstand voltage acrossthe
open gap, kVrms
vii) Type of Operating Mechanism
viii) Operating Motor details
- Type
- Rated Voltage
- Rated Current
- Rated Watts
ix) Operating Time
- Closing
- Opening
x) Mechanical indication on drive shaft
21 Current transformers 400 kV
i) Type
ii) Material
iii) Position of Current Transformer
iv) Reference Standard Station Transformer
v) Rated Continuous thermal current
vi) Rated Short Time current
vii) Duration
No. of Cores and details of all the Gen Lines Reactor Bus Bus
cores in all bays such as s Coupler Sectionali
s zer
- Ratio
- Output Burden
- Accuracy Class
- Minimum Knee Point Voltage at
highestratio
- Maximum Excitation Current at Vk
- Maximum Resistance at highest ratio
22 Voltage Transformer 400 kV Type
Position of Voltage Transformer
Reference Standard
Rated Over Voltage Factor – Continuous
Short Time Over Voltage Factor
Duration
Partial Discharge Level
Thermal Rating of Primary Winding
23 Line & Bus CVT 400 kV Details
53
- Ratio
- Output Burden
- Accuracy Class
24 Enclosed Surge Arrester 400 kV
i) Name of Manufacturer
ii) Arrester Class
iii) Type (with mfr type designation)
iv) Applicable Standard
v) Rated system voltage (kV)
vi) Rated Arrester Voltage (kV)
vii) Max continuous operating voltage (MCOV) –(kV)
viii) Nominal Discharge Current (KA) with 8/20Micro
-second wave
a) Max resistive component of cont. current at
MCOV-mA crest
b) Max capacitive component of cont. current at
MCOV -mA crest
ix) Long Duration Discharge Class
x) Min. Energy Discharge Capability (KJ/KVrating)
xi) Max. switching current impulse residual voltage

(KVP)
xii) Pressure Relief Class KA (rms)
xiii) High Current short duration impulse withstand
level with 4/10 micro-second wave(KA) peak
xiv) Over –voltage withstand capability – KV
a.100 Seconds
b. 10 Second
c. 1.0 Second
d. 0.1 Second
e. Reference Voltage (KV)
f. Reference Current (KA)
xv) Surge counter
xvi) Leakage monitor
25 Local Control Cubical 400 kV
i) Name of Manufacturer (OEM of GIS)
ii) Location in GIS
iii) Material
iv) Sheet Thickness
v) Degree of Protection
vi) Padlocking arrangement
vii) Major components of LCC
- Bay control mimic diagram
- Control Switches
- Indicating lamps
- Position indicators
- Annunciation scheme
- Auxiliary relays
- Contact multiplication relays
- System parameters display
- Heater with thermostat
-Interface terminal blocks for relaying &
54
protection
26 GIS to Line connection 400 kV
Type of termination Proposed
27 GIS to Transformer / reactor connection 400 kV
Type of termination proposed
28 Maintenance
i) Maximum down time for replacement or removal
of any part
ii) Maximum down time for degassing and refilling
the biggest compartment
iii) Time between two refilling of SF6 gas.
vi) Recommended period for overhauling
v) Nearest local service centre & Availability of
spares at local service centre
vi) List of recommended special tools, etc attached?
29 GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF 400 KV OUTDOOR POWER EVACUATION

EQUIPMENT
1. STRUCTURES
a)Type
b) material
2. CONDUCTOR & BUS BAR
a) Size
b) Type
c) Current Density
3. CLAMPS
a) Type
b) Current Density
4. ISOLATORS With Earth switch
a) Type
b) No. of poles
c) Rated voltage
d) Rated normal current
5. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Rated voltage
2. Type
3. Ratio:
4. No. of secondaries
5. class of Accuracy----0.2S
6. Application (Boundary Metering)
6. CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

1 Rated primary voltage
2 Type single phase capacitor VT
3 No. of secondaries
4 Rated voltage factor
5 Phase angle error + 20 minutes (for metering)
6 Capacitance (pf)
7 Voltage Ratio:
i)Rated primary voltage. KV
ii) Secondary Voltage (Volts)
8 Rated total thermal burden and class of Accuracy -
55
--0.2S
9 Application Protection/Communication
(Boundary Metering and Line)
7. LIGHTENING ARRESTORS
a)Type
b)Mounting
8. POST TYPE INSULATORS
a)Type
b)Mounting
9.EARTHING:
a) Size
b) Material
56
SCHEDULE – D 15
GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF LIGHTING
A TYPE OF FIXTURES
B LIGHTING LEVEL
57
SCHEDULE – D 16
GUARANTEED PARTICULARS OF FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
A Fire Hydrant System-
Details of Main Pump and capacity

Details of Jockey Pumps and capacity
Details of Diesel Engine driven Pump and Capacity
Valves details
Pipe material & thickness
Pressure rating
Hose Pipe Boxes details
Any other technical details not covered above
B Portable fire extinguishers
i. Co2 fire extinguishers
1.wall mounting
2.Tyre mounting
ii. Foam type fire extinguishers
iii. DCP type Extinguishers
C NITROGEN INJECTION SYSTEM FOR
PREVENTION OF FIRE/ EXPLOSION FOR
TRANSFORMERS/REACTORS
1 Name of Manufacture
2 Reference standards
3 Details of system equipments
4 FEC (Fire Extinguishing Cubicle)
i. Dimensions (LXBXH) mm
ii. Capacity of Nitrogen cylinder
iii. Number of cylinders
iv. Pressure of Nitrogen filing
v. Oil drain Valve (ABOVE FEC) details
vi. Nitrogen Injection Valve (Above FEC) details
5 Control Box
Dimensions (LXBXH) mm
Details of components provided in the control box
6 Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve details
7 Detectors
a. Make
b. Type
c. Quantity required
8 Any other technical details not covered above
58
VOLUME – III
PART – III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF E&M EQUIPMENT
3.0 SPECIFICATION FOR TURBINE AND ITS AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

3.1 SCOPE:
3.1.1 This section of the specification covers the design, Engineering, preparation of model, testing of
model, manufacture of prototype, testing at manufacturer’s works before dispatch, supply,
erection, testing and commissioning of Twelve sets (12 Nos.) of Vertical Kaplan turbines with
associated auxiliary and ancillary equipment including governing equipment, equipment for the
auxiliary system such as compressed air, and lubrication systems, oil, water and air piping with
valves, instrumentation, control, safety devices etc., and spares as well as special tools and
plant as described and detailed in the specification and in the annexed schedule of
requirements.
3.1.2 The scope of supply shall include all parts, accessories, spares etc., which are necessary for
construction, operation and maintenance of complete equipment even though these are not
individually or specifically stated or enumerated. Corresponding parts of the turbines,
associated equipment and spares shall be of the same material, dimensions workmanship and
finish and shall be interchangeable.
3.1.3 The turbine manufacturer shall match his equipment in respect of speed, runaway
speed, moment of inertia, overload capacities, couplings and any other requirements with that
of generator manufacturer.
3.2 HYDRAULIC & OTHER DATA:
3.2.1 The details of the hydraulic system and other basic data for turbine design are given below:
1. Maximum Water Level (FRL) EL 45.72 M

2. Minimum draw down level EL 41.15 M
3. Minimum tail race level EL 13.64 M (1 unit)
4. Maximum tail race level EL 18.20 M (12 units)
5. Maximum Tail race level(during flood) EL 32.50 M
6. Maximum net head EL31.08 M
7. Minimum net head EL 17.00 M
8. Discharge per unit 331.00 M3/sec
9. Rated net head 27.00 M
Head of 17m will be available at a flood discharge of 10lakh cusecs. One combination for min. head of
17m is when HWL =42m and TWL =25m.
One possible combination corresponding to 14m net head, Head Water level (HWL) is 41.15m and Tail
Water Level(TWL) is 26.5m.
3.2.2 TYPE AND RATING.

3.2.2.1 The turbine shall be of Vertical shaft Kaplan type suitable for direct coupling to generator of 80
MW Capacity with continuous over load of 10% of rating. The direction of rotation shall be
clockwise when viewed from top of the Generator.As it is an EPC Contract the Agency shall
decide the orientation of Penstock and semi spiral to meet the requirement as per the E&M
equipment (Turbine-Generator). Each turbine shall be so designed and constructed that all
removable parts including runner, shaft, guide bearing, shaft seal, guide apparatus etc., can be
easily replaceable. It shall be possible to repair/replace turbine shaft seal without de-watering
the Draft tube for which purpose additional repair seal shall be provided. It shall be ensured
that the turbine best efficiency head shall fall well within the operation zone of heads.
59
3.2.2.2 The turbine shall be capable of giving rated output of 80 MW at the generator terminals at
rated net head 27.00 M and discharge of 331 Cumecs. The net head and Gate opening at
which the machine gives the best efficiency shall be as per the guaranteed particulars
indicated. While delivering the rated output, the turbine shall be designed and constructed to
operate satisfactorily with complete safety and without objectionable vibrations, noise and
cavitations at all heads within the range of head variation.The turbine shall be capable of
giving outputs higher than the rated outputs. Specific speed resulting in rotation speed of less
than 100 rpmwill not be acceptable
3.2.2.3 The maximum output and the corresponding gate opening and discharge at minimum and
maximum net head, and at best efficiency head shall be as per the guaranteed particulars
indicated. Capability of turbine for giving higher output and Graphical data regarding the
output, gate opening, discharge, efficiency, shall be as per Guarantee Technical particulars.
The turbine shall operate satisfactorily for variation in capacity from 30%to 110 % of the rated
capacity (80 MW) for rated and maximum net head. Output at minimum operable net head
shall be as per the manufacturer’s hydraulic design.
The turbine shall be capable of running at 30% of the rated capacity continuously.
The turbine shall be capable of running up to a net Head of 14.0m continuously (However
the Guarantied Efficiencies are not applicable at this Head of operation).
3.2.2.4 The tentative cross section of the powerhouse is shown in the enclosed drawing.
3.3 Guarantees:
The full gate output of turbine corresponding to a net head of27.00 M and the efficiencies at
100%, 80%, 60% and 30% outputs shall be as per technical particulars and in addition, the
output of the turbine at full gate opening at a head of 31.08m (maximum head), 27m (rated
head) and 17.00 m (minimum head) shall be stated in the tender.
The offered guaranteed efficiencies of the Turbine at rated Head and rated discharge shall not
be less than 94%.However the bidders shall offer possible higher efficiencies at 31.08 m
(maximum Net head), 27m (rated Net head) and 17.0 m (minimum Net head).
Turbine Weighted Average Efficiencyshall be guaranteed and all other individual efficiency
values at variousheads and outputs including bestefficiency point are for informationonly.L.D.
will be calculated on WeightedAverage Efficiency values obtainedfrom Model test results only.
3.4 Checking guarantees from model test results:

Field efficiency test, as per IEC 60041-1991,forms the final basis to establish the fulfillment of
guarantees offered. The purchaser shall have option of carrying out the field test by the
manufacturer under third party supervision. Model tests as provided in clause3.12.1.of this
section shall however be carried out by the manufacturer prior to taking up manufacture so as
to satisfy the purchaser of the capability of the design to meet all the guaranteed values.
Modification of design, if necessary shall be made so that the guaranteed performance can be
obtained as determined by model tests and the contractor shall proceed with the manufacture
only after satisfactory results have been obtained and approved by the Purchaser. In case of
inability to obtain such satisfactory results, the Purchaser reserves the right to cancel the
contract or to accept the same, subject to levy of penalty as specified in clause 3.5.1.
3.5 Penalty on account of fall in Efficiency and output at rated Head and Discharge:
Penalty on account of fall in weighted Average Efficiency and output:
3.5.1 For any shortfall in the tested values of rated output and weighted Average Efficiencies
(as determined by the following basis 3.5.3) from the guaranteed values, a penalty shall be
applicable at the rate of Rs. 1,16,50,000 (Rupees One Crore Sixteen Lakhs and Fifty Thousand
only) for turbine for each 0.01% (one by hundredth percent) by which the test figure is less
than the corresponding guaranteed figures. This penalty rate is total value for 12 turbines.
60
For the purpose of calculating Weighted Average Efficiencies, Model test results will be
considered and penalties will be levied for shortfall in Guaranteed Values.
Penalties on deviation from the guaranteed output figures will be as follows:

a) Rated Out Put - Rs. 24.3 Cr per MW.
This Penalty rate is a total for 12 turbines.
The penalties on account of the output and efficiencies shall be computed separately and the
total amount of penalty shall be the sum of these two. Tolerance on measurement of
efficiencies shall be allowed in accordance with the IEC test code No. 41 or any other equivalent
standard for field tests of Hydraulic turbines.
3.5.2 REJECTION LIMIT
The purchaser has right to reject the equipment if the test values of either Guaranteed
efficiency of the Turbine orout put at Rated Head and Discharge falls below 2% of the
corresponding guaranteed figures as per IEC 60193-1999.
The purchaser has right to reject the equipment if the test values of either weighted average
efficiency (as determined on following basis) or the rated output falls below 2% of the
corresponding guaranteed figures as per IEC 60193-1999.
3.5.3 COMPUTATION OF WEIGHTED AVERAGE EFFICIENCY:
The weighted average efficiency of the prototype turbine shall be determined from the
guaranteed and model test values of the efficiencies with the following formula for the purpose
of calculation of penalty and rejection limits of efficiencies guaranteed.
Eav = 0.2 E1+ 0.55 E2+ 0.25 E3
Where Eav - weighted average efficiency of the prototype turbine.
E1 - Efficiency at maximum net head i.e 31.08 Mtrs, (Rated Out Put)
E2 - Efficiency at rated net head i.e 27.0 Mtrs, (Rated Out Put)
E3 - Efficiency at minimum net head i.e 17.0 Mtrs,(Max. Possible Output with 100% guide
vane opening)
3.6 RECTIFICATION TO MEET GUARANTEES:

The Contractor shall make good and meet the guarantees again within a period of 4 (Four)
months from the date of witnessing the original tests, should the original test be unsuccessful in
meeting the guarantees. However, no delay in the original delivery schedule shall be allowed
due to this reason.
The Purchaser reserves the right either to levy penalty or to reject if the second attempt is also
unsuccessful in meeting the guarantees.
3.7 CAVITATION GUARANTEE:
3.7.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the runner, discharge ring, guide vanes and other parts in the
hydraulic passage against excessive pitting caused by Cavitation for 24 months from date of
commissioning or 8,000hrs. of actual operation, whichever is earlier.
3.7.2 Excessive cavitation Pitting Guarantee shall be as per latest revisions of IEC 60609-1(Hydraulic
Turbines, Storage Pumps and Pump Turbines , Cavitation Pitting evaluation- Part 1: Evaluation I
reaction turbines, storage pumps and pump turbine). The contractor shall indicate the method
he proposes to use for measuring the amount of the metal removed on account of cavitation,
which shall be subjected to the approval of purchaser.
3.7.3 If the 24 months guarantee period expires prior to the completion of 8000 hrs. of actual
61
operation, the contractor shall guarantee that the weighted loss shall not exceed the value
proportional to the number of hours actually operated.
3.7.4 In case of excessive cavitation being present, the Contractor at his cost shall correct the
condition and rectify and/or replace the part thus affected. The turbine after such
modifications and repairs and/or replacements of part or parts shall be subject to the same
cavitation guarantee as for the original equipment.
3.7.5 In determining whether or not excessive pitting has occurred, metal removed by erosion,
corrosion by the presence of injurious foreign element in water or by chipping and grinding
preparatory to repairing the pitted area, shall be excluded. The manufacturer shall adopt
necessary improvement modifications in the designs, manufacturing to minimize the cavitation
pitting within the permissible limit.
3.8 CRITICAL AND PLANT SIGMA

Values of critical sigma as computed by IEC code on the basis of the model tests shall be given in
form of curves for different heads of operation. Plant sigma curves as recommended by the
manufacturer shall also be plotted on it to clearly show the safety margin available.
3.9 SPEED RISE, RUNAWAY SPEED AND NOISE LEVEL
3.9.1 The flywheel effect of the unit and the normal wicket gate closing time shall be soadjusted that
the momentary speed rise of the unit shall not exceed 50% and the pressure rise in the
penstock shall not exceed 35% of maximum static head (Maximum Static head =45.72m –
wicket gate Centre line EL.) under load rejection.
3.9.2 The data on speed rise, speed drop etc., shall be furnished as required in the schedule of
technical particulars of this volume. The regulation shall be obtained from load rejection of one
unit operating alone and both units. The turbine manufacturer shall co-ordinate with the
generator manufacturer for providing the required flywheel effect for the reversible unit for
achieving the desire performance.
3.9.3 The maximum runaway speed of the unit under any combination of head water and tail-water
conditions shall be stated in the Bid. The turbine shall be capable of running safely at maximum
runaway speed without damage to its parts for not less than 15 minutes for every such
occurrence. The duration for which the turbine can run at runaway speed safely shall also be
stated.
3.9.4 The bidder shall also supply the Integrated Vibration monitoring system comprising all the
necessary instruments for measuring, recording and analyzing, vibration levels of Both Turbine
& Generator components and shall include these in his bid. Maximum noise level resulting from
any of the operating conditions shall not exceed 90db (A) at any place 1.0m away from any
operating equipment.
3.10 MODEL TESTS

Before commencement of manufacture of prototype turbine, the manufacturer shall perform
model tests in the presence of the Purchaser’s and third party inspection representatives to
demonstrate that the efficiency and other guarantees as well as requirements of the
specifications for the performance of the turbines shall be met. The tests shall be conducted
and test reports submitted for perusal of the purchaser within SEVEN months from the Zero
Date. The test shall comply within International codes for model acceptance by hydraulic
turbines and pumps-IEC 60193:1999 and its latest Revisions.
3.11 MODEL TURBINES
After the award of the contract, the contractor shall build a model of the turbine. The water/
passages of the model shall be fully homologous with those of the prototype from the upstream
termination point of the turbine conduit to the draft tube exit. Adequate length of conduit
62
before the spiral casing inlet and beyond the draft tube outlet shall be provided to ensure even
flow distribution. The draft tube cone shall be of transparent to permit observation and for
taking photograph of the cavitation phenomena. The contractor shall submit to the purchaser,
within two months of the award of the contract, drawings and description covering the details
of the proposed model, testing equipment, instrumentation, test procedure for individual tests,
method of interpretation and computation of test results for approval of the Purchaser.
3.12 MODEL TEST

The final model test series shall include but not be limited to the following tests:
Performance (efficiency) test under various conditions extended upto the runaway Speed
Cavitation test – photographs of cavitation phenomena and vortex in the draft tube shall be
taken. These shall show outflow-edges of the runner blades. vortex below the runner, etc.,
Runaway speed test
Wicket –gate torque test
Hydraulic thrust test
Pressure fluctuation tests
Prototype efficiency shall be derived from the model efficiency by application of the efficiency
step-up formulae as stipulated in the relevant IEC test codes.
There shall be no step-up used for recalculation of turbine speed and discharge from the
model.The equations specified in the relevant IEC model test codes shall only be used for
discharge and speed.
3.12.1 MODEL TEST REPORT
After completion of the model test series, the contractor shall submit the model test report
giving performance of the turbine in Generating modes of operation to the purchaser for his
approval. The test report shall include but may not necessarily be limited to the following.
1. Model hill chart
2. Model efficiency curves extended upto the runaway speed.
3. Prototype diagrams in compliance with all applicable requirements.
4. Curves showing sigma versus efficiency and sigma versus unit power and unit discharge for
specified heads with envelope curves drawn.
5. Curves showing unit speed versus unit torque and unit speed versus unit discharge.
6. Photograph and sketches of the cavitation phenomena.
7. A sample calculation for each computation from beginning to end. Record of calibration of all test
instruments and equipment and computation of margin of error
The bidder shall separately furnish in the schedule of prices towards the charges for conducting
the model tests by the contractor including submission of model test report.
3.13 MODEL ACCEPTANCE

Within ONE month following the receipt of the model test report, the Purchaser shall
communicate his approval of the model test report to the contractor. The turbine
manufacturer shall commence the manufacture of the prototype only after the approval to the
model has been accorded Should the model fail to meet the guarantees and other
requirements, it shall be optional for the Purchaser to accept the model conditionally and direct
the contractor to modify the model until it complies with the requirements. All expenses
involved for the modifications and subsequent model tests shall be borne by the contractor.
The turbine manufacturer shall make good and meet the guarantees again within a period of
2(TWO) months from the date of witnessing the original model tests, No delay, however, shall
be allowed in the original delivery schedule due to this reason.
63
The penalty or rejection shall be applicable if the second attempt is also unsuccessful in meeting
the guarantees.
The purchaser also reserves the right of getting the model tested in an independent laboratory.
No charges shall in that case, be payable to the Contractor for testing of the model.
3.14 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF THE TURBINE

3.14.1 The turbine shall be of Kaplan turbines with Vertical shaft movable guide vanes and adjustable
runner blades, with semi-spiral casing and so constructed that all the removable parts including
runner, shaft, guide bearing, thrust bearing (if provided on the top cover) and supports top and
bottom covers, gate operating mechanism etc., can be removed from above through the
generator stator bore. The design shall be such that the turbine guide vanes are not required to
be disturbed for removing the runner. The design of the turbine shall permit a vertical
movement of the runner shaft by an amount sufficient for adjustment of the thrust bearing and
for clearing the joint at the coupling of the turbine generator shafts. Also suitable provision shall
be made to hold the runner shaft assembly before coupling to the generator shaft if the thrust
bearing is provided on generator side. The machines shall have necessary Runner aeration
valves for air admission and vacuum breaking in top cover
3.14.2 The bearing arrangement of the generator shall be semi-umbrella type with the thrust bearing
located below the rotor.
3.14.3 All equipment in the turbine pit shall be neatly arranged and shall be readily accessible for
operation and maintenance. (All necessary walk-way, ladders hand-rails, chequered plates,
mono-rail hoist for maintenance of heavy equipment in the turbine-pit, etc., required for the
equipment covered under this specification shall be provided by the turbine manufacturer).
3.15. TURBINE CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL:-
All parts of the turbine shall be designed and constructed to safely withstand the maximum
stresses during operation, runaway and short circuit conditions, out of phase synchronising and
brake application on the unit. The maximum unit stresses of the rotating parts of the turbine
shall not exceed two thirds of yield point strength of material. For other parts of the turbine,
the maximum stresses due to severe operating condition shall not exceed one third of yield
point strength and one fifth of the ultimate strength of material. For temporary over-loading
and short circuit conditions, stresses not exceeding one half of the yield point shall be
permitted.
3.16 RUNNER
3.16.1 The runner shall be of the Full Kaplan type. The runner material shall preferably be of 13%
Chromium, 4-5% Nickel stainless steel, composition of the material to be used shall be stated in
the Bid.
3.16.2 A bolted flange connection shall be made available for disengagement of the turbine shaft from
the Generator shaft for inspection and adjustment of thrust bearing, etc., The bolt holes in the
flanged connection shall be reamed after assembly of runner and shaft in the shop. Match-
marks shall be made for proper and easy assembly at site. The finished runner and its cone
complete assembly shall be balanced in the shop before dispatch.
3.16.3 All surfaces of the runner shall be finished smooth and shall be free from hollows, cracks or
projections so that the possibility of mechanical failure and the susceptibility to cavitation,
erosion is eliminated. High degree of quality control in manufacture, absolute conformity with
the model in dimensional homology and perfect balancing shall be ensured.
The runner shall be of stainless steel but tenderers may offer as an alternative a runner of any
other material which experience has proved better consistent in the economy. The runner shall
be accurate with a high degree of accuracy balanced and blades polished and finished
accurately. They shall be designed and constructed to withstand safely the stresses due to
64
operation at runaway speed under conditions of maximum head including pressure rise with
gates wide open with no –load on the generator.
3.17 THE RUNNER AND THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPRISE OF:
Adjustable blade runner consisting of :
3.17.1 Set of vanes/blades of 13%-4% Cr-Ni stainless steel each with transition collar, large trunnions
and strong operating lever, the latter forming the thrust element carrying the centrifugal force
on the blade, the streamlined vanes ground smooth, the trunnions accurately turned, and the
levers fitted with steel pins, bronze bushes and connecting gear.
3.17.2 Hub of Carbon steel accurately machined and fitted with bushes of specially high duty bronze
for the vane trunnions and their thrust steps and with spring loaded double acting packings
sealing round the vane collars. The hub with central coupling flange for the shaft, piston stem
and keyways for the servomotor, streamlined guide cone of steel securely bolted on, end cover
and access cap. Complete with forged steel keys, bolts, studs, nuts and locking washers for the
main shaft coupling.
3.17.3 Operating mechanism: With powerful oil pressure servomotor, the steel piston mounted on the
hub stem and the steel cylinder which moves vertically coupled to the vane levers, and with
projecting keys faced with special bronze to fit into the vertical keyways of the hub. The gear
working in oil, the servomotor sealed and connected to the oil pressure head at the top of the
generator through the bore of the main shaft
Oil pressure head assembly shall comprise of bush housing assembly with stain steel bushes for
effective sealing between the opening and closing operating ports and negligible oil leakage and
negligible wear on the bushes during excess run out. Oil head box with oil level level being
maintained always above the maximum tail water level to avoid water entering into the runner
hub during any leakage.
Distributing valve: - Controlling the oil admission to the servomotor located at the centre of the
servo motor cylinder, operated by the governor and surrounded by a return motion gear sleeve
of bronze.
Oil Pressure Head of steel for mounting on the top of the generator and incorporating ports for
supplying the runner vane servomotor and the hub with oil, guides and bearings fitted with
forced oil lubrication and return motion locking lever; complete with special piping passing
down the bore of the main shaft connection to distributing valve and return motion gear.
3.17.4 Cavitaation:The applicable standard is IEC – 60609-1.
The runner shall be guaranteed against deterioration due to cavitation for the first 8,000 hours
of service. The form of cavitation guarantee shall be as follows:
The tenderer shall guarantee that the runner and discharge ring will not be subjected to
excessive pitting and corrosion as defined by any or all of the following clauses for a period of
8,000 hours of operation from the date of which the turbine comes into commercial operation.
a) Loss of material from the runner and discharge ring of excess of 1.5 Kg per 8000 hours of
operation.
b) Reduction in mean thickness of runner blade or discharge rings of 3/ 16 “ or more for a
continuous area of 4” square or more for 8,000 hours of operation.
Should the runner and a discharge ring suffer from excessive pitting due to cavitation as defined
above, the contractor shall undertake at his own cost, to repair the pitted portions of the
runner, and discharge ring by stainless steel welding followed by grinding to a smooth surface
and shall agree to extend the same guarantees in this respect for a period of 8,000 Hours of
operation from the date the turbine is so repaired and put into regular service. If from the
extended period of guarantee inspection reveals that the cavitation guarantee is not sustained,
65
the contractor shall supply in full satisfaction of liabilities in this respect, a full set of runner
blades and or discharge ring free of cost delivered at site.
The fly wheel effect of the rotating parts shall be stated in the tender, the combined value for
the generator and turbine GD 2 shall be suitable to meet full technical particulars for the
turbine including regulation figures shall be stated in the tender.
3.18 TURBINE SHAFT, COUPLING AND ALIGNMENT

The turbine shaft shall be of forged carbon or alloy steel properly heat treated. The shaft shall
be hollow bored and of ample size to transmit torque and run at maximum runway speed
without detrimental vibration or distortion. The central bore shall be of sufficient diameter
along the entire length of the shaft to permit the oil pressure lines and returning device of
runner blade operating mechanism. The turbine shaft shall have integrally forged coupling
flanges for bolting to the runner and to the generator shaft and shall conform to the American
Standard for shaft coupling (ANS- 1B, 49.1-1967). The shaft shall be inspected at shop by
ultrasonic test.
The manufacturers of turbine and alternator must Co-operate closely to ensure that the
rotating unit will be perfectly balanced and there will be no undue vibration or play in the
complete unit consisting of shaft, turbine runner and alternator rotor even at speeds higher
than Normal speed resulting due to full load being suddenly thrown off at full gate opening.
The shaft should preferably be in one piece, if this is not possible a forged flange or coupling to
the generator should be provided. The shaft should have a suitable axial bore to permit
inspection of the interior of shaft and also to provide for return mechanism for runner vane
servomotor in the runner hub.
The turbine shaft shall be of proper length to connect with the generator shaft and shall have a
flanged half coupling on the upper end for connection to a similar half coupling on the lower
end of the generator shaft. The coupling shall be forged integral with the shaft.
Alternatively, proposals for exchange of only requisite templates and gadgets by the respective
manufacturers may also be considered if satisfactory alignment of shaft at site is guaranteed by
both generator and turbine manufacturers.
The turbine manufacturer shall furnish to the generator manufacturer a drill template for the
sub-drilling of the half couplings and coupling bolt guard and coupling design is to be carried out
by the turbine manufacturer in consultation with the generator manufacturer.
The turbine manufacturer shall supply all necessary data such as characteristics of mechanical
parts, forces due to turbine during starting, stopping and running etc to the generator
manufacturer who shall make the critical speed calculations and determine the shaft diameter.
The critical speed and the shaft diameter calculations shall be mutually finalized as acceptable
to both the turbine and generator manufacturers. The lowest/ critical speed of the combined
rotating parts of the complete unit shall be at least 30 percent higher than the maximum
runaway speed.
The shaft shall be accurately machined all over and polished where it passes through the guide
bearing. Maximum shaft run out on cylindrical surfaces shall not exceed the tolerances
recommended in the NEMA standards for vertical hydraulic turbine and generator shaft run out
tolerances.
The turbine shaft shall have a removable and renewable sleeve, where it passes through the
gland in the head cover. The sleeve shall be of stainless steel, resistant to abrasion and
corrosion and shall be of split type for ease of fixing to the shaft.
The Bidder shall ensure that when the turbine has been shut down, there is a minimum leakage
through the shaft seal either under the maximum head water condition or under the maximum
tail- water condition. The expected level of leakage under this condition shall also be indicated
66
by the bidder. The bidder may indicate the cooling arrangement proposed for the Shaft seal,
should the cooling arrangements warrant filtered water, the necessary equipment for providing
this amenity with redundant configurationshould also be indicated in his bid.
A removable baffle shall be fitted to the shaft immediately above the shaft seal to prevent
leakage water traveling up the shaft to the main guide bearing.
The turbine manufacturer shall co-operate with the generator manufacturer in regard to
detailed design of the coupling. The turbine manufacturer shall machine the turbine shaft
coupling base to the final dimensions; The generator manufacturer shall be responsible for the
final reaming of the coupling bolt holes and shall also supply the coupling bolts and nuts as well
as suitable cover for the coupling bolts.
The generator manufacturer shall be responsible for final coupling and alignment of the turbine
and generator shafts. The turbine manufacturer shall deliver the template of the turbine shaft
to the generator manufacturer to enable him to co-ordinate the alignment of two shafts.
The alignment and coupling of the two shafts at site shall be done by the generator
manufacturer who shall be responsible for the alignment of the complete unit.
3.19 TURBINE GUIDE BEARING

The turbine guide bearing shall be of the oil self lubricating type with Babbitt lined bearing pads.
It shall be located on the inner head cover as close to the runner as possible but above the
turbine shaft gland. The bearing shall consists of a removable bearing housing, oil sump having
removable cover plates, cooling tubes, etc., It shall permit vertical movement of the shaft to
facilitate movement and dismantling of the generator thrust bearing and clearing of the male,
and female portions of the shaft coupling. It shall be designed to withstand natural retardation
from maximum over speed without application of generator brakessafely and without damage.
Access to bearing shall be such as to enable inspection of bearing without dismantling other
turbine parts. The bearing housing shall be split into two or more sections to facilitate
dismantling and shall be dowelled securely. The bearing shall be lined with suitable high grade
anti-friction material such as Babbitt. The lining shall be bonded securely to the shell, and shall
be suitably bored and grooved to make lubricating oil to circulate over the bearing face without
the aid of a circulating pump.
The built-in heat exchangers preferably of the plug-in-type shall be provided through which cold
water from the station cooling water system can be circulated for cooling of the lubricating oil.
The contractor shall supply all the pipes and fittings including valves. A flow indicator with alarm
contacts to indicate Normal and low/no flow and a throttling valve shall be provided
downstream of the heat exchanger. The cooling water shall be discharged into the draft tube.
The bearing oil sump shall be provided with an oil level indicator and level switches for Normal,
high and low oil level alarms. The Bearing Pad metal and oil temperature detectors,
signalisersshall be provided. Connections for oil filling and drain as well as purification and
safety devices shall be provided.
The bearing shall be designed such that alarm and trip for high bearing temperature shall occur
at temperatures of 70o C and 75o C respectively. The expected bearing temperatures at rated
operating conditions shall also be indicated.
The design shall be such that no water shall enter the lubricating system and there shall be
negligible loss of oil by escape system under normal operating condition. A water detector with
alarm contacts shall be provided at the lowest point of the oil sump.
The bearing shall be capable of safe operation without any damage under the following
conditions.
67
i) Continuous operation at any speed from 90 (ninety) percent to 110 percent of rated
speed.
ii) Operation for a period of at least 15 minutes at rated load and speed after the
failure of bearing cooling water supply.
iii) Operation for a period of 15 minutes under maximum runaway conditions with
cooling water on.
iv) Operation for a period of atleast 30 minutes on low speed of 4-5 percent of the
rated speed.
i) Continuous operation at any speed from 90 (ninety) percent to 110 percent of rated
speed.
ii) Operation for a period of at least 15 minutes at rated load and speed after the failure of
bearing cooling water supply.
iii) Operation for a period of 15 minutes under maximum runaway conditions with
cooling water on.
iv) Operation for a period of atleast 30 minutes on low speed of 4-5 percent of the rated
speed.
The first fill of oil plus 10 percent in excess shall be supplied by the Bidder in non-returnable
drums. The bidder shall furnish details, such as, quantity and pressure of cooling water
required, quantity of oil, specification of oil etc., in the bid. The bidder shall select a lubricating
oil which will be normally available in India for replenishment or replacement in future. He shall
also indicate the trade mark or the brand of oil under which it is being marketed in India.
The Bidder may, if he so desires, offer as an alternative a design having thrust bearing as part of
the turbine and mounted on the top cover. In this alternative, adequate space shall be made
available for maintenance of the guide bearing and guide apparatus. The thrust bearing, thus
offered, shall comply with the technical and other requirements as outlined generator
specification at clause no. 4.34.
The thrust bearing support shall be of massive construction designed to support the bearing
rigidly and to transmit the load to the speed ring. The turbine manufacturer shall be
responsible for fully coordinating the design of thrust bearing with the requirements of the
generator. Separate price for the thrust bearing shall be indicated in the schedule of prices in
case thrust bearing is being offered as a part of turbine supply.
3.20 MAIN SHAFT GLAND (SEALING BOX)

The turbine shaft gland shall be of the water lubricated type and shall be located below the
main guide bearing in the head cover. The sealing box shall be of the carbon ring type or any
other superior type, and shall be suitable for the worst operating conditions those may be
encountered. A maintenance seal (isolating seal) of inflatable rubber shall be provided below
the shaft seal to enable replacement or adjustment of the shaft seal without dewatering the
unit.
The shaft seal shall be so designed that it shall be suitable and durable for the quality of water
i.e sandy and mud water during flood seasons.
The shaft seal shall be so designed that it can be adjusted without disturbing the guide bearing.
It shall prevent the leakage of water up the shaft at standstill and under all conditions of
operation including its operation under maximum T.W.L. condition (under highest Flood
discharges) and entry of water into the turbine guide bearing during operation.
The bidder shall indicate the cooling arrangement proposed for the Shaft seal. Turbine
contractor shall supply all the seal water pipes and fittings etc., in case of cooling water required
68
is of quality higher than possible with 1.5mm grating, the turbine manufacturer shall provide
two parallel simplex or a twin type (duplex) strainers and automatic flushing in the supply piping
close to the seals for further filtration. Valves for isolation of strainers shall also be provided.
A flow indicator and a duplex pressure gauge shall be provided with contacts for annunciation
of low flow. The duplex gauge shall indicate the pressure beneath the seal and in the supply
line.
Suitable wear indicator (if applicable) for local readout shall be provided.
The seal shall be easily accessible for inspection and adjustments/replacements of the sealing
rings. The bidder shall indicate the quantity, pressure and purity of seal water required.
3.21 SPIRAL CASING

SPIRAL CASING (Semi-Spiral)
The Contractor shall specify in the Tender the requirements for concrete finish for the turbine
efficiency guarantee offered.
The Contractor shall make special provisions to avoid concrete erosion in regions affected by
high water velocities and eddy formation, including the use of special epoxy grout compounds.
The junction between the concrete spiral case and the embedded steel stayring shall be grouted
to avoid concrete erosion and spalling.
The design of the concrete spiral case shall consider the water pressure both during normal
operation and during full load rejection under any condition of accident or emergency
operation.
The semi-spiral case shall be provided with a manhole of approved design and location to give
convenient access to the inside of the semi-spiral case for inspection and maintenance
purposes.
A conveniently situated manually operated spiral case drain shall be provided, equipped with
lockable headstock, and discharging into the elbow of the draft tube. Provision to permit the
entry of air to the spiral case during dewatering of a turbine, and the release of air when
refilling, shall be arranged.
For site testing, and as provision for a possible future site efficiency testing, suitable test
sections shall be arranged and stainless steel pressure tappings in accordance with IEC 60041
shall be supplied and fitted for connection to their respective stainless steel pipes as specified
below:
i) Around the spiral case inlet section, measure the head at the turbine inlet.
ii) Four Winter-Kennedy tapings at suitable locations on all Units for turbine index
iii) Pressure testing of Semi Spiral casing shall be carried out as per the applicable standards.
The spiral casing shall be of semi-spiral type with epoxy concrete construction and shall be
made and balance with steel plate supplied in minimum number of sections with a view to keep
welding at site to the minimum possible or of semi spiral type. Welding of steel spiral segments
to the extent possible subject to transportation limitation shall be computed at factory and also
necessary assembly jigs are to be provided for case of erection at site.
The construction of inlet and water passage shall be designed and constructed so as to produce
minimum hydraulic losses and disturbances. Shall ensure a continuous smooth surface on the
inside of the spiral case.
The concrete spiral case and rest of steel lining spiral case shall be designed for a maximum
operating pressure including water hammer and shall be assembled and match marked to the
69
extent possible in the shop before dispatch. The scope shall also include the bulk head test with
spiral arrangements and, the high pressure pump etc., required for hydro static testing at site.
The quantity of electrodes required for site welding of semi-spiral casing of all the units shall be
included in scope of supply.
The casing and the joints with the stay ring shall be completely field-welded only. In case of
welding joints, suitable mating faces shall be provided between the different sections to ensure
proper matching, circularity and other dimensional accuracy during assembly and erection at
site. In case of bolted flanged joints, seal welding shall be provided at the joint periphery for
water tightness.
The semi-spiral case, stay ring welds shall be 100 percent radiograph and any
other relevant higher grade tested.
A suitable flanged drain connection, complete with pipe down to a suitable point in the draft
tube and wedge gate valve, etc., shall be provided at the bottom of inlet. A grill which will
follow the original surface at the water passages shall be provided for the drain opening in the
concrete spiral casing.
A manhole door made of steel and frame of suitable diameter shall be provided in the concrete
spiral case and shall be designed to withstand any possible internal pressure. The inner surface
of door shall be in profile with the inner surface of concrete spiral case when door is closed. A
small test cock shall be provided near the manhole level. Suitable number of piezometer
connections shall be provided to indicate water pressure and for connection to the discharge
measuring equipment.
Ample number of machined pads for application of jacks and adjustable tie rods shall be
provided for field alignment of the assembled stay ring and for anchoring or holding down
purposes during erection. Sufficient number of turn-buckles and jacks required for holding the
scroll casing during concreting shall be supplied.
Two sets of shuttering material with suitable profiles for semi spiral casing as per prototype
design as required shall be supplied. The profile shutter plates shall be test assembled at works
for their accuracy, rigidness and suitability before shipment to site. The Profile shutters
segments size shall be limited so that they can be removed from the stay ring fixed vane path or
through the intake penstock tunnel. Each set of shutters shall be of hard reinforced fiber sheet
material with necessary support and fixing arrangements and shaped for complete concreting of
semi spiral with required smooth finish and shall be supplied for progress of two units works
simultaneously.
The contractor shall furnish all spiders or bracings required to prevent distortion of the
shuttering sections during transportation, erection and welding.
3.22 STAY RING

The stay ring shall be of low alloy cast steel or fabricated from welded steel plate and suitably
stress relieved prior to machining. The stay ring shall be made in suitable number of sections
necessary to keep individual section size and weight within the limitations of transport and
handling etc., The sections thus provided shall have either welded joints or bolted flanged joints
for assembly at site. In case of welded joints, suitably machined mating faces shall be provided
between the different sections to ensure proper matching, circularity and other dimensional
accuracy during assembly and erection at site. In case of bolted flanged joints, seal welding
shall be provided at the joint periphery for water tightness. The flanges shall be provided for
bolted connections between the stay ring and the head cover and between the stay ring and
discharge ring. Alternatively, the discharge ring may be welded to the stay ring prior to stress
relieving and matching. A flange to receive the pit linear shall be provided. The stay ring shall
be designed to support the weight, of the superimposed structure and parts, with spiral case
empty and to withstand safely the upward thrust due to maximum head, including maximum
pressure rise. For fabricated stay ring design, the stay vanes shall protrude through the upper
70
and lower shroud plates and shall be shop-welded with full penetration welds. Fabrication of
the stay ring will only be allowed in case of transport limitation. Welding electrodes required
for site welding shall be included in the scope of supply.
Each section of the stay ring shall be provided with eye bolts and / or lugs for attaching slings for
handling. A sufficient number of machined pads for the application of jacks and fastening for
holding down bolts and a corresponding number of jacks and holding down bolts shall be
provided for leveling during concreting of semi spiral casing and stay ring during erection and
for holding and supporting it in proper position while the concrete surrounding the spiral case
and stay ring is being placed. Grout holes of suitable diameter shall be provided in the lower
flange of the stay ring to facilitate placing of concrete under the section. Suitable provision shall
be made for closing these grout holes after placing of concrete with spiral epoxy compound.
Two drain pipes shall be provided by the contractor through the stay vanes for connection to
the embedded drain piping in order to drain the stay ring collection area (outside the head
cover) to the sump. The pipes shall be so located that the strength of the stay vanes is not
impaired. Removable and readily accessible strainers shall be provided on the top of these
pipes.
3.23 BOTTOM RING

The bottom ring shall be made of either cast steel of good weld ability or welded plate steel
suitably sectionalized, if necessary, to facilitate shipment and handling. If the bottom ring is
made of welded plate steel, all welds shall be stress-relieved. It shall be dowelled and bolted to
the discharge ring.
Bronze bushed bearings of self lubricated shall be provided for the lower stem of each wicket
gate, located in the bottom ring. Stainless steel overlay or stainless steel facing plate shall be
provided at the wicket gate opening and on the entire surface between the wicket gate and the
discharge ring. The turbine wicket gates and stems shall be of 13:4Chromium Nickel stainless
steel.
Provision shall be made in the bottom ring for the wicket gate seals.
3.24 RUNNER CHAMBER

The runner chamber shall be stainless steel or welded plate steel construction or combination
of the two, heavily ribbed to maintain its circularity, properly stress relived and suitably
sectionalized for shipping. A removable stainless steel or stainless steel-clad throat liner shall
be mounted at the inside of the discharge ring to form the water passage directly below the
runner. It shall be machined as its upper end for connection to the staying or alternatively may
be welded to the stay ring prior to machining. It shall be machined at its lower end for
connection to the draft tube liner and on its top face to receive the bottom ring. Inside face of
the runner chamber shall be spherically machined to maintain equal gap along the edge of the
runner blade at all positions of the blade.
Suitable adjustable jacks, turnbuckles and foundation bolts shall be provided to position and
level the runner chamber during erection as well as to maintain its position during concreting.
Grout holes of suitable diameter shall be provided in the top face of the runner chamber to
facilitate placing of concrete underneath and suitable size and no. of tapped holes for grouting
and air release during grouting after concreting shall also be provided.
3.25 DRAFT TUBE AND DRAFT TUBE CONE:

The draft tube shall be of elbow type and tubular connection with its profile designed to gain
maximum turbine efficiency. The constructional features of the various components of the draft
tube as desired are summarized below.
i) The cone shall be of fabricated steel structure with adequate stiffening ribs and strong upper
flange. A hinged rectangular manhole cover, suitable off-takes for connections of the
pressure/vacuum gauge and pockets for runner inspection platform shall be provided.
71
Inspection plug shall be provided below the manhole door to ensure that the water is below the
level of manhole before opening it. Provision shall be made for a platform to be positioned
under the runner to facilitate inspection of the inside of the water way and also to enable
possible repair to be made. This platform also, which is to be supplied by the turbine
manufacturers shall be so designed as to be easily erected and the dimensions of its component
parts shall be such that they can be inserted through the manhole door. Also all the parts of the
platform shall be of aluminum material for easy handling. The upper part of the cone shall be
connected to the discharge ring by flanged connection. Required turn buckles, anchor plates
and pipe jacks for anchoring the DT cone shall be supplied.
ii) The draft tube liner shall be of fabricated or welded steel plate structure with adequate
stiffening ribs and erection brackets, holding down bolts, anchor rods, turn-buckles etc., for
anchoring the liner securely into the concrete and for leveling it in place. Minimum thickness of
the draft tube plate shall not be less than 13mm.
If necessary, the liner shall be divided into suitable segments keeping in view the transport and
weight handling limitations. In such a case, the draft tube liner shall be assembled and match-
marked in the manufacturer’s shop before shipment for convenience of proper assembly and
alignment at siteand for speedy completion of erection works.
Specifications and quantities of the welding electrodes required and the welding sequence for
the draft tube linear shall be indicated by the contractor. Piezometric taps shall be provided at
suitable locations for measurement of pressure/ vacuum in the draft tube. Adequate number of
holes for free passage of air and grout, while the liner is being concreted, shall be provided. The
draft tube shall be sufficiently strong and stiff so that it will not cause any detrimental vibration
under all operating conditions of turbine. The stiffeners shall have hole to ensure free passage
of air and grout materials during concrete placing. Drain box and drain pipes for dewatering the
draft tube shall be included in the scope of supply.
The extent of the horizontal leg of the liner shall be upto a point where the average velocity
of the water is 5m/sec. Further The limit of liner shall be up to in horizontal plane with
minimum length of TWO metres
A drain box for dewatering of the draft tube shall be provided. One end of the drain box shall
be connected to the lowest point of the Draft tube and the other end shall be connected to the
dewatering pit. The dewatering pipe shall open into the dewatering gallery/ sump. Grating
shall be provided between the draft tube and the drain box. A suitable control valve which shall
be designed to be operated from the draft tube inspection gallery. The spindle of the control
valve shall rise upto the draft tube inspection gallery floor. The pipe sleeve to house the spindle
in the mass concrete shall also be supplied. Provision of adequate sealing arrangement shall be
made, so that the draft tube water does not rise through the sleeve.
Penstock and concrete spiral casing shall also be dewatered under gravity through the draft
tube. Necessary pipes, pipe fittings and control valves, etc for this purpose shall also be
supplied.
It is essential that the turbine operation be stable at all gate openings and that no pulsations
shall originate in the draft tube.
The frequency and amplitude of draft tube surges anticipated on the basis of model tests shall
be stated by the turbine manufacturer who will co-ordinate with the generator manufacturer
to ensure that the frequency of the draft tube surges is not close to natural frequency of the
generating unit to avoid resonant conditions and objectionable power swings.
3.26 GUIDE VANES:

The guide vanes including stem shall be made from (Chromium: Nickel)13:4 stainless steel.The
guide vane bushes shall be of the self-lubricating type withprotective seals.
72
The number of guide vanes selected shall be well-matched to ensure turbine operation without
objectionable vibrations. The design of the guide vanes shall suitably take into consideration
high stresses and dynamic torque and the consequent fatigue problems. The guide vane
linkages shall also be rigid enough to withstand these dynamic torques without giving rise to
excessive vibrations. The guide vanes shall be shaped to permit smooth flow of water.
The turbine wicket gates and stems shall be of nickel chrome stainless steel. Composition of the
material to be used shall be stated in the bid.
Each wicket gate shall be provided with three greaseless self lubricating bush type bearings.
Each stem shall be provided with a thrust bearing of bronze to carry the weight of the gate and
to withstand hydrostatic uplift. Convenient means shall be provided for adjusting and
maintaining the vertical clearances of the wicket gates.
The upper gate stems shall be amply designed to withstand torsion effects. The hydrodynamic
forces after a shear pin breakage.
The gate operating mechanism shall be of ample strength to withstand the most severe
operating conditions. All working points with relative motion shall be provided with self
lubricated bronze bushes. Means shall be provided for adjusting the position of any individual
gate independently.
Each gate shall be individually connected to the gate operating ring through a set of lever and
links.
Suitable shear pins shall be provided between each wicket gate stem and gate operating ring
which shall be strong enough to withstand the maximum normal operating forces but will break
or yield due to forces in opening or closing direction and will protect the rest of the mechanism
from damage when one or more wicket gates become blocked. A shear pin failure check circuit
shall be provided which shall be electrically continuous if all pins are sound and open. If one pin
is sheared, it shall provide annunciation on the turbine – generator gauge panel. One potential
free contact shall also be provided for annunciation in the control room. A shear pin break test
shall be performed in the shop.
Solid stops and suitably designed friction device shall be provided for each wicket gate to limit
the angle and range of movement of gate stem levers while opening and closing on shear pin
failure. The loose gate and its linkage after shear pin failure shall not create progressive failure
of adjacent shear pins.
All the components of the guide apparatus shall be readily accessible for inspection, adjustment
and repair. The gate operating ring shall be made of cast steel or welded steel. The guide
operating ring and its supporting structure shall be of adequate strength and stiffness to
prevent deflection of this ring, guide bearing or the main shaft in case of the gate operating ring
being subjected to the thrust of only one servomotor with the other being blocked or without
oil pressure.
Seals shall be provided above and below wicket gates and also at the sealing line edge to the
adjacent gate to effectively reduce leakage of water or air. Segmented seals of proven design
shall be used. The leakage through the wicket gate when the unit is put into operation shall be
guaranteed and the expected quantum of leakage shall be indicated in the bid
73
3.27 TOP COVER
The top cover shall be cast steel or welded plate construction or a combination of the two,
properly stress-relieved and segmented radially as required to facilitate shipping and assembly.
Provision shall be made to facilitate lifting of the complete top cover assembly with the help of
the power station crane.
The top cover shall be substantially ribbed and designed to withstand all forces acting upon it
with safety and without undue deformation specially those caused by the maximum tail water
level and those resulting from load rejection. The top cover shall also be designed to give rigid
support to the main guide bearing. Main and maintenance shaft seals, wicket gates and wicket
gate operating mechanism. While designing the top cover, the contractor shall ensure direct
accessibility to the main shaft seal and to the wicket gate stem packing boxes. Pipes or passage
ways shall be provided in the top cover to drain the leakage water from the wicket gate stem
seals into the stay ring collection area.
The top cover shall have an integral bearing surface for the regulating ring, guide bearing
support flanges, packing box or shaft gland support flanges. The bronze bushedself lubricated
bearings and a packing box with a proven type of packing and bronze gland ring shall be
provided in the head cover for the upper stem of each wicket gate. Stainless steel overlay or
stainless steel facing plate shall be provided at the wicket gate seals.
The gravity drainage shall be effected in case of rise in water level in the head cover, the ejector
shall operate automatically so as to drain the head cover. In addition to the above 2 no’s
submersible pumps having minimum submergence requirement of suitable capacity shall be
provided to drain the water in the top cover area. All necessary float switches, motor starters,
wiring and controls shall be provided and mounted within the turbine pit to operate the pumps
and ejector automatically at present levels.
The top cover shall be fitted with renewable upper and lower self lubricated bronze bush
bearings for guide vanes.
Necessary aeration valves shall be provided on the top cover into the turbine water passage for
relieving excessive vacuum/ pressure created in certain operating conditions or when required.
3.28 TURBINE PIT LINER
A pit liner for each turbine pit shall be provided. The pit liner shall be made in suitable sections
of welded steel plate construction and shall be site welded together and to stay ring. Stiffening
ribs as required shall be provided on the liner sections
Turbine pit liner shall be provided the extents of pit liner is from top cover and up to the
bottom of the Lower Bracket( Bottom Thrust / guide bearing housing)
Adequate number of bonding rods shall be welded on the periphery of the pit liner to provide
bonding between the liner and concrete around it.
Fabricated steel recesses shall be provided in the pit liner, properly ribbed and braced and
machined to receive and support the gate servo motors and to transmit the servo motors thrust
loads on to the concrete. The openings for stair – way shall be provided in each pit liner.
Mono-rail with chain blocks of suitable capacity and girders for handling the equipment inside
each turbine pit shall also be provided. The pit liner shall be complete with necessary platforms,
floor plates walkways, ladders etc.,
74
For illuminating the turbine pit and the entrance stair case, service power sockets shall be
installed at proper places in the pit. All devices and accessories for illumination( LED Lamps only
) shall be furnished by the contractor. The lighting fixtures shall be suitable for operation on
230 volts. Single phase, 50Hz supply. The lighting fixtures shall be water proof switches for
lighting fixtures shall be provided at the entrance of the stair case. In turbine pit 24V DC rectifier
shall be arranged for the purpose of handlamps.
All wiring for meters, relays and other instruments inside the pit liner shall be gathered and
terminated in a junction box provided in the pit liner. The contractor shall furnish necessary
wirings, conduits and also ducts for passing through the concrete barrel.
3.29 GUIDE VANE SERVOMOTORS
The guide vanes shall be operated by double acting oil pressure operated servomotors made of
fabricated or case steel and having adequate capacity to operate the turbine wicket gates to full
closing with minimum oil pressure in the governor oil pressure tank. The servomotors shall be
arranged so that each of them shall equally share the force required for operating the guide
vanes.
The servomotors shall be provided with suitable adjustable bypass connections for cushioning
to achieve retardation in the rate of closure to prevent excessive pressure changes into the
water passages.
Manual locking devices to hold the guide vanes in the closed and open positions against
maximum oil pressure shall be provided along with switches for interlocking circuits and lamp
indications of the locking device and also the position by means of a pointer.
Effective sealing to prevent oil leakage shall be provided.
3.30 TURBINE PLAT FORM, WALKWAYS, HAND RAILS, ETC
Necessary platforms, walkways, hand rails, chequered plates, ladders, etc., complete with
supporting steel structure shall be supplied.
3.31 TURBINE FLOW-METER
Each turbine shall be provided with a Discharge flow measuring equipment for local and remote
indication/SCADA and Paper less recording. The flow meter shall indicate the instantaneous
flow (in cubic meters per second) through the turbine at uniformly graduated direct reading
indicator the flow meter shall also record the flow through the turbine with facility to integrate
over a selected period (Eg. 24 Hrs.). The equipment shall be preferably of Differential pressure
measurement type and Microprocessor based. The equipment shall be capable of measuring 10
percent to 110 percent of the maximum turbine discharge to cover the entire range of turbine
operation.
The flow meter shall be mounted on the unit control board/ Gauge panel and shall be complete
with required vent vales. Shut off valves, pressure pulsation dampeners, supports, all piping
form the winter Kennedy tapping to the flow meter and all other accessories those may be
required such as for two years and special tools for initial calibration. Direct indication of
instenteneous flow and 2. Nos 4-20 mA signals for the Paper less recorder and one for the
SCADA are to be provided. Complete scope of measuring system including Transmitters, Paper
less recorders etc., are included in the Scope of Supply.
75
The flow meter shall be calibrated during the field testing of the turbine. Only one Unit is
selectable for Field Testing as per Contract. Hence balance flow meters shall be calibrated as per
the applicable standards and best prevailing practices in the industry.
3.32 PIEZOMETER GAUGES.
Four piezometer tapings equally spaced around the turbine inlet pipe and similarfour
piezometer tapping at the draft tube exit section shall be provided for measurement of net
head in accordance with IEC field test code. In addition, piezometer tapings at tow diametrically
opposite locations in the draft tube liner below the runner shall be provided. Connections shall
be terminated in a manifold adjacent to the draft tube man-door. A pressure gauge shall be
connected to the manifold and mounted conveniently.
At least three piezometers shall be located under the head cover on a vertical plate. A pressure
gauge mounted on the pit wall shall be provided for each tapings
Separate piezometer tapping are to be provided which are required for mounting the
Transmitters with indication (included in the Scope) for pressure measurements at the penstock
and concrete spiral casing, draft tube etc., for data acquisition system, the tapping shall be
included.
Winter – kennedy tapings in the top shroud of the stay ring and spiral case shall be provided for
flow measurement.
All piezometer tapings used for pressure measurement shall be made of stainless steel and shall
conform to Clause 3.3 of chapter IX of IEC Field Test code. Stainless steel piping shall be used for
connections. The portion of piping to be laid in concrete shall be enclosed in a conduit to
protect the pipe during placement of concrete.
Gauges shall be supplied complete with necessary piping capillary tubing, valves, vents, fittings
and provision for Purging etc., The pressure gauges shall be calibrated to indicate the value in
metric system in kg/cm2. Suitable transmitters of reputed make for providing signals to SCADA
are also envisaged in the scope
3.33 TEMPERATURE DETECTORS AND THERMO–SIGNALISERS
1. Resistance type temperature detectors Shall be provided for All Bearing Pads and at least
2.Nos for Bearing Oil temp. Measurements.
2. Alternate Pad temp. RTDs and 1 No. Oil temp. RTD shall feed data to a paperless Display
cum recorder (included in the scope) located in LCU of respective Unit and the balance RTDs
shall feed data to SCADA.
3. The said Display cum recorder shall have the ability to trend and display not less than 8
signals per screen and not less than 6 (SIX) such screens in total, which may accommodate
the Stator Winding and core temperatures.
In addition to above dial type thermometers (DTTs) 4 Nos & 1 No. shall be provided in the
bearing pads and bearing oil reservoir respectively for indication, alarm, shut down, etc
DTTs shall be mounted on the gauge panel near the turbine housing. Minimum Three sets of
hermetically sealed, independent, normally open contacts for alarm and trip & SCADA purposes
shall be provided on these temperature indicators. The contacts for alarm and trip, easily
adjustable to set the alarm and trip temperatures shall have adequate operating current
capacity and sufficient resistance to arcing and shall be highly reliable and accurate.
76
Indicator and recorder for RTDs shall be mounted on the unit control board. Necessary inner-
connection between RTDs and the indicator/ recorder on the UCB and the DTTs on the boards
and sensing elements located on the bearings, etc., shall be provided by the bidder.
3.34 OIL LEVEL TRANSMITTERS / GAUGE AND OIL LEVEL RELAYS
Oil level Transmitters with programmable Switches /gauges shall be of float gauge type and
shall be fitted with appropriate protective devices. They shall be so constructed that there is no
oil leakage.Oil level Transmitters of other types shall also be considered asper system
requirement and can be finalized during detailed engineering.
The Transmitters / gauge shall be fixed at locations convenient for inspection and checking even
during operation. Normal, upper and lower limit oil levels shall be indicated with LED indicators
on the transmitters.
The oil level relays should also be with indication and shall be installed in convenient positions
to enable easy inspection and checking of operation and shall be accurate and reliable in
operation. The relays shall be provided with Minimum of Three sets of normally open contacts
for each of the lower, Normal and upper oil levels respectively.
3.35 GOVERNING EQUIPMENT
3.35.1 GOVERNORS:
NOTE:-The manufacturer from whom it is intended to procure the Digital Electro Hydraulic
Governor (Proportional valves based)system must have designed, manufactured, tested,
supplied and commissioned similar type of systems of capacity intended for this project or
higher capacity during the last five years at atleast in two power stations outside the country of
manufacturers Origin or in India and should be in successful operation for 2 years without any
failure as on the date of submission of Bid.
At least one (1) number of Digital Electro Hydraulic Governor (Proportional valves
based)system of the said capacity, should have been commissioned in India and is in
satisfactory operation as on the date of submission of Bid.
The governors shall be PLC based Digital Electro Hydraulic Type(Proportional valves for GV and
RB control).
The Governor shall be designed to control the wicket gates and Runner blade angle in
combination.
Microprocessor based Digital Governors having Free Governor mode and Restricted Governor
Mode Operating facilities with selection including Electrical and Mechanical control cabinets,
toothed wheel generator, servomotor opening & closing feedback system shall be considered.
Type and Description
The governor shall be suitable for local/Remote and Manual/Automatic electrical control from
the unit control board/ governor actuator cabinet and remote control from the control room.
The governor shall be adaptable for use in an unattended station with automatic start-
up/shutdown, automatic synchronizing, automatic load frequency control of the turbines in
operation.
The governor shall be suitable for automatic sequential control of the units in various modes of
operation.
77
The governor shall be fail-safe on the failure of the speed sensing element, loss of oil pressure
or defect in the actuating system so that under any of these conditions, the machine shall be
automatically shutdown with alarm and indication.Provision shall also be made available to
control and acquire data from and to the station SCADA/UCB
The control supply shall be 220V D.C.(Any other supplies if required shall be obtained from the
220 v D.C through redundant power packs& OR ing Diodes)
The governor shall be of oil pressure type of ample capacity to maintain complete control of
speed under all operating conditions.
They should be capable of hand operation as well as remote control from control room, should
act promptly, should be sensitive to speed variation down to 1/10 of 1%, be dead beat, and
entirely without any tendency to hurt or cause water hammer, on the penstock or racing of the
runner.
The governor closing time should be such as to limit the speed rise to 50%,and without causing
excessive Water hammer as per applicable standard when the maximum load at maximum
head is suddenly thrown off. The exact variation in speed and governor closing time should be
stated in the tender
The servomotors shall be equipped with an adjustable slow closing device for retarding the rate
of closure from slightly below the speed at no load position to the fully closed position as to
minimize pressure rise in the penstock. Suitable mechanical locking devices shall be provided
on the servomotor by which the turbine gates may be held securely in the open or closed
positions against maximum governor oil pressure.
The governors shall be fitted with;
Stroke indicator to show the amount of gate opening.
Automatic over speed safety device (Both Mechanical & Electrical) for shutting down the
turbine.
Capable of operationfrom local system as well as from the remote control board/SCADA
Speed changer: A speed changer with micro metric adjustment capable of operating manually at
the actuator and electrically from the main control board shall be provided. Speed control shall
be from 95% to 105% of rated speed.
Speed droop adjustment: Permanent speed droop as 0-10% & Temporary speed droop as 0-
100%.
Safety devices capable of shutting down the turbine when the oil pressure falls or the actuator
drive fails, at the same time operating the alarm signals and providing signals to SCADA
Load limiting devices with manual and remote control.
Shutting down mechanism for manual and remote control operation.

3.36 ELECTRICAL AND HYDRAULIC CABINETS
3.36.1 ELECTRICAL CABINET
Each turbine shall be provided with PID type micro processor based Electro-hydraulic type
78
governor complete with actuator, oil pressure vessel, sump tank, oil pumps, leakage oil tank,
pumps, piping, valves, control and indicating device, speed signal generator and other
electrical/ electronic equipment, suitable for automatic control of wicket gates and runner
blades, all parts and accessories required to make complete operating unit for regulating the
speed and load. The governor shall be designed for controlling in a stable manner at all power
outputs between zero and maximum when the generator is operating as an isolated generator
or the generator operating in parallel with other generators in the grid or in joint governing
mode. The electrical equipment and hydro-mechanical equipment of the governor shall be
arranged in separate cabinets. The control equipment of the governing system shall be suitable
for 220V DC
The various control and adjustments for the generating units for manual starting, stopping,
Speed/load control and for automatic starting stopping, emergency shutdown, of units and
various indications for such controls and adjustments shall be located on the governor hydraulic
cabinet/ Electrical cabinet and from the control room.
The governor shall regulate the turbine to a uniform speed free from hunting or instability
throughout its operating range.
The regulating functions are to be executed in the programmable electronic equipment, which
is responsible for accurate and long term stabilizing features of regulating equipment to provide
i) Accurate and stable setting of base load.
ii) Load/frequency control with high regulating capacity
iii) Rapid regulation in the event of system disturbance
iv) Stable regulation during no load operation.
v) Great stability of setting and function
The output of Generator Voltage transformer shall be used as one of the signal source for speed
sensing. The algorithm shall comprise of a discriminator which would include speed sensor,
stabilizing circuits with PID chamber and other elements forming and Electrical control signals
for the distributing valve of the servomotor of the regulating member control, device for
realising the stable speed-droop characteristics (droop compensating device), the speed setting
adjustment , load setting adjustment, Electrical and Mechanical limiter adjustment mechanism
and a circuit for group regulation such as additional device for measuring the speed of the
generating set (toothed disc and sensing proximity switch( 2Nos)). Electrical relays for starting,
shutdown and varying the operating conditions of the generating sets as well as automatic
protective devices and speed relays for necessary automation and interlocks shall also be
provided. Water level sensing and transmitting to the control room for digital display and to
feeding the information to Governors of all units for headrace as well as tailrace shall be
provided by Contractor. The Governor control logic should generate Guide vane & Runner blade
control signals duly considering the Head variation (Function of Head race & Tail race levels)
The governor shall be adaptable for use in an unattended station with automatic startup/shut-
down, automatic synchronizing, FGMO, RGMO, joint control According to Head and automatic
load / frequency control of the turbines in all modes of operation. The governor shall be
suitable for connecting to automatic sequential control equipment of the units in various modes
of operation with the facility of transmitting and receiving necessary analog and Digital signals
from Unit controller/SCADA exclusively.
The governor shall be designed fail-safe i.e., on the failure of the speed sensing elements, loss of
oil pressure or defect in the actuating system, the machine shall be automatically shutdown
with alarm and indication safely.
79
The electronic cabinet shall comprise redundant regulating equipment such as speed sensing
elements, stabilized power supply pack, Microprocessor based PID (proportional-Integral-
Derivative) and temporary droop forms of stabilizing circuits, frequency dead band, permanent
droop circuits and speed setting device, items of joint control, FGMO & RGMO associated with
the particular governor.
Guide vanes closing time and runner blades opening time shall be such that the speed rise of
the unit shall not exceed 50% of the nominal value under any operating condition. The speed
dead band at the rated speed shall not exceed 0.02%.
Provisions to be made for RGMO operation as per IEGC.
3.36.2 HYDRO MECHANICAL CABINET:
Hydro Mechanical Cabinet shall comprise of the following mechanisms:-

1) Servo/Proportional valves for Guide Vane and Runner Blade operational control
2) Distributing valves
3) Gate Limiter
4) Feed back mechanism such as LVDT’s for GV and RB
5) Double oil filter with necessary on line change over control.
6) Electrical Accessories and accessories to provide all the signals to SCADA
7) Inlet & outlet pipe connections for pressure and drain
8) Built in Emergency closing valve ( both Electrical and Mechanical operated)
9) control oil piping
The governor shall be provided with a restoring mechanism for transmitted wicket gate servo
meter moment to the distributor valve.
The restoring connections between the actuator and the wicket gate operating mechanism shall
be as direct as possible. In the event of failure/loss of restoring action, the operation of the
actuator shall be to close the wicket gates.
The governor shall have the following features:
1) It shall be suitable for local manual operation from Hydro-mechanical cabinet/ Electrical
cabinet, and automatic electrical control from main control room, to regulate the turbine to a
uniform speed free from hunting or instability at all loads
2) Suitable means shall be provided in the governor for full opening of the runner blades during
the turbine start up conditions, and also during the tripping of turbine runaway conditions for
limiting speed.
3) It shall be provided with a set of control gear to be mounted on governor cubicle and unit-
control board and shall include
unit-control board and shall include:
1) Speed /load setting.

2) Gate limit setting
3) Governor balance meters.
4) Transfer selector switch for Manual/Auto changeover of GOV-Controls.
5) Start/Stop push buttons.
6) Pressure monitoring devices
7) Guide vane and Runner blades position indication.
8) Tachometer for measuring speed.
80
9) Gate position and limit indicators.
10) Speed relays to initiate automatic start and stop and other control functions.
11) Emergency shut down.
iv) Setting/{Programming of the following parameters shall be possible
1) Temporary Droop Percent.

2) Permanent Droop.
3) Frequency Dead-Band.
4) Sensitivity.
v) The governor shall be fail-safe on failure on the speed sensing element, loss of oil
pressure or defect in actuating system, so that under any of these conditions the machine
shall be automatically shut down and shall initiate alarm and indication in addition to
signaling of SCADA.
vi) The governor shall be designed for independently adjusting the opening and closing rates
of movement of turbine wicket gates for full gate opening or closing stroke. A secure and
rigid means shall be provided for locking the rate of adjustment.
vii) The governor shall be provided with a set of the restoring mechanism for transmitting
wicket gate servomotor movement to the distributor valve.
viii) Speed adjustment over the range of 90% to 105% of the rated speed along with the
indicator.
ix) An automatic shut down device for complete closure of wicket gate for emergency
closing. The operating solenoid shall be of self-latching type with the provision of
electrical reset.
x) Device for automatic locking out of the governor and gate control mechanism and
manually operated from the governor cubicles.
xi) Indicating lamps for showing the position of locking mechanism.

xii) Emergency shut down manually operated from the governor cubicles, unit control panel
and SCADA. Indicating lamps showing the position of shut down mechanism i.e. whether
operated manually or electrically shall be provided on the governor cubicles as well as on
the unit control panel and control desk.
xiii) Manually operated control device allowing opening or closing of wicket gates shall be
provided. A change over switch Automatic to manual control and vice versa shall be
provided along with the indicating lamps.
xiv) Transmitters / Transducers for transmitting signals to SCADA for operation of Governor
from SCADA and Any other devices may be required for satisfactory operation of the
governor.
xv) Two(2Nos.) programming & commissioning tools (1No. Laptop & 1.No.Desk top along
with necessary software including provision to analyze historian trends) shall be provided
for Governor along with 2 sets of complete governor commission and calibration
equipment viz., Variable voltage & variable frequency Sources suitable for the supplied
governors, 4-20 mA sources and any other Kits necessary for the purpose.
3.37 OIL PRESSURE VESSEL

i) The oil pressure tank shall be designed and tested in accordance with the ASME code for
81
unfired pressure vessels considering the maximum working pressure of the governing
system. The interior surface of the pressure tank shall be coated with oil resistant paint
or other suitable coating to prevent deterioration of the metal. It shall also be ensured
that oil characteristics in regard to its functions are not affected chemically or otherwise.
ii) The capacity of the oil pressure vessel shall be sufficient to meet all the pressure oil
requirements of the governor, guide vane servomotors and even below its machine shut
down oil level. It shall have an oil volume capable of performing 3 full operations that is
close-open-close, with the governor oil pumps being out of operation without reaching
the very low trip oil level.
iii) Means shall also be provided to prevent entry of air into the oil piping system under
conditions of lowest oil level.
iv) The oil pressure vessel shall be provided with the following safety/control/operation
switches:
a. Pressure switches for automatic starting of oil in flow into the tank when oil
pressure in the vessel falls below a predetermined value and for automatic
stopping the oil inflow when pressure rises above a predetermined value, and for
alarm and trip under low pressure or abnormally high pressure conditions.
b. Level switches for giving alarm and shutting down the machine when oil level falls
below predetermined value.
c. Level switch for giving alarm when oil level rises above the predetermined value.
v) The oil pressure vessel shall be equipped with a gauge for indicating oil level in the tank and
Pressure relief valve.
vi) The oil pressure vessel shall be complete with compressed air through air dryers to inlet,
auto air replenishing system air relief valve (safety valve) pressure gauges, oil drain
connections with valve, manhole, etc.
Note: Whether exclusively indicated or not in this document at respective places, It should be
considered in the scope (of supply, erection & commissioning) that All Level & pressure
elements/Parameters Should have Dual output transmitters with programmable
switches(having a Minimum of Two change over contacts) and a local indication of parameter
in addition to Mechanical gauges & indicators with Normal, low, very Low, High and Very High
settings invariably.
3.38 OIL SUMP-TANK AND PUMPS
i) Two nos. screw type oil pumps shall be provided and located on the tank top itself, one
serving as Main & other as standby, with a manual selector switch to changeover their
functions. The standby pump shall automatically start on failure of the pump in service.
ii) The pumps shall be of the continuously running type with adequate capacity and shall
continue to run intermittently with pressure switch control when the turbine is temporarily
shutdown. A set of smoothly operating unloader valve, non-return valve and safety valve
shall be provided to regulate the oil level.
iii) The pump motors shall be 415 V. 3 phase, 50 Hz. squirrel cage type. The electric motor shall
be supplied complete with starter, switch and other accessories.
iv) Each governor oil sump tank shall be provided with level indicator, oil contamination
detector level switches for low/high oil level alarms, oil filter, air vent and filter, oil inlet/
82
outlet connection and drain valves. etc. The interior surface of the sump tank shall be
coated with oil resistant paint or other suitable coating to prevent deterioration of the
metal. It shall also be ensured that oil characteristics in regard to its functions are not
affected chemically or otherwise.
v) The sump tank provided shall have a sufficient capacity with not less than 50% margin to
hold all the oil in the governing system of the turbine.
vi) The sump tank shall be provided with a manhole for access to interior of the tank and shall
have suitable connections for MOBIL oil purifier.
NOTE: An additional station 220 V D.C operated Screw type pressure oil pump motor set shall
be provided for TWO Nos. of Units for enabling early start of Units duringBlack start of station
3.39 LEAKAGE OIL TANK AND PUMPS

A governor oil leakage tank along with pumps and necessary piping and valves shall be provided
and located at suitable location. The tank shall be provided with suitable level indicator level
switches for automatic start/stop of the pumps. The pump motors shall be suitable for 415 V, 3
phase, 50 Hz, AC supply. An alarm shall also be provided to indicate high & low oil level in the
tank.However this need of OLU can be as per system requirement and can be finalized during
detailed engineering.
3.40 GOVERNOR OIL PIPING AND VALVES

All governor oil piping and valves complete with flanges, bolting materials, gaskets; packing etc.
required for inter-connections between the various equipment shall be included in the offer. All
piping shall be seem less steel, suitable for maximum governor oil working pressure. All valves
shall be cast or forged steel valves having flanged ends.
3.41 HIGH PRESSURE COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM

Two sets of Compressed Air system required for the station shall be in the scope of supply
which shall include at least 2 Nos.(TWO) H.P Air and 2 Nos L.P. Air reservoirs with a minimum of
Two Air compressors sets for each reservoirs and a complete inter connection of Air lines
between HP-HP, LP-LP and HP-LP reservoir tanks( in addition to their compressors) with all
operational and safety devices inclusive.Separate Compressors for HP and LP are to be
envisaged.
Necessary PRV,Controlvalves,NRV’s,pipelines,moisture traps, pressure Transmitters, gauges.
Pressure switches etc along with control panels for auto/ remote start / stop of the compressors
shall be considered.
The HP air required tobuild up /makeup of Air required for Governor oil Accumulator tanks shall
be taken from the HP Air reservoir for six units.The volume of the tank shall be considered duly
taking into consideration of air requirement of accumulators. Each high-pressure compressor air
system with a common bus to meet the requirement of six units shall be formed. The high-
pressure compressed air system shall also be capable to supply low-pressure air requirement
through pressure reducers and Low pressure air receiver of suitable capacity with all
accessories.
Air pressure required for Brakes and Maintenance seal and for Service &cleaning etc shall be
taken from LP Air Compressor and LP compressed air tank of suitable capacity required for six
units. The LP air pressure maybe derived from HP Air pressure through a pressure reducer. The
system shall be designed such that the pressure in the individual L.P Air tank shall not fall below
the Minimum Pressure required to operate the Unit Brakes even though the generator brakes
of 6(SIX) Units are applied simultaneously. Necessary pressure relief valves, control
valves,NRV’s,pipelines,moisture traps, pressure gauges. Pressure switches etc along with
control panels for auto/ remote start / stop of the compressors shall be considered. All the
materials shall be of high quality and meeting to Standards. The air receiver shall conform to the
83
requirements of ASME code for unfired pressure vessels (Section-VIII) or any other equivalent
code.
i) The air receiver shall conform to the requirements of ASME code for unfired pressure
vessels or any other equivalent code.
ii) ALL Air receivers shall be provided with pressure gauges, Dual O/P transmitters,
pressure switches, safety valves, air inlet and outlet connections, manhole and drain
and moisture trap connections etc.
iii) The high-pressure compressed air system shall also be capable to supply low-pressure
air requirement for generator brakes without the need of L.P Compressors to start
during normal course of operation, and auxiliary inflatable seal for the turbine shaft
seal.
iv) All the piping, valves, pressure switches, pressure reducers etc. required for the
generator brakes and inflatable seals also are covered in the scope of supply.
3.42 COOLING WATER SYSTEM:

For each unit the cooling water shall be tapped off from the penstock inlet for the cooling
requirement of Turbine Guide Bearing, Generator Thrust/Guide Bearing, Stator Air Coolers and
Transformer Coolers etc. Cooling water system shall consist of main and stand-by pump-motors
for each unit consisting of duplex strainer, valves, Dual output Transmitters with indication &
programmable switches, Mechanical gauges, flow relays,
differential pressure switches with Auto washing facility for the strainers etc.The scheme may
be finalized during detailed engineering . Motor operated washers shall be adopted with
automatic flushing with all accessories shall be provided for the strainers. Maximum cooling
water temperature of 35 deg. C shall be considered for designing the cooling water system.
3.43 PARALLEL OPERATION:

The unit should work in parallel with Andhra Pradesh Grid. The governor should be designed to
ensure proper sharing of load with other machines of grid at all conditions of load and speed.
The governor shall not hunt when operating in parallel with other power houses or with other
synchronous machines connected to the grid.
3.44 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR TURBINES AND GOVERNORS.
Instrumentation, alarms, safety devices and controls necessary for automatic control,
monitoring and efficient operation of the turbine with its associated equipment shall be
supplied by the manufacturer so as to constitute a complementary part of the complete and co-
ordinated set of such instruments, Transmitters / transducers gauges, controls operational and
safety devices required for supervision and controls of the unit during normal running and in
emergencies.
Tentative requirements of the instrumentation etc. are given in the schedule of requirement
Item 3. The Contractor shall however, offer any additional instruments and safety devices which
the contractor considers, necessary for the unit and the contractor shall guarantee the
sufficiency and adequacy of the provisions in this regard. The turbine is normally started from
the Operator Terminal of SCADA in the control room and brought to synchronous speed and
then synchronising and loading of the machine are done. In general the instrumentation and
control scheme shall be such as to provide for manual mechanical control, manual local
electrical control and automatic remote control and emergency shut down.
All necessary indicating instruments, Transmitters, gauges and controls etc. for the turbine and
governor shall be mounted on the unit control board and wherever necessary on machine
control panel. All temperature indicating/Chart less recording instruments, associated relays,
certain electrical instruments on the unit control board shall be provided by the manufacturer.
84
For remote control of the units from the main control room, all necessary items of the
governors and also alarm/safety devices shall be provided on the main control panels and
Operator terminal of SCADA in control room. The governor controls and indicating instruments
shall be provided. The control which are provided both on the unit control board/Machine
control panel and the control desk Governor cabinet (Main control Board) shall be so
interlocked electrically as to eliminate the possibility of simultaneous operation of any control
at both the boards.
One set of Electronic apparatus for measurement and recording of the turbine discharge shall
be supplied with each turbine. The apparatus shall be complete with all necessary measuring
instruments, Transmitters, piezometers, tappings, interconnecting tubing& their purging
arrangements, Valves, Vents etc. and shall be calibrated at the time of efficiency and out-put
tests on the turbine.
Two sets of water level transmitters and indicator/recording instruments shall be provided for
head reservoir and Tail race with stabilized dual outputs.
3.45 SPECIAL TOOLS,SPECIAL SLINGS, EQUIPMENT & CONSUMABLES ETC.

All special tools, slings, lifting devices jacks turn buckles, foundation plates, bolting materials
etc. required for assembly, erection, dismantling of the turbine, governor and other equipment
shall be supplied along with the main equipment. The tenderer shall submit a list of the above
special tools, slings etc., in the offer.
3.46 SPARES:
The spare parts for the turbine and associated equipment considered necessary for 5 years of
operation of the generating units shall be supplied by the contractor along with the first turbine.
The unit prices of the spares shall be indicated as per enclosed schedule no.3 and additional
spares, if considered necessary, shall be listed with unit prices.1 No. Runner should be included
in the spares
3.47 SHOP ASSEMBLY AND TESTS:
The following assemblies and tests shall be carried out on the turbines and associated
equipment at the manufacturer’s works before despatch in the presence of the purchaser’s
representatives if desired by the purchaser. Test Certificates shall be submitted whether or not
the tests were witnessed by the purchaser.
a. One turbine manufactured first, shall be assembled in the shop to the extent possible.
b. Static and dynamic balancing of runners.
c. Hydrostatic testing at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure including water
hammer for not less than 15 minutes for the main inlet valve, servomotors, etc.,
ifapplicable.
d. No-destructive testing of welds.
e. Performance tests for individual auxiliary equipment.
f. Complete assembly and test of governors. Complete testing of integrated system is to
be carried out for their suitability for the first unit. However it Will be finalized during
detailed engineering
g. All motors/pumps/compressors, etc., shall be tested as per relevant Indian or
h. other standards.
Dynamic balancing for the complete machine shall be performed at site including turbine
runner, turbine generator shaft and generator rotor on completion of total assembly and
during commissioning. (Prebid reply)
3.48 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS
At the discretion of the purchaser, the turbine shall be tested at site for establishing
85
fulfillmentof guarantees in respect of turbine output and efficiencies included weighted average
efficiency. The tests shall be carried out as per IEC 41 for Field Acceptance Tests of hydraulic
turbines. All arrangements for these tests including the testing devices shall be provided by the
contractor.
Field Efficiency tests are to be performed on ONE Unit only Which is selected by the
Purchaser. However the flow measurement etc. are to provided for All the Units.
For the purpose of calculating Weighted Average Efficiencies, Model test results will be
considered and penalties will be levied For short fall in theGuaranteed values.
3.49 COMMISSIONING TESTS

The contractor shall carry out the commissioning tests in accordance with IEC 545. The turbine,
after continuous operation for 72 hours at full load, shall be free from problems of leakages,
over-heating, failures, damage etc., The machine will be handed over to the purchaser
thereafter.
3.50 SUPERVISION OF ERECTION
The contractor shall depute experts in erection, testing and commissioning of turbines,
governors and associated equipment for supervision of erection, testing and commissioning of
these in addition to erection teams.
3.51 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS
Item 1. Turbine
Twelve (12 no.s) Vertical shaft movable blades Kaplan turbines each rated to
generate 80 M.W. Comprising the following for each unit
1) Kaplan type runner of stainless steel and cast steel boss complete with necessary blade One
adjusting mechanism and boss cover
2) shaft of forged electric furnace steel properly heat-treated and forged with connecting One
flanges at both ends, keys coupling bolts, nuts, covers etc. for connecting to the runner
and to the auxiliary shaft and generator rotor
3) Set of Servomotors for turbine blades operation, with operation rods, combinator, One
linkages and blades angle regulating mechanism etc
4) Oil supply head mounted suitable for operation of turbine runner blades with necessary One
oil piping, valves, pressure gauges Transmitters and other accessories
5) Set of guide bearing of oil-lubricated type with bearing housing and with temperature One
& Level detector, temperature& Level detection relay,Transmitters, oil piping, pressure
gauges, cooling water piping, water flow indicators differential pressure relay and
other accessories.
6) Shaft Sealing box with main staff glands for sealing water piping, differential pressure One
relay, and water flow and wear indicators, for alarm annunciation in U.C.B. & SCADA
and local indication.
7) Guide apparatus complete with wicket gates, operating ring, renewable guides, levers, One
links and shearing links.
8) Draft tube cone, draft tube bend liner, pressure liner of steel plate suitably sectionalized One
and equipment for assembly of sections access door with hinged cover and provision
for connecting to discharge ring with a manhole with cover and drain valves and runner
maintainer plat form
9) Set of embedded piping including leakage water drain piping, pump sets and other One
miscellaneous piping of top cover. (All embedded pipes shall be seamless pipes of
thickness of next higher rating than specified as per the IS standards for that
requirement and application but not less than 10 mm. All Valves used in water
system used in the power house area must be of cast steel valves with raising stem
only)
86
10) Discharge ring with a provision for connecting to the draft tube on one side. One
11) set of double acting guide vane servomotors with necessary oil piping, locking devices, One
guide vane operating rods and guide vane position indicators etc.
12) set of semi Spiral casing, drain valve and pipe system fabricated from steel palates in One
suitable number of transportable sections.
13) set of Top cover fabricated from steel plates including vacuum breaker valves and its One
piping.
14) Stay ring of cast steel or welded plate steel, which shall be embedded in the concrete One.
15) set of bottom ring made of welded plate steel One
16) Turbine pit liner One.
17) Governor equipment comprising speed responsive element, gate control arrangement One
etc. with a complete set of instrumentation, controls, and automatic safety devices,
mounted on the actuator and at the Electrical cabinet of governor and equipment for
necessary remote control and indication at the main control room along with testing
tools.
18) oil pressure system for governor, comprising of 2 Nos. oil pressure pumps, driving One
motors complete with starting equipment, instrumentation and automatic controls, oil
piping, necessary stop valves, check valves, blow off valves, by pass valves, unloading
valves, safety valves, fittings etc. and arrangement for replenishment of air in the oil
pressure receiver including compressor plant etc.
19) Standby governor oil-pump together with the driving motor complete with automatic One
control system, pressure switches, contactors, relays, manually and electrically
operated change over and other valves, inter-connecting piping and bends etc.
20) Governor oil sump tank with access door, oil level gauge, level relays, temperature One
detector, oil strainer, oil leakage unit including pumps, driving motors complete with
starting equipment, instrumentation and automatic controls,Transmitters and oil cooler
unit.
21) Governor oil pressure receiver with oil level gauge, pressure gauges, air blow off One
valves, pressure switches, low oil protector and valves,Transmitters etc.
22) Leakage oil sump tank for with pump set and associated control and indicating devices, One
piping, valves etc.
23) Speed indicator generator and speed measuring devices( toothed wheel sensors and One
proximity switches) Supply of One portable speed measuring device with attachable
patch on the shaft and a portable speed measuring Gun (Digital tacho meter) is
included in the scope as common for all Units.
24) complete system of equipment with 2 no’s Pumps (Main and Standby), piping, One
connecting pipes, valves, bends, drains etc. for cooling water forturbine and generator
bearings and Air coolers of Stator, oil and High-pressure compressed air systems for
turbine and governor equipment.
25) guage panel with all the devices like DTT’s, Level indicators and recorders, for guages One
mounted to it.
26) Setof level indicators common for allthe units with instruments/transmitters, sensing Two
element, piping, valves, complete system for monitoring the reservoir level. The wells sets
for water level sensors and wiring materials between each equipment shall be supplied.
(for the station)
27) Setof level indicators as above for monitoring level of tail water. Two
sets
28) set of high pressure compressed air system along with necessary pipe line, valves, One
pressure switches, pressure reducers and transmitters. set
29) set of Discharge measuring equipment of unit (Differential pressure transmitter type) One
along with Electronic Transmitters (Dual o/p) and paper less recorder and with
necessary pipelines and valves.
87
30) Set of erection and commissioning tools. One
31) Set of special tools, slings and consumables etc. One
32) Set of tools and plant for maintenance of the plant . One
Drainage & Dewatering system:

The dewatering and drainage system suitable for discharging of approximately 10000 cubic
meters of volume of water
a) Unit Dewatering for Repairs :
4 no.s of VT pumps of with discharge capacity of the pump of 700 m3 / hr, minimum head 45
mts., capacity 110 KW, along with 4no.s Submersible pumps of discharge capacity of the pump
of 700 m3 / hr, head 45 mts. and necessary piping and valves as required to carry the drainage
water from station sump shall be supplied.
The dewatering system shall be so designed that the water from one unit spiral , penstock and
draft tube area in case of maintenance on underwater parts of the unit, it shall be possible to
complete dewatering in 6 to 8 hours on closing /sealing of both penstock gate and Draft tube
gates of the respective unit.
Note: Control Panels for submergible dewaering pumps shall be located at 35 m EL nearer to
MCR.
b) Drainage system for the Power House:

2 no.s of VT pumps with discharge capacity of 350m3 / hr, head 45 mts, capacity 55 KW, along
with 2no.s Submersible pumps of discharge capacity of the pump of 350 m3 / hr, head 45 mts.
and necessary piping and valves as required to carry the drainage water from station sump shall
also be provided.
The quantity, head & capacity of pumps for unit dewatering & drainage system mentioned
above are nominal/ minimum requirement only.
However quantity and capacity shall be increased ( with 100 % Standby) if required during
detailed design with out any extra cost.
Piping:
Unit dewatering piping with valves( twono.s long stem gate valves in series for each Draft tube
drain)required for emptying of draft tube into the dewatering gallery shall be provided by the
contractor. Suitable size of the dewatering pipes and valves shall be provided. The system for
pumping out the water from the sumps to tail race above the maximum tail water level shall be
arranged. The dewatering and drainage system shall be separate and shall be common for all
the units placed at different areas of the Power house. The equipment for each of the
dewatering and drainage system shall comprise motor driven vertical pumps associated piping,
valves, float switches, suitable controls, accessories etc. required for completeness of the
system. The motors shall be suitable for 415 V, 3 Phase 50 Hz, AC supply and rated for
continuous duty. They shall be suitable for continuous starting and stopping duty. The motors
shall be in complete form with their star/Delta starters or Soft starters depending upon the
capacity, over load protection and single phase preventing devices, control gear for starting and
stopping both automatically through the contacts of adjustable level sensing devices to be
installed in the sumps. Two nos level transmitters with programmable switches shall be
considered for showing the level and also for signaling to SCADA through 4 – 20 mA signal.
Necessary alarm levels and start / stop of pumps at two sumps located at either end of the
power station.
The pipes shall be 6 mm thick ERW pipes and all the valves shall be of cast steel. Same system
with all provisions as described above for Dewatering system shall be provided for station
88
drainage pumps also
Service water supply system
Two no.s of service water supply system shall consist of main and stand-by pump-motors
consisting of duplex strainer, valves, guages, flow relays,differential pressure switches etc. The
Booster pumps shall be adopted if the necessary head and pressure is not available to meet the
water supply requirements of Toilets, Station transformer cooling requirement, Air conditioning
and ventilation system of the station .All piping required along with suitable capacity overhead
tanks are in the scope of contract for total completion.
Item–2 Schedule of Spares
Spares for 5 years operation of all the TWELVE units and associated auxiliary equipment for
turbine, Governing Equipment.
1. TURBINE
S No Description of the Item Quantity

1) Guide bearing pads with Babbitt metal. 2 sets
2) Shaft seal packing of carbon 4 sets
3) Guide vane stem packing 2 sets
4) Shear Links ( pins) 2 sets
5) Guide vanes 6 Nos.
6) Shaft sleeves 3 No.s
7) Piston rings for servomotor cylinders. 4 sets.
8) Guide vane bearings bushes(Required for one 2 sets.
complete unit- 1 set)
9) Packing & Sealing, all types and sizes. 2 sets.
10) Bushes for regulating mechanism. 2 set.
11) Springs for shaft seals 3 sets
12) Guide vane Servomotor complete with seal kit. 2 no.s
13) aeriation valves 3 no.s
14) Valves 2 nos of each type
15) Maintanace seal 2 no.s
16) TTCD pump 4 no.s
17) Tubine Runner complete 1 Set
2. GOVERNING EQUIPMENT
a) Electrical Cabinet

1) Speed sensors 6 Nos.
2) Auxiliary relays 4 Nos. for each type
3) Gate position, Runner position transmitters 3 Nos.of each type
4) P.C.B’s/ Electronic cards for electronic cabinet 2 Sets.
5) PB’s, lamps. Switches 6nos. of each type
6) Servo/ Proportional valves in complete 4 Sets
7) DC/Dc power supplies 4 Nos.of each type
8) Seals, all types. 1 set.
9) Gov. emergency Solenoid Valve complete. 2 Sets
10) filter elements 12 nos of each type
11) Bearings 1 set
12) Pressure transmitters., 2 sets.
13) Solenoids and valves 2 no.s of each type
14) Pressure gauge & transmitters 3 Sets
89
15) pressure & position switches 3 sets of each type
16) Oil level gauge& Transmitters 2 Sets
17) Gov. Over speed device complete 1 Set.
c) Oil pressure vessels, sump-tank Leakage tank and pumps.

1) Oil screw pump with motors for pressure oil supply 3 Nos.
-
2) Seals/Packing (all types) 2 sets.
3) Solenoids/ coils. 3/4 sets.
4) Limit switches. 3 sets.
5) Micro switches. 3 sets.
6) Level relays & Transmitters 3 sets.each
7) Pressure switches& Transmitters 3 sets.each
8) Safety relief valve together with pump unloader 4 Nos.
valve
9) Twin filter for oil 3 Nos
Note: The list of spares is only indicative. The tenderers shall indicate additional spares
recommended by him for 5 years of satisfactory operation. The tenderer must however quote
for all items listed above.
3. INSTRUMENTS AND SAFETY DEVICES

1) Resistance type temperature detectors. 6 Nos. of each type
2) Flow relays.and transmitters 3 Nos. of each type.
3) Level switches.& Transmitters 3 Nos. of each type
4) Dial type thermometers. 4 Nos. of each type.
5) Coils/Contacts/Springs for auxiliary relays Solenoids and 3 Nos. of each type
switches etc
6) Float switches. 2 Sets of each type.
7) Pressure Gauges& Transmitters 3 Nos for each type
8) Site gauge glass for pressure oil tank, sump tank 2 for each type.
9) Head Water Level transmitter along with power supply 1 No.
10) Tail water transmitter along with power supply 1 no
4. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM. for Each of HP & LP systems

1) Compressor unit 1 No
2) Piston 1 No.
3) Piston rings 1 Set
4) Cylinder valves. 1 Set
5) Bearings 1 Set
6) Springs 1 Set
7) Packing, Sealing, Gaskets etc. 1 Set
8) gate valves 2 no,s of each type
9) Pressure switches 2 no.s of each type
10) Pressure transmitters 1 no.of each type
11) NRV 2 no.s of each type
12) Pressure relief valves 2 no.s of each type
13) Control valves 6 no.s of each type
14) Pressure gauges 2 no.s of each type
15) Pressure Reducers 2 no,s
90
5. DEWATERING & DRAINAGE SYSTEM

1) Bearings 2 no.s of each type
2) Motor 1 no of each type
3) Shaft gland & seals 2 sets of each type
4) Couplings 2 sets of each type
5) NRV 1 no of each type
6) Gate valve 2 nos. of each type
7) Impellers 2 no. of each type
8) Submersible pump motor set 1 no of each type
6. COOLING WATER SYSTEM

1) Cooling water pump and motor 2 sets
2) Bearings 2 no.s of each type
3) Shaft gland & seal 2 sets
4) Impeller 2 no.s
5) Strainer unit 1 set
6) Automatic flushing unit 1 no
7) Cooling water pump and motor 2 no.s of each type
91
Item 3. Instruments controls and safety devices
Twelve sets of instruments, control, operation and safety devices for turbines each set comprising.Indicating and recording instruments etc. as per Table
below and located as indicated therein,
LIST OF INSTRUMENTS FOR INDICATION,CONTROL,PROTECTION FOR EACH UNIT (EACH TURBINE)
Purpose
(** All transmitters to be dual O/P with local

indication and programmable switches where
ever Needed to feed data to PL recorder &
S.No SCADA) Type of instrument quantity indication metering control protection alarm
local remote
Press. Trans-
1 Draft tube pressure mitter**& gauge 1+1 1 1
Press. Trans-
2 spiral pressure mitter**& gauge 1+1 1 1
3 Turbine top cover level control switch unit level switch 4 2 1 1
4 shaft seal cooling water pressure pressure switch 1 1 1
5 shaft seal cooling water flow flow switch 1 1 1 1
6 shaft seal temperature DTT and RTD 1+1 1 1 1
7 maintanance seal pressure switch pressre switch 1 1 1
8 Maintanance seal pressure gauge pr gauge 1 1
9 Turbine bearing oil level switch unit& ** level switch 4 1 1 1 2
92
10 Turbine bearing cooling water flow& ** flow switch 1 1 1 1
11 Turbine bearing pad temp DTT 4 1 1 1
12 Turbine bearing pad temp RTD All Pads 3
13 Turbine bearing Oil Temp DTT 2 1 1 1
14 Turbine bearing Oil Temp RTD 3 3
15 Governer oil sump level switch&** level switch 4 1 1 1 2
16 Governer oil contamination detector Moisture detector 1 1
17 OPU Accumulator level switches& ** level switch 4 1 1 1 2
18 Governor ACCumulatorPressre switches pressre switch 5 3 1 1
19 Gov oil pressre gauge pr gauge 1 1
20 Gov oil pressre transmitter** & Gauge Press Transmitter 1 1 1
21 Unit discharge** DPT 1 1 1
22 GV position Pos Transmitter 1 1 1 1 1
23 RB position Pos Transmitter 1 1 1 1 1
24 Speed proximity sensor 1 1 1 1 1
25 Gen & Turbine Cooling water pr Pr gauges 4 4
26 Cooling water Pr Pr transmitters 2 2 2 2
26 Dewatering level control Level switches 4 1 4 2 2
93
LIST OF INSTRUMENTS FOR INDICATION,CONTROL,PROTECTION FOR COMMON
Type of
S.No Purpose instrument quantity indication metering control protection alarm
local remote
1 Dewatering&Drainage sump level Level switch 8 2 2 4 2
2 Dewatering&Drainage sump level ** level Transmitter 2 2 2
3 HP AIR system Pr switch pressure switch 12 10 2
4 HP AIR system Pr transmitter ** Press Transmitter 2 2 2
5 HP Air pr gauge pr gauge 4 4
6 LP AIR system Pr gauge pr gauge 4 4
7 LP AIR system Pr switch pressure switch 4 2 2
Pressure
8 LP Air pr Transmitter ** Transmitter 2 2 2
9 Head water level transmitter ** Radar type 2 2 2 2 2
10 Tail water level transmitter ** Radar type 2 2 2 2 2
94
Item 4: List of Special Tools & Equipment for Turbine Components.
One complete set of following special tools and equipment shall be supplied for erection and
maintenance of Turbine components separately.
Sl.No. Item Description Quantity

1) Supporting base for turbine runner and hub 1 set
2) Lifting devices for turbine runner and hub 1 set
3) Lifting and sliding devices for main shaft 1 set
4) Lifting device for runner blade 1 set
5) Supporting device for runner blade 1 set
6) Chain block (Special) 1 set
7) Shaft coupling and locking devices 1 set complete
8) Guide vane lifting device 2 set
9) Any special tools required such as Torque 2 Sets
spanners,spanners,Jacks and hydraulic power
packs
10) guide vane lifting / setting devices 2 Sets
11) Nylon slings suitable for lifting 2 Sets
Testing items at site (turbine)
No. Item Test checking
1 Piping pressure test Piping for all oil, air and water system shall be tested in pressure test,
the test pressure value is 1.5 times of working pressure value.
2 Test inspection Turning inspection for main shaft alignment inspection after the main
shaft is connected.
3 Leakage inspection for the seal of each flange of connection, and
leakage inspection of the seal for main shaft and G.V. shaft journal.
Starting and test
running test for the Operation test for G.V. opening and closing will be done when the
generating unit generating unit is erected, to prove G.V. and its mechanism are normal
acting, and the clearance dimensions for G.V. are conformed with the
technical requirement.
To test this acting test at normal oil pressure and lowest operating oil
pressure, at the same time to sample the data for the relation curve
between servomotor stroke and rotating angle of blades.
Measurement for the relation curve between servomotor stroke and

rotating angle of blades
No-load test
4 With load and load rejecting test
Continuous test running test
95
SHOP ASSEMBLY AND TESTING ITEMS
No Other checkingItems&
Item Material test Fabrication procedure & final checking Testing Checking
. remarks
Non- Dimensi
Rigidi Non- Appearan Operation
Mechanical Chemical destructiv on
ty destructive ce Checking
characteristics composition e checkin
test inspection Checking
inspection g
* Blade profile &

Pressure and operation
1. Runner     * * * fineness check, static
test*
balance
* Drilling hole sampling for test. Parallelism between

2 Main shaft     * * Including tensile strength, yield flanges, verticality and
strength, elongation test etc. concentricity.
3 Coupling bolt   
4 Guide bearing  Local assembly
Main shaft
5 Local assembly
seal
Gate mechanism
Wicket gate
preassembly operation
6 and operating   * * * test counterweight &
mechanism gate operation test *
Servomotor stroke
7 Servomotor  * Pressure test*
check*
8 Top cover     Preassembly
10 Draft tube      
Runner
11     
envelope
Note: * marked CHP/CWP, rest-review reports. After main shaft forging and heat treatment, submit report of yield strength, tensile strength and elongation
to APGENCO.
96
SECTION – IV
4.0 GENERATOR
4.1: SCOPE:
The supply includes manufacturing, testing before shipment, delivery at site, testing at site and
commissioning of vertical alternating current generator for direct coupling to the turbine
specified in Section (3) along with Static Excitation Equipment and slip rings LAVT cubicle and
Neutral grounding Transformer cubicle.
4.2: DRIVE:
The generator shall be driven by KAPLAN vertical type turbine coupled to it. The necessary
coupling bolts shall be supplied by the generator manufacturer.
4.3: TYPE AND RATING:

The generator shall be of 3 phase, salient pole revolving field type and shall be capable of
meeting the following requirements. The generator shall preferably be of semi Umbrella type.
1) Normal voltage 11KV
2) Short circuit ratio Greater than 1.1
3) Frequency 50 c/s
4) Range of frequency variation 48.5 Hz to 51.5 Hz
5) Range of voltage variation 90% to 110%
6) Output at rated head at 11KV, P.F.0.9lagging and 80 MW
a continuous overload upto 10%.
7) Connections Star
8) Terminals. All the six terminals brought out.
9) Neutral Earthed through
GroundingTransformer.
10) Inertia constant Not less than3
11) Line charging capacity should be greater than 65000 KVAR
12) Combined Voltage & Frequency variation limited to ± 10%
4.4 GENERAL DESIGN:
a) In the design of generator each part shall be so proportional that the maximum unit
stresses therein resulting under any continuous operating conditions shall not
exceed 1/3 of the yield point or 1/5 of the ultimate strength of the material
whichever is less. In case of specified runaway speeds, unit stresses not exceeding
2/3 of the yield point will be permitted.
b) Design of the generator structure and housing in which resonance may become
objectionable shall be so proportioned to avoid the possibility of synchronism with
the frequency or any multiple of the frequency.
97
c) The generator shall be mechanically capable of withstanding sudden short circuit or
sudden open circuit at its terminals.
d) The generator shall confirm to IEC 60034. Specification of the latest issue or
equivalent American or continental standards except where otherwise specified and
have class ‘F’ insulation for the stator and rotor windings.
e) The generator terminals shall be brought out of stator frame for insertion of current
transformers for protection. The generator neutral shall be grounded suitably.
f)
4.5 OVER SPEED:
The generator shall be designed to run with safety upto maximum possible runaway speed
of the turbine under maximum head. It shall be capable of running for a period of 15
minutes at the maximum runaway speed.
4.6 NOISE LEVEL:

The noise level shall not exceed 90 db (A) when measured at a distance of 1m fromOut side
the Generator barrel will be considered. & 1.5 mt from floor of operating.
4.7 INSULATION:
Insulation shall be provided as follows:
i) Stator winding Material corresponding to class F,
ii) Rotor winding Material corresponding to class F,
4.8 TEMPERATURE RISE:

The rated output at the generator terminals shall be guaranteed for continuous operation
(S1) without exceeding the excess temperature limits admissible according to IEC 60034-1,
insulation category F , for stator and rotor windings (at rated voltage, rated power factor,
rated frequency, cooling air inlet temperature maximum 45 °C and cooling (river) water
temperature 35°C):
When operating continuously at the rated output of 80 MW at 0.9 P.F., 50 c/s, the
temperature rise shall not exceed the following limits.
a) Stator winding measurement by embedded temperature detectors 85o C.
b) Rotor field winding measurement by resistance method 95o C.
c) Iron core and other parts in contact with, or adjacent to 80o C.
windingmeasurement by the thermometer.
d) The ambient temperature of the cooling air 45o C.
e) The ambient temperature of cooling water 30o C.
f) Absolute Thrust bearing Temp. at rated load 75 deg C
g) Absolute Guide bearing Temp 70 deg C
h) max permissible Bearing Temp 85 deg C
Measurement of temperature shall be made as specified in IEC 34 of the latest issue. The
ambient temperature shall be taken on 45o C. and the guaranteed figures given accordingly.
98
4.9 EFFICIENCY AND OUTPUT GUARANTEES:
efficiencies for various heads and for partial and full loads shall be given and they shall be
subject to tolerance as per IEC 34 or IS 4722. For determining the output and efficiency of
the turbine the following proposals are suggested.
The generators shall be tested at Site in the presence of the representative of the purchaser,
efficiencies obtained at the time at various outputs of generator will be determined and this
will be taken as standard. The graph of output versus input of the generator will be plotted.
The tenderer should furnish graphs of; APPLICABLE PERFORMANCE DATA
SHEETS ARE TO BE FURNISHED
i) Load versus guaranteed efficiency
ii) Load versus discharge
iii) Characteristic curves comprising load head and discharge in the working range of
the turbine.
4.10 EFFICIENCY GUARANTEES:
The efficiencies of the generator at full load, 80 (eighty) percent full load and 60 (sixty)
percent full load at the rated voltage and rated power factor as well as the weighted average
efficiencyshall be mentioned in Guaranteed Technical particulars.
The offered guaranteed efficiency of the Generator at rated frequency and rated Power
factor shall not be less than 98%. However the bidders shall offer possible higher efficiencies
at full load, 80 (eighty) percent full load and 60 (sixty) percent full load at the rated voltage
and rated power factor
The Weighted Average Efficiencies shall be subject to penalty and rejection as per
applicable clause4.13 & 4.14.
4.11 DETERMINATION OF EFFICIENCIES:
4.11.1 The efficiencies shall be determined by summation of losses method in accordance

with the latest issue of IEC: 34-2 or IS: 4889. The static excitation equipment losses shall also
be included in the generator losses. Tolerance as per IEC will be considered.
4.11.2 The weighted average efficiency shall be determined from the efficiency figures at
the three specified loads as follows:
n = 0.60n + 0.25n + 0.15n
Gav G100 G80 G60
Where n = Weighted average efficiency of prototype
Gav Generator at rated voltage, power factor and frequency.
n, n & n = Efficiency of Generator at 100%,
G100, G80, G60 80%, 60% of rated outputrespectively at rated

voltage, power factor and frequency.
99
4.12 OUTPUT AND TEMPERATURE RISES:
The generator shall be guaranteed to be capable of giving its rated output and maximum
output without exceeding the temperature rises as defined in clause 4.8
4.13 PENALTY FOR SHORT-FALL IN EFFICIENCY AND OUTPUT:
For any shortfall in the tested values of rated output and 1Average Efficiencies (as
determined by the clause 4.11.2 above) from the guaranteed values,, a penalty shall be
applicable at the rate of Rs. 1,16,50,000 (Rupees One Crore Sixteen Lakhs and Fifty
Thousand only) for Generator for each 0.01% (one by hundredth percent) by which the test
figure is less than the specified guaranteed figures.
Penalties on deviation from the guaranteed figures will be as follows:
a) Gross Out Put - Rs. 24.3 Cr per MW.
4.13.1 The penalties on account of shortfall in output and the efficiency shall be computed
separately and the total amount of the penalty shall be algebraic sum of these two.
No tolerance shall be permitted over the test figures of output. Tolerance in computation of
losses for determining efficiency shall be allowed in accordance with IEC. The above
mentioned penalty is for 12 Generators.
4.14 REJECTION LIMIT:
4.14.1 The purchaser has a right to reject the generator equipment if the test values of
either of the maximum output or the guaranteed WAE efficiency is less than the
corresponding guaranteed value by 2 (two) percent or more.
4.14.2 The generator is also liable for rejection if either of the stator or rotor winding
temperature exceeds the specified limits while operating corresponding to maximum
output. This guarantee shall be without bonus in case of temperature raise being less than
those specified.
The guaranteed WAE efficiencies to be specified by the tenderer shall be calculated in

accordance with IEC 34 of the latest issue and shall be taken at 75o C.
The generators shall be tested for their efficiencies at the SITE in the presence of
representatives of the purchaser. The WAE efficiencies guaranteed by the bidder shall be
subject to the same penalties stipulated in of turbines. For purpose of penalty no tolerance
as per IEC will be allowed.
The tenderer should furnish graphs indicating the load versus efficiency at different power
factors specified.
4.15 WAVE FORM:
The wave form of electromotive force of alternators on open circuit shall be sine wave and
shall not exceed the limits specified in IS 4722 of the latest issue. The frequencies and
maximum amplitudes of the various harmonics as compared with the fundamental shall be
stated in the tender.
100
4.16 PARALLEL OPERATION, STABILITY AND PERFORMANCE:
The generator shall operate satisfactorily and stablyin parallel with the grid with load as
generator and with lead / Lag reactive power contribution.
The alternator should remain stable on sudden application of maximum load or sudden loss
of maximum load and during momentary short circuits or sustained ground faults.
The tenderer shall submit curves showing the output of the alternator from maximum
lagging to leading output, in relation to the field current.
4.17 FLY WHEEL EFFECT:
The value of fly-wheel effect of each alternator together with that of turbine shall be
sufficient to ensure stability and speed regulation specified.
The value of GD 2 must be suitable for the speed of the machine and shall be incorporated in
the alternator and turbine and not added in the shape of separate weight rings or other
means. The tenderers are requested to check the values with reference to the transmission
system, turbine governor opening time etc., and vary it, if necessary, if this will lead to a
more economical unit.
4.18 INHERENT REGULATION:
The inherent regulation of alternators shall be stated in the tender and this shall mean the
percentage rise of voltage when full loads are thrown off without changing the speed or the
exciting current of the machines.
4.19 SHORT CIRCUITS:
Each alternator when running at normal speed with excitation for the maximum output at
0.9 P.F. and on automatic voltage regulator control must be capable of withstanding short
circuits at its terminals without any displacements of its windings or mechanical damaged to
any of its parts. The Sustained single and three phase short circuit currents shall be stated in
the tender. The short circuit ratio of the alternator shall not be less than 1.1. Full particulars
of the alternator including weight, regulation, line charging current capacity etc., shall be
given in the tender.
4.20 EARTHING OF NEUTRALS:
Each generator winding Star point shall be earthed through a single phase grounding
transformer and secondary winding of the transformer shall have a parallel resistance of
suitable capacity.
4.21 PROTECTION:
The winding temperature alarm may be operated off the thermo couples in the machine
slots through suitable relays. For bearing alarms suitable DTT and thermostats should be
provided in both thrust and guide bearings. Trip contacts may also be provided to trip the
turbine governor and circuit breaker which may be set for a particular temperature limit.
Flow relays shall be supplied for cooling water flow alarm.
Supply to the alarm and annunciation circuits will be at 220 V. DC.,
101
4.22 TEMPERATURE DETECTORS
The machine shall be provided with sufficient no. of RTDs and thermocouple type
temperature detectors embedded in places where the highest temperatures are likely to
occur and their locations must be clearly stated in the tender. The tentative list have been
indicated in the clause 4.58 Indicating instruments and safety devices
The temperature detector equipment shall be supplied with a test certificate from an
approved testing laboratory.
4.23 DAMPER WINDING:
The field poles shall be provided with adequate damper winding to ensure stability under
fault conditions and to meet designed loads.
4.24FANS:
Axial flow centrifugal fans are to be mounted at each end of the rotor for ventilation/cooling
purposes. However The fan types shall be selected based upon the ventilation
requirement of the machine.
4.25VENTILATION:
The system of ventilation shall be of the self contained - closed circuit type with water
cooling arrangement.
A sufficient number of surface air coolers shall be provided, located symmetrically around
the stator frame to cool the air from the generator. A valve shall be provided in each
connection between cooler and water headers of inlet & outlet.
The tubes of the surface air cooler shall be of Cu-Ni material. The assembly of tubes shall be
such as to permit the removal and replacement of any individual tube without disturbing the
other tubes. Each cooler shall have flanged connections at the bottom, which shall
completely drain the cooler and shall have air vents at the top; each air vent shall be
connected through a valve to a common header and vented to the water supply line. The
entire water system shall be designed to prevent accumulation of sediment. Lifting lugs
shall be provided to remove any cooler through the top of the generator housing. Water
boxes shall be removable for cleaning tubes. The pipe work shall terminate in flanges for
connection to external pipe and these flanges will be as per standards for pipe flanges IS
4711 of 1968.
The flow relays with indication and Transmitters with local indication shall be provided in the
main header of all cooling water circuits of Generator.
A drainage system with valves at each cooler shall also be provided for draining the coolers
in case of maintenance.
Pressure water from the penstock pipelines is intended to be tapped for supplyingthe
cooling water required for the generator water coolers, bearing coolers, Transformer coolers
and Fire protection of generator.
102
All valves, water flow indicators, Transmitters and alarm relay contacts shall be provided.
The pipe work shall terminate in two flanges ( supply and outlet) for connection to external
pipe work to be separately arranged for by the purchaser.
4.26 FIRE PROTECTION:
Water spray system type fire extinguisher capable of extinguishing fire in any alternator shall
be provided. For Generator power units Fire extinguishing activation, there shall be a local
panel with the emergency release push button and the same can be activated from the main
fire alarm control panel located at control room. Fire and smoke detectors shall be provided
inside the Generator barrel for detecting of any fire and initiate an alarm. Necessary control
panel shall be provided for the same.
This equipment shall be supplied in complete with main and Jockey pumps( AC & DC supply)
and controls with water tapped from the unit Penstock including the necessary high
pressure piping nozzles/sprays and all other accessories inside the generator barrels and
necessary control valve outside the generator.
4.27CONSTRUCTIONS:
The tenderer shall give full particulars of the extent to which the generators will be
assembled for the purpose of shipment and the full details of the work to be done at site in
assembling them and the means to be adopted for carrying out these works
4.28 STATOR FRAME:
The frame must be so proportioned for the laminations and windings will be supported with
practically no deviation from a perfect circle. Provision must be made for ventilation in
armature in accordance with the system specified in clause 4.25. The Stator frame will be
divided into no. of sections for facilitating handling and transport. The stator shall be
designed to provide ready accessibility to the windings. Hand rails shall be provided
wherever necessary.
4.29 STATOR CORE:
The laminations shall be of the best grade CRNGO steel and not subject to significant ageing
through any cause and shall be thoroughly insulated from each other with an insulating
material or coating capable of withstanding the temperature of 120 0 C without
deterioration. They shall be secured to the frame by dove-tails and suitably clamped.
Ventilating ducts must be arranged at such frequent intervals that the temperature of the
hottest part of the interior shall not be greater than that at the surface.
4.30 STATOR WINDINGS:
The tenderer must give a full description of winding offered, both as to conductor and
insulation. Large scale drawings shall be submitted showing the arrangement of conductors
and the thickness and nature of all materials used both for insulation and mechanical
protection in the slots of the stator.
Insulation shall be provided as follows:

1 Stator winding Thermosetting Epoxy resin-mica paper tape systemcorresponding
to class ‘F’ insulation
103
2 Rotor winding Thermo-setting type epoxy impregnated asbestospaper,
corresponding to class ‘F’. OR Thermosetting type epoxy impregnated
nomex (aramid) Paper, corresponding to class ‘F’ can also be
provided
With cooling air entering the generator at 45o C (cooling water temperature 35o C) the
generator shall be capable of delivering rated output continuously at any voltage and
frequency in operation range, rated power factor without exceeding the excess temperature
limits admissible according to IEC 60034-1 or latest additions , insulation category F , for
stator and rotor windings
Maximum temperature rise when the unit is delivering its maximum output and rated P.F. at
any voltage and frequency in the range without exceeding the following temperature rise
over cold air temperature of 45 o C
a) Stator winding - 95 o C
b) Field winding - 105 o C
The temperature of the stator winding shall be determined by means of embedded
resistance – type temperature detectors located in the stator winding between coils at the
center of the core. The temperature of the field shall be determined by the resistance
method.
The winding must be capable of being easily substituted by removing a few adjacent coils.
The projecting parts of the coils must be suitably braced and supported by rings of non-
magnetic materials to withstand any movement caused by short circuit at the terminals of
the machine in grounded or ungrounded operation.
All the six stator terminals shall be brought out into a vermin proof terminal box which shall
accommodate the cables and connecting links for the alternator windings. Further this Will
be discussed during detailed Engineering. Box to be provided to suit the IPB connection.
4.31 ROTOR:
The rotor assembly shall be of such design that the assembling and dismantling can easily be
effected at site. The poles shall be inter-changeable and capable of repeated removal and
replacement without loss of fit. Poles shall be removable without removing the rotor from
stator. The rotor assembly shall be removable from the shaft without disturbing the
adjustment or setting of theLower Guide and thrust bearings.
Low resistance amortisseur windings shall be fitted with the rotor to improve the stability
and speed characteristic of the machine.
4.32 FIELD COILS:
A description of the method of winding, materials used for conductor and insulation, means
adopted for cooling system, arrangement of bracing against vibration and centrifugal force
shall be submitted by the tenderer. The leads of field coils shall be properly annealed. The
remarks about insulation of stator windings shall generally apply to rotor winding also.
104
Top and Bottom Damper bars of the poles shall be shorted. The design shall be adopted such
that no heating of pole ends shall be there when the generator is running both in leading
and lagging power factor range during generator operation.
In order to facilitate inter-change of connections to the slip rings periodically to avoid undue
wear of the slip rings due to electro-chemical action, long studs shall be provided for brush
holders assembly which can be moved up and down to achieve change of polarity of slip
ringsor as an alternative, Excitation cubicle can have provision for polarity Reversal.
4.33 SHAFT:
The shaft shall be of highest quality steel and sufficiently rigid so that it will not vibrate or
whip. It shall have an ample margin of strength and be provided with a forged coupling to
the water wheel in case it is not a feasible to provide the shaft in one piece – vide relevant
clause under section covering ‘turbines’. The shaft shall have central hole drilled axially
through it and finished smooth to permit to provide oil tubes for supply of oil pressure to
runner. The coupling bolts shall be provided by the generator contractor. The supplier of the
alternators must co-operate with the manufacturer of turbine and agree as to what parts are
to be supplied by each party where any doubt exists. The design of the coupling as already
stated shall be worked out by the Generator manufacturer in consultation with the supplier
of the Turbine.
4.34 BEARINGS:
Each Generator shall be equipped with a suitable thrust and guide bearings located below
the rotor and one Guide bearing shall be located above the rotor mounted on to the stator
frame. The thrust bearings shall have sufficient capacity to support the entire weight of all
the rotating parts together with unbalanced hydraulic thrust on the turbine runner. The
expected temperature of the bearings shall be so designed that the temperature shall not be
higher than 75 deg C for thrust bearing and 70 deg C for generator guide bearings at rated
operating conditions.
Thrust bearing shall be of pivoted / spring mattress type segmental pad type and shall
ensure trouble free operation in all possible working regimes of the machine. The bearing
shall be self lubricated and shall be immersed in oil bath in which water cooled oil coolers
shall be placed to remove the bearing losses. The top guide bearing shall be insulated to
prevent bearing current.
The thrust bearing shall consist of a thrust collar integral part of the shaft and shall rotate
over the babbited surface of the thrust pads. Radial and circumferential movement of the
pads shall be prevented by means of the locking plates.
The guide bearings shall be designed and constructed so that it can be removed without
disturbing the thrust bearing or the rotor or the stator. Provision shall be made in the design
of the bearings to prevent oil vapour from entering the generator. Opening with removable
covers shall be provided. Special tackles shall be provided to enable the thrust pads and
guide pads to be withdrawn. The bearings shall be adequately insulated where considered
necessary to prevent any harmful circulating currents from passing through the bearing
surfaces. The bearings shall be preferably of self lubricated type with plug in type oil to
water coolers inserted in the bearing compartment. The cooling water for the oil coolers will
be available at temperature not exceeding 30 deg C. All the bearings shall be provided with
105
RTDs/DTTs/Thermostats and Dual o/p Transmitters with programmable switches as
necessary.
Resistance thermometers shall be provided for temperature indication in all bearing Pads
(50% of which feeding SCADA and balance to Electronic Paper less indicator cum recorder)
and 2 Nos for Oil. Thermo signaling devices /DTTS (4 Nos) with two contacts shall also be
provided in the pads and 2 Nos for Oil for alarm and tripping in case of over heating of the
pads or Oil.
The bearing shall be designed to withstand operation of runaway speed for a period of 15
minutes.
STRAY CURRENTS:
Each generator shall be adequately insulated against stray currents set up by the field of the
generator which may cause injury to the generator or turbine bearings. Insulation shall be
arranged to break the possible path of shaft currents in not less than two places in series so
that positive tests of ground currents can be made readily.
4.35 H.S.LUBRICATION:
A high pressure oil system should be provided for the thrust bearing in order to create a
positive oil film over the pads at low speeds during starting and stopping of the generator.
The components consist of a positive displacement pump with its motor, filters, valves etc.,
mounted on a steel base. A pressure gauge, pressure switch with electrical contacts for
starting interlock of the generator shall also be provided.
The system shall be arranged to come into operation automatically during starting/stopping
and also when the generator starts creeping.
The duplicate oil pump sets one may be suitable for A.C. 3 phase, 415V 50 c/s, drive for
normal service and the other suitable for D.C. 220V, drive from the station battery for
emergency lubrication if the A.C. power fails. The switchgear required for control and
operation of these motors shall be included in the tender. The equipment shall be provided
with an automatic arrangement by which in case of failure of A.C. supply the set will be
switched on to D.C.
Full particulars of the lubricating system shall be given in the tender.

4.36 OILS
The tenderer shall indicate this requirement and give his recommendations with detailed
specifications regarding type of oil to be used for lubrication of generator bearings. The oil if
used for generator bearing lubrication etc., shall be identical with that used for the pressure
oil system of governor. The generators and turbine manufacturers shall cooperate to ensure
that their recommendations regarding oil are identical. The first filling of oil with 10 percent
extra shall be supplied alongwith the generator. The oil must be commonly available in India.
4.37 OIL & AIR PIPING:
Oil and air piping inside the generator barrel shall be carried with Union joints for ease of
maintenance and dismantling if necessary.Pipes shall be routed with suitable clamps at
regular intervals with necessary markings for identification.
106
4.38 BRAKES AND JACKS:
Each generator shall be provided with a set of compressed air operated mechanical
brake,One Vacuum cleaner along with required babbles etc. to remove the braking dust
from the stator winding and oil- operated jacks including pipes and valves inside the
generator.
For stopping the generating units quickly, each generator shall be provided with compressed
air operated brakes which will be operated automatically and manually. The generator brake
would consist of a suitable number of brake shoes which will operate against a polished
segmental steel brake track bolted to rotor. Compressed air at required pressure will be
made available from the Low pressure compressed air system to be supplied by turbine. Two
compressors of suitable capacity with accumulator tank and with necessary valves and
pressure switches and control panels shall be supplied.
When Brakes are operated, the Unit shall be capable of bringing the entire generating unit
from 30 % of rated speed to rest within 5 minutes without injurious heating.
When acting as a jack, the set shall be capable of lifting the combined weights of all rotating
parts of the generator and turbine sufficiently to facilitate easy inspection ad removal of
bearing parts. Mechanical blocks attached to the jacks shall be provided to hold the rotor in
the raised position.
An interlock shall be arranged so that the unit cannot be started with brakes or jacks in
position and for prevention of application of brakes when the speed is above the safe limit
for application of brakes. The safe limit for application of brakes shall be stated by the
tenderer.
Complete set of arrangements including valves, gauges, piping etc shall be provided for each
individual Units
4.39HYDRAULIC POWER PACK :
Motorized hydraulic power pack along with necessary starters, valves, gauges safety
valves/Recirculation valves etc., shall be provided for jacking the rotor of each unit during
maintenance. Flexible hoses with swivel nuts for connection between power pack and brake
jack control panel shall also be provided.
4.40 VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM
Each Turbine –Generator shall be provided with online Vibration monitoring system with
proximity type displacement sensor probes provided in radial direction and at an angle of
90 degrees between them( X-axis and Y- axis of the shaft) at 3 locations.Relative and
absolute shaft vibration measurements are to be carried out on the machine using non
contacting transducers provided.
a) close to turbine bearing -2 no.s( X,Y axis)

b) Above thrust/Guide bearing – 2 no.s( X,Y axis)
c) Above Top Guide Bearing – 2 no.s( X,Y axis)
107
d) Near Shaft coupling in Z axis – 1 no
e) Air gap measuring – 1 no
Monitoring systems include sensors, transducers, monitoring modules, and software.

The software shall facilitate to diagnosis the machine condition. The systems should be fully
integrated with control system to facilitate shutdown and alarming. Local indication shall be
envisaged. Necessary 4- 20ma outputs shall be envisaged for trending the values in SCADA
for diagnosis
4.41 WINDING HEATERS:
The tenderer shall provide electric heaters designed and located to reduce condensation on
the windings when the machine is idle. The voltage rating for these heaters shall be 415V, 3
phase/ 230V, 1 phase connection between individual heaters and heater circuit terminal box
shall be suitably located within the generator housing and wiring shall be adequately
insulated against heat. Operation of the heaters shall be possible from UCB, Local Panel and
SCADA.
4.42 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS:
Item 1 (a) Generators
Twelve Nos. Vertical shaft generators of capacity 11 kV, 80 M.W. 50 Hz, 3 Ph., 0.9 pf.
lagging, directly coupled to vertical Kaplan turbines, Each generator shall consists of the
following:
1) Stator consisting of stator core, frame (part of shell of steel plates) stator One
windings, space heaters with control switch, cooling ducts and other
necessary accessories.
2) set of main connections to CT’s and from there for Isolated Phase Bus. One.
3(THREE) neutral leads for CT and grounding Transformer after star
formation connection
3) One Rotor, consisting of poles, field winding with Damper bar winding, rotor rim, One
combined with spider brake ring and other necessary accessories including slip rings
and brushes.
4) Shaft current insulation. One
5) Auxiliary shaft hollow bored to accommodate concentric pipes for pressure oil and One
lube oil and complete with one set of slip rings with carbon brushes, brush holders,
leads etc.
6) bearing bracket bolted to the upper side of the stator and one bearing bracket fitted to One
the bottom bracket sole plate. The bearing brackets shall be complete with housing
and the combined thrust and guide bearing with oil to water coolers with all the
necessary piping brake shoes etc.
7) set of air coolers complete with connecting piping valves and all other accessories One
8) set of H.S.lubricating oil pumps with necessary piping and other accessories and One
controls for thrust bearings
9) set of Jacking system complete with oil pumps and motors connecting piping valves One
and all other accessories
10) set of brakes mounted on a bracket with dust collectors and all necessary internal One
pipe work and tank mounted compressor of suitable capacity. The system shall be
108
complete with electrically and manually operated valves. One Vacuum cleaner along
with required babbles etc. to remove the braking dust from the stator winding.
11) set of limit switches(with THREE c/o contacts) for the braking system with sufficient One
contacts for brake ON and OFF indication and starting confirmative circuit
12) set of Ladder and platform in the generator and turbine pit. One
13) set of terminal box and internal wiring and conduits for auxiliary circuit inside the One
generator shell
14) Device for creep detection and for over speed detection with contacts for shut down/ One
auto control
15) set of online vibration monitoring system with a set of Vibration detectors and air gap One
monitoring
16) set of static excitation equipment, complete in all respects along with control and One
protective devices including Rotor Earth fault protection Relay. One No. cast resin
Dry type Excitation Transformer along with necessary protection and control devices
connected to the 11KV Generator Bus
17) set of Digital voltage regulator equipment complete with contactors, over voltage One
protection, grounding protection, necessary accessories, potential and current
transformers and complete set of controls and indicators for manual and automatic
operation. The equipment shall be complete with suitable cubicles for housing
external wiring, cables, etc.
18) set of anti-condensation heaters One
19) The gauge panelequipment shall be complete with suitable cubicles for housing One
external wiring, cables etc. All the indicating devices/ indicators shall be mounted to
guage panel of Turbine i.e. DTT’s, recorders etc.
20) set of fire and smoke detectors along with control panel and pipelines nozzles and One
other accessories including control valve suitable for water spray system for
extinguishing of any fire in the Generator
21) set of Current transformers required for Protection,Metering,AVR suitable for One
placement in the Line and Neutral outlet side of the Generator at suitable location
before the Busduct.
22) set of Neutral grounding Cubicle consisting of the following One
Neutral Isolating Switch. (single pole) One
Neutral Grounding Transformer suitably rated with One
secondary resistor.
Earth Bus. One
set of terminal connections, grounding, wiring, etc., to One
complete the cubicle
23) Set of spares One
24) Any other items
4.43PIPING:
All air and oil piping systems within the generator air housing valves and fittings shall be
designed and connections to them brought to position adjacent to housing at the side of the
Generator as required by the purchaser to be supplied by the contractor. Valves and other
operating devices shall be easily accessible from floors or walk – ways.
All Cooling water pipelines inside the Generator barrel shall be of GI piping
109
Pressure piping may be of steel of appropriate strength and other piping shall be a seamless
copper.
Sight flow device shall be furnished in the bearing oil supply and return and also in the
bearing cooling water return.
The arrangement of piping and location of valves etc., shall lead to minimum disturbance
when generator is dismantled or parts removed for inspection and repairs.
All pipe systems associated with the generator such as oil flow, air flow and cooling water
shall be supplied in semi fabricated condition with an extra length of 10% to cover any
possible shortages.
(All embedded pipes shall be seamless pipes of thickness of next higher rating than
specified as per the IS standards for that requirement and application or minimum of 10
mm thick. All Valves used for water system used in the power house area must be of cast
steel valves with raising stem only)
4.44 GAUGES:
Each generator shall be provided with the following instruments and gauges.
1) Oil level gauge and Transmitter with indication & programmable switches for guide
and thrust bearings and oil reservoir should be mounted in an accessible position.
2) Normal level, High and low level alarm and trip contacts for guide and thrust bearing
oil reservoir.
3) Remote mercury or liquid pressure type temperature indicators with D.C. alarm and
trip contacts both for guide and thrust bearing shoes.
4) Cooling water flow indicators and Transmitter with indication & programmable
switches for generator air coolers, bearing with alarm contacts.
4.45 GENERATOR FOUNDATIONS:
The tenderer is requested to furnish his recommendation on the most economical method
of supporting the generator.
4.46 DEPARTURES FROM SPECIFICATIONS:
Departures from this specification may be made if improved efficiency and economy are
likely to result, but the attention of the purchaser must be specifically drawn in the tender to
all such departures – vide section 1. All departures from the specification shall be listed in
schedule ‘E’ with full particulars and reasons for the departure. Unless this is done, the plant
offered shall be considered to comply in every respect with the terms and conditions of this
specification.
110
4.47 TESTS:
Tests shall be carried out on any of the generators before shipment and at site as specified in
detail in clause Authenticated test certificates that the machines underwent all the tests
specified at the manufacturers works satisfactorily supported by all the test results shall be
furnished along with shipment documents.
The first generator shall be completely assembled at works and type tests as specified below
shall be conducted on the assembled unit and auxiliaries as per the latest edition of IS:4722.
Site Testing of Generator is Acceptable. However all the equipment necessary for
conducting tests at site shall be Provided/arranged by the contractor. And all the relevant
expenses shall be to the account of contractor only. However the details of tests being
carried out at site and test procedures shall be furnished along with the bid. The Test
procedure along with the standards being considered for the test shall be furnished and got
approved during finalisation of drawings or along with the Generator drawings approval
based on the merits of the test standards and manufacturing Procedure".
4.48 SHOP ASSEMBLY AND TESTS:
The firstALL Generators shall be completely assembled at the WORKS/SITE and tests as
specified below shall be conducted on the assembled units and auxiliaries. In case of
remaining generators, part assemblies to the maximum extent shall be done and match
marked to avoid any problem of matching during erection at site. The tenderer shall
indicate such of the tests that he would prefer to be conducted at site and these shall be
subject to the approval of the purchaser. These tests proposed to be conducted at site shall
be at the expense of the contractor and he shall provide all instruments/ equipment and
apparatus required for conducting the tests and transport the testing equipment to site and
back at his own cost.
The tests shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the SA, BSS, IEEE 115 “
Test procedure for synchronous machines”.
The contractor shall advise the time of tests sufficiently in advance so that the tests may be
witnessed.
The witnessing of the tests by the purchaser or his representatives shall not relieve the
contractor of his responsibility to fully meet the requirements of these specifications and the
guarantees.
Advance copies of the test certificates shall be despatched by air mail to the purchaser and
the equipment shall not be shipped until the purchaser’s approval in writing for the test
certificates and dispatch clearance is obtained.
Type test and WAE tests should be performed on any ONE UNIT only selected by the
purchaser. These two test need not be selected to be performed on the Same UNIT.
4.49 TESTS AT WORKS :
The first generator along with the excitation system and other auxiliaries shall be completely
assembled at the manufacturer’s works. The following tests shall be carried out on the
generator at the works
111
a) Temperature rise:
The test shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Standards, IEC or any other
equivalent standard in the direction of rotation.
b) Dielectric tests:
The high voltage test shall be applied between the winding and the frame with the core
connected to the frame and to the windings not under test. Connections between the
windings (e.g. neutral point) will be separated before making the tests. It shall be applied to
the complete machine with all its parts in place under conditions equivalent to normal
working conditions and shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s worksafter the
temperature rise test of the machine. The test voltage shall be alternating and shall be as
nearly a sine wave as possible as per IEC 60
c) Excess current:
The generator shall be tested for capabilities to withstand for 15 seconds a current 50% in
excess of its rated current, the voltage being maintained as near the rated value as possible,
consistent with the maximum capacity of the prime mover.
d) Efficiency:
The efficiency of the generator shall be determined by the summation of losses method.
All the losses shall be measured in accordance with the approved standards.
e) Line charging capacity:
The line charging capacity of the generator shall be determined in accordance with Indian
Standard or AIEE test codes for synchronous machines.
f) Bearing currents:
These shall be determined in accordance with AIEE code of synchronous machines.
g) Short –Circuit tests:

To verify the capabilities of the generator to withstand short circuit stresses without
injury, short circuit tests shall be carried out. Oscillographic records shall be made of the
currents and voltages in generator and excitation windings. This test shall be made by
abruptly short circuiting the generator when operating at no-load, rated frequency and
110 per cent rated voltage. However this will be finalised with Contractor during
Detailed Engineering.
h) Characteristics:
i) Open circuit
ii) Short circuit
II. Direct – axis, transient reactances.
i) Rated current.
112
ii) Rated voltage.
III. Synchronous reactances direct axis and quadrature axis saturated and unsaturated.
IV Sub transient reactance.
V. Negative phase sequence reactance.
VI. Rated current, zero power factor lagging, saturation curve.
VII. No-load and short circuit saturation curves.
VIII. Wave form: Oscillographs shall be taken of the armature winding when the
generator is operating at rated voltage and open circuit.
IX. Resistance of armature and field windings.
X. Moment of inertia of rotating pats ( WR2 )
XI. Short circuit ratio.
XII. Phase sequence tests.
i) Insulation resistance test.
ii) Dielectric test on cubicles and transformers. In addition to above, test shall
be carried out on motors, PMG, relays etc., and all other auxiliaries.
4.50 AT SITE:
The following tests shall be carried out on the generators at site.
a) Dielectric test:
In case of generator already tested at the manufacturer’s works, the dielectric test shall
be carried out with 85 per cent of the test voltage where as all other generators shall be
tested at the full test voltage.
b) Determination of the resistance of armature and all field windings.
c) Tests on excitation system.
i) Load rejection and load acceptance test to be made on each generator.
ii) Excitation system frequency response (phase and gain) curves to be made
oneach generator.
iii) Overall response of machine and excitation system to system voltage changes
iv) Test of maximum excitation limiter.
v) Test of volts per cycle regulator.
vi) Minimum excitation limiter test.
vii) Effectiveness of voltage regulator forcing action in demagnetizing the main

regulator field.
viii) Tests to determine the field current under following conditions.
a) Rated KVA, Rated power factor and 110 per cent voltage.
b) 115 per cent rated KVA, rated power factor and 110 per cent voltage.
ix) Dielectric test for excitation transformer.
x) Adjustment of DVR
xi) Relay test.
113
xii) Shaft voltage.
xiii) Phase sequence.
xiv) Automatic start and stop test.
xv) Synchronizing.
xvi) Quick and emergency stop test.
xvii) Oil lift operation test.
xviii) High voltage test on stator coils and stator sections and on assembled stator.
xix) High voltage test on field coils and poles
xx) Impedance and voltage test on field coils.
xxi) Accuracy test for RTDs and dial type thermometers.
xxii) Hydraulic tests on oil, and air coolers.
xxiii) PSS tuning and Step Response Test at No load & different Loads
4.51 TESTING EQUIPMENT
11 KV XLPE Cable of suitable size and length to connect from 11 KV Indoor panels to
Exitation transformer of any unit for carrying out Short circuit / O.C.C tests of Generator
when ever necessitated shall be supplied along with the first unit with necessary
accessories
A list of field testing equipment along with item-wise prices shall indicate in the tender.
4.52 SUPERVISION OF ERECTION
The contractor shall depute experts in erection, testing and commissioning of generators,
excitation equipment and other associated equipment for supervision of erection, testing
and commissioning of generators and associated equipment. In addition to erection teams
4.53 DRAWINGS
In addition to the drawings called for in Section –II the following drawings and data shall be
submitted with the tender.
The drawings containing all the information required for designing the civil works shall be
supplied within 60 calendar days of the placement of letter of intent.
i) The general arrangement and overall dimensions of the generators, exciters (where
applicable) and bearings, and showing positions of main and neutral terminals.
ii) Description of lubrication system alongwith drawings.

iii) Physical and schematic drawings of excitation system and AVR alongwith descriptive
literature.
iv) Graphs showing predicted characteristics of the generator.
v) Generator layout drawings showing overall dimensions and layout of all ducts,
cables, piping, relative positions of auxiliaries etc.,
114
4.54 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS FOR GENERATOR AND AUXILIARIES
Instrumentation, alarms, safety devices and controls necessary for automatic control,
monitoring and efficient operation of the generator with its associated equipment shall be
supplied by the manufacturer so as to constitute a complementary part of the complete and
coordinated set of such instruments, gauges, controls and safety devices required for
supervision and control of the unit during normal running and in emergencies.
Tentative requirements of the instrumentation etc. are given in the schedule of requirement
Item 3. The Contractor shall however, offer any additional instruments and safety devices
which the contractor considers, necessary for the unit& SCADA and the contractor shall
guarantee the sufficiency and adequacy of the provisions in this regard. The turbine is
normally started from the SCADA in the control room and brought to synchronous speed
and then synchronizing and loading of the machine are done. In general the instrumentation
and control scheme shall be such as to provide for manual LCU local electrical control and
automatic remote control (SCADA) and emergency shutdown.
All necessary indicating instruments, Transmitters, gauges and controls etc. for the turbine
and governor shall be mounted on the unit control board All temperature
indicating/recording instruments, associated relays, certain electrical instruments on the
unit control board shall be provided by the manufacturer.
For remote control of the units from the main control room, all necessary items of the
governors and also alarm/safety devices shall be provided on the main control panels and
Unit Control Board in LCU. The governor controls and indicating instruments shall be
provided.
The Generator supplier shall supply all equipment and devices for control, instrumentation
and safety relating to the generator. These together with the equipment supplied by the
turbine supplier shall constitute a complete and coordinated set of instruments, gauges,
control and safety devices for control of the units during normal running and in
emergencies.
Indicating instruments, gauges, controls, Electronic paper less recorders and safety devices
will be mounted on the unit control board to be supplied by the generator supplier. The
turbine supplier shall supply necessary loose items for mounting on the unit control board.
The generator manufacturer shall fully coordinate with the manufacturer of turbine to
ensure a neat and functional arrangement of the cubicles. A tentative list of Transmitters,
indicating instruments, controls and safety devices to be supplied by the generator supplier
is given in Tables A, B and C of schedule 1. The generator manufacturer may
increase/decrease items according to requirements to suit the type and design and also for
proper and satisfactory operation of the units after approved by the purchaser. The alarm
and annunciation panel with all necessary annunciation relays, aux relays, alarms bell,
terminal bolts. Etc., and adequate number of alarm annunciation facia windows for both
turbine and generator shall be provided. The generator manufacturer shall fully co-ordinate
with the turbine manufacturer in this regard.
4.55 SPARES
The unit rates shall be quoted for the spares as listed at Schedule of spares. The tenderer
shall also indicate in the tender any additional spares that he would recommend for 5 years
of operation and furnish itemwise unit prices for the same.
115
4.56 SPECIAL TOOLS,SPECIAL SLINGS, EQUIPMENT&CONSUMABLES ETC.
All special tools, slings, lifting devices jacks, turn buckles, foundation plates, bolting
materials, insulating material etc. required for assembly, erection, dismantling of the
Generator, and other equipment shall be supplied along with the main equipment. The
tenderer shall submit a list of the above special tools, slings etc., in the offer. These items
shall be the property of Purchaser. Further One set of Special tools as finalized during
detailed engineering shall be supplied in addition.
The following special tools& tackles are to be supplied.
1) Spanners sets with cabinet ‐ 2 SET

2) Hydraulic Torque wrenches ‐ 2 SET
3) Stator lifting tackle ‐ 2 SET
4) Pole removing/replacing tackle ‐ 2 SET
5) Pole key withdrawal tackle ‐ 2 SET
6) Shaft & Rotor lifting tackle ‐ 2 SET
7) Rim Building Tools ‐ 2 SET
8) Thrust Pad withdrawal tackles ‐ 2 SET
9) Stools for supporting stator and rotorduring assembly ‐ 2 SET
10) Oil cooler withdrawal tackle ‐ 2 SET
11) Air cooler blanking plates ‐ 2 Nos
12) Slings, D‐shackles, eye bolts etc. forerection and maintenance ‐ 2 SET
13) Stator coils brazing machine ‐ 2 SET
The list specified is minimum requirement.However any Tools & tackles as required shall
beconsidered to be supplied to carry out theerection works of two turbine ‐ generator
unitssimultaneously at free of cost.However Shaft coupling tools such as Hallow jacks and
Torque spanners/Bolt tensioners etc., as required shall also be supplied.
4.57 TRAINING OF ENGINEERS:
Training of the Engineers of the purchaser in contractor’s design/ drawing office,

manufacturing shops during designing, manufacturing shops of equipment during assembly,
testing and in operation and maintenance shall be provided in the offers, as mentioned
below for a period of two months free of charge.
4.58 WORKING MODEL:
One Number of working Model Homologous to Unit shall be Designed,Engineered and

supplied (as approved by APGENCO) for Exhibition and self explanation of complete system
Illustrating the water passages and Unit operation etc. The Model should have Elegant
appearance.
116
4.58 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS &: SAFETY DEVICES
LIST OF INSTRUMENTS FOR INDICATION,CONTROL&PROTECTION FOR EACH GENERATOR
Type of SCADA
s.no Purpose instrument quantity Indication Metering control Protn. alarm
local remote ** as per standard

design requirement
1 Stator winding temp RTD 16 8(recorder) 8 and will be finalised
during detailed
2 Stotor core temp ** RTD 12 6(Recorder) 6
Engineering.
3 Stator teeth temp ** RTD 8 4(recorder) 4
4 Stator inlet air temp DTT 4 4 4 4 4
5 Stator inlet air temp RTD 6 3 3
6 stator outlet air temp DTT 4 4 4 4 4
7 Stator outlet air temp RTD 6 3 3
8 Gen Bottom Guide Bearing Oil Temp DTT 2 2 2 2 2
9 Gen Bottom Guide Bearing Oil Temp RTD 2 1 1
10 Gen Bottom Guide Bearing PadTemp. DTT 4 4 4 4 4
11 Gen Bottom Guide Bearing PadTemp RTD All Pads 50 % 50%
12 Gen Bottom Thrust Bearing pad Temp DTT 4 4 4 4 4
13 Gen Bottom Thrust Bearing pad Temp RTD All Pads 50% 50%
117
Gen Bottom Guide Bearing Oil Transmt**
14 levelswitch level switch 4 1 1 1 2
Generator bottom brg cooling water Transmt**

15 flow flow switch 1 1 1 1
16 Gen. Top guide Brg oil temp DTT 2 2 2 2 2
17 Gen Top guide Brg oil temp RTD 2 1 1
18 Gen Top guide BrgPad temp DTT 4 4 4 4 4
19 Gen Top guide Brg pad temp RTD All Pads 50% 50%
Transmt**
20 Gen Bottom top Bearing Oil levelswitch level switch 4 1 1 1 1
Transmt**
21 Generator top brg cooling water flow flow switch 1 1 1 1
22 Rotor Jacking limit swich 2 2 2 2 2
Shall be as per total

23 Brakes position switch 2 c/o contacts limit swich All Brakes 2 2 2 No. of Brakes
24 Brakes status indication lamps 2 2 2 2
25 Brake air pressre switch Pr. Switch 2 1 1
Press
26 Brake air pressure** Transmitter 1 1 1
* ALL DTTs to be provide with 3Nos (THREE) Change over contacts** Dual output Transmitters with programmable switches
118
4.59 Schedule of Spares
S No Description of Item Qty

1) Stator winding bars complete with insulation materialsCovering at 2/3 Set of ONE Generator
least 4 Nos. of each type i.e bottom, Top, end etc.)
2) Completely Assembled Poles 9 Nos
spare Poles to be supplied are: End Poles ‐ 2 Nos Each, North (Three of Each Type)
& South Poles 6 Nos Each, Total 16 Number of fully
assembled poles to be supplied as spares
3) carbon Brushes 4 sets
4) Brake liners 4 sets
5) Brush holders 2sets
6) Bearing pads 2 sets of each type
7) RTDs 6 nosof .each type
8) Dial thermometers 1 No. of Each type
9) Valves for C.W system 3 nos. of each type
10) Contacts, springs and coils for each type of relay contactor, one complete set
breaker and auxiliary switch
11) Flow relays
12) stator Cooler units 2 no.s of each type
13) Bearing coolers for Each bearing. 2 set
14) Brake jack units 1 set
15) A.C and D.C H S Lub oil unit 2 set
16) Flow Transmitters ** 1 set of Each.
17) Level switches 2 no.s of each type& Rating
18) Level Transmitters 2 no.s of each type& Rating
19) Flow relays 2 no.s of each type& Rating
4.60 List of testing instruments
The following testing instruments and equipment shall be supplied for testing of Generating units.

1) Variable frequency generator(suitable for testing the Governor) 1 No.
2) DC High voltage testing kit, 0 to 60 KV/50 mA 1 No
3) Megger Digital, 500 V, 1000 M ohm 3 No.s
4) Megger Digital, 1000V, 2000 M ohm 2 Nos.
5) Motor operated Megger 2 Nos.
6) Dual trace Oscilloscope, (with all accessories.) 2 No.s
7) Electric Hand tachometer (Digital) 0-1500 rpm 1 No.
8) Mercury thermometer, 0-150 Deg. C 3 Nos
9) Pressure test bench with Equip. for testing &Calibrating of gauges & 1 set
Transmitters 0 to 100 Kg/cm2
10) Shunt, 5A or 7.5 A/50 mV 3 Nos.
11) Elec. Soldering station, 230 V AC (with temp. contr 2 Nos.
12) Vernier calipers 150mm, 300mm 4 Nos.each
13) Dial gauges with magnetic base 36 sets.
14) Pitch gauge 4 sets.
15) Depth micro meter 0 to 50mm, 0 to 400mm 2 No.each
16) Inside micro meters 25 mm to 1 meter 2 No.each
17) Out side micro meters0 to 150mm, 0 to 1000mm 2Nos.each
18) Slip gauge up to 100mm 1 set
19) Straight edge 300mm/ 1 meter / 3 mts 2/2/
20) Telescope gauge up to 150mm 2 set
21) Block level 0.02 per meter accuracy 4 No.
22) Digital Tong Tester A.C & D.C (Jaw capacity 100 mm)As per system 2 Nos. of each
requirement and can be finalized during detailed engineering. And for type
measuring up to Milliamps
23) Temp. measurement Kit. (RTD measurement.) For calibration including 1 No.
Standared RTD
24) Digital Multi meter 6 Nos.
25) Portable Vibration MeterRange 1 to 1000 mm/sec2, Velocity 0.1 – 100 1 No.
mm/sec. withrecorder
119
26) Sub-standard Pressure gauge meter set for
(Range 0 to 100 Kgs/Cm2., Resolution 0.5 Kg/Cm2)
a) Liquid measurements. 1 No.
b) Pneumatic measurement 1 No.
27) Water level micrometer 1 no.
28) D’meter (0-10 mm), (0-25 mm) 1 no. each
29) Bore dial gauge (15 – 65 mm) 1 no.
30) AC High voltage testing Equipment, 0 -50 KV, 10 Amps 1 no
31) Automatic Tan delta capacitance testing equipment 10 KV,5 A 1 no
32) Loading Transformer 2000Amps 1. no.
33) Infrared Temperature measurement Devices( hand operated) 2 no.s
(Thermal imaging Cameras with high resolution)
34) Partial discharge measuring equipment with 1 set
coupling capacitors for testing the Generators
35) Partial discharge measuring equipment with 1 set.
36) coupling capacitors for testing the Generators 1. No
37) Battery Ground fault locator Megger make 1 Set
38) Oil BDV test Kit 3 Nos
39) Circuit Breaker Analyser & Contact Resistance Meas, Kit 4 nos.
40) 0-50 V D.C variable source 1 No.
41) 0 – 20 mA D.C Variable sources 1 No.
42) Primary Injection Kit 1 No.
43) CT & PT Analyser Kit 1 No.
44) Dissolved gas Analysis Kit ( Portable) 2 Nos.
45) Lubricating / Hydraulic Oils test kit 1 No.
46) Earth resistance Measurement Megge 1 No.
47) Portable Vacuum Pump (Industrial grade) 1 set
4.61 List of Mandatory Tools and plant:
The following tools and equipment shall be supplied for regular operation & maintenance of
Generating units.

1) Turbine oil filter centrifugal450 LPH (Purifier up to 2 microns) 1 No.
Filteration requirements shall be finalized based on the purity of oil required
for Governor servo valves and bearings etc.,
2) Turbine oil Electro Static filter 2 No.
3) Double end ring spanners 6mm to 36mm 4 sets each
4) Open end type spanners 4 sets each
5) Box spanners with ratchet 4 sets each
6) handle and extension rod 6mm to 36mm 4 sets each
7) Feeler gauge 0.01mm to 2.5mm (150 m long 4 sets
8) Transformer Oil Tank (capacity 20 KL)Mounted on movable trolley 1 No.
120
SECTION-V
STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM AND DVR
5.0 GENERAL:
Each generator shall be equipped with microprocessor based digital excitation control
equipment. The equipment shall confirm to the latest applicable standards. The excitation system
shall permit continuous stable operation of the generators under manual excitation control or
voltage regulator control, for all conditions of operation. The excitation system shall meet all
performance requirement and receive tests described below and shall be furnished with the
electrical, mechanical and physical features required.
NOTEThemanufacturer from whom it is intended to procure the DVR and Excitation system must
have designed, manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned similar type of systems of
capacity intended for this project or higher capacity during the last five years at atleast in two
power stations outside the country of manufacturers Origin or in India and should be in successful
operation for 2 years without any failure as on the date of submission of Bid.
At least one (1) number of DVR and Excitation system of the said capacity, should have been
commissioned in India and is in satisfactory operation as on the date of submission of Bid.
The output of the excitation system is intended to be connected to the generator field with the
use of field circuit breakers. The suppression of the field winding is proposed to be achieved by
the inversion operation of thyristors.
Direct current measuring equipment consisting of shunts and leads, etc., and all other equipment
required to provide indication& Operation at the D.V.Rpanelfor Generator field voltage and
current shall be furnished.Interfacing and remote indication and controls from remote control
and station SCADA shall be made available.
The basis of rating of the rectifier should be a duty cycle consisting of a series of close in faults
and reclosure for which the generators are expected to continue service.
The fault duty cycle is as follows:
a) Continuous operation at its maximum rating.
b) Three phase fault adjacent to HV terminals of step up transformer (assume 12%
reactance) cleared in 5 cycles.
c) The rectifiers must be suitable to work at a maximum ambient temperature of 50o C for
the above duty cycle.
d) The ceiling voltage of the rectifier should be at least 1.8 times the generator field voltage
when delivering rated full load and voltage.
The excitation system shall be complete including its Excitation power supply transformer
connected to the generator terminals, circuit breaker in the AC and DC filed flashing circuits and
all necessary devices for indication, protection, alarm and control of the equipment. The
excitation system shall not rely on any other source of power except for the 415Volt 3 phase
alternating current or station battery for flashing the generator field at the time of start. The use
of oil as an insulating medium in any of the components is prohibited.
Rectifiers of the exciter shall be of the silicon controlled type. The initial capacity of the rectifiers
shall have an allowance to cover any loss in capacity which may be cased by ageing. The rectifiers
shall have a PIV rating of not less than four times the maximum rms voltage of the input. A
sufficient number of rectifiers shall be used in series in any string so that failure of any one of
them in the series string by short circuit will not cause failure of excitation. The number of
bridges should be two and each bridge shall be capable of delivering the full load current. With
the failure of 2nd bridge, it shall be possible to continue operation at 100% load. Voltage spike
protection shall be provided.
121
The excitation system shall be of modular design in such a way that it can be readily removed for
inspection and replacement of parts. Indicating lights shallbeprovided on each module to indicate
and locate rectifier failure.
Testing equipment for periodical testing of Excitation system during fault and after annual shut
down shall be supplied. One complete set of Latest Electronic analyser Cum high resolution
recorder with test probes etcrequired to perform Step test and PSS Tuning at different Loads on
generator shall be supplied. Rotor earth fault protection system shall be provided. Necessary
spares for trouble free operation and required testing tools shall also be supplied along with
equipment. One Laptop with Maintenance & programming tool with provision for historian trend
analyser (including license softwares) shall be supplied.
5.1 EXCITATION POWER (RECTIFIER) TRANSFORMER:
Three phase excitation power shall be obtained through a three–phase transformer connected to
the generator terminals. The transformer shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with
the latest standards for transformers.
The transformer shall be self cooled, indoor, enclosed dry(copper winding and cast resin
insulated) type. Since the high voltage winding is connected directly to the generator terminals
full design consideration shall be given to the generator frequency increase rate, generator
voltage build-up rate and insulation co-ordination. Surge transmission from the high voltage side
to the low voltage side shall be prevented by suitable means. Full rated capacity taps on the high
voltage winding shall be provided to accommodate the complete range of operation.
The transformer shall be equipped with a winding hot spot temperature detector of the
resistance type together with necessary accessories arranged for remote indication. The detector
shall be suitable for use with the recorder specified. Transformer Temperature high alarm and
Trip signals shall be provided for protection of the transformer incase of the rise in temperature
beyond the safe limits.
The transformer shall be provided with over current protection along with necessary current
transformers on HV side.
The 11KV terminals of the transformer shall be suitable for connection with 11KV isolated phase
bus ducts. The low voltage terminals shall be suitable for cable connection.
The transformers shall be completely assembled at the factory and shall be subjected to standard
dielectric tests. Di-electric tests and other tests shall also be carried out at site.
5.2. EXCITATION CONTROL:
The voltage regulating and excitation control equipment shall be suitable for local manual and
automatic control from machine control panels and remote control from SCADA at control room.
Suitable circuits containing position switches and internal wiring within the equipment required
to give correct operation and indication and all necessary equipment necessary for this operation
shall be provided by the contractor. The regulator ‘balance’ indicator and the regulator control
switch shall be provided on regulator panel and with a provision to control from the remote
panel.. All equipment required to provide smooth change form ‘Auto’ position of voltage
regulator to ‘Manual’ position and vice-versa be provided for this purpose.
Local control and metering shall be provided for all the important features in addition to the
provision for remote control and metering operation.
5.3 DIGITAL VOLTAGE REGULATORS:
Microprocessor based Digital voltage regulators with PLC based control structures shall be
provided. The system shall have full redundancy. It shall consist of TWO auto channels and
manual channel.
The voltage regulator shall be anti-hunting. The voltage regulator shall be capable of maintaining
the generator terminal voltage at and pre-set value and at the same time sharing the reactive KVA
of the load between the two similar units.
The generator when operating under steady load conditions for any load or excitation within
operating range and shall initiate corrective action without hunting.
122
Each machine shall be provided with digital voltage regulators. The equipment shall be such as to
afford either automatic or manual control of excitation as and when required. It should also
include the following features.
a. Auto channel – (2 Nos.) Each consisting of
(i) Automatic voltage regulator with
- Reference value setting
- V/Hz ratio limiter ( to avoid over-fluxing)
- Reactive droop/drop compensation
- Rotor current limiter (over-excitation limiter)
- Load angle limiter (Under-excitation limiter)
- Stator current, both capacitive and inductive limiter (under &
over excitation limiter)
- Slip stabilization
- Soft start ( for limiting over-shoot during voltage build – up)
- Follow up controller
- Power factor or reactive power control
- Power system stabiliser
(ii) Firing pulse generation
(iii) Firing pulse amplification
(iv) Firing Pulse Supervision
b. Standby manual channel – 1 no. (Digital)

- Firing pulse generation
- Firing pulse amplification
- Firing Pulse Supervision
- Field current regulation with reference value setting
Thyristor cubicles consists of 2 sets of three phase, 6 –pulse thyristor converters shall be
supplied. Normally One converter shall be in operation with the other one as ‘standby’ Or
alternatively with all the thyristor bridges can be selected for operation out of which 50% of the
thyristor cubicles shall be able to deliver the full load requirement. The configuration shall be
so selected to have 100% redundancy of bridges
The main components of each thyristor bridge are:
1. Three phase fully controlled Thyristor Bridge with semi-conductor fuses and Gate circuit
assembly with pulse transformer and associated protection features.
2. Off load isolators both on AC and DC sides.

3. Air flow monitoring unit
4. Thyristor bridge cooling fan.
5. Miscellaneous items comprising HRC fuses, MCB, Meters
6. AC over voltage protection.
123
5.4 FIELD SUPPRESSION:
1. Field – flashing contractor
2. Field flashing diode bridge for AC field flashing
3. Blocking Diode assembly for DC field flashing
4. AC field flashing supply Transformer. (step down)
5. Field discharge resistor.
6. 1 No Field circuit breaker ( 2 main pole)
7. Field voltmeter and shunt and Transmitters
8. Miscellaneous items eg. MCBs, relays and fuses.
9. 1 No crow bar circuit equipped with two anti parallel thyristors to connect the discharge resistor
due to an external trigger pulse by opening the field breaker incase of positive or negative field
over voltage.
The excitation system shall be supplied with programming tool for carrying out any modification
and maintenance works on the system.
SPARES
Excitation system spares as recommended by the supplier
a) Electronic control Cards& power supply units 2 Nos. of each type
b) Thyristor stack 2 sets
c) cooling fans 2 sets
d) Fuses 1 set
e) Relays, contactors, C B’s 10 no.s of each type
f) Field flashing,field breakers 1 no of each type
g) Crow Bar unit 3 Sets.
124
SECTION – VI
Scope of Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of Control and Relaying Equipment of
complete Scheme
6.1 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

Following shall be included in scope of supply: -
a) Latest type of data acquisition, control and monitoring system having provision for
Local/Remote control panels as per requirement with built in Sequence of event recorder,
Disturbance Recorder, Disturbance Record evaluation unit, GPS time synchronizing units, GPS
System, Automatic and manual Synchronising devices for units & lines and bay controllers for
400KV GIS switchyard bays,11 KV supply system, Station auxiliaries system, Large Video Screen
Display system complete in all respects to service 12 units and Two 400 KV feeders, Twostation
Transformers and other station auxiliaries as described here in after. 1 Lot
b) Control & Protective Relaying panels for
- Generator and Generator transformer 12 Sets
- 400KV feeders 2 Sets
- 400KV bus bar protection 1 Set
- 400KV Bus Reactor 2 Sets
- 400KV Bus couplers &Sectionalisers 2 Sets
- Station Transformer 400/11KV 2 Sets.
- 33/11 KV Transformer & system 1 lot
- 11KV system Indoor & Outdoor system 1 lot
c) Testing instruments 1 set
d) Communication and Public Address system 1 Lot
e) Spares for 5 years maintenance 1 set
6.2 PROVISIONS
a) GENERAL
The proposed layout of the control room shall be finalized during detailed design and engineering
as per requirement. Panels shall be of simplex type fabricated front MS sheet of not less than 2
mm thickness for weight bearing members and 1.6 mm thick for other portions conforming to
IEEE or other standard as applicable. All equipments on and inside panels shall be mounted and
completely wired to the terminal blocks ready for external connections. All control wiring shall be
carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, stranded copper conductor of size 1.5/2.5 sq.mm FRLS
cables. Terminals for field cables terminations shall be suitable for terminating with ring type lugs
and shall be of type KATM4, KATDM4 of M/s.ELMEX make or equivalent.
Redundant CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication shall be envisaged for all
parts of the control system.
Licensed Software with life time validity of the equipment shall be loaded and supplied along with
the equipment.
125
6.3DATA ACQUISITION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
(Digital Distributed control system(DDCS) was proposed for control and monitoring of the Power
station. One No. suitable I/O controller is proposed each for 11 KV outdoor system area and 11KV
indoor switchgear system , Penstocks,400 KV GIS etc (as per pre bid reply confirmations) at the
respective locations for control and monitoring of all the I/o's of all the switchgear equipment in
that area with redundant communication to Station auxiliary controller through optic fiber cables.
However additional hardwired connections to operate necessary drives from the station auxilliary
controller shall also be established as backup and to operate in emergency. The system
requirements and its architecture will be finalised during detailed engineering)
6.3.1 BASIC COMPONENTS

The computerized control and monitoring system shall be of distributed type built up on the
following components:
- Workstations/Engineering stations/Servers/plant computers for programming and central
control and supervision of the power plant.
- Unit level controllers for units U1 to U12 - 12 sets, (Each controller shall have I/O cards
,output and other relays ,Temperature and other parameter recorders, Indicating instruments
redundant CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication, etc as required.)
- One bay control unit suitable for 12 nos. Penstock intake gates of units with I/O cards and
position transmitters communicable to main control station, redundant CPU, redundant
power supply, redundant communication etc as required,
- one 400 KV ( GIS) switchyard controlling system , with I/O cards ,out put and other relays,
redundant CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication, etc as required (if
necessary Bay control units may be adopted for each bay)
- One 33Kv and 11Kv switchgear outdoor system (Bay control units with I/O cards ,out put and
other relays, redundant CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication,, etc as
required)
- One 11Kv switchgear indoor system (Bay control units with I/O cards ,out put and other
relays,redundant CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication, etc., as
required)
- One station auxiliaries controlling system with I/O cards ,out put and other relays, redundant
CPU, redundant power supply, redundant communication, etc as required for
compressors,Drainage and dewatering system,11KV&415V station supply system etc. (if
necessary Bay control units may be adopted for each area)
- GPS clock with Antenna for time synchronization (Time Synchronization Unit with Time
Display Unit and ability to extend time synchronizing signals to all the relays, LCUs, and
equipment in the power house and GIS switchyard)
- Gateway control PC and Modem or RTU panel with Modem for data transfer to LDC/SRLDC
through PLCC (For gateway, it shall communicate with State load Dispatch Center
(ALDC/SLDC) on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. And Provision for expandable to IEC 104 protocol.
2 Ports for ALDC/SLDC.). PLCC panels with Voice, Data & protection couplers shall also be
supplied and commissioned.
It shall be the bidder’s responsibility to integrate his offered system with existing SLDC
system for exchange of desired data.
- Above controllers and their Servers of the control system shall have OPC compatibility and
shall be readily integratable to the OPC compliant devices.
- A common Large Video Screen Display system (with 8 Nos. 67 inch displays to be mounted as
a Two tier (2 X 4) ) operable from OWS/EWS for display of mimics and data as desirable
126
- A large video display screen with CCTV circuit for monitoring different locations of power
house and switchyard (Large Video screen. : 67” SXGA+ Display Technology : DLP, single chip
0.95” DMP 12”)
- Provision for Remote control of the station i.e., units and feeders control from other station /
load dispatch center through standard communication networks and protocol
- High speed Dual Communication network allowing the data interchange between the
controllers and the central control room system.
- Four operator work stations with 25’’ LED screen for Human-machine interface
- One stationary and TWO portable Engineering stations for diagnosis, programming,
debugging etc.,
- One PC based operator console for off line training and simulator system
- 7 no.s of printers including Hard copy unit
List of Printers with / without Printer server
1. Colour Laser Printer with MFD – 1 No. (Print, Scan, Fax & Xerox) (For Reports & Disturbance
records),
2. Line / Dot Matrix Printers – 4 Nos. (For Alarms, reports and Sequence of Event recorder)
3. Black and White Laser printer -2 Nos
- Elegant Control desk/consoles and furniture required for printers, OWS, EWS, Servers and 10 nos.
chairs
- Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, unit controllers, station auxiliary
controller, Station HMI, Printers, gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required. (FO Cables, Media
converters, Ethernet switches etc.,) as required.
- Modems as per requirement
- Any other equipment as necessary for effective functioning of the system.
- one set of Maintenance tools
- one set of spares
6.3.2 CONTROL PHILOSOPHY
Centralised data acquisition and control system (DACS) or Digital Distributed control system
(DDCS) having following facilities shall be provided:
6.3.2.1 UNIT CONTROLLER
i) Control for start/stop, emergency shutdown of the machine from the unit control
board(UCB/LCU) locally with a provision of MIMIC and illuminated push buttons on the front
panel with necessary interlocks or through 19” Touch screen HMI provided on the front panel
of the LCU and from operator/work stations in control room in generating mode with
provision to choose Local / Remote control selection through Lockable L/R Switch.
ii) Each auxiliary shall have a local control board near the device with necessary controls,
indication, interlocks and protection i.e., overload relays, voltage and current meters, control
switch for start/stop, MCCB/HRC fuses for incoming supply, indications, interlocks required
for the process, single phase preventer etc., with feedbacks and control input & operational
provisions from SCADA
iii) For unit auxiliaries, necessary controls, interlocks, instruments and relay panel shall be
provided along with unit. All unit auxiliaries can also be controlled from unit control board in
remote mode.
iv) Automatic voltage regulator and governor shall have local control from respective panels and
from unit control board for start / stop and raise / lower operations and also from Remote
HMI Control System
v) Status indication of unit and its auxiliaries shall be provided as under:
127
a) For unit auxiliaries at local control panel, unit control boards, and SCADA.
b) For excitation system and governor, locally at their respective panel and on remote
control desk (SCADA), and UCB.
c) Status indication of switchgear equipment on local control panel as well as DACS/DDCS
through indicators
vi) Annunciation system having adequate number of windows with facility to accept, reset and
test, for various fault conditions or abnormal running conditions shall be provided along with
each unit controller. The alarms shall be grouped as trip alarms and non trip alarms having
different audible tones and different coloursi.e Amber for alarm windows and Red for trip
windows. Flasher relay/ First out facility, shall be provided so that new alarm is easily
identified.
vii) Analog/digital meters for measurement of MW, MVAR, voltage, current, Power factor, speed,
Excitation Voltage & Current etc. shall be provided on the UCB.(Multi function meters will not
be permitted)
viii) All temperature measuring devices like DTTs, Thermostats, oil level indicators, pressure
gauges/Switches, flow measurement devices shall be mounted on the gauge panel with their
contacts wired further to UCB for necessary fault annunciation alarms and tripping.
ix) Vibration monitors, Paperless recorders shall be mounted on unit controllers with their alarm
and trip contacts wired further to UCB forfault annunciation/tripping through unit tripping
relays in addition with storing the Data for future use and transmitting the real time data to
UCB through communication link such as RS485.
x) Built in SOE function with 1 ms resolution for at least 128 digital inputs or as Required by the
system, whichever is higher.
In addition following control shall also be provided.
a) Joint power output control as per optimum efficiency requirement.
b) Protection signal from applicable protection relays shall interrupt unit start up and initiate
shutdown ensuring precedence of protection signal.
c) Trivector meters of Class0.2s shall be provided.
Local unit control panel shall have facility for control, protection & metering as per requirement.
Provision for logging of temperature of generators, transformers, bearing& vibrations etc. shall be
made as required. Logging of important levels and pressure shall also be done
I/O controllers (DI,DO,AI,AO, RTD) shall be provided at unit level for interface with turbine,
generator, valves and auxiliaries. Potential free contact with necessary type and rating required
shall be adopted for input or output control. At unit level, Human machine interface is provided
by push buttons & indicators or alternatively with touch screen display unit. If required for
testing, or other purposes, programming console can be hooked up and unit control can be done
from unit controller panel installed at unit level.
Unit can be started from local control panels, if required, under permission from central control.
Sequence shall be to start auxiliary one by one as per approved sequence. Unit can be started
from governor cubicle and voltage built up from regulation cubicle.
The programmable dedicated logic controller at unit level shall perform the following functions:
- Programmable as per unit start/stop, emergency shutdown logic control scheme.
- Acquire the logic and analog signals from the process comprising turbine, governor, valve,
generator and auxiliaries etc.
- operate the process actuators and perform automatic control sequence in response to
process signals or to orders from the other controllers or from the protective equipment in
control room.
128
- Monitor the process and initiate alarm annunciation as applicable with a printout of alarms.
- Send to the control room the essential information (status signals, grouped alarms, etc.)
about the process.
- hook a portable programming console for test start.
The control boards shall be designed for the following functions:
- Starting, stopping and automatic shutdown under fault conditions / Emergency stopping of
the unit with local push buttons and Mimic.
- Control of unit auxiliaries
- Status indication of unit and its auxiliaries
- Visual and audio alarm annunciation with facility to accept, reset and test.
- Metering for MW, MVAR, voltage, current, speed, PF, frequency etc.
- Active and reactive power, generated by each generator
- Active and reactive energy meters for each generatorof class 0.2S accuracyat transformer LV
and HV side i.e., 11kv and 400KV side.
- Accepting and communicating the commands / Digital and Analog signals (4 to 20 mA) and PT
100 with DACS/DDCS through communication network
6.3.2.2 THE UNIT CONTROLLER SHALL ALSO CONSISTS OF
i) Automatic Synchronising Equipment
The automatic synchronizing equipment shall be designed to permit automatic control of turbine
speed, voltage, and breaker closing for the purpose of connecting the generator to a running
system with a minimum of disturbance to the machine or the system.
Theautomatic synchronizer design shall include the following units:
- Voltage acceptor
- Speed matcher
- Voltage matcher
- Synchronism checking device
ii) Manual Synchronising Equipment
In case the automatic Synchroniser is out of order, the units shall be Synchronised by the operator
using the manual Synchronising equipment.
The manual Synchronising shall comprise:
- Selector switch off/ auto/manual/test
- Incoming and running voltmeter
- Incoming and running frequency meter
- Synchroscope with Synchronising lamps
- Synchronising pulse sent indication light (green) separately.
- Check Synchronising relay with indication and bypass switch.
6.3.2.3 400 KV GIS SWITCHYARD CONTROLLER

Control for switching On/Off or Open /close of Breakers,isolators/switches in 400 Kv GIS, from the
GIS control board(UCB/LCU) locally with a provision of MIMIC and illuminated push buttons on
the front panel with necessary interlocks or through 19” Touch screen HMI provided on the front
panel of the LCU and from operator/work stations in control room in generating mode with
provision to choose Local / Remote control selection through Lockable L/R Switch.
129
Status indication of switchgear equipment on local control panel with mimic as well as in
DACS/DDCS through indicators.
Annunciation system having adequate number of windows with facility to accept, reset and test,
for various fault conditions or abnormal running conditions shall be provided along with GIS
controller. The alarms shall be grouped as trip alarms and non trip alarms having different
audible tones and different colours. Flasher relay/ First out facility shall be provided so that new
alarm is easily identified.
Analog/digital meters for measurement of MW, MVAR, voltage, current, frequency etc. shall be
provided on the GIS LCU.
Built in SOE function with 1 ms resolution for at least 128 digital inputs or as required by the
system, whichever is higher shall be provided.
Trivector meters of Class0.2S for lines and for station transformers feeders shall be provided
GIS controller panel shall have facility for control, protection & metering as per requirement.
Provision for logging of all parameters shall be made available as required.
This programmable logic controller shall perform the following functions: -
- communicate with the control room through the redundant data communication
network.
- The controller shall be provided with enough input/output modules to deal with the
following signals to and from the process (including spare):
- logic input signals from the process
- logic output commands to the process
- analog signals from the process (4 to 20 mA , 0-10V etc.,) and PT 100
- acquire logic information required to control the line,reactor, transformer Bus coupler
&sectionaliser breakers & disconnectors etc.
To simplify the wiring / cabling it may be considered to provide I/O controllers (DI,DO,AI,AO,RTD
etc.,) at bay level for interface with Breakers, isolators/ disconnectors, Earth switches. Current
transformers, potential transformers, GTs, STs etc., of all bays. Potential free contact with
necessary type and rating required shall be adopted for input or output control. Human machine
interface is provided by push buttons & indicators or alternatively with touch screen display unit.
If required for testing, or other purposes, programming console can be hooked up and unit
control can be done from GIS controller panel installed at Bay level.
Alternatively
The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor all the sub-
station equipment from local control centre.
Dedicated Bay Control Units (BCUs) and Bay Protection Units (BPU) shall be provided for each bay
for Control and protection functionality on IEC-61850 standard. The Bay Control and Protection
IEDs shall communicate on the IEC61850 standard for Communication Networks and shall comply
with the
➢ IEC61850-5 for communication data modeling,
➢ IEC61850-6 for Sub-station Configuration Description Language for communication &
➢ IEC61850-7-1 to 7-4 for Data Model and Services.
The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:
❖ Bay Control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IEDs) for Control and Monitoring.
❖ Bay Protection Intelligent Electronic device (IEDs) for Protection.
❖ Station Human Machine Interface (HMI)
130
❖ Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network
communicationinfrastructure with hot standby.
❖ Disturbance Recorder evaluation unit with dedicated printer
❖ GPS time synchronization to all the equipment to synchronise the times of each
equipment.
Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated
disconnectors, earth switches, instrument transformers etc.,) bay mimic along with relay and
protection panels and PLCC/OLTE panels housed in the Local control unit of the particular GIS bay
module suitably located in GIS floor and Station HMI in Control Room building for overall
optimization in respect of cabling and control room building.
System architecture
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented,
distributed intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process.
The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The typical
SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a
Station level and a Bay level.
At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control, monitoring and
protection, inputs for status indication, and outputs for commands. The IEDs should be directly
connected to the switchgear without any need for additional interposition or transducers.
Transformer Parameters i.e., Oil / Winding temperatures, Oil levels, PRV status, On Line Monitor
Hydran (or equivalent) or any Other equipment like Transformer management Relay and OLTC
Tap Position & Operation (not AVR) shall be interfaced with BCU through Transducers for
monitoring these parameters in Local.
Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall not be
affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station.
The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall take place via the
communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fiber optic cables, thereby guaranteeing
disturbance free communication. The fiber optic cables shall be run in G.I/HDPE conduit pipes.
Data exchange is to be realized using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched
Ethernet communication infrastructure.
The communication shall be made in fault tolerant ring in redundant mode, excluding the links
between individual bay IEDs to switch wherein the redundant connections are not envisaged,
such that failure of one set of fiber shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS. However
failure of fiber, it shall be alarmed in SAS.
At station level,( at main control room ) the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from
the station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level
equipment at all times.
The GPS time synchronizing signals for the synchronization of the entire system shall be provided.
Bay/station interlocking and blocking
Software Interlocking shall also to be provided in addition with hardware interlocking to ensure
that inadvertent incorrect operation of switchgear causing damage and accidents, in case of false
operation does not take place.
Bay control functions
❖ Control mode selection
❖ Select-before-execute principle
❖ Command supervision:
131
➢ Interlocking and blocking
➢ Double command
❖ Synchro-check, voltage selection
❖ Run Time Command cancellation
❖ Transformer Tap Changer control (for Power Transformer bays)
❖ Operation counters for Circuit Breakers and Pumps.
❖ Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor/Spring charge control and runtime
Supervision
❖ Display of interlocking and blocking
❖ Breaker position indication per phase
❖ Alarm annunciation
❖ Measurement display. (Electrical Parameters of Line, Transformer & Reactor
Parameters)
❖ Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode)
❖ Interface to the station HMI.
❖ Data storage for at least 200 events
❖ Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fiber optic
communication and process bus
Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:
The bidder shall provide the redundant optical/ switched Ethernet communication infrastructure
for SAS.
The Bay Level Unit should have a redundant Power Supply unit or have an automatic change over
facility. If one of the power supply fails, same shall have to be alarmed and recorded as event in
SAS.
Input/output (I/O) modules
The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit (BCU) and shall provide coupling to the
substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear information (i.e. data coming
directly from the switchgear or from switchgear interlocking devices) and transmit commands for
operation of the switchgear.
The measured values of voltage and current shall be from the secondary of instrument
transformers.
The measured values of WTIs, OTI, online monitor Hydran Values shall also be received through
transducers to Bay Level Unit
The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution. Contact bouncing in digital
inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
The layout of equipment / panel shall be subject to APGENCO’s approval. The GIS control room
shall be provided with fire alarm system with at least two detectors with necessary power supply
(if required) and it shall be wired to SAS.
6.3.2.4 STATION AUXILLIARY CONTROLLER
Following control philosophy for station auxilliaries along with bay controllers shall be adopted.
1. Start/ Stop control and monitoring of Compressed air system
2. Start /stop control and monitoring of Dewatering and Drainage system
3. Control, Monitoring, Metering of Station service transformers and its Breakers and
Isolators including HV side 33 KV, 11KV and 415 v LV system
132
4. Control, monitoring, Metering of LT supply(415 V) and its Breakers and Isolators
5. Control, monitoring, Metering of DG sets and Emergency restoration and emergency
lighting system
6. Monitoring and metering of Station Battery and chargers , UPS etc
7. Control and Monitoring of HVAC and air conditioning system, Ventilation system and Fire
protection system.
8. Monitoring of Head water level and Tail water levels and Distribution of Net head
availability for unit control and all Governors.
9. Monitoring of Discharges through turbine of each unit and total station etc.,
Adequate I/O controllers shall be provided along with necessary transducers for metering and data
acquisition. Essential Local meters to be provided on the control board
Control for start/stop of the drives such as DW pumps, compressors,Breakers etc. from the station
auxiliary control board(SACB) locally with a provision of MIMIC and illuminated push buttons on the
front panel or through 19” Touch screen HMI with necessary interlocks and from operator/work
stations in control room
Annunciation system having adequate number of windows with facility to accept, reset and test, for
various fault conditions or abnormal running conditions shall be provided along with station
auxiliary controller. The alarms shall be grouped as trip alarms and non trip alarms having different
audible tones and colours. Flasher relay/ First out facility shall be provided so that new alarm is
easily identified.
This programmable logic controller shall perform the following functions: -
- communicate with the control room through the Redundant data communication
network.
- The controller shall be provided with enough input/output modules to deal with the
following signals to and from the process (including spare):
- logic input signals from the process
- logic output commands to the process
- analog signals from the process (4 to 20 mA , 0-10V etc.,) and PT 100
- acquire logic information required to control the 33kv,11kv,&415V ac power supply
including changeover of supplies
- acquire logic information for control/monitoring of ventilation and air conditioning
system for Power House.
- acquire logic information for control and monitoring of d.c. supply systems.
6.3.2.5 LARGE VIDEO SCREEN DISPLAY:

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF LVS DISPLAY
1. SCOPE:
a. The scope of supply includes :
8 Nos. of LVS to be mounted as a Two tier (2 X 4) seamlessly in main control room with its
associated Display Controllers, personal computers , all mounting accessories, optical
components, Graphic adapters, cables, software and accessories as applicable and
required for each LVS.
b. All the cables (Communication as well as power cables) along with cable accessories such
as terminal blocks, connectors, sockets, cable alley, ties, etc, are in the scope of supply.
c. The mounting stands for LVS etc shall be designed to suit the above keeping in view of the
aesthetics. The height of the LVS stands shall be suitably designed so that there shall be
133
no obstruction for viewing for the operator sitting at the control desk with LED monitors
placed on the desk.
d. The LVS shall be operable from the OWS/EWS of the plant.
2. Technical specification for LVS:

LVS shall be capable of 24 hours X 7 days of continuous operation under normal ambient
lighting in the control room.
The LVS and its accessories shall be designed such a way that the brightness in the center
of the screen and the edges of the screen to be uniform and there is no perceivable
difference in the quality of the picture in the center and at the edges of the screen.
3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LVS WITH A DISPLAY CONTROLLER FOR MAIN CONTROL
ROOM AS DETAILED BELOW.
Sno. Item / Description Requirement
3.1 DISPLAY WALL / VIDEO SCREEN
a. Size of Each Screen / Cube 67 inches diagonal

LVS Screen Non-reflecting, flicker free suitable for control room. These shall
b. be no burn-in due to prolonged display of the same picture at
the same place.
c. Type of Projection Rear Projection with single DLP technology
d. Resolution 1400 x 1050 native DMD chip resolution
e. Viewing Angle 180 Degree
f. Light Source Type LED light source with separate LED array for each colour (RGB).
g. Life of LED Lamps Average Life: Min 60000 Hrs. (or better)
h. Operating temperature 5-40 oC( 20oC +- 3 oC for optimal screen performance)
i. Humidity 80% and above non-condensing
j. On screen diagnostics To be provided
Power Supply Input 240 V A.C + 10% and – 15% 50 Hz, 1 Phase (Indian type plugs &
k.
sockets)
l. Brightness ANSI Minimum 750 Lumens.
m. Brightness Uniformity ≥ 90 %
n. Dynamic Contrast 12, 00,000:1 or more.
The Visual Display Unit / Rear Projection Modules shall have
o. Redundancy Redundant Power Supply modules.
p. Hot Swappable Power Supply Cube should have a Hot swappable Power Supply In built
q. Control IP based control to be provided
r. Remote IR remote control should also be provided for quick access
Cube arrangement LVS for Main plant shall be in 2 X 4 matrix (in Two Tier),
s.
t. Screen to Screen Gap ≤ 0.2mm Seamless
134
Screen should have Anti-Reflective Glass Backing to prevent
u. Screen Support
bulging
v. Control BD Input terminal Input: 2 x Digital DVI
Above are minimum requirement. However shall be finalised during detailed engineering stage.
3.2 DISPLAY CONTROLLER
Controller to control Video Walls in a matrix of 4( C) x 2( R) with
a. Display controller outputs , video inputs and Universal inputs along with
necessary software
b. Processor Single Quad Core Intel® Xeon/i7 64-bit 2.0 GHz CPU or better
c. RAM Min 4GB
d. HDD Min 500 GB Hard Disk. Hard disk Capacity should be upgradable
4 Functions of LVS
a) Display of important data, graphics coming from the DDCMIS, PLC, Workstation, Video, SCADA,
images from CCTV, IP camera etc in real time.
b) LVS shall provide real time clear luminous view to share information to operators and visitors.
c) The whole screen of the Large Screen Graphics Wall should behave as a single logical screen and the
control of the same should be from a dedicated Graphical Control Unit (Controller) having a
Keyboard & mouse. However, as option shall be provided, to control the Graphics Wall from all
work stations on LAN having Windows latest version.
d) The complete system shall be interfaced with station/SCADA LAN.
e)The offered system should be able to work in 24/7 days environment and is of industrial nature.
5. SOFTWARE
All associated software and drivers for the said LVS to run on Licensed software, whose license shall
be valid for the life time of the product/equipment
6.3.3 ARCHITECTURE OF THE PROPOSED SYSTEM
The architecture of the proposed system shall comprise the following:
1. High speed Dual data way system connecting the controllers and Operating / work stations
2. Each controller shall comprise Redundant CPUs and communication portsconnected to the
dual communication network.
3. Redundant power supply system for each LCU
4. Redundant communication controllers for all LCU
5. Required IO cards
This shall provide following facilities: -
- Individual or overall control of the units in individual or joint control mode using mimics &
control views.
- Printing reports
- Graphic displays
- Fault annunciation and alarm management including SOE recording
- Logging facilities
135
- Power generation control as per river discharges and levels
6.3.3.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CAPACITY OF THE SYSTEM
Input/output capacity of various controllers shall be as per system requirement with 20%
spares input/output provision wired up to TBs.
6.3.3.2.1GPS CLOCK FOR TIME SYNCHRONISATION
System shall include necessary time synchronisation equipment complete in all respects including
antenna, all cables (except power and control cables) processing equipments etc., required to
receive coordinated universal Time (UTC) transmitted through GEO positioning satellite system
(GPS). It should be compatible for synchronisation of event logger, all relays, LCUs, SCADA,
disturbance recorders etc. The equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC-255 for storage and
operation. The synchronisation equipment shall have two micro second accuracy. Equipment should
operate upto the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C and 100% humidity. Equipment should give
real time corresponding to IST, taking into consideration all factors (voltage, temperature etc.
variations, propagation and processing delays etc.) including communication time for satellite link to
achieve real time signal. The system should be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption
of synchronisation signal. The output pulses/signals of the equipment shall be programmable at site
for one hour, half hour, minute, second pulse, SNTP,IRIG-B, etc., as per requirement. The equipment
shall have enough number of output ports to meet the requirement mentioned above. Various
combinations of output ports shall be selected by the customer during the detailed engineering from
the following:
i) Voltage signal (Normally 0 to 5 V with 50 m sec pulse duration). In case any other
voltage signal required, the same shall be specifically indicated.
ii) Potential free contact (minimum pulse duration of 50 milli seconds)
iii) Variable current signals.
iv) IRIG - B
v) SNTP
vi) RS 232 C
The equipment should have a periodic time correction facility of 1 sec periodicity.
The cable connecting Antenna and Time Synchronising unit should be run through HDPE pipe or
GI pipe from the location of Antenna fixing to Time Synchronising panel with suitable fixtures and
no provision to enter rain water and should not be affected by atmospheric conditions.
6.3.3.2.2 GENERAL PROVISION
In addition to the equipment already described, each panel shall be equipped with the following
as per requirement:
- Anti condensation heaters with thermostat
- Illumination with door operated switches
- Three pin 15A power socket with switch
- Fuses, terminal blocks, MCBs
- Cable glands
- Annunciation relays
- Flasher relay or equivalent facility
- Contact multiplication relays
- Interposing relays
- Bell/hooter for fault annunciation
- Misc. auxiliary relays as per requirement
136
6.3.4 HMI STATION / PLANT COMPUTER
i)FUNCTIONS AND COMPONENTS
- The fully redundant centralised processor/computer system/Servers located in the control
room shall perform the following functions: -
- Acquisition of data inputs coming from the local automation cells
- Processing of the data inputs in order to update its real time data base
- Screen based Human machine interface (HMI).
-Printer outputs management
- Computation functions
- Joint control and power optimisation.
It shall comprise the following components:
- Plant computer system for the real time data base management and the specific computation
and hydraulic application functions.
- 4 operator stations (video stations) for Human machine interface.Each station shall be equipped
with graphic LED of size 24’’ or higher, keyboard and mouse.
- A system maintenance workstation with colour laser jet hard copy printer for the copy of any
one of the operator CRT’s.
- Four Dot matrix printers/ Two Laser jet printers for event logging and report printing
ii)FEATURES OF PLANT COMPUTER
The centralised computer system shall have following facilities:
a) Display Functions
- Alarm display
- Group display
- Bar chart display
- Trend curve display
- Profile display
- Plant schematic display
- Mimic display
b) Recording Functions
- Alarm log
- Post Trip log
- Trend log in 1 Hour/ 10 Hour/ 24 Hour/ 10 days formats
- Plant status logs
c) Supervisory Functions
- Maintenance log
- Hourly /Daily log
- Shift log
137
- Calculation function
d) System Customization Start up and maintenance
e) Storage of Data
6.3.5 Visual monitoring system for watch and ward of Power Station, GIS and surrounding premises:
Visual monitoring system for effective watch and ward of powerhouse, GIS and surrounding
premises covering the areas of entire powerhouse, GIS, Control Room, different floors of power
house, Fire fighting pump house, stores and main gate etc., shall be provided. The contractor shall
design, supply, erect, test and commission the complete system including cameras, Digital video
recorder system, mounting arrangement for cameras, cables etc. The number of cameras and
their locations shall be decided in such a way such that any location covered in the area can be
scanned. The cameras can be mounted on structures, buildings or any other suitable mounting
arrangement to be provided by the contractor.(Minimum of 60 nos. of cameras shall be envisaged
to cover all the locations)
Technical requirements of major equipment of visual monitoring system.
i) Camera
➢ The colour cameras shall have PAN, TILT and ZOOM facilities so that it can be focused to the
required location through a controller. It should have the following features:
➢ The camera shall be able to PAN through 180 deg. or more.
➢ Tilting angle shall be 90 degrees.
➢ It shall be possible to define at least 12 preset locations so that the camera gets automatically
focused on selection of the location for viewing a predefined location.
➢ The camera shall have Interface to communicate with Digital Video Recorder.
➢ The camera shall be housed in a weather proof housing for protecting it from rain, dust etc
and shall conform to at least to IP 55 grade of ingress protection.
➢ The camera shall be suitable for viewing even under low illumination level upto 5 LUX.
The equipment should generally conform to Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for
outdoor equipment in EHV switchyards. The required EMC levels are 4 KV (level IV of IEC 61000)
for fast Transient and 2.5 KV (level III of IEC 61000) for HF disturbances. Type test reports to
establish compliance with this requirement shall be submitted during detailed engineering.
ii) PC Based Digital Video Recorder system.
PC based digital video recorder (DVR): DVR shall comprise of a PC station with Monitor, key board,
mouse and camera controller with software for performing the following functions:
➢ Storing data for at least one month after which first records shall be over written by the
latest.
➢ Panning, tilting , zooming and focusing of cameras
➢ Receiving data from and controlling cameras
➢ Panning, zooming ,tilting, playing back recorded data
➢ Communicating with the camera
6.3.6 SPARES -
The following Mandatory spares are to be supplied along with the equipment
1. Power supply units 4 no.s of each type
2. CPU units 4 no.s of each type
3. Input modules 8 no.s of each type
4. Output Modules 8 no.s of each type
5. Relays 20 no.s of each type
138
6. Paperless recorders 2 no.s
7. Meters 2 no. of each type
8. Auto synchronizer 2 no
9. Check synchronizer relay 2 no
10. communication equipment spares 1 lot
11. communication cards 4 no.s of each type
12. Display units (19’ touch screen) 3 no.s (if envisaged)
13. Camera unit 5. No.s
14. LVS screen 67” 1.no.
15. Bay control unit with all accessories 2 nos.
Any other spares which are essential for 5 years of trouble free operation.If any alternatives
systems were furnished, The Pertinent spares approved by APGENCO shall be supplied.
6.4 Protective Relaying Equipment
Unless otherwise specified as all offered Protective Relays shall be Numerical Relays and
suitable for IEC 61850. The description of requirements are indicative only, however the
protection shall be provided as required during detailed engineering so that no area is left
unprotected.
The following protective relays of Numerical type shall be provided.
6.4.1 Generator and Generator Transformer
The generator protection panel shall consists of redundant nuemarical relays each of different
make and covering the following protections
95% & 100% Stator earth fault protection (64 N)
Negative Phase Sequence Protection (46)
Split Phase Over Current Protection (50 S)
Rotor E/F protection (64 F)
Loss of field protection (40)
PT fuse failure protection (60)
Reverse Power Protection (32)
Generator Over Voltage Protection (IDMT &
Instantaneous type) (59)
Generator Under Voltage Protection (27)
Under / Over frequency protection (81U/81O)
Backup Impedance Protection (21G)
Generator Differential Protection (87 G)
Generator over current protection (50/51)
Breaker failure protection (50 BF)
Generator Thermal Overload Protection (49G)
Generator Inter turn fault protection
Generator under current for breaker tripping in normal shut down
Dead machine Protection
Voltage Restrained Over Current Protection (51V)
139
6.4.2 Generator transformer protection
The generator Transformer protection panel shall consists of redundant nuemarical relays each of
different make and covering the following protections
Transformer differential protection (87 GT)
Generator – Transformer overall Differential Protection. (87 OD)
(For units 1 & 7 three CT input measurements i.e., 3 winding differential shall be considered.
Others shall be two CT input measurement shall be considered)
Transformer over fluxing protection (99 GT)
Transformer O/C ground fault relay (51 N)
Transformer restricted E/F protection (64 GTR)
In addition the following protections shall also be monitored
Transformer oil temp. rise protection, Transformer winding temperature rise protection, Alarm
for abnormal oil level in Tr. Conservator, Buchholz relay protection for trf and OLTC, Oil flow and
cooling water flow’, oil surge relay.
6.4.2.1 Governer Auto/ Manual selection for trip grouping i.e., converting Class-B,C trips also into Class-
A trips when Governor is in Manual mode.
Auxiliary high speed closing and tripping relays
Master trip relays for Controlled action tripping, Emergency tripping, and electrical
tripping.Contact Multiplier relays , Auxiliary relays , Aux. CT’s, Test blocks , Stabilising resistors,
Trip Circuit monitoring relays, Trip relay coil healthy monitoring relays, DC supply monitoring
relays, Metrosils and other required items for completeness of scheme.
IF 3 SINGLE PHASE LIMBS ARE PROVIDED FOR GENERATOR TRANSFORMER ABOVE PROTECTIONS
SHALL BE CONSIDERED FOR ALL THE 3 PHASE LIMBS SEPERATELY.
6.4.2.2 Excitation Transformer
Over-current protection (50/51) and temperature raise protection
6.4.2.3 Auxiliary Tap of Protection for Unit-1 and Unit-7
Over-current protection (50/51) and temperature raise protection
6.4.3 400KV Transmission Line protection.
Main-I Numerical distance Protection suitable for use with permissive under-reach and over
reach transfer tripping. Relay shall have continuous self monitoring& diagnostic feature. Main-II
Numerical distance protection of different make and measuring technique to that quoted under
Main-I. Directional earth fault feature shall be available in both Main I and Main II distance
protection relays.
Main-1: Numerical Distance Protection Scheme (with Backup IDMT Earth Fault
Protection)(21+67N)
Main-2: Numerical Distance Protection Scheme (with Backup IDMT Earth Fault Protection)
(21+67N)
Requirements:
1. Shall have continuous self Monitoring diagnostic feature.
2. Shall be modular in construction
3. Shall be non-switched type with separate measurements for all phase to phase and phase to
ground faults with minimum 4 Zones with one reverse zone, carrier aided scheme.
4. Shall have stepped time – distance characteristics for all zones.
5. Shall have Directional mho or quad or other suitably shaped characteristic for all zones.
6. Capable of single & Three Phase Tripping
140
7. Capable of operation for close-up three phase faults and Switch On To Fault (SOTF).
8. Adjustable Characteristic angle to match the Line angle where ever applicable.
9. Accuracy of better than or equal to 5% of set value for reach measurement in Zone-1 and
better than or equal to 10% of set value for other zones.
10. Accuracy of better than or equal to 5% of set value for time measurement for all zones.
11. Variable residual compensation.
12. Shall include power swing detection feature for selective blocking, as required.
13 Shall include suitable Fuse-failure protection to monitor all types of fuse failure and block the
protection.
14. Includes a directional backup IDMT earth fault relay with normal inverse characteristic as per
IEC-60255-3 as a built in feature or as a separate unit.
15. Must have current reversal guard feature.
16. Have built-in supervision & testing facility.
17. Includes continuous DC supervision.
18. LED’s are to be available on each scheme for represent the operation.
19. Shall have resetting of less than 55 milliseconds (include the resetting time of trip relays.
20. Shall have carrier inter tripping facility
Main-I & Main-II should be of Different Types, Different measurement techniques, Different
Hardware, Different algorithm. Different manufacturer and these shall not be duplicated.
Two Stage over Voltage Protection:
Requirements:
1. Monitor all three Phases.
2. If distance schemes having in built feature of 2 stages over Voltage protection, is accepted but
this can be enabled in both distance schemes.
3. If distance schemes having in built feature of single stage over voltage protection, stage-1 is
accepted in both distance schemes. For stage-2 external numerical relay has to be provided.
4. Have high drop off to pickup ratio greater than 95%.
5. Stage-1 shall monitor one phase to Phase voltage and stage-2 shall monitor all three phase to
Phase voltages and each stage shall be provided with its associated timer.
6. Have an adjustable setting range of 100-130% of rated voltage with adjustable time delay
range of 0.5 to 10 seconds for the first stage.
7. Have an adjustable setting range of 100-200% of rated voltage with adjustable time delay
range of 0 to 100 milliseconds for the second stage.
8. Be tuned to power frequency.
9. Shall have independent alarm and trip outputs available for each phase and stage for breaker
trip relay, event logger and other scheme requirements.
10. Provide separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage relays.
Auto-Reclosure Relay:
Requirements:
1. It should be numerical relay
2. In built function of Distance scheme is not allowed.
3. One relay for each circuit breaker when circuit is connected for Transmission line is to be
provided.
141
4. Have single phase or/and three phase reclosing facilities.
5. Have a continuously variable single phase dead time range of 0.1 to 2 seconds.
6. Have a continuously variable three phase dead time range of 0.1 to 2 seconds.
7. Have a continuously variable reclaim time range of 5 to 25 seconds.
8. Incorporate a four position selector switch from which single phase/ three phase / single &
three phase auto reclosure and non auto reclosure mode can be selected. Alternately, the
mode of auto-reclosing can be selected through programming.
9. Having facilities for selecting check synchronizing or dead line charging features. It shall be
possible at any time to change the required feature by reconnecting of links.
10. Shall have selection among off/single shot/two shot/three shot either through selector switch
or through software selectable.
11. In Multi circuit breaker arrangement it is desirable to have a priority arrangement. A natural
priority is that the circuit breaker near the bus bar is reclosed first. In case of faults on two
lines on both sides of TIE circuit breaker is reclosed after the outer circuit breakers. The outer
circuit breakers do not need a priority with respect to each other.
12. Suitable relays for synchronism check and Dead Line charging should be included in the
overall auto-reclosure scheme.
6.4.4.1 400KV/11KV Station Transformer Protection
Main: Station Transformer Differential Protection (87ST).
Requirements:
A. Shall be Numerical relay.
B. Be triple pole type with individual phase indication.
C. Have through fault restraint features for external faults with an adjustable or multi-bias
setting.
D. Have magnetizing inrush restraint features and also be stable for inrush under normal over
fluxing conditions, Magnetizing inrush proof feature shall not be achieved through any
intentional time delay e.g. use of timers to block relay operation.
E. Shall have unrestricted instantaneous highest over current unit operation which is unaffected
by inrush.
F. Have one bias winding per phase and per CT input.
G. Have an adjustable operating current.
H. Have operating time not greater than 30msecs at 5 times setting.
I. Have facility for ratio and phase angle correction either through auxiliary transformer or
through in built provisions.
J. It should have harmonic restraint circuits to prevent incorrect operation when generators and
unit transformers are energized from the system.
K. The scheme shall have facility for ratio and phase angle correction either through auxiliary
transformer or through inbuilt provisions or programming.
Backup: Station Transformer Directional Over Current & Earth Fault Protection with high set
feature.
1. HV side 400 KV Side (67 P+N).
2. LV Side 11 KV side(67P + N)
Requirements:
142
B. Shall have three over current and one earth fault elements in composite unit.
C. Have IDMT Characteristic with directional Feature ( HV side relay direction on LV side)
D. The scheme shall include necessary VT FFR for alarm.
E. Over current relay shall have a variable setting range 50-200% of rated current.
F. Earth fault relay shall have a variable setting range 20-80% of rated current.
G. Over current relay shall have an adjustable characteristic angle which is generally 30 / 45
degrees lead.
H. Earth fault relay shall have an adjustable characteristic angle which is generally 45 / 60 degrees
lag.
I. Over current relay shall include high set unit having low transient over reach and variable
setting range typically 500-2000% of rated current.
J. Earth fault relay shall include high set unit having low transient over reach and variable setting
range typically 200-800% of rated current.
K. Shall include LED’s for indication for type of fault.
Station Transformer over Flux protection
1. 400 KV side HV over flux relay (99ST HV).
Requirements:
B. Shall be Phase to Phase connected.
C. Operate on the principle of measurement of voltage to frequency ratio.
D. Have inverse time characteristics compatible with transformer over fluxing.
E. Provide an independent alarm with time delay continuously adjustable between 0.1 to 6 secs
at a value of V/F adjustable between 100% to 130% of rated value.
F. Have a high resetting ratio of 98% or better.
G. Shall be provided both on HV and LV side of transformer.
H. Be acceptable as an in built feature of Numerical backup directional over current & Earth fault
relay for HV and LV and in built function of other relays is to mentioned and it will be evaluated
at the time of finalization.
Station Transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64 HV REF)
Requirements:
B. Shall be Tripple Pole Type.
C. Be of Current / Voltage Operated high impedance type.
D. Be tuned to the system frequency.
E. Have a suitable non-linear resistor/s to limit the peak voltage to 1000 volts.
F. Have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1Amp or have a suitable voltage setting range.
G. Inbuilt function of any other relay is not acceptable.
H. As per CBIP recommendations wherever separate Phase wise CT’s are available on neutral side
of Transformer, triple pole High impedance relay may be provided instead of single pole REF
Relay.
Station Transformer Backup Earth Fault Protection (51NCT ST)
1. Requirements:
143
2. It should be Numerical relay.
3. Shall monitor the current in ST Neutral
4. Shall be Single Pole Type.
5. Be definite time characteristic.
6. Have an adjustable time setting range of 10-100% of rated current.
7. Inbuilt function of any other relay is not acceptable
IF THE SINGLE NUMERICAL RELAY WITH ALL THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE TRANSFORMER
MENTIONED ABOVE ARE OFFERED IT SHALL BE OFFERED WITH REDUNDANT CONFIGURATION
KEEPING THE REDUNDANT RELAY OF DIFFERENT MAKE.
Transformer oil temp. rise protection, Transformer winding temperature rise protection, Alarm
for abnormal oil level in Tr. Conservator, Buchholz relay protection for trf and OLTC, Oil flow and
Master trip relays for tripping. Contact Multiplier relays , Auxiliary relays , Aux. CT’s, Test blocks ,
Stabilising resistors, Trip Circuit monitoring relays, Trip relay coil healthy monitoring relays, DC
supply monitoring relays, Metrosils and other required items for completeness of scheme.
6.4.4.2 400 KV Bus Reactor Protection:

Bus reactor Directional Over Current & Earth Fault Protection with high set feature.
HV side 400 KV Side (67 P+N).
Requirements:
B. Shall have three over current and one earth fault elements in composite unit.
C. Have IDMT Characteristic with directional Feature. The scheme shall include necessary VT FFR
for alarm.
D. Over current relay shall have a variable setting range 50-200% of rated current.
E. Earth fault relay shall have a variable setting range 20-80% of rated current.
F. Over current relay shall have an adjustable characteristic angle which is generally 30 / 45
degrees lead.
G. Earth fault relay shall have an adjustable characteristic angle which is generally 45 / 60 degrees
lag.
H. Over current relay shall include high set unit having low transient over reach and variable
I. Earth fault relay shall include high set unit having low transient over reach and variable setting
range typically 200-800% of rated current.
J. Shall include LED’s for indication for type of fault.
Bus reactor over Flux protection
1. 400 KV side HV over flux relay (99ST HV).
Requirements:
B. Shall be Phase to Phase connected.
C. Operate on the principle of measurement of voltage to frequency ratio.
D. Have inverse time characteristics compatible with transformer over fluxing.
144
E. Provide an independent alarm with time delay continuously adjustable between 0.1 to 6 secs
at a value of V/F adjustable between 100% to 130% of rated value.
F. Have a high resetting ratio of 98% or better.
G. Be acceptable as an in built feature of Numerical backup directional over current & Earth fault
relay in built function of other relays is to be mentioned and it will be evaluated at the time of
finalization.
Bus Reactor Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64 REF)
Requirements:
B. Shall be Triple Pole Type.
C. Be of Current / Voltage Operated high impedance type.
D. Be tuned to the system frequency.
E. Have a suitable non-linear resistor/s to limit the peak voltage to 1000 volts.
F. Have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1Amp or have a suitable voltage setting range.
G. Inbuilt function of any other relay is not acceptable.
H. As per CBIP recommendations wherever separate Phase wise CT’s are available on neutral side
of Reactor, triple pole High impedance relay may be provided instead of single pole REF
Relay.
Bus Reactor Backup Earth Fault Protection (51NCT ST)
1. Requirements:
2. It should be Numerical relay.
3. Shall monitor the current in ST Neutral
4. Shall be Single Pole Type.
5. Be definite time characteristic.
6. Have an adjustable time setting range of 10-100% of rated current.
7. Inbuilt function of any other relay is not acceptable
IF THE SINGLE NUMERICAL RELAY WITH ALL THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS OF THE BUS
REACTORMENTIONED ABOVE ARE OFFERED IT SHALL BE OFFERED WITH REDUNDANT
CONFIGURATION KEEPING THE REDUNDANT RELAY OF DIFFERENT MAKE.
Reactor oil temp. rise protection, Reactor winding temperature rise protection, Alarm for
abnormal oil level in Tr. Conservator, Buchholz relay protection for trf and OLTC, Oil flow and
Master trip relays for tripping.Contact Multiplier relays , Auxiliary relays , Aux. CT’s, Test blocks
,Stabilising resistors, Trip Circuit monitoring relays, Trip relay coil healthy monitoring relays, DC
supply monitoring relays, Metrosils and other required items for completeness of scheme.
IF 3 SINGLE PHASE LIMBS ARE PROVIDED FOR REACTOR ABOVE PROTECTIONS SHALL BE
CONSIDERED FOR ALL THE 3 PHASE LIMBS SEPERATELY.
As per general protection philosophy/CBIP manual on protections, if any additional protections
required are to be envisaged with numerical relays.
145
6.4.4.3 400 KV Bus coupler &Sectionaliser Protection:
Bus Coupler &Sectionaliser Over Current Protection with high set feature.
Requirements:
B. Shall have three over current elements in composite unit.
C. Have IDMT Characteristic.
D. Over current relay shall have a variable setting range 50-200% of rated current.
E. Over current relay shall have an adjustable characteristic angle which is generally 30 / 45
degrees lead.
F. Over current relay shall include high set unit having low transient over reach and variable
G. Shall include LED’s for indication for type of fault.
6.4.5 400 kV bus bar protection
1 LBB / BFR / CBF / Stuck Breaker Protection
Requirements:
A. Shall be Numerical Relay
B. In built function of Main-1 & Main-2/Backup is not accepted.
C. In built function of Numerical Bus-Bar scheme is accepted.
D. One relay for each circuit breaker is to be provided.
E. Be triple pole type.
F. Be suitable for 220V DC.
G. Have an Operating time of less than 15 milliseconds.
H. Have a resetting time of less than 15 milliseconds.
I. Have three over current elements.
J. Have a setting range of 20-80% of rated current.
K. Have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated current irrespective of setting.
L. Have a timer with continuously adjustable setting range of 0.1 to 1 sec
M. Have a necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
N. The other requirements of above protection as per CBIP recommendations Publication No:
274.
O. If offered BUSBAR scheme is Centralised Architecture LBB standalone Numerical relay shall
be offered.
P. The offered LBB shall be provided in associated CB relay Panel. If LBB is inbuilt function of
BUSBAR protection the associated Bay Unit / Peripheral Unit shall be provided in associated
CB Relay Panel.
400KV Bus Bar Protection
Main-1: Numerical Low Impedance Distributed/Centralised Architecture BUSBAR Scheme
(87BB1)
Main-2: Numerical Low Impedance Distributed/Centralised Architecture BUSBAR Scheme
(87BB2)
Main-I & Main-II shall be of Different Manufacturer/ Different make either star topology or
Redundant Ring Topology.
146
Requirements:
A. The BUSBAR Scheme at POLAVARAM Hydroelectric Project is Double Bus with Sectionaliser
(on both buses) and Bus couplers (2 nos.) System.
B. Bus bar protection shall be Low Impedance Numerical Differential Relay
C. Redundant (87BB Main-1 & 87BB Main-2) BUSBAR Protection of different Make with
Distributed/Centralisedarchitecture shall be provided. Duplicated protections invariably
employ separate DC circuits and CT cores. They send trip impulses to separate Trip systems
(96 BB1 & 96 BB2) trip coils and use separate isolator position auxiliary contacts. Cross
tripping of both trip coils is accepted.
D. Have a maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of faults of 15
milliseconds at 5 times setting value.
E. Operate selectively for each bus bar.
F. Give 100% security up to 50KA fault level. For 400KV.
G. In corporate clear zone indication.
H. Be a phase segregated and triple pole type.
I. Incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondary against any possible opencircuit and if it
occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection inoperative.
J. Provide independent zones of protection. If the bus bar section is provided then each side
bus section shall have separate set of bus bar protection schemes.
K. Have an inbuilt algorithm for check zone protection and over current element protection of
rate of rise of current for regular and during the fault.
L. Include individual high speed electrically reset tripping relays for each feeder.
M. Be transient free in operation.
N. Includes continuous DC supervision.
O. Not cause tripping for the differential current below the load current of heaviest loaded
feeder. Bidder shall submit application check for the same.
P. Include protection IN/OUT switch for each zone.
Q. Have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
R. Having features of Disturbance handling & Event recording facility.
S. Shall have continuous self Monitoring diagnostic feature.
T. Be modular in construction.
U. Bus having 12 Generators, 2 Station Transformers, 2 Bus reactors, 2 Lines and 2 bus
sectionalisers .
V. The offered BUSBAR Scheme shall be suitable for further expansion of another 2 bays and
shall be provided now along with relay as a Mandatory spares. (This is Part of BUSBAR
Scheme).
6.4.6 Master Trip Relays for Tripping (86 Gr-A & Gr-B)
The Master Trip Relays (86Gr-A/Gr-B) are to be provided for each Circuit Breaker in CB Relay
panel. They should be segregated as Group-A & Group-B Tripping as per the recommendations of
CBIP Manual Publication No: 274.
Trip matrix for Generator Transformer, Station Transformer, required for implementing class
A/B/C tripping schemes will be provided by the contractor and will be indicated in block interlock
diagrams to be submitted to match the recommendations of CBIP Manual Publication No: 274.
147
6.4.7 Fault Locator
Distance to fault Locator is recommended to be provided as a standard for all 400KV Lines. It
should be in-built function of Main-1 & Main-2 Distance protection. Distance to fault Locator
feature shall be available if external Fault / Disturbance recorder is provided in additions to
Main-1 & Main-2.
6.4.8 Fault / Disturbance recorder
1. Disturbance recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be used to record the graphic
form of instantaneous values of Voltage and Current in all three phases, Open delta Voltage and
Neutral Current, open or closed positions of relay contacts and Breaker during the system
Disturbances.
2. Built in feature of Main Distance relays are accepted, but it should be configured in Both
Distance schemes for 100% Redundancy. In case of Transformers 87T & 64T relays should have
this feature.
3. The Disturbances Recorders in a station are to be synchronized with GPS.
4. The Disturbance Recorder shall have minimum 12 analog and 16 Digital Channels.
5. The acquisition units shall acquire the fault data for the pre-fault and post fault period and
transfer them to evaluation unit automatically to store in the hard disk.
6. The disturbance recorder shall also be available in COMTRADE format (IEEE standard – Common
Format for Transient Data Exchange for Power System - COMTRADE)
7. It should operate on 220V DC.
8. Pre-fault time shall not be less than 100 msecs and post fault time shall not be less than 2 secs
with a facility to adjust pre-fault and post-fault times . The total memory of acquisition unit shall
not be less than 50 secs.
9. Scan rate shall be 1000MHZ.
6.4.9 Sequence OF Event recorder :

The event recorder is used to record the state of switch yard equipment and relays and
occurrence of alarms. The equipment also records events recorded by disturbance recorder also
as changes in digital inputs i.e.. operation and resetting of relay contacts and switching of primary
plant with in the substation.
6.4 10 Energy Meters:
The accuracy of TRIVECTOR Meters shall be 0.2 S Class.
It shall have a Built in Clock and calendar and it shall be synchronized by GPS time synchronization
equipment. The meter shall normally operate with power Drawn from VT Supplies
Even single phase PT is sufficient for Operation of Meter.
An alternative Option like battery backup shall be available at the time PT supply is absent, to
read & Transfer the data is required.
An Automatic backup shall be provided by a built in life time battery and shall not need
replacement for at least ten years with a continuous VT Interruption of at least 2 years.
It shall have optical port at the front of the meter for data collection by a hand held device.
It shall have means to communicate with SCADA system.
Separate pulse rate shall be provided for MWH & MVARH from separate devices.
6.4.11 Bay Control Unit:
1. It shall accept direct connection of CT & VT and Having a facility of Measurement of Current,
Voltage, frequency, MW, MVAR, Power factor and the parameters are to be transferred to
station unit
2. It shall act as a data concentrator for IEC 61850/ to transfer the data to station unit.
148
3. It shall have a facility to accept input of 4-12-20mA of external devices.
4. For Measurement of Bus Voltages and Frequencies and Control and Operation of Bus Isolators
and earth switch interlocks for bus shall be provided with 4 Nos BCUs (one for each BUS) and
provided in BUSBAR Protection Panel.
5. It shall have a sufficient BO/DO / Control Output relays for Control & Operation and Interlock
execution with contact rating sufficient to drive field equipment directly.
6. It shall have a sufficient BI/DI/ Optos for Monitoring.
7. They can work on auxiliary supply of 220V DC or AC.
NOTE: The functional requirement and characteristics of the relays specified are the minimum
required. Any additional protection required to meet statutory requirement / Guidelines/
considered necessary by the contractor shall also be provided by him. The responsibility of
establishing the equivalence or superiority of relays offered vis-à-vis that of the specification rests
with the contractor. The Protection scheme with all the drawings shall be submitted and got
approved before finalizing the scheme
6.4.12 Configuration of Control & Relay panels:
1 400KV BUSBAR and Common Control Panel 1 No
2 400KV Genratoe,GT Control & Protection Relay Panels 12 Nos
3 400KV Line CB Control & Relay Panels 2Nos
4 400KV Line Protection Panel 4 Nos
5 400KV ST CB Control & Relay Panel 1 No
6 400KV ST Protection Panel 1 No
7 400KV Bus reactor control & Protection panels 2 no.s
2Nos for bus couplers &
8 Bus Coupler & Sectionaliser control & Protection panels
2Nos for Bus Sectionalisers.
400KV BUSBAR & Common Control panel:

Bay Control Units (If applicable)for Monitoring Bus Voltages, Frequencies
1 and Operation & Control for Bus Isolators and interlocks for Bus Earth 4 Nos
Switches and Contact Multipliers. (One BCU for each Bus)
2 BUS Bar Central Unit (87BB1 & 87BB2) 2 Nos
3 DC Selector Switch for each Central Unit 2 Nos
4 BUSBAR Reset Push Button for each BUSBAR Central Unit 2 Nos
5 BUSBAR in/out switches for each BUSBAR 1 Set
6 DC Supply Supervision Relays 2 Nos
7 Auxiliary Relays for Bus Isolator Operations 1 Set
DC Distribution with MCBs to each PU Located in respective CB Relay
8 1 Set
Panels.
9 Bus PT Distribution for each BUS to each Relay and Protection Panel. 1 Set
10 Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included.
400KV Line Main CB Control & Relay Panel

149
Sr
Item Description Qty
No
1 Bay Control Units for Line CB Bay Equipment Control, Operation, 1 No
Monitoring, Synchronisation & Interlocks with Mimic. The Bay Control
Unit has an automatic change over facility if one of the DC power supply
fails.
2 Numerical Auto Re-closure Relay Scheme Complete Scheme with Check 1 No
Synchronizing and Dead Line charging. (Part of BCU or Distance Relay is
acceptable)
3 Numerical Breaker Failure Relay. (BFR/CBF/LBB/ Stuck Breaker 2 No
Protection) (part of Bus Bar protection BU/PU)
4 Flag relays two element type for Circuit Breaker Troubles for Alarms/ 6 Nos
Event Logger / Disturbance Recorder.(Part of BCU is acceptable)
5 Trip Coil Supervision Relays. 6 Nos
6 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring/Supervision relays for Gr-A & Gr-B 2 Nos
7 3-Ph High Speed Master Trip Relays with Electrical Reset through BCU for 4 Nos
86Gr-A, 86Gr-B, 96BB1 & 96 BB2 including Supervision.
8 High Speed Single Phase Trip Relays with self resetting& Flag indication. 12 Nos
9 High Speed Auxiliary trip relays with flags and self resetting for Direct Trip 2 Sets
Channel-1 & Channel-2 Send, Receive & Trip for Alarms/ Event Logger /
Disturbance Recorder.
10 Auxiliary Relays for Control & Operation of Circuit Breaker & Isolators of
1 Set
Particular Bay from BCU.
11 Emergency Circuit Breaker TNC Switch for CB Open & Close. 1 No
12 Under Voltage Relay for Line Isolator Earth Switch Interlock circuit. (in 1 No
built of BCU is also accepted)
400KV Line Protection Panel

Sr
No
1 Main-1 Protection Scheme 21L1, along with Test Plug. 1 No
2 Main-2 Protection Scheme 21L2, along with Test Plug.& shall be of 1 No
different make &Algoritham
3 Over Voltage Protection Relay Scheme.(Stage-1, Stage-2) (Part of 1 Set
Distance Scheme is also accepted)
4 Distance to Fault Locator.(Part of Distance Scheme) 1 No
5 Fault Recorder (Part of Distance Scheme) 1 No
6 Disturbance Recorder (Part of Distance Scheme) 1 Set
7 Power Swing Block relay (Part of Distance Scheme) 1 set
8 Fuse Failure Relay (Part of Distance Scheme) 1 Set
9 High Speed Auxiliary trip relays with flags and self resetting for Direct Trip 1 Set
Channel-1 & Channel-2 Send, Receive & Fail.
150
10 220KV Bus PT Selection Latch Relays based on Isolator Logic 75A & 75B. 2 Nos
11 Bus PT / Line CVT Selection Switches for 21L1, 21L2 & Metering. 3 Nos
12 Carrier in /out Switches for 21L1 & 21L2 2 Nos
13 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring/Supervision relays for Numerical 2 Nos
Protection Relays
14 3-Ph Energy Meter for Registering Both Export & Import of Both MWH 1 No
(0.2 S cl) and MVARH (0.2 S Cl) with Test Terminal Block. The Energy
Meter supplied with RS232/485 with Modbus/ DNP 3.0 Protocol
15 Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included
in the quoted prices.
400KV Station Transformer CB Control & Relay Panels

1 Bay Control Units for ST HV CB Bay Equipment Control, Operation, 1 No
fails.
2 Numerical Breaker Failure Relay. (BFR/CBF/LBB/ Stuck Breaker 2 Nos
Protection) (Part of BUSBAR Protection Bay / Peripheral Units (87BB1 &
87BB2) each BUSBAR Protection)
3 Flag relays two element types for Circuit Breaker, Transformer Troubles 1 Set
for Alarms/ Event Logger / Disturbance Recorder. (inbuilt function of BCU
is acceptable)
5 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring / Supervision relays for Gr-A & Gr-B 1 Set
86Gr-A, 86Gr-B, 96BB1 & 96BB2 including Supervision and Electrically
resetable form BCU.
7 High Speed Inter-trip Relays to energize GR-A & Gr-B Trip Relays 1 Set
8 Auxiliary Relays for Circuit Breaker & Isolators remote Operation of
1 set
9 Emergency Circuit Breaker TNC Switch for CB Control & Operation. 1 No
10 3-Ph Energy Meter for Registering Both Export & Import of Both MWH & 1 No
MVAR (0.2S cl) with Test Terminal Block. The Energy Meter supplied with
RS232/485 with Modbus/ DNP 3.0 Protocol
400KV Station Transformer Protection Panel

Sr
No
1 Numerical 3-ph, 2 wdg, % biased Low Impedance Transformer 1 No
Differential Protection 87ST
2 Numerical 1-ph, 1 Pole, High Impedance Voltage / Current Operated 2 No
Transformer REF Protection for HV with necessary Non Linear Resistors
64THV
151
3 Directional Over Current and Earth Fault Relay with Non Directional High 1 No
Set Feature for HV 400KV Side 67HV
4 Directional / Non Directional Over Current and Earth Fault Relay with 1 No
Non Directional High Set Feature for HV 11KV Side 50/51/67LV along
with test plug.
5 Over Flux Protection for HV 400KV side 99 ST HV. (part of Differential 1 No
Protection accepted)
6 Standby Earth fault relay using Neutral HV Bushing CT 51NCT 1 No
7 Disturbance Recorder (Part of Differential Relays) 1 Set
8 400KV Bus Voltage selection Relays latch type for selecting PT. i.e. 475A, 2 Nos
475B.
9 Flag relays two element types for Transformer Trips & Troubles for 1 Set
Alarms/ Event Logger / Disturbance Recorder.
10 Transformer Over Load Relay 50 O/L. (Part of 87T1 or 67HV) 1 Set
11 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring / Supervision relays for Numerical 2 Nos
Protection Relays
12 PT Fuse Failure Relay for HV 1 No
13 Auxiliary PT for Open Delta for 400KV Side 1 Set
14 High Speed Protection trip Relays to energize GR-A & Gr-B Trip Relays of 2 Nos
Main CB HV Side and LV CB.
15 Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included
in the quoted prices.
Bidders can also offer one numerical relay with all the protections covered in which case
redundant relay of different make shall be provided.
400KV BUS Reactor CB Control & Relay Panels

1 Bay Control Units for Reactor CB Bay Equipment Control, Operation, 1 No
fails.
is acceptable)
resetable form BCU.
1 set
152
MVAR (0.2s cl) with Test Terminal Block. The Energy Meter supplied with
400KV Bus Reactor Protection Panel

Sr
No
Reactor REF Protection with necessary Non Linear Resistors 64R
Set Feature 67
3 Over Flux Protection 99 ST. (part of Differential Protection accepted) 1 No
4 Standby Earth fault relay using Neutral Bushing CT 51NCT 1 No
6 400KV Bus Voltage selection Relays latch type for selecting PT. i.e, 475A, 2 Nos
475B.
7 Flag relays two element types for Transformer Trips &Troubles for 1 Set
Protection Relays
9 PT Fuse Failure Relay 1 No
Main CB.
Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included in the
quoted prices.
Bidders can also offer one numerical relay with all the protections covered in which case
400KV Bus coupler /Bus sectionaliser CB Control & Relay Panels
Sr
No
1 Bay Control Units for Bus coupler / Bus sectionaliser CB Bay Equipment 1 No
Control, Operation, Monitoring, Synchronisation & Interlocks with Mimic.
The Bay Control Unit has an automatic change over facility if one of the
DC power supply fails.
is acceptable)
153
resetable form BCU.
1 set
400KV Bus Coupler &Sectionaliser Protection Panel

Sr
No
1 Over Current and Earth Fault Relay with Non Directional High Set 51, 51N 1 No
2 Disturbance Recorder part of the above relay 1 Set
3 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring / Supervision relays for Numerical 2 No.s
Protection Relays
4 High Speed Protection trip Relays 1 set
Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included in the
quoted prices.
Bidders can also offer one numerical relay with all the protections covered, in which case
400KV Generator Protection Relay Panels
Sr
No
1 DC-1 & DC-2 Supply Monitoring / Supervision relays for Gr-A & Gr-B 1 No
86Gr-A, 86Gr-B, 86Gr-C, including Supervision and Electrically resettable
form BCU.
4 Generator protection relays (shall be redundant with different make) 2Nos
covering all the protections mentioned below.
a Generator Differential Protection (87G)
b Generator Loss of Excitation protection (40G)
c Negative sequence protection (46G)
d Thermal Over Load Protection (49G)
e 95% Stator Earth fault Protection (64s1)
f 100% Stator Earth fault Protection (64S2)
g Voltage Restrained over current Protection (51V)
154
h Over Current Protection (51G)
i Instantaneous over current protection (50G)
j Earth fault protection (51N)
k Instantaneous Earth fault Protection (50N)
l Pole Slip Protection (98G)
m Dead Machine Protection
n Overall differential protection (87OA)
o Split phase over current protection (Inter Turn)
P Reverse power protection (32G)
q Over voltage protection time delayed (59G1)
r Instantaneous over voltage protection (59G2)
s Under voltage protection (27G1)
t Instantaneous under voltage protection (27G2)
u Over frequency protection -2 step(81O)
v Under frequency protection -2 step(81U)
w Voltage balance protection
X Fuse failure protection
y Any other component required for satisfactory operation shall be deemed to be included.
400KV Generator Transformer Control & Protection Relay Panels

Sr No Item Description Qty
1 Bay Control Units for GT HV CB Bay Equipment Control, Operation, 1 No
fails.(if proposed)
3 Flag relays two element types for Circuit Breaker Troubles for Alarms/ 1 Set
Event Logger / Disturbance Recorder. (inbuilt function of BCU is
acceptable)
resetable form BCU.
1 set
MVAR (0.2 cl) with Test Terminal Block. The Energy Meter supplied with
155
400KV GT Protection Panel

Sr
No
Transformer REF Protection with necessary Non Linear Resistors 64T
Set Feature 67
3 Over Flux Protection 99 ST. (part of Differential Protection accepted) 1 No
4 Overall Differential protection 87OA (IF NOT PROVIDED IN GENERATOR 1No
PROTECTION PANEL)
5 Transformer Differential protection 87T 1No
6 Standby Earth fault relay using Neutral Bushing CT 51NCT 1 No
8 400KV Bus Voltage selection Relays latch type for selecting PT. i.e., 475A, 2 Nos
475B.
9 Flag relays two element types for Transformer Trips & Troubles for 1 Set
Protection Relays
11 PT Fuse Failure Relay 1 No
Main CB HV Side and LV CB.
6.4.13 33/11 KV service transformer Control &protection

One Breaker control panel for controlling the HV and LV breakers with Tripping relays, trip
circuit supervision relays, Breaker Control switch, DC supervision relays, 0.2s Class Energy
meter, necessary meters and indicating equipment etc.,
1 set of Over current & earth fault protection for 33 Kv side
1 set of Over current & earth fault protection for 11 Kvside(earth fault measurement shall be
Open delta voltage principle if the 11 KV system chosen to be delta)
1set of Transformer auxiliary protection relays for Buchholtz alarm, Trip, Winding and Oil
Temperature relays etc.
6.4.14 11 KV switchgear Protection for Indoor and Outdoor including control by bay control unit (if
applicable)
INDOOR 11 KV Panels
156
Over current & earth fault protection for 11 Kvside(earth fault measurement shall be Open delta
voltage principle if the 11 KV system is delta) for each incomer - 3 sets
Over current & earth fault protection for each 11 Kv outgoing feeders for station service
transformers – 4 nos.
andoutdoor to indoor inter connecting (Bus Ties) switchgear panels.----2 Sets
The scope shall be complete in all aspects so that no part of the system is left unprotected.
OUTDOOR 11 KV Panels
Over current & earth fault protection for 11 Kvside(earth fault measurement shall be Open delta
voltage principle if the 11 KV system is delta) for each incomer - 3 sets
Over current & earth fault protection for each 11 Kv Local feeders -2 no.sandoutdoor to indoor
inter connecting (Bus Ties) switchgear panels. ----2 Sets
The scope shall be complete in all aspects so that no part of the system is left unprotected.
Protection of 11KV switchgear and 11KV XLPE cables and 4 no.s 11KV/415 v transformers are also
to be considered.
Protection relays for 11KV side at 11KV switch gear incomer breakers shall be considered with
Neutral displacement relays and o/c relays. Master trip relays shall be provided for extending the
trippings to Incomers on HV side in case of fault on 11KV side if the same is considered to be
DELTA bus configuration.
6.4.15 Spares
The following Spares shall be supplied along with the equipment.
Sr
No
A 400KV Line Protection
1 400KV Feeder Main-1 Distance Scheme 21L1 1 No
2 400KV Feeder Main-2 Distance Scheme 21L2. 1 No
3 400KV line Over Voltage Protection Relays 59 L1&59L2 if offered relays are 1 Set
stand alone
B 400/11KV Station Transformer Protection
1 400/11KV ST Differential Protection Scheme 87ST. 1 No
2 400/11KV ST HV REF Protection Scheme 64 REF. 1 No
3 400/11KV ST HV Backup Dir O/C & E/F relay 67 HV. 1 No
4 400/11KV ST LV Backup Dir O/C & E/F relay 50/51/67 LV. 1 No
5 400/11KV ST HV Over Flux Relay 99ST HV. if offered relays are stand alone. 1 No
6 PT Fuse Failure Relay FFRif offered relays are stand alone 1 No
7 Stand by Earth fault relay for HV Neutral 51NCT if offered relays are stand 1 No
alone
If all the protections are provided in single relay with redundant configuration 1 No. for each relay
shall be provided
C 400KV Generator Transformer Protection
1 Generator Differential Protection Scheme 87G1. 2 Nos
157
2 Generator Differential Protection Scheme 87G2. 2 Nos
3 Generator Transformer Differential Protection Scheme 87GT. 2 Nos
4 Generator & Transformer Overall Differential Protection Scheme 87GT OD. 2 Nos
5 Generator Transformer HV Directional Over Current & Earth Fault 2 Nos
Protection Scheme 67GT.
6 Generator Transformer Restricted Earth fault Protection Scheme 64GT. 2 Nos
7 Generator Transformer Standby Earth fault Protection Scheme 51GT NCT. 2 Nos
8 Generator Transformer HV Over Flux Protection Scheme 99GT HV. 2 Nos
9 Generator Transformer HV Over Voltage Protection Scheme 59GT. 2 Nos
10 Generator Transformer HV Under Voltage Protection Scheme 27GT. 2 Nos
11 Generator HV Over Current Alarm Relay 50 HV GT if offered relays are 2 Nos
stand alone
12 PT Fuse Failure Relay FFRif offered relays are stand alone 2 Nos
13 Generator Transformer Stand by Earth fault Protection Scheme for HV 2 Nos
Neutral 51GTNCT if offered relays are stand alone.
If all the protections are provided in single relay with redundant configuration 1 No. for each relay
shall be provided
D BUSBAR & LBB Protection Scheme
1 LBB / PU/ BU offered as Part of BUSBAR scheme another 2 Nos as to be Part of BUSBAR
provided as a Mandatory spares which is mentioned in BUSBAR description Scheme
2 Non Directional O/C & E/F Relay 50/51(P+N). 1 No
E CB Control & Relay Panels in GIS ( As used)
1 Bay Control Units and others 2 Nos
2 DC Supply Monitoring relays. 4 Nos
3 Energy Meters with TTBs offered. 2 Nos
4 Trip Coil Supervision relays offered. 12 Nos
5 Selector Switches offered. 3 Nos
86Gr-A, 86Gr-B, 96BB1 & 96BB2 including Supervision offered.
7 High Speed Single Phase Trip Relays with self resetting& Flag indication 12 Nos
offered.
8 Emergency Circuit Breaker TNC Switch or Push Button for CB Opening Only 3 Nos
offered.
9 Auxiliary Relays for Closing Circuit Breaker and Isolator or any other switch 10 Nos
yard equipment.
10 Voltage selection Latch relays offered. 2 Nos
11 O/c & E/F relay used for 33KV, 11kv and 415v systems 1 no
If bidders feel that some items are very important which are not shown shall be quoted and it will
be finalized during detailed Engineering.
158
6.4.16 Panel Construction:
The panels shall be metal enclosed sheet steel cubicle, indoor, floor mounting freestanding
type. Panels shall be totally enclosed, dust and vermin proof with IP-52 degree of protection as
per IS: 2147. These shall be made out of at least 2.0mm thick cold rolled sheet steel. Suitably
reinforced to provide rigid flat level surfaces, resistant to vibration during transportation and
installation. Non-load bearing members such as doors or removable covers shall be at least
1.6mm thick. No welds rivets, hinges or bolt threads shall be apparent from outside. The color
of the panels will be RAL 7032. The panels shall have front and back opening doors. Earthing
bus of 25 X 6 mm shall be provided in the panels.
❖ The Test Plugs are to be provided for each individual Numerical Protection Relay (IED).All
Relays shall be Numerical unless otherwise specified and Suitable to IEC 61850 Protocol.
❖ All Panels are Front Opening preferably with Swing Door.
6.4.17 TESTS:
The equipment offered shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards. Type testing of
the relays shall be carried out based on general guide lines specified in CIGRE committee 34
report on simulator/Network Analyser /PTL for all relays offered including disturbance recorder,
fault locator and event logger shall meet fast transmit level-III as per IEC-255-22-4 & IEC-1000.
The control and relay panels shall be completely assembled and subjected to the various type,
routine and acceptance tests as per the relevant standards and respective equipment sections in
the presence of the purchaser's representative if desired by the purchaser.
Control &RelayPanel shall also be subjected to following tests:
i) Mechanical operation Test.
ii) Verification of degree of protection as per IS:2147.
iii) High voltage test/Insulator Resistance Test.
iv) Electrical control, interlock & sequential operation test.
v) Verification of wiring as per approved schematic.
Contractor shall carry out H.F. Disturbance test, Impulse test and fast transient test (as per
IEC 801-4) on principal numerical/static relays (of each type). Contractor shall carry out type
tests on all principal relays fault locators, Disturbance recorder & event logger etc. as per
relevant standards besides others as specified elsewhere in this specification.
6.4.18 AUTOMATIC MICROPROCESSOR BASED RELAY TEST KIT

ONE NO MICROPROCESSOR BASED AUTOMATIC RELAY TEST KIT for testing the NUMERICAL /
STATIC / ANALOG relays being supplied for line, transformer, generator and LT switch gear
protection with all necessary softwares and accessories shall be supplied for commissioning and
periodical maintenance and testing of the relays. The test kit shall be capable of testing the
Transducers and Energy meters with 0.2 S class of accuracy. Self calibrating facility shall be
available for the kit. The test kit shall be operable from a PC/ Laptop connected to it in addition to
manual operation when needed. All accessories shall be supplied with the Kit for complete testing
facility. The KIT Type shall be MEGGER MPRT/FREJA/DOBBLE/OMIKRON preferably with latest
versions for complete testing
6.4.19 TRAINING FACILITIES

A PC based training simulator system shall be provided which shall be independent of the main
control and monitoring system. It shall comprise a PC based operator workstation and a single
controller. The controller shall be connected to a PC computer allowing the simulation of inputs
and outputs starting/stopping sequence and facility for instructor interruption.
159
6.4.20IMPLEMENTATION OF SAS AND DISTURBANCE RECORDER EVALUATION
Complete substation Automation System shall be commissioned based on the IEC61850 protocol.
Disturbance records and events from the individual relays of various bays shall be captured
automatically when ever disturbance/event occurs and shall display on the dedicated workstation
provided for the same. The disturbance reports and event lists shall also be printableby the
operator on the dedicated laserjet printer provided for the same. The event lists shall be
arranged in chronological order automatically and provision for sorting the same baywise and
equipment wise shall be possible.
160
SECTION – VII
SUPPLY, ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF POWER HOUSE AUXILIARIES
7.1.0 11 KV ISOLATED PHASE BUSDUCT:

Aluminum, 3 phase, 11 KV, 6000 Amps Isolated phase bus duct (IPB) of continuous type, naturally
cooled complete with flexible connections, seal-off bushings, plates structural supports,
removable links, expansion bellows, erection and lifting devices, spares and all other accessories
as given below for each generator unit.
7.1.1 Provision of bus ducts for each unit as follows:
a) From Generator phase side to Generator Transformer
b) A Taping from Generator to Excitation Transformer and LAVT cubicle, and to Station
Auxiliary Transformer/Isolation transformer(5MVA,Delta/Delta) for Unit-1 and Unit-7.
c) From Generator Neutral side to form a star point after CT’s and the star point upto neutral
grounding transformer.
7.1.2 The following Isolating links shall be provided
a) Two sets of removable links shall be provided in the main run to facilitatedisconnection of
Generator & Generator transformer during testing, commissioning and maintenance.
b) One set of removable links shall be provided near tap off to unit excitation transformer
to facilitate disconnection, testing, commissioning & maintenance
c) One set of removable links shall be provided near tap off to Station Auxiliary Transformer
in units 1 &7 to facilitate disconnection, testing, commissioning & maintenance
d) One set of removable links shall be provided in tap off to LAVT cubicle to facilitate
disconnection during testing, commissioning & maintenance.
e) One set of Isolating links shall be provided on neutral side of duct
f) Any other item, links etc. that the contractor feels essential to facilitate easy maintenance
and operation of the system. Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have
been specifically mentioned in this specification but which are necessary for the
completeness of equipment and are required for satisfactory performance of the
equipment shall also be included in this offer.
7.1.3 SPECIFICATION FOR ISOLATED PHASE BUSDUCT
Enclosures
a. Each phase shall be enclosed in a weather-proof, dust-tight, non-magnetic aluminum
alloy enclosure.
b. The enclosure is to be designed for welded connection where possible.
c. The enclosure shall be minimum flux type to permit not more than five (5) percent of
total conductor flux outside the enclosure.
d. The enclosure cross-section, connecting members between enclosure section, flexible
and rigid joints and shorting links between phase enclosures shall be adequate to allow the
flow of longitudinal current required for the rated continuous currents of the bus without
overheating.
e. The enclosure shall be insulated at connections to the generator, transformers and other
equipment so that the longitudinal current will not flow through or be transmitted to any
connecting equipment. The insulation shall be non- deteriorating.
f. The bus enclosure shall have metallic or rubber to take care of expansion/ contraction
due to temperature changes. At equipment termination, this flexible connection checks the
transfer of vibration from terminal equipment. Flexible joints shall be provided in enclosures
at all points where the busduct terminates at equipment to withstand vibration, expansion/
161
contraction and at suitable intervals in any straight run of the busduct where expansion and
contraction would otherwise result in stresses in the supporting structures.
g. Inspection opening/split covers shall be provided to allow easy access for installation
inspection, replacement or repairs of the insulators, disconnects, bus connections and
terminations.
The inspection/split covers shall have reliable sealing arrangement with neoprene/rubber
gaskets in grooves.
h. Wall-frame assembly with support plates shall be provided where the bus duct penetrates
the building wall. For non-pressurized busduct, the wall frame shall be complete with seal
assembly of bushings to prevent exchange of air between indoor and outdoor portions of the
busduct.
i. Silica-gel breather shall be provided on both indoor and outdoor portions of the busduct
(shall not be required for pressurized busduct).
j. Filtered drains for drainage of condensate shall be provided at the lowest points and at
such locations where accumulation of condensate can be expected.(Shall not be required for
pressurized busduct).
k. The enclosures of all three phases shall be rigidly supported by cross members to
maintain parallel alignment.
l. Shipping length of the bus duct shall be as long as practicable within transport limitation
to reduce field assemble work.
m. Space heaters shall be provided in the bus duct to avoid condensation.
Will be Finalised during Detailed Engineering.
7.1.4 BUS CONDUCTOR
a. The bus conductor shall be of high conductivity, aluminum alloy or appear of Electrolytic
Grade, supported on wet process porcelain insulators or cast epoxy insulators.
b. The bus conductor shall be designed for welded connections except at equipment
terminations and bolted disconnect links.
c. Flexible connections shall be provided strategic locations to allow expansion and
contraction of the conductor. Flexible connection shall also be provided at all equipment
terminations&Shall be as per standards.
d. All contact surfaces shall be silver plated to ensure an efficient and trouble-free
connection and the hot spot temperature shall be limited to 105 degree centigrade. All
connection hardware shall be non-magnetic and shall have high corrosion resistance.
e. The bus conductor shall be sufficiently corona-free at rated voltage.
f. The bus conductor shall be designed to avoid skin effect.
7.1.5 Disconnect Link:

a. Removable bolted disconnect link can be provided in the bus for isolation of the
transformers and auxiliary equipment. However, wherever possible the flexible connections
can also act as disconnecting links. It is preferable to provide disconnect link at the tap off to
Lightning Arrestor, voltage transformer and surge protection (LAVT/PTSA) cubicles.
b. Disconnect link shall consist of a removable section of conductor and shall be so
constructed as to permit easy removal or reinsertion without alignment difficulties.
c. The bus on both sides of the link shall be rigidly supported so that the disconnect link is
equal in mechanical strength to any other section of the bus.
d. A minimum clearance of not less than specified phase to earth clearance shall be ensured
between the disconnected bus enclosures with the link removed.
162
e. The short circuiting bar with necessary hardware is to be provided to facilitate generator
testing and commissioning.
7.1.6 Insulators
a. Bus support insulators shall be interchangeable, high strength, wet process, fine glazed
porcelain/ epoxy resin cast insulators and shall be provided with creepage distance of not less
than 25mm per KV of highest system voltage or more depending on the pollution level at the
site.
b. Insulator shall be mounted in such a way so as to permit easy removal or replacement
without disassembly of the bus.
c. The conductor shall be either fastened on the insulator through fixed and slip joints or of
floating design with the bus bar held by insulators at 120 degree apart or single insulator so as
to allow conductor expansion or contraction without straining the insulator.
d. All metal parts of the insulator shall preferably of aluminum.
e. Additional insulators shall be provided at bends, tap-off etc.
7.1.7 Connections & Terminations:

a. The bus duct shall be provided with matching flanges/adopter boxes, seal-off bushings,
gaskets, fittings, hardware and supports required for termination of the bus duct at the
generator, transformers and other equipment. Seal off bushings are required to be provided
at generator termination and wall crossings of bus ducts (if required). If required, seal off
bushings can also be provided as an additional requirement at transformer side in case of
pressurized bus ducts but not mandatory.
b. Flexible connection shall be provided both for conductor and enclosures.
i. At all equipment terminations to provide for misalignment up to 25mm (1”) in all
directions.
ii. Between bus duct supported from building steel and that supported by turbine
foundation to prevent transmission of vibrations.
c. The equipment terminal connections shall be readily accessible and shall provide
sufficient air gap for safe isolation of the equipment during testing.
d. If the material of bus conductor and that of the equipment terminal connectors are
different then suitable bi-metallic connectors shall be provided. However, if silver plated
contracts are provided there is no need of bimetallistic strips.
e. Isolation barrier or seal off bushings shall be provided at the generator end of the busduct
. The space above the barrier at the generator side shall be ventilised through filtered
opening in the enclosure wall.
7.1.8. Shorting Link

a. Busduct shall be provided with the provision of shorting all three phases through pre-
fabricated shorting links having rating equal to continuous rated current of busduct main run
for drying out or short circuit test.
b. The link shall be complete with all hardware connections.
c. The links shall be suitable for shorting bus conductor/enclosures of three (3) phases after
generator phase current transformers in prefixed location.
d. The links shall be so designed with flexible connections that the bus insulators will not be
unduly stressed due to expansion/contraction during testing.
163
e. 2 Sets of Shorting links required for carrying of short circuit test of Generator shall be
supplied along with the first BUSDUCT.
7.1.9 Grounding
a. The electrically continuous bus enclosure shall not be used as the ground bus and two
separate eath buses of suitable size shall be run on both sides of the bus duct.Or as per
relevant Standards
All parts of the bus enclosure, supporting structures and equipment frames shall be
grounded.
b. Duplicate bolted type ground pad shall be provided to accommodate galvanized flat
grounding conductor of specified size at following locations:
i. Generator end of the bus.
ii. Generator transformer end of the bus.
iii. Auxiliary/Unit transformer end of the bus.
iv. Voltage transformer and surge protection cubicles.
v. Neutral grounding cubicle.
vi. Excitation transformer cubicle, (in case of Static Excitation System).
vii. Generator Circuit Breaker (if provided).
7.1.10. Supporting Structures:
a. All supporting structures required for hanging and/or supporting the complete busduct
shall be provided. These include all members, indoor/outdoor posts, bolts, slims, base plates,
beams, hangers, brackets, bracings and hardware.
b. All buses shall be adequately supported and braced to successfully withstand normal
operation, vibration, thermal expansion, short circuit forces and all specified design loads.
c. Support shall be designed to provide a tolerance of + 12mm (1/2’).
d. The indoor supports shall be in general of hanger supports while outdoor shall be
generally supported from the ground.
e. All steel members shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. All hardware shall be of
high strength steel with weather resistant finish.
f. Arrangement of support steel work shall be such as to prevent heating of structure
caused by circulating currents.
g. steel structures used for Busduct supports shall confirm to IS 2062: 1999or any other
international standard superior to the IS. Depending upon the loading pattern, composite/
buildup sections are formed with the help of extruded members. Necessary design
calculations of supporting structures shall be furnished.
All fabricated MS supporting structures shall be hot dip galvanized to prevent the structure
against corrosion and galvanizing should be according to IS 2629. While designing the
structures the load combination of dead load+short circuit force + wind/sesmic load are to be
taken.
7.1.11 Current Transformers
The following Current transformers shall be provided in Neutral side and Line side of
Generator in the bus ducts Burdens
164
7.1.12 Neutral side
Rating class burden Qty/Phase remarks
6000/1 Amp PS 3 Knee point voltage, magnetizing
current and resistance shall be
suitable for relay
6000 / 1 amp 0.5 30 VA 1 For AVR
7.1.13 Line side

Rating class burden Qty/Phase remarks
6000/1 Amp PS 2 Knee point voltage shall be
suitable for relay
6000 / 1 amp 0.2 30 VA 1 For metering& Excitation
6000 / 1 amp PS 1 spare
a. The current transformers shall be epoxy cast-resin, ring type, mounted within the busduct
enclosures and suitable for operation at an ambient temperature equal to rated bus bar
temperature. It may be in the range 90 degree to 100 degree Celsius.
b. The bus design shall permit removal or replacement of CTs without dismantling the bus
run or supports.
c. The CTs shall have polarity markings indelibly marked on them.
d. CT secondary leads will be brought out to separate terminal box mounted on or adjacent
to CT enclosure. From phase terminal boxes, Ct secondary leads shall be brought out
through non-magnetic metallic conduits to a master terminal box for external cable
connections.
e. The terminal boxes shall be dust-tight, weather-proof, fabricated from aluminum alloy
and complete with screwed cover for access to terminals and removable gland plate for
external cable connections.
f. The facility for shorting and grounding shall be provided at the terminal blocks. Mounting
arrangement of CTs shall be so designed so as to avoid equalizing connections between
the conductor and CT inner surface. CT secondary leads shall be brought out through non
magnetic metallic conduits to a marshalling box. All the terminal blocks shall be
disconnecting type KATDM4 of M/s.ELMEX make or equivalent.
NOTE: The Burden of Metering Core CTs and PTs Will be finalized during
detailedengineering based on the standards and as per the connected requirements and
calculations
7.1.14 Voltage Transformer and Surge Protection Cubicles (VT &SP)/ Lightning Arrestor and
Voltage Transformer cubicles (LAVT).
a. The VT & SP cubicles, one for each phase, shall be metal-clad, dust and vermin
proof, free standing dead front assemblies.
b. Each phase cubicle shall house upto three (3) voltage transformers, one(1)
lightning arrestor and one(1) surge capacitor, in separate compartments. Seal –
off bushings shall be used between the bus tap and cubicle and between
compartments.
c. Lighting arrestor shall be station class, hermetically sealed type, connected
between line and ground, specifically suitable for generator protection.
165
d. A discharge counter shall be provided for each lighting arrestor. The discharge
counter register shall be visible without having to open the compartment door.
e. The surge capacitor shall be non-inflammable and non-toxic type, single pole,
connected between line to ground.
f. The voltage transformer shall be epoxy cast resin type, suitable for normal
operation connected from line to ground and for 1.73 times rated line to ground
voltage under sustained emergency condition. They shall be mounted on draw
out type carriage. Suitable guide slots and stops shall be provided to ensure easy
withdrawal and positioning.
g. In the disconnected position, the voltage transformer primary and secondary
circuits shall be automatically disconnected and the primary fuse shall be visibly
grounded. The draw out frame shall be grounded at all times.
h. The high voltage winding of the voltage transformer shall be protected by current
limiting fuse mounted on top of the primary bushing. The fuse will be accessible
only in fully drawn out position.
i. The secondary leads from the voltage transformer shall be extended to a fuse and
terminal cabinet flush mounted on the compartment.
j. From phase cabinets the VT secondary leads shall be brought to a marshalling box
having sufficient number of terminals to accommodate all VT leads, facility for
making star points and removable plates with knockouts for external cable
connections.
k. VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only
at the terminal blocks, provided in the instrument transformer marshalling boxes.
Each phase of VT&SP Cubicles shall consist of the following.
7.1.15 Potential Transformer:
a) Type : 1 Phase, Epoxy Cast resin draw out type

b) Primary Voltage : 11 KV
c) Secondary Voltage : 110 V (Metering) - 0.2Class
110 V (Protection ) – 3 P class.
110 V (AVR ) – 0.2 class
d) Burden : 100 VA. each.
HV FUSES
a) Type : HRC
b) Full load current rating at 11 KV : 6 A (RMS)
c) Symmetrical fault rating. : 100 KA
LV FUSES.
a) Type : HRC
b) Continuous full load current rating of fuses : 10 A
c) Symmetrical fault rating of fuses : 50 KA
LIGHTNING ARRESTORS
a) Type : Gapless Metal Oxide
b) Voltage Class : 9 KV
166
CAPACITORS
a) Type : Single pole, Non – Inflammable/ Non-
toxic oilimpregnated
b) Voltage Rating : 18 KV
c) Capacitance : 0.25 Micro Farad
All the materials shall be of the quality as per the Indian or International Standards.
7.1.16 Neutral Grounding Cubicle

a. The transformer and resistor shall be located in separate cubicles adjacent to
each other. The cubicles shall have hinged access doors capable of being pad
locked.
b. The transformer cubicle and resistor cubicle shall be of sheet steel construction.
The resistor cubicle shall hot-dip galvanized screen sides.
c. The neutral grounding equipment shall be completely assembled, wired and
connected to the neutral bus tap through seal-off bushing.
d. The neutral grounding transformer shall be dry type, natural air cooled, single
phase, connected between generator neutral and ground.
e. The neutral current transformer shall be cast resin, ring type, suitably mounted to
permit easy removal or replacement.
f. The loading resistor shall be formed of non-ageing, corrosion resistant steel,
provided with necessary insulations and deigned for indoor service.
g. Alarm, protection and indication leads shall be wired up to terminal blocks that
shall be mounted in a dust tight enclosure suitable for flush mounting and having
a fully hinged cover with lock.
7.1.17 Cubicle and Control Panel/Cabinet
a. All cubicles, control panels and control cabinets shall be fabricated from cold
rolled sheet steel of minimum 2 mm thickness suitably reinforced to ensure
structural rigidity.
b. The degree of protection for all indoor cubicles shall be minimum IP55/IP52 for
outdoor/indoor locations respectively, except for neutral grounding resistor
enclosure which shall be minimum IP 23.
c. Each cubicle shall be equipped with space heater, internal illumination lamp and
ground bus.
d. Space heater and lamp shall be provided with individual ON-OFF switches. The
space heater shall be provided with thermostat.
e. Space heater shall be so sized and located as to maintain the temperature within
cubicle at least 50C above dew point.
f. The ground bus shall have provision for connection to external grounding
conductor of specified size.
WIRING:
a. All wiring shall be done with insulated stranded copper conductor of not less than
2.5 sq mm cross – section. Each wire shall be identified at both ends with wire
designation as per wiring diagrams.
167
b. Heat resistant type wires suitable to withstand specified busduct inside
temperature shall be used for wiring between CT secondary terminals to the
terminal box.
c. Terminal blocks shall be box-clamp type suitable for 2x2.5 sq mm copper
conductor with marking strips.
d. Not more than two wires shall be connected to one terminal. Spare terminals
equal to 20% of active terminals shall be provided.
e. Terminal for CT secondary leads shall have protection for shorting and grounding.
NAME PLATE:
a. Each disconnect link, voltage transformer compartment, surge protection
compartment and fuse block etc. shall be provided with name plates.
b. Material for name plate shall be Anodized aluminium,3mm thick, using white
letters on black background.
FINISH
a. Except for supporting steel structures, which shall be galvanized, all equipment
shall be finished with an undercoat of high quality primer followed by two coats
of synthetic enamel paints unless otherwise epoxy paints as specifically required.
b. The interior surface finish shall be as per manufacturer’s standard practice or
customer requirements. The shade of exterior surface finish shall be light grey
shade number 631 for indoor and battle ship grey shade number 632 for outdoor
as per IS-5, unless otherwise specified equivalent RAL standard can also be used.
c. Pretreatment consisting of degreasing, detesting etc. shall be done on all
fabricated parts before painting or galvanizing.
d. Paints shall be suitable to withstand heat and weather conditions. The paint shall
not scale-off or crinkle or get removed by abrasion due to normal handling.
e. Sufficient quantities of all paints and preservatives required for touching up at
sites shall be provided.
Shorting links required for carrying of short circuit test of Generator shall be supplied
along with first BUSDUCT
7.1.18 Spares
The following Spares shall be supplied along with the equipment
1. Flexible Jumpers : 1 set
2. Potential Transformer : 3 Nos. of each type
3. Current transformers : 3 Nos. of each type
4. Lightning arrestors : 3 Nos.
5. Surge Capacitors : 3 Nos.
6. NGT & NGR : 1 No
7. Rigid Jumpers : 1 set
168
7.2 11KV SYSTEM
The 11 KV system is considered to be DELTA system. However same can be reviewed during
detailed engineering based on the merits proposed by the bidder
7.2.1 11 KV OUTDOOR SUB STATION
The 11 KV sub station at outdoor near tail race shall consists of 3 incomers and 5 out
going breakers ( including spare) with one bus coupler in the configuration
The type of VCB’s / 11 KV VCB panels shall be finalized during detailed engineering
based on the convenience and place available
2 Nos. Out going feeders to Power house indoor 11KV panels and 2 nos. colony feeders
one each from each bus section, One Emergency DB/Spare feeder shall be provided.
Necessary AB switches, Earth switches along with necessary structures and PT and CT’s
are included in the scope of supply for 33KV incoming supply source side.
Incomer sources are from 33/11 Kv transformer, 2 Nos. of 1000 KVA D G Sets.
1000Amps 11KV Bus shall be formed in two sections with a Bus coupler for these sections
and erection including foundations and civil works.
Cabling and terminations with necessary trays and trenches required shall be erected as
per the standards and approved drawings. All cables shall be routed to bay control unit of
11 KV sub station
The following are in the scope of supply erection & commissioning including civil works
and foundations.( as per SLD)
11KV Vacuum Breaker cubicles, 800 Amps –
For incomer :3 nos. (2 Nos. DG incomers and 1 No. 33/11kv Transformer,
For Bus coupler :1 Nos.
For Outgoing feeders : 5 Nos.
Bus PT :2 Sets
for 33 KV incomer
AB switches :as required
Earth switches :As required
Line PTs : For all incomers
Structures :1 LOT
Conductor or cables :As required
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 11KV OUT DOOR TYPE VCB SCOPE:
This specification covers the manufacture, assembly, stage testing, inspection and testing before
supply and delivery at site and erection of 9 no.s, 11kV, 3 Pole, 50 Hz Vacuum Circuit Breakers
with Current Transformers and Control & Relay Panels along with necessary structures and civil
foundation required to mount at out door 11 KV sub station.
The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and
trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed to be within the scope.
STANDARDS :
The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications/ IEC
Standards, with latest amendments indicated below.
Indian Standard Title International &
Internationally
recognized standard
169
ISS-13118/1991 General requirements for Circuit breakers for voltage IEC 62271-100-1/2001
above 1000V.
ISS-2705/1992 Current Transformers
ISS-3156/1992 Voltage Transformers
ISS-2099/1986 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V.
ISS-2633/1964 Methods of testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
articles.
ISS-3231/1987 Electrical relays for power system protection
ISS-1248/1983 Specification for Ammeters & Voltmeters
ISS-335/1983 New insulating oils Electrical Clearances IEC 71 (For oils in CTs)
ISS-2147/1962 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear & control gear
PRINCIPAL PARAMETEERS :
CIRCUIT BERAKERS : 11 KV
Service Out door
Type Vacuum Porcelain clad (Outdoor)
No. of Poles/Phases Three
Rated Voltage (Nominal/Max.) 11/12kV
Rated frequency 50 Hz
System of earthing NA as it is a DELTA BUS
Impulse withstand Voltage 75 KVp
One minute power frequency withstand 28 kV(rms)
voltage.
Power frequency withstand 2 kV(rms)
voltage on Auxiliary circuit:
Rated Current 1250/800 A
Rated breaking Capacity Symmetrical 40 kA
Rated short time withstand current for 3 40 kA
sec
Rating making capacity 2.55 times Rated breaking Current
Total break time 3 Cycles(max)

Bushing Insulator creepage distance Not less than 300mm
Mounting Steel Structure
Operating duty for gang operation. O-0.3sec.-CO-3min.-CO.
Operating Mechanism Motor operated and Manual spring charged. The standard
DC voltage for the operating devices shall be 220V DC.
Operation Voltage for motor spring charging mechanism
shall also be 220 V DC. Normally the breaker shall be
operated by power and there shall be provision for manual
operation
170
Terminal connector Material (for outdoor) Aluminium suitable for PANTHER conductor
Limits of temperature rise The limits of temperature rise shall be in accordance with
relevant standard (IEC 62271)
Requirement of simultaneity of poles The maximum difference between instants of contact

touching during closing and the maximum difference
between the instant of contacts separation during opening
between 3 poles shall not exceed one half cycle of the
rated frequency. The breaker shall open and close
simultaneously on all the three phases for fault on any
phase and or on all the phases
Protection The Breakers shall be provided with 3 Over current (3O/L)
and one Earth fault (1 E/L) IDMT relays. with min. setting
5% having CTs of suitable ratios with 1A secondary. 220V
DC auxiliary relays are to be provided for power
transformer protection with 2 NO + 2 NC contacts & Hand
reset type.
Pad locking for both mechanism box, control panel should be provided
All angles 65 mm X 65 mm X 6 mm minimum size for breaker structure should be provided
Control and operation of these breakers shall be local or from control room through bay control unit
where all the I/o s are wired to it and the same is communicated for main control unit.
The relays shall be static/ numerical relays with IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time)
characteristics and also with high set / instantaneous elements for high fault currents and shall
comply with relevant standard. The accuracy class of relays shall be clearly specified as per IS.
Auxiliary Electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply system.
Power devices and lighting 240V single phase-4 wire 50c/s. and lighting neutral
grounded AC supply.
Operating DC supply 220VDC ungrounded 2wire
3 O/L + 1 E/L IDMT, Numerical relay
220 V DC (OR) SELF POWERED
auxiliary DC supply range
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
Rated Voltage 11kV
Type Single Phase outdoor oil cooled vacuum
impregnated CTs forout door VCBs.
Earthing
Insulation level
Nominal System Voltage 11kV
Maximum System Voltage 12kV
Impulse withstand voltage 75kVp
One minute power frequency 28kV
withstand voltage
Frequency
50 Hz +/- 5%
171
Transformation Ratio suitable ratio with 1A secondaries
Rated Secondary Current Amps
Core-I (Protection),Core-II (Metering) 1A , 1A
Rated Output (VA)

Protection 15
Metering 15
Differential protection ----
Class of Accuracy
Protection (Core-I) 5P
Metering (Core-II) 0.5
Differential protection (core-III) ---
Short time Thermal current The short time thermal current should suit the
breaker rupturing capacity and duration to suit
the maximum tripping time.
Accuracy limit factor 10 for protective core
ISF < 5 for metering core
Current transformers stand cross bracing should be provided
STANDARDS: The equipment shall conform in all respects to the latest version of relevant IS indicated
below as applicable.
1. Current Transformers : IS 2705 (Part I to IV)
2. HV Porcelain Bushings : IS 2099
3. Oil : IS 335
4. Galvanisation : IS 2633
5. Primary Terminals : IS 10601
6. Insulation coordination : IS 2165
7. Dimensions of porcelain Bushings : IS 3347
8. Method of high voltage testing : IS 2071
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :
The following technical particulars are common for outdoor/Indoor VCBs except where
specifically mentioned.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS :
The equipment will be installed out door in hot, humid and tropical atmosphere
The maximum temperature in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceed the
permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards.
The equipment shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal stresses of listed short
circuit current without any damage or deterioration.
The safety clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevant standards.
All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection, involving special treatment
of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion
172
TYPE AND DUTY
The 11KV circuit breakers shall be outdoor, 3-pole, vacuum type having internal isolation without
any sequential interlock.
The duty of the circuit breaker shall involve satisfactory interruption of short circuit currents as
listed in principal parameters.
The breaker shall be capable of interruption of reactive current (lagging/leading) without under
/over voltage
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES :
GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The circuit breaker shall have fixed type construction consisting three single identical poles,
complete with a gang operated sealed porcelain housing conforming to IP-65 protection
conforming to relevant standards. All three poles of circuit breaker shall be linked together
electrically/mechanically to ensure simultaneous closing of all poles.
The trip free operating mechanism, 3 phase inter connection links shall be completely
accommodated in the base. There shall be sufficient clearance between live parts of the circuit
breakers and the ground. The circuit breaker shall be completed with operating mechanism,
other accessories/materials to ensure complete assembly and proper functioning. The current
transformers shall be externally mounted on the supporting structure integrated with circuit
Breaker structure. Terminal connectors suitable for ACSR conductor should be supplied for
Circuit Breakers and Current Transformers. The circuit breaker shall be provided with proper
standard earthing and with terminal earth bar for earthing connection. Suitable inter -
connection between Circuit Breaker terminals and Current Transformer Terminals are to be
provided.
NOTE :
Neither the circuit breaker nor any part of the switchgear or its supporting structures shall be
permanently strained due to vibration etc., when making or breaking the rated short circuit
currents.
The vacuum interrupter assembly used in the circuit breakers shall be interchangeable with
indigenously available vacuum interrupters (make and type shall be mentioned).
MAIN CONTACTS AND ARC QUENCHING CHAMBER:
The main contacts shall have adequate area and contact pressure for carrying rated continuous
and short time currents without excessive heating liable to cause pitting and welding.
The tips of the arcing & main contacts shall be heavily silver plated.
The contacts that are adjustable to allow for wear, shall be easily replaceable and shall have
minimum moveable part and adjustments. The arc-quenching device shall be of robust
construction and shall not require any critical adjustments. The devices shall be easily accessible
and removable for access to the breaker contacts.
AUXILIARY CONTACTS:
Each breaker shall be provided with Four (4) normally open and Four (4) normally closed
electrically separate spare Auxiliary contacts in addition to those required for its own operation
and indication.
The auxiliary contacts shall be rated for 10A for AC and 5A for DC
INSULATORS :
Bushing insulator for circuit Breakers shall comply wherever possible with relevant Indian
standard for High voltage porcelain bushings.
Insulators shall be wet process porcelain, brown glazed and free from all blemishes. Ferrous
metal parts and hardware shall be hot-dip galvanised.
173
Insulator shall have adequate mechanical strength and rigidity to withstand the duty involved.
When operated at maximum system voltage there shall be no electrical discharge. Shielding
rings, if necessary, shall be provided. Insulation shall be coordinated with basic impulse level of
the system. The creepage distance shall correspond to heavily polluted atmosphere.
OPERATING MECHANISM :
The operating mechanism shall be motor operated/ manual operated spring closing with trip free
features complete with shunt trip coils. All three poles of the breaker shall operate
simultaneously, It shall operate in such a way that the closing springs after each closing operation
are automatically charged by the motor and locked in the charged position by a latch. Means
shall be provided to charge the springs manually also. Provision shall be made for slow closing of
VCB without spring charging. The contact loading spring shall be designed in such a way that the
contact bounce is eliminated and it shall be ensured and the opening stroke is commenced only
from fully closed position. All the breakers shall be suitable for manual operation as well as slow
closing without spring charging. Anti pumping device shall be incorporated.
Operation counter and mechanically operated indicator to show whether the circuit breaker is
open or closed shall be provided on the circuit breaker operating mechanism.
All manually operating gear shall be so designed that the circuit breaker can be operated by one
movement. The mechanism shall be such that the tripping spring can be charged while the circuit
breaker is closed and the closing mechanism when charged shall not be operated by vibration
caused by the circuit breaker opening under fault conditions.
The mechanism shall be designed for electrical control from remote. Local manual close/trip
(lever/button) shall be provided in the mechanism box.
CONTROL CUBICLE (MECHANISM BOX) FOR OUTDOOR VCBS :
A common control cubicle shall be furnished to house electrical controls, monitoring devices and
all other accessories.
The cubicle shall have IP-55 grade of ingress protection and shall be of gasketed whether proof
construction, fabricated from sheet steel minimum 2.5 mm thick.
The cubicle shall have front access door with lock and keys, and removable gland plate at the
bottom for cable entry.
WIRING & TERMINAL BLOCKS:
Wiring shall be complete in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control, protection,
monitoring and interlocking schemes.
Wiring shall be done with flexible 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, switchboard wires with 2.5 sq.mm
stranded copper conductor, and Wiring between individual poles and control cubicle shall be
routed through G.I Conduits.
Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing wire numbers as per
wiring diagram. The wiring schematic may conform to relevant standards.
Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulating sleeves. Wires shall
be spliced between terminals.
All spare contacts of relays, push buttons auxiliary switches etc. shall be wired upto terminal
blocks in the control cubicle.
Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade, equivalent to CATM4 or CATDM4 of connect well or
equivalent.
Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. Spare terminals equal in number to
20% active terminal shall be furnished.
Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access. Wiring shall be so arranged that individual
wires of an external cable can be connected to constructive terminals.
174
NAME /RATING PLATE :
CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with a name plate or plates legibly and
indelibly marked with at least the following information:
1) Name of manufacturer
2) Type designation and serial number
3) Rated voltage and current.
4) Rated frequency
5) Rated symmetrical breaking capacity
6) Rated making capacity and
7) Rated short-time current and its duration (which shall be either one or three seconds)
8) P.O No. & Date and year of supply
9) Guarantee of years
10) Operating sequence
11) Make & type of vacuum interrupter
12) Control supply
13) Spring charge motor voltage
14) Closing and tripping coil voltage
PAINTING :
Before painting all ungalvansied parts shall be completely cleaned and made free of rust, scale
and grease and all external rough surface cavities on casting shall be filled by metal deposition.
The interior parts and internal structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by sand
blasting and given a primary coat and two coats of oil and weather resisting epoxy paint.
All external surface shall receive a minimum of 3 coats of paint. The paint shall be guaranteed for
5 years from the date of receipt of material.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
The core shall be high grade non-aging electrical silicon-laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and
high permeability to ensure high accuracy, at both normal and over current.
The secondary terminals shall be brought into a compartment on one side of current transformer
for easy access. The secondary terminals shall be provided with short circuiting
arrangements.The secondary taps shall be adequately reinforced to withstand normal handling
without damage.
The current transformer shall be suitable for mounting on steel structure or concrete pedestals.
The necessary flanges, bolts, etc for the base of current transformer shall be supplied and these
shall be galvanized. The current transformer tank and other metal parts shall be galvanized.
The current transformers shall be designed to carry continuously a current of atleast 125% of the
rated current.
The current transformers shall be complete in all respects with filling of oil confirming to IS:335
and with oil level indicator with minimum/maximum oil levels.
Earth strips as per relevant Standards shall be provided for proper earthing of equipment.
Earth bar of copper (suitable for termination of 2 Nos. 50 x 6 mm Flats) shall be provided on
Circuit breaker support structure. Terminal connectors suitable for ACSRconductor for 11KV shall
be supplied for Circuit Breaker (6 Nos.) and CT Terminals (6 Nos.). Suitable inter connection
between circuit breaker terminals and CT terminals are to be provided for outdoor VCBs.Terminal
175
connectors should have contact area of above 300 Sq.mm when connected to VCB & CTs and
must be bushing type.
Note: Other standard accessories which are not specifically mentioned but supplied with
breakers of similar type and rating for efficient and trouble free operation shall be deemed
toincluded in the scope.
TESTS :
The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture, shall be carried out on the
vacuum circuit breaker as per the IEC 62271-100 -2001 and current transformers as per IS 2705
(with latest revision).
TYPE TESTS:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS : IS13118/IEC62271
a) Temperature rise test for the main circuits.
b) Measurement of resistance of the main circuit.
c) Operation tests.
d) Mechanical endurance tests.
e) Impulse voltage tests.
f) One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand tests.
g) One minute power frequency voltage wet withstand tests.
h) Tests for short circuit conditions.
i) Tests for short time current.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS : IS 2705
a. Verification of terminal markings and polarity.
b. High voltage power frequency test on primary windings.
c. High voltage power frequency test on secondary windings.
d. Over voltage inter-turn test.
e. Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate accuracy class.
f. Short-time current
g. Temperature rise test.
h. Impulse voltage test for current transformers for services in electrically exposed
installations.
ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS :

CIRCUIT BREAKERS :
a) Measurement of resistance of the main circuits.
b) Operation tests.
c) One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand test on the circuit
breakers.
d) One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand test on auxiliary circuits.
176
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS :
a. Verification of terminal markings and polarity.
b. High voltage power frequency test on primary windings.
c. High voltage power frequency test on secondary windings.
d. Over voltage inter-turn test.
e. Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate
accuracy class.
7.2.2 11 KV INDOOR BREAKER PANELS/ LOAD BREAK SWITCHES
Indoor type 11 KV Stand-alone Breaker cubicles shall be supplied for extending of 11KV supplies
for station Auxilliary Transformers. The breaker cubicles shall receive 11 KV supply from two 400/
11 KV station transformers and also receive supply from Aux transformers of units 1 &7 through
Load break switch cubicles and extend the same to the Station Auxiliary Transformers and
outdoor 11 KV cubicles through 11kv XLPE cables.
11 KV Load Break switches/VCBs shall be provided nearer to the 5 MVA , 11/11 KV Isolation
Transformers-2 no’s for emergency isolation purpose.
The following are in the scope of supply erection & commissioning. 11KV VCB Breaker cubicles -
For incomer : 4 Nos.
For Bus coupler : 1 No
For Outgoing feeders : 7 Nos.(including spare)
Bus PT panel : 2 Sets.
Breaker trolley
Earthing trolley
Load Break Switch Cubicles of 800 Amps : 2 no.s
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
Each Breaker cubicle shall consists of Electrical as well as Mechanical indications for ON and OFF
status indication.
11KV /110 V Potential transformers at incoming terminals - 1 set
800 / 1 A current transformer for metering & protection - 1 set
Draw out type VCB Circuit breaker
Neutral displacement relay and master protection relays
Under voltage relay, O/c * Earth fault relay
Control relays, switches,MCB’s , Bus bar & accessories etc
Indoor Circuit Breakers: All the Switchgear cubicles compartments shall be draw out type VCB
circuit breakers of 40KA interrupting capacity generally confirming to IS 2516 and shall comply
with the following requirements.
I. The following shall be provided on the door of VCB breaker compartment.
1. 1 No.3 position. (Trip-Neutral-close) spring return to neutral control switch for
operating the breakers electrically. The contacts of the switches shall be suitable
for 220V DC operation.(KAYCEE/GEC ALSTHOM Make)
2. 1 No. Local/Remote selector switch for selecting the control of the breaker.
(KAYCEE/GEC ALSTHOM Make)
3. 6Nos. Indication lamps (Technic/BCH make)
177
Red – ON indication
Green – OFF indication
Amber – Trip circuit healthy indication
(2nos one each for TC-1 and TC-2)
Blue – Spring charge indication
Amber – Breaker Trip indication. This indication should be
latched till reset
Yellow - DC supply fail indication (shall be provided in AC circuit)
4. 1 No. P.B for lamp test along with required circuitry (Technic/BCH make)
5. 1 No. P.B for reset (Technic/BCH make)
6. Indication Lamps for Bus PT supply indication.
7. 1 No. Ammeter with ammeter selector switch (R-Y-B-Off) (ENERCON/MECO make
and class of accuracy:1.0)
8. 1 No. Volt meter. 110V rating with 4 position selector switch (RY-YB-BR-OFF)
(ENERCON/MECO make and class of accuracy:1.0)
9. 3 Nos. OC relay- Inverse characteristic type Static Over Current relays with
instantaneous trip arrangement. The relays shall have a setting range from 50% to
200% of 5A. Only static relays shall be quoted. (GEC/ABB/SIEMENS)
10. DC supply supervision relay.
11. Trip circuit supervision relay.
12. High speed Master Trip relay with manual reset. Detailed tripping scheme will be
furnished to the tender.
13. Auxiliary relay with flag indication (EE/GEC/ABB Make)
14. Under Voltage relay (EE/GEC/ABB Make)
15. 2 pole MCB with NC contact for DC supply control. (L&T/MERLIN GERIN/SIEMENS
make)
16. 2 pole MCB for AC supply control.
17. 3 pole MCB for Bus PT. (L&T/SIEMENS/ MERLIN GERIN Make)
18. 3 pin 5A socket
19. space heater with thermostat
20. Illumination lamp with door limit switch
21. All the VCB Circuit breakers shall comply with the following requirements.
a). Nominal system Voltage :11kv
b). Highest equipment voltage :12.0KV
c). Rated normal current : 1250/800A
d). Symmetrical three phase breaking current : 40KA
e). i). Rated short time withstand current : 40KA for 3 sec.
ii). Rated short circuit making current :Not less than 2.5 times
the rated short circuit breaking
capacity.
f). 1Minute Power frequency withstand voltage :28KV
178
g). Impulse withstand voltage :75KV.
h) Frequency :50Hz
i) Control circuit voltage :220V DC
j) Leaching requirement :Trip free.
k) Opening time :3cycles –(60ms)
l) Operating control :To be suitable for local as
well as remote operation.
m) Operating mechanisms :Mechanical spring
charging type. The spring
charging motor shall be
suitable for 220VDC operation.
CIRCUIT BREAKER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

a). The VCB circuit breaker shall be equipped with anti pumping protection. Only one closing
operation of the circuit breaker mechanism shall result from each closing operation of a
manually operated initiating control device, even though the breaker trips while the
initiating control devices being held in the closed position.
b). The design of the breaker shall be as to minimize switching over voltages and C.B s shall
be suitable for full out of phase switching. The C.B s shall be with VCB interrupter and
shall not have more than one breaking chamber per phase. All the three poles of the C.B
shall close/open simultaneously.
c). In addition to the auxiliary contracts required for normal operation and control, 4
normally open and 4 normally closed Auxiliary contacts shall be provided and wired to
terminal blocks for use in remote panels.
d). Necessary interlocks shall be provided to prevent closing or opening of the breaker under
low gas pressure and devices for initiating alarm shall be provided. Potential free contacts
are to be wired for terminals blocks for remote panel.
e) The breaker shall have two trip coils each operating on two independent sources of
supply. Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided for each coil independently.
OPERATING MECHANISM:
The spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring, closing spring and
all other necessary mechanism to complete the operating unit. Each mechanism shall be so
designed as to enable a continuous sequence of circuit breaker opening, closing and opening in
the event of failure of supply to motor. Spring charging by the motor shall be automatic and
charging time shall not exceed 15 seconds.
a) Charging of closing spring after each operation of the breaker shall occur automatically. It
shall also be possible to charge the spring manually by means of an emergency handle. A
local indication shall be provided to show the status of the spring. Potential free contacts
of spring charged ON/OFF indication shall be wired to terminal blocks for remote
indication.
The breaker mechanism shall be such that failure of any spring shall not prevent tripping.
b) The closing coils and other auxiliary devices shall operate satisfactorily at all voltages
Between 85% -110% of the control voltage. The trip coil shall operate satisfactorily at all
voltage between 70-100% of the rated control voltage i.e.220V DC.
c) When the breaker is in closed or open position, same operation of an initiating control
devices shall not result in the further operation of the breaker closing or opening
mechanism or discharging of the closing spring.
179
d) Mechanically operated targets to show the open and closed positions of the breaker shall
be provided.
e) The draw out mechanism shall have four positions: service, test, isolate and maintenance
position.
a) Service: Both power and Auxiliary contacts in Service.
b) Test : Power contacts isolated but the auxiliary contacts are in service.
c) Isolated: Both power and Auxiliary contacts are isolated.
d) Maintenance: Both power and Auxiliary contacts isolated and the CB is partially
withdrawn on to the special rails temporarily inserted inside the cubicle, suitable
for maintenance.
There should be a provision to lock in the isolated position. In the maintenance position, the
breaker shall remain in the cubicle providing access to all the parts enabling to attend simple
maintenance. When the C.B. is drawn out, provision shall be made to close the shutters provided
for the purpose to avoid accidental contacts with live parts.
Breaker rackout truck shall also be provided for easy removing of the breaker from the cubicle for
maintenance purposes.
LOAD BREAK SWITCHES:
In case of provision of Load Break Switch instead of VCB the LBS shall be able to interrupt the
110% loading current of the SAT in addition with breaking the no load current (highly inductive
current) of the SAT.
It shall have open and close indication lamps and mechanical indications to show the status of the
switch.
It shall have space heather with thermostat for anti condensation purpose.
It shall have one 15A 3pin socket with switch and Illuminication Lamp with switch.
Highest system voltage of the LBS shall be 12kv
Rated current of the LBS shall be 800A
Impulse withstand voltlage shall be 75kv
One minute Power frequency withstand voltage shall be 28kv
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: (PRAYOG/PRAGATHY/KAPPA make)

All the CTs and PTs shall comply to the following requirements.
❖ Nominal System Voltage : 11KV
❖ Rated frequency : 50Hz
❖ Highest System Voltage : 17.5 KV
❖ One minute power frequency with stand voltage
❖ (Primary) : 38 KV
❖ One minute power frequency with stand voltage
❖ (Secondary) : 2 KV
❖ Impulse with stand voltage : 75 KV
180
CURRENT RATIO THE CTs AND DETAILS:
C.T. Ratio : Suitable CT ratios with 1A secondaries
Details :
Secondary Core Core- I Core-II Core-III
Accuracy Class 5P PS 1.0
Accuracy Class 10 -- --
Secondary burden (VA) 30 -- 30
Purpose for O/C Diff. relay Metering
Minimum Knee point -- 1000 V or as Voltage.
reqd. for relay
7.3.1 STATION AUXILLIARY TRANSFORMERS
4 Nos. of 2500 KVA, 11KV / 415 V cast resin Dry type transformers with copper winding and with
Enclosures for indoor application shall be supplied for utilization for station and unit auxiliaries.
1. GENERAL:
In view of the changes in technology the tenderers may quote equipment with additional
advantages other than the parameters indicated in this specification.
2. SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
The scope of this specification covers supply, erection testing & commissioning of 4Nos.
Station Auxiliary Transformers (SAT) of 2500 KVA Capacity, 11KV/415V, Delta/Star
connected, 3 phase, Cast Resin Dry Type
3 STANDARDS:
Design, manufacture and testing of various equipments covered in this specification shall
comply with the latest issue of the following specifications.
1. IS:2026 : Transformers
2. IS:11171 : Dry type transformers
3. IS:3639 : Fittings and accessories
4. IS:2099 : Bushings for AC voltage above 1000V.
5. IS:2629 : Recommended practice for hot dip
galvanizing of iron and steel.
6. IS:2633 : Method of testing of coating of zinc
coated Items.
7. IS:12063 : Degree of protection provided by enclosures.
8. IEC-60076-11 : Dry type power transformers.
4. Transformer and its enclosure HV terminals shall be suitable for connecting to 11KV XLPE
cable. The Phase and Neutral terminals of LV side shall be brought out through a bushing
and shall be suitable for both Bus duct & cable.
5. Transformer fittings:
a. Each transformer shall be fitted with the following accessories
b. Inspection covers.
c. Off circuit links in the primary i.e., 11kv side for voltage variations
181
d. Rating diagram and tap connection plates.
e. Terminal marking plate.
f. Two Nos. earthing terminals with lugs.
g. Lifting lugs and haulage lugs.
h. Winding temperature detectors with solid state temperature Indicator with digital
read out and requisite sets of remote signaling contacts for alarm and trip operation.
i. Under carriage with bi-directional rollers with locking and bolting devices. Suitable
arrangement for core and winding assembly to draw out the same.
j. Marshalling box complete with all instruments, accessories and fittings as required for
the transformer.
k. Danger plate indicating “entry prohibited under energized condition” of the
transformer.
6. One set of current transformers of all the three phases on HV side of ratio 150/5 Amps,
5P10 and 0.2class , each 30VA Burden suitably mounted on the transformer for HV side
protection and metering of the transformer.
Type and routine tests on all electrical equipment in accordance with approved standards
shall be performed and test certificates shall be furnished to purchaser for approval. Type
tests and routine tests shall be done on one transformer and routine tests on balance
transformers at works. Required tests shall be carried out as per standards
All tests at works shall be carried out as per approved QAP
182
ANNEXURE-II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF SAT
1 Capacity 2500 KVA

2 Type Dry Type Resin Cast Transformer
3 Type of cooling AN
4 Volts at H.V 11000V
5 Tapings, off circuit ±2.5,±5%
Bolted links on HV
6 Volts at L.V 415V
7 Amperes in H.V side 131.22
8 Amperes in L.V Side 3478
9 Phases 3
10 Frequency 50HZ
11 Insulation Class F
12 Vector Group Dyn11
13 Installation INDOOR
14 Percentage Impedance 6.250%
15 Average Temperature Rise of winding by 90 degC
resistance method over an ambient temp. of
50ºC.
16 Method of casting Vacuum
17 Tests as per IS2026/11171
18 BIL 28kv/75kvp
19 Type of Insulators Epoxy support insulator
20 Enclosure particulars
a. Type of Protection IP23
b. Dimensions
c. Paint shade RAL -7032
d. LV&HV connection details Star/Delta
21 no load loss <4000W
load loss <25000W
7.3.2 ISOLATION TRANSFORMAERS

2 Nos. of 5000 KVA, 11KV / 11 KV cast resin Dry type transformers with copper winding and with
Enclosures for indoor application shall be supplied for utilization for station and unit auxiliaries.
1. GENERAL:
In view of the changes in technology the tenderers may quote equipment with additional
advantages other than the parameters indicated in this specification.
183
2. SCOPE OF SUPPLY:
The scope of this specification covers supply, erection testing & commissioning of 2 Nos.
Isolation Transformers (IT) of 5000 KVA Capacity, 11KV/11KV, Delta/Delta connected, 3
phase, Cast Resin Dry Type
3 STANDARDS:
Design, manufacture and testing of various equipments covered in this specification shall
comply with the latest issue of the following specifications.
IS:2026 TRANSFORMERS
a)
IS:11171 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
b)
IS:3639 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
c)
IS:2099 BUSHINGS FOR AC VOLTAGE ABOVE 1000V.
d)
IS:2629 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR HOT DIP GALVANIZING OF IRON AND
STEEL .
e)
IS:2633 METHOD OF TESTING OF COATING OF ZINC COATED ITEMS
f)
IS:12063 DEGREE OF PROTECTION PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURES
g)
IEC-60076-11 DRY TYPE POWER TRANSFORMERS
h)
4. Transformer and its enclosure HV terminals shall be suitable for connecting to 11KV IP
Busduct of Generator tap off and 11KV secondary winding shall be extend to Load break
switch cubicle through suitable Bus bar arrangement./XLPE Cable.
5. Transformer fittings:
a. Each transformer shall be fitted with the following accessories
b. Inspection covers.
c. Off circuit links in the primary i.e., 11kv side for voltage variations
d. Rating diagram and tap connection plates.
e. Terminal marking plate.
f. Two Nos. earthing terminals with lugs.
g. Lifting lugs and haulage lugs.
h. Winding temperature detectors with solid state temperature Indicator with digital
read out and requisite sets of remote signaling contacts for alarm and trip operation.
i. Under carriage with bi-directional rollers with locking and bolting devices. Suitable
arrangement for core and winding assembly to draw out the same.
j. Marshalling box complete with all instruments, accessories and fittings as required for
the transformer.
k. Danger plate indicating “entry prohibited under energized condition” of the
transformer.
6. One set of current transformers of all the three phases on both windings side of ratio
400/5 Amps, 5P10 and 0.2class , each 30VA Burden suitably mounted on the transformer
for protection and metering of the transformer.
184
7. Type and routine tests on all electrical equipment in accordance with approved standards
shall be performed and test certificates shall be furnished to purchaser for approval. Type
tests and routine tests shall be done on one transformer and routine tests on balance
transformers at works. Required tests shall be carried out as per standards
All tests at works shall be carried out as per approved QAP
ANNEXURE-II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF ISOLATION Tr
1 Capacity 5000 KVA

2 Type Dry Type Resin Cast Transformer
3 Type of cooling AN
4 Volts at Primary 11000V
5 Tapings, off circuit
Bolted links on HV ±2.5,±5%
6 Volts at Secondary 11000V
7 Amperes in primary side 262
8 Amperes in secondary Side 262
9 Phases 3
10 Frequency 50HZ
11 Insulation Class F
12 Vector Group DD5
13 Installation INDOOR
Average Temperature Rise of winding by
resistance method over an ambient temp. of 90 degC
15 50ºC.
16 Method of casting Vacuum
17 Tests as per IS2026/11171
18 BIL 28kv/75kvp
20 Enclosure particulars
a. Type of Protection IP23
b. Dimensions
c. Paint shade RAL -7032
d. Primary & secondary connection details Delta/Delta
load loss <31000W
185
7.4 33/ 11KV, 7.5 MVA AUXILIARY STATION SUPPLY TRANSFORMER
One No. 33/11 KV, 7.5 MVA oil immersed, ONAN cooling, vector group Ynd11, copper winding,
outdoor type along with all accessories and fittings shall be supplied and erected in the 11 KV
substation system.
Following accessories shall be provided:-
a. Radiators suitable for 10% overloading capacity
b. Bucholtz relay with two sets of contacts
c. Oil temperature indicator with 3 sets of contacts
d. Winding temperature indicator with 3 sets of contacts
e. PRV with electrical contacts and flag indication
f. Earthing terminals
g. Lightening Arresors for HV and LV side
h. CT and PT’s required for metering and protection for 33KV side and 11kv side.
The transformer shall be of type tested. All routine tests shall be carried out as per IS 2026.
LV and HV shall be suitable for XLPE cable connections and ACSR conductor with clamps. Vacuum
Circuit Breakers with Static Relay (3 O/c+E/F with High set provisions) units on HV and LV with
necessary supporting structures shall be supplied and erected including foundations and civil
works are included in the scope.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 7.5MVA 33/11KV TRANSFORMER:
1 Capacity 7500 KVA
2 Type Oil immersed out door type Tr.
3 Type of cooling ONAN
4 Volts at H.V 33000V
5 Tapings, off circuit
Bolted links on HV ±2.5,±5%
6 Volts at L.V 11000V
7 Amperes in H.V side 131.22
8 Amperes in L.V Side 393.65
9 Phases 3
10 Frequency 50HZ
11 Insulation Class A
12 Vector Group Ynd11
13 Installation OUTDOOR
Average Temperature Rise of winding by resistance
55 degC
15 method over an ambient temp. of 50ºC.
16 Tests as per IS2026
17 BIL HV 70kv/170kvp
18 BIL LV 28kv/75kvp
20 LV&HV connection details Star/Delta
22 load loss <42000W
186
7.5 415 VOLTS LT DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (UABs, SABs & RBs)
415 Volts A.C. 3 Phase 4 wire LT Switchgear panels shall consists of the following equipment.
a) Unit auxiliary boards (UABs) : 6 sets
b) Station auxiliary boards (SABs) : 2 Nos.
c.) Reserve board (RB) : 3 No.s
Each LT Board shall consist of the following
a) Potential Transformers
b) Over Current, Earth fault and Under voltage relays
c) Voltmeters with selector switch
d) Energy meters
e) Current Transformers
f) Air circuit breaker (ACB)
h) Ammeter with selector switch.(Ammeter for 3 phase current)
i) Indicating lamps and push buttons
J) Required no of feeders with MCCB’s to feed the loads of units and
station with 10% additional requirement as spare
j) Voltage and current transducers / Multi function meters
The LT System shall be as per the LT Layout drawing enclosed
GENERAL
The feeders shall be provided with electrically operated draw out type air circuit breaker of 3
phase, 415 volts, specified capacity, 50 KA/1sec. short circuit capacity and shall have shunt trip
facility with built in static type adjustable thermal over load and short circuit protection with
suitable high interrupting capacity etc. These Air circuit breakers can be able to be operated from
local /remote with necessary interlocks in full auto operation through station auxiliary controller.
The ACB capacities are as follows
Incomer from Trf to Reserve boards - 4000 amps
Outgoing from RB’s to UAB’s & SAB’s - 2000 amps
UAB incomer and Bus coupler Breakers - 2000 amps
Each UAB shall able to feed all the unit auxiliaries of two units. Each section of UAB is feeding the
loads of one unit with a bus sectionaliser. Each load shall be fed through MCCBs of suitable
capacity as required. All the Twelve units shall have the similar type of equipment and system.
The UAB shall have one incoming feeders from RB1 and RB2 respectively or RB2 and RB3
respectively and with a bus sectionalizing breaker. In general the sectionalizing breaker is
generally in open condition. Necessary interlocking facility shall be provided that both the
incomers shall not be closed when the bus sectionaliser is in service.
SAB 1 &2 shall have incoming feeders from both the sections of the Reserve board-2 with a bus
coupler.
Each Reserve Board 1 & 3 shall have two incomers one from 11Kv/415v, 2500 KVA indoor
Transformer and another from Reserve Board 2. Reserve Board-2 shall have two incomers from
two nos. 11Kv/415v, 2500 KVA indoor Transformers and interconnecting incomers from Reserve
Board 1 & 3 with a Bus coupler. Reserve board 1 & 3 shall have 5 outgoing breakers including one
spare and Reserve Board-2 shall have 12 outgoing feeders.
SABs shall able to feed all the powerhouse loads (Common auxiliaries)
187
a) Dewatering pumps
b) Drainage pumps
b) EOT Cranes
c) Lifts
d) Air compressors
e) Complete power house lighting
f) Battery chargers, HVAC system
g Ventilation system
h) Lighting &Other loads if any
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER
The Circuit breaker shall be triple pole, horizontal draw out type and shall have inherent fault current
breaking and making capacity as specified in technical particulars.
Circuit breakers shall be mounted along with its operating mechanism on telescopic rails. The cradle
should be so designed and constructed as to permit the smooth withdrawal and insertion of the
breaker into it. The movement should be free of jerks and shall preferably on rollers and not on the
flat surface. Suitable guides shall be provided to minimise misalignment of the breaker.
There shall be 'Service', 'Test', and 'Isolated' and maintenance /rackedout positions for the breakers.
Locking facility shall be provided so as to prevent movement of the circuit breaker from service, test
or isolated position. It shall be possible to close the door in Test and isolated Positions.
Main poles of the circuit breakers shall operate simultaneously in such a way that the maximum
difference between the instants of contacts touching during closing shall not exceed half cycle of
rated frequency.
Power Operated Mechanism
i) Circuit breakers shall be provided with motor operated spring charged mechanism. The
motor shall be a universal motor suitable for operating from 220V DC supply with voltage
variation from 85% to 110%.
ii) The charging time for closing springs shall not be more than 20 seconds.
iii) After failure of power supply at least one open-close-open operation shall be possible.
iv) Provision shall be made for emergency manual charging of closing spring.
v) Circuit breakers shall be provided with closing and tripping coils. The closing coil shall
operate correctly for voltage variation between 85% to 110%, and trip coil for voltage
variation between 70% to 110%.
vi) Mechanical tripping shall be possible by means of front mounted red coloured trip push
button. These push buttons shall be shrouded to prevent accidental operation.
vii) Circuit breakers shall be provided with mechanical indicating devices to show OPEN, CLOSE,
SERVICE, TEST, ISOLATED and SPRING CHARGED conditions.
Self aligning, Spring loaded, silver plated, sliding contacts of proven design shall be provided as
control terminals for with-drawable/draw-out modules. Detachable plug and socket type control
terminals shall also be acceptable.
It shall not be possible to open the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in 'Test' or 'Service'
position. Inbuilt interlock should be provided to prevent close breaker being inserted into panel or
withdraw out of the panel.
MCCBs and MCBs
188
MCCBs shall in general conform to IS:13947 (part-2). All MCCB shall be of P2 duty.
MCCBs shall be of heavy duty single through group operated quick make, quick break type complying
with IS:8828 & IEC:898-1987. MCCBs shall be so designed with suitable breaking capacity in
conformity with above IEC & IS.
MCCBs/MCBs shall be flush mounted on AC & DC Distribution Boards.
Suitable door interlock latches shall be provided.
MCCB shall be provided with thermo-magnetic type release for over current & short circuit
protection. The setting of the thermal release as specified in specification shall be adjustable
between 50% to 100% of the rated current. The magnetic release setting shall be adjustable
between 50% to 100% of thermal release setting at site.
MCBs for A.C, D.C control supply and heaters supply wherever required shall be mounted in side the
cubicles.
No Fuses shall be envisaged for the Motor supply feeders. Only Motor protection MCB’s / relays
shall be used
RELAYS
All relays and timers in protective circuits shall be flush mounted on panel front with connections
from inside. They shall have transparent dust tight covers removable from the front. All protective
relays shall have a drawout construction for easy replacement from the front. They shall either have
built-in test facilities, or shall be provided with necessary test blocks and test switches located
immediately below each relay. The auxiliary relays and timers may be furnished in non-drawout
cases.
All AC relays shall be suitable for operation, at 50 HZ with 110 volts VT secondary and 1 Amp. CT
secondary. Auxiliary Supply 220V DC.
DC auxiliary relays shall be designed for 220 V DC unless otherwise specified and shall operate
satisfactorily between 70% and 110% of the rated voltage. Relays shall have adequate thermal
capacity for continuous operation in circuits in which they are used.
All protective relays and timers shall have at least two potential free output contacts. Relays shall
have contacts as required for protection schemes. Contacts of relays and timers shall be silver faced
and shall have a spring action. Adequate number of terminals shall be available on the relay cases for
applicable relaying schemes as per relevant IS/IEC Standards
All protective relays auxiliary relays and timers shall be provided with hand reset operation indicators
(flag) for analysing the cause of operation.
All relays withstand a test voltage of 2 kV(rms) for one minute.
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
All current and voltage transformers shall be completely encapsulated cast resin insulated type
suitable for continuous operation at the temperature prevailing inside the switchgear enclosure,
when the Distribution Board is operating at its rated condition and the outside ambient temperature
is 50o C.
All instrument transformers shall be able to withstand the thermal and mechanical stresses resulting
from the maximum short circuit and momentary current ratings of the associated switchgear.
All instrument transformers shall have clear indelible polarity markings. All secondary terminals
shall be wired to a separate terminal on an accessible terminal block where star-point formation
and earthing shall be done.
Current transformers may be multi or single core type. All voltage transformers shall be single phase
type. The bus VTs shall be housed in a separate compartment.
All VTs shall have readily accessible HRC current limiting fuses on both primary and secondary sides.
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
189
All indicating and integrating meters shall be flush mounted on panel front. The instruments shall be
of at least 96 mm square size with 90o scales, and shall have an accuracy class of 1.0 or better. The
covers and cases of instruments and meters shall provide a dust and vermin proof construction.
All instruments shall be compensated for temperature errors and factory calibrated to directly read
the primary quantities. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment without removing or
dismantling the instruments.
All instruments shall have white dials with black numerals and lettering. Black knife edge pointer
with parallax error free dials will be preferred.
Watt-hour meters, Energy Meters shall be of 3 phase three element 4 wire type.
All indicating lamps shall be LED cluster type
CONTROL & SELECTOR SWITCHES
Control & Selector switches shall be of rotary type with encryption plates clearly marked to show the
function and positions. The switches shall be of sturdy construction suitable for mounting on panel
front. Switches with shrouding of live parts and sealing of contacts against dust ingress shall be
preferred.
Ammeter and voltmeter selector switches shall have four stay out/stay put position with adequate
number of contacts for three phase 4 wire system. These shall have oval handles. Ammeter selector
switches shall have make before break type contacts to prevent open circuiting of CT secondaries.
Contacts of the switches shall be spring assisted and shall be of suitable material to give a long
trouble free service.
INDICATING LAMPS
Type of the Indicating Lamps shall be LED.
Indicating lamps shall be of the panel mounting LED type and low watt consumption. The lamps
shall have encryption plates marked with its function, wherever necessary.
Lamps shall have translucent lamp-covers of the following colours, as warranted by the application
:
RED : ON, Breaker closed
GREEN : OFF, Breaker open
WHITE : AUTO Trip,
AMBER : For all healthy conditions (e.g. control supply) &
also for SPRING CHARGED.
LEDs shall be easily replaceable from the front of the cubicle.
Indication lamps should be located just above the associated push buttons/control switches. Red
lamps shall invariably be located to the right of green lamps. In case a white lamp is also provided, it
shall be placed between the red and green lamps along the centre line of control switch/push button
pair. Blue and amber lamps should normally be located above the red and green lamps.
When associated with push-buttons, red lamps shall be directly above the red push button, and
green lamps shall be directly above the gun push-button. All indicating lamps shall be suitable
for continuous operation at 90 to 110% of their rated voltage.
FUSES
Fuses shall have visible operation indicators. All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge fuse link type.
Fuses shall be mounted on fuses carriers, which are mounted on fuse bases, wherever it is not
possible to mount fuses on carriers fuses shall be directly mounted on plug in type of bases. In such
cases one set of insulated fuse pulling handles shall be supplied with each switchgear.
Exact fuse rating shall be provided by the tenderer depending upon the circuit requirements and
these shall be subject to approval of Purchaser.
190
TERMINAL BLOCKS
Terminal blocks shall be of 100 volts grade rated Min. 30 Amps. and in one piece moulding. It shall
be complete with insulating barriers, clip-on-stud type terminals for Control Cables and identification
strips marking on terminal strip shall correspond to the terminal numbering on wiring diagrams.
In all circuit breaker panels at least 10% spare terminals for external connections shall be provided
and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks. Space for adding
another 10% spare terminals shall also be available.
All terminal blocks shall be suitable for terminating on each side, two (2) Nos of 2.5 mm square size
standard copper conductors.
All terminals shall be numbered for identification and grouped according to the function. Engraved
white-on- black labels shall be provided on the terminal blocks.
Wherever duplication of a terminal block is necessary it shall be achieved by solid bonding links.
Terminals blocks shall be arranged with at least 100 mm clearance between two sets of terminal
blocks. The minimum clearance between the first row of terminal blocks and the associated cable
gland plate shall be 250 mm.
NAME PLATES AND LABELS
All switchgears, AC & DC Distribution Boards, shall be provided with prominent, engraved
identification plates. The module identification plate shall clearly give the feeder number and feeder
designation. For single front switchboards, similar panel and board identification lables shall be
provided at the rear also.
All name plates shall be of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lamicoid with white engraved lettering on black
back-ground, inscriptions and lettering sizes shall be subject to Purchaser approval.
Suitable plastic sticker labels shall be provided for easy identification of all equipments, located inside
the panel/module. These labels shall be positioned so as to be clearly visible and shall give the device
number, as mentioned in the module wiring drawings.
CONTROL AND SECONDARY WIRING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS
All AC & DC Distribution Boards shall be supplied completely wired internally upto the terminal blocks
ready to receive purchaser's control cables.
All inter cubicle and inter panel wiring and connectors between panels of same Distribution Board
including all bus wirings for AC & DC supplies shall be provided by the bidder.
All internal wiring shall be carried out with 1.1 kV grade, single core 2.5 Sq.mm stranded copper wires
with PVC insulation.
Flexible wires shall be used for wiring to device mounted on moving parts such as hinged doors.
All wiring shall be properly supported, neatly arranged, easily accessible.
POWER CABLES TERMINATION
Cable termination compartment and arrangement for power cables shall be suitable for stranded
aluminium conductor, armoured PVC/XLPE insulated and sheathed, single/ multiple core/3 and half
core, 1100V grade power cables.
All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, supporting clamps and brackets,
power cable lugs, hardware etc. for purchaser's cables shall be provided by the bidder, to suit the
cable sizes which are required for various auxiliaries. The gland plate shall be of removable type and
shall cover the entire cable alley. Bidder shall also ensure that sufficient space is provided for all
cable glands. Gland plates shall be factory drilled according to the cable gland sizes and number
which shall be arrived during detailed engineering. For all single core cables, gland plates shall be of
non-magnetic material.
DESCRIPTION OF MODULES :
191
Each AC & DC Distribution Board shall comprise of a number of different type of modules as per the
requirement of the station
Module type ' I ' (For incoming and Bus coupler circuits):
Module type ' I ' shall comprise of the following :- (ACB-3 Pole and Neutral Link).
i) One no. triple pole air circuit breaker with motor operated mechanism.
ii) Neutral link
iii) Circuit breaker control switch
iv) Current transformer for metering
v) Ammeter and voltmeter with selector switches
vi) Current transformers for protection & Metering.
vii) One triple pole combined over current and earth fault relay with IDMT and instantaneous
units. The operating time of IDMT relay shall be adjustable between 0-1.3 sec. at 10 times
current setting. IDMT unit current settings adjustable between 50 to 200% of 1 Amp. for
over current elements (51R,51Y & 51B) and 20% to 80% of 1 Amp. for earth fault element
(51N). Instantaneous unit settings adjustable between 100% to 1000% of 1 Amp. for over
current elements (50R, 50Y & 50B) and 20% to 500% for earth fault element (50N). Fitted
with 2 Nos. S/R contacts and a hand reset operation indicator per pole.
viii) High speed tripping relay with 220V DC with hand reset contact. Anti pumping relay.
ix) HRC control fuses, Auxiliary contactors
x) Indicating lamps as required.
Module Type 'F1' (for outgoing AC feeders):
Module type 'F1' shall consist of
All MCCBs(Four pole) 36KA , 10kA Control Ckts. Protection by HRC Fuses.
Module Type 'F2' (for outgoing feeders - DC feeders):
Module type 'F2' shall consist of
Upto 63 Amps MCBs (DC 2 Pole), 5 kA 250 Amps MCCB (DC 2 Pole), 5 kA
Module Type DC (Incomer from Battery Charger)
Module Type DC shall consists of
i) 250 Amps MCCBs (DC Two Pole), 5kA
ii) One DC Ammeter with Shunt and range of 0-250A.
Module Type 'V':
Module type 'V' shall consist of the following :-
i) Voltmeter (0-500V)
ii) One four position voltmeter selector switch (R-Y, Y-B, B-R, OFF)
iii) HRC control fuses, indicating lamps
INTERLOCKING
AC Distribution Board
The incoming feeder circuit breakers from Station Auxiliary Transformers and bus coupler breaker
should be so interlocked such that paralleling of both the incoming supplies is prevented.
TESTS & TEST REPORTS
AC & DC Distribution Boards, Circuit Breakers, instrument transformers, relays, meters etc., shall
comply with the type test requirements and subjected to routine tests as per the relevant standards.
192
All the type test reports in 4 copies according to IS:8623/13947 shall be submitted by the bidder
along with the bid.
Type test reports of circuit breaker, MCCBs/MCBs, Busbar & AC & DC Distribution Board, contactor
and relays and all important components like instrument transformers, meters & fuses etc. shall be
furnished by the bidder along with the bid. The report shall cover all applicable type tests listed in
relevant Indian Standards for all components for each type and ratings being supplied.
Routine tests shall be carried out on all Distribution Boards and associated equipments; as per
relevant standards.
The following acceptance tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Purchaser's representative
i) Visual inspection
ii) Dimensional verification
iii) Bus bar sizes and minimum clearances
iv) Paint shade & thickness
v) Modules interchangeability
vi) Dielectric tests:
vii) HV test
IR test before & after HV test.
7.6 UNIT AUXILIARY AND STATION AUXILLIARY CONTROL PANELS

Unit Auxiliary Control Panels supply shall be fed from UABs and shall be fed to pumps such as OPU
pumps of oil Servomotors of Governing system, Main inlet valve, cooling water pumps,etc., The
panel shall contain Star/Delta starters with minimum protection ‘3’ phase over current relays,
Earth fault relays, temperature relays, oil pressure relays etc.
Station Auxiliary Control Panels supply shall be fed from SABs and shall be fed to pumps such as
Dewatering pumps, Compressors, EOT crane and HVAC system etc
The electrical system shall consists of the following:
1. MCCBs : one Numbers For Each Pump
a) Suitable Starters/contactor : One No.
b) O/L Relay : one Nos.
c) Selector switch : One No.
(Stand-by, Neutral, Local)
d) Proper indications for : One Set
Motor ON, OFF
e) Contact multiplier relays for Alarms & controls - One Set
f) Volt meter with selector switch for the motor 40kW above - One
g) Ammeter with selector switch for the motor 40kW above - One
h) Ammeter for motor of 10kW above and under 40kW - One
i) Control Panel for control of motor of 30 kW and above shall be Provided with
star/delta starting.
In addition AC distribution Panels are to be provided for lighting system. The lighting distribution
boards shall have input from SAB and UPS/DCDB/EMDB system with automatic change over for
minimum lighting to the important areas
SPARES FOR LT SYSTEM
193
1. Air circuit Breaker 4000Amps 1 no.
2. Air circuit Breaker 2000Amps 2 no.s
3. Over current relays 3 no.s
4. MCCB’s 2 no.s of each type
5. SFU 2 no.s of each type
6. Spring charge motor & Assy 2 no.s
7. Set of moving & fixed contacts 2 sets
7.7 GENERATOR TRANSFORMERS

Note:1. The transformers/ Bus Reactors are proposed to be placed at EL.+26.0Mt Annex. Floor,
which is below the Maximum tail race level. Hence the Transformer cooling water circulation
system shall be suitably designed to meet all the technical requirements of the Transformers /
Reactors. All the additional/ alternative arrangements required if anyincluding civil works are to
be envisaged and to be included in the scope in complete shape as per the final approval during
Detailed Engineering. This is valid and to be considered for All the Transformers in that floor but
not limited to Gen Transformers / reactors.
2. The manufacturer from whom it is intended to procure the Transformer / Bus Reactor must
have designed, manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned similar type of equipment of
capacity intended for this project or higher capacity during the last five years in atleast two power
stations outside the country of manufacturers Origin or in India and should be in successful
operation for 2 years without any failure as on the date of submission of Bid.
At least one (1) number of Transformer / Bus Reactor of the said capacity, should have been
commissioned in India and is in satisfactory operation as on the date of submission of Bid.
The Transformers /Bus Reactors offered shall be of type tested as per the relevant standards in
recognized laboratory. The date of type tests shall not be earlier than five years as on the date of
submission of Bid, subject to no alteration in the design.
7.7.1 13 Nos. (THIRTEEN Nos. including one No. spare transformer) 11 KV/400 KV, 3 Phase, 100 MVA,
50 Hz outdoor type power transformers (420 KV class) complete with fittings accessories, spares,
special tools & tackles etc.
SALIENT FEATURES
1. Type : 2 winding core type 3phase power transformer
2. Quantity required : 13 Nos.(including 1Spare)
3. Vector Group : Ynd11
4. Basic Insulation Level : 1425 kvp Lightning impulse
1050 Kvp Switching Impulse
630 KV rms induced over voltage
5. Percentage of impedence : 14.5 %
Rated voltage : 400KV( +5% to -10% )
No. of phases : 3
Frequency : 50 Hz
No. of windings : 2 (Two)for each phase or all 3 phases
6. Type of cooling : OFWF(oil forced and water forced cooled)
7. Cooling Media : Transformer oil as per relevant
194
standards
8. Temperature rise of : 50 and 55 deg C.
oil and winding over
ambient of 50 deg.C
9. Method of connection : HV in star LV in Delta
10. Tappings : Full capacity (rated KVA)on load taps
from -10% to +5% shall be provided on HV
winding in steps of 1.25% (13 taps)
11. Installation : Out door type
12. Method of system earthing : Solidly grounded neutral system
13. HV bushings : Suitable for connection to 400 KV
GIS( SF6 Gas Bushing)
14. LV Bushings : Suitable for connection 11 KV Aluminium
Isolated phase bus duct.
15. Neutral point : Star point of HV winding shall be
brought out with suitable bushing for connecting
to earth mat .
16. OLTC : On HV Side
The Generator Transformers offered shall have Guaranteed Efficiency of GREATER THAN 99% at
Full load & 0.9 PF.
7.7.2 STATION SERVICE TRANSFORMER

Two No. 400 / 11KV, 3 Phase, 20 MVA, 50 Hz outdoor type power transformers (420 KV class)
OFWF type of cooling complete with fittings, accessories, spares, special tools & tackles etc. for
station supply application. The specification is similar to that of Generator Transformer except the
differences mentioned above shall be as per the specification of Generator Transformer. Suitable
adopter Box on LV side shall be arranged to be provided for Termination of 11 KV XLPE cables.
11KV LA’s shall be mounted in the box
SALIENT FEATURES
1.Type: 2 winding core type 3phase power transformer
2. Quantity required : 1 No.
3. Vector Group : Ynd11
4. Basic Insulation Level : 1425 kvp Lightning impulse
1050 Kvp Switching Impulse
630 KV rms induced over voltage
5. Percentage of impedence : 14.5 %
Rated voltage : 400KV( +5% to -10% )
No. of phases : 3
Frequency : 50 Hz
No. of windings : 2 (Two)for each phase or all 3 phases
6. Type of cooling : OFWF
7. Cooling Media : Transformer oil as per relevant
195
standards
8. Temperature rise of : 50 and 55 deg C.
oil and winding over
ambient of 50 deg.C
9. Method of connection : HV in star LV in Delta
10. Tappings : Full capacity (rated KVA)on load taps
from -10% to +10% shall be provided on HV
winding in steps of 1.25% (17 taps)
11. Installation : Out door type
12. Method of system earthing : Solidly grounded neutral system
13. HV bushings : Suitable for connection to 400 KV
GIS( SF6 Gas Bushing)
14.LV Bushings: Suitable for connection 11 KV XLPE Aluminium /
copper cables
15. Neutral point : Star point of HV winding shall be
brought out with suitable bushing for connecting
to earth mat .
16. OLTC : On HV Side
7.7.2.1STANDARDS:
The offered Equipment shall meet at latest editions of the following standards including the
amendments:
IS-2026 Power Transformers
IS-3639 Fittings & Accessories for Power Transformers
IS-335 Insulating Oils for Transformers & Switchgear BS-14
IS-2099 Bushing for Alternating Voltages above 1000 V BS-22
IS-2705 Current Transformers
IS-325 Three Phase Induction Motors
IS-375 Markings & Arrangements for Switchgear, Bus bars, Main Connections and Auxiliary
Wiring.
IS-3737 Gas Operated Relays
IS:3638-1996 Application Guide for Gas Operated Relays
IS-1886 Code of Practice for Installation and Maintenance of Transformers
IS-2147 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures for Low Voltage Switchgear and Control.
IS-5 Colours for Ready Mix Paints
IS-6272 Industrial Cooling Fans
IS-6600 Guide for Loading of Oil Immersed BSCP-0160 Page 8 Transformers
IS:8468 On-Load Tap Changer
IS-8269 Methods for Switching Impulse Test on High Voltage Insulators
IS:10028-1981 Installation of Transformers Part-2
IS: 10028-1981 Maintenance of Transformers Part-3
196
IS: 10561-1983 Application Guide of Power Transformers
IS: 8478-1997 Application Guide for On-Load Tap Changer
IS-8263 Method for Radio Interference Tests on High Voltage Insulators
IS-3202 Code of Practice for Climate Proofing of Electrical Equipment
IS: 3401-1992 Silicagel NEMA - Standard Tr. No.1
IS-6702-1972 Method for Determination of Electric Strength of Insulating Oils
6103-1971 Method of Test for Specific Resistance of Electrical Insulating Liquids
6262-1971 Method of Test for Power Factor and Dielectric Constant of Electrical Insulating Liquids
6104-1971 Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by the Ring Method.
IEC-60034, Rotating Electrical Machines Page 9 P1-22 (1972-2000)
IEC-60044, AmdP1-2000,
P6-1992 Instrument Transformers
IEC-60060, P1-1989, AmdP2-1996 High-Voltage Test Techniques
IEC-60071, P1-1993, P2-1996 Insulation Co-Ordination
IEC-60076, P1-2000, P2-1993, P3, 5-2000,P8-1997 Power Transformers
IEC-60085 (1994) Thermal Evaluation and Classification of Electrical Insulation
IEC-60137 (1995) Insulation Bushings of Alternative Voltages above 1000 V

IEC-60214 (1989) On-load Tap Changers
IEC-60270 (1981) Partial Discharge Measurements
IEC-60296, Amd1-1986 Specification for Unused Mineral Insulating Oil for transformer and
Switchgear
IEC-60354(1991) Loading Guide for Oil-Immersed Power Transformers
IEC-60404-8-7 Specifications for Individual Materials - Cold Rolled Grain Oriented
-1998 Electrical Steel Sheet and Strip Delivered in Fully Processed State.
IEC-60529, Amd1-1999 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP-code)
IEC-60542, Amd1-1988 Application Guide for On-Load Changers
IEC-60551, Amd1-1995 Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels
IEC—60567(1992) Guide for Sampling Gases and Oil from Oil-Filled Electrical Equipment for the
Analysis of Free and Dissolved Gases
IEC-60599 (1999) Mineral Oil-Impregnated Electrical Equipment in Service – Guide to the
Interpretation of Dissolved and Free Gases Analysis.
IEC-60616 (1987) Terminals and Tapping Markings For Power Transformers
IEC-60722 (1982) Guide to the Lighting and Switching Impulse Testing of Power Transformers and
Reactors.
IEC-60815 (1986) Guide for Selection of Insulators in Respect of Polluted Conditions
IEC-60947, P1-7, (1984-2000) Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
IEEE Std80 Guide for Safety and AC Substation Grounding IEEE Std979 Guide for Substation Fire
Protection.
IEEE Std980 Guide for Containment and Control of Oil Spills in Substations.
197
CBIP Pub. 295/2006 Manual on Transformers
7.7.2.2GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

The transformers shall be three phase with oil immersed windings and suitable for outdoor use at
specified site and service conditions. The transformers including bushings shall be designed and
suitable for heavily polluted environments. The transformers shall be rated for specified ambient
conditions and according to IS and the de-rating factors shall be as per ISS.
The Power transformers offered shall be complete with all parts, which are necessary or usual for
their efficient and trouble free operation.
The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per the guaranteed technical
particulars furnished.
The average sound power level (LPA) of the transformer shall not exceed the values as specified in
the Technical Data Sheets when measured in accordance with the conditions outlined in the latest
IEC 60551 recommendations.
External clearances between energized parts and ground, and clearances between adjacent
phases of the transformers shall be coordinated with the transformer internal insulation class and
external insulation of bushing, but shall be at least 5% higher than those specified in the latest
issues of IEC 60076.
The overload rating and operation of the transformers shall be in accordance with all cyclic
loading duties as specified in IEC: 60354. The overload capability of any auxiliary equipment such
as bushings, OLTC's, CT's, oil expansion tanks, leads, etc. shall not be less than the transformer
overload rating transformers shall be capable of operating for 20 minutes in the event of failure
of cooling water system. Air core reactance of the HV winding shall not be less than 20% and
knee point voltage shall not be less than 1.1 per unit.
The transformers and all its accessories like CTs, Bushings, OLTC etc. shall be designed to
withstand without injury, the thermal and mechanical effects of any external short circuit to earth
and of short circuits at the terminals of any winding for a period of 2 seconds as per IS: 2026. The
short circuit level of the HV system to which the subject transformer will be connected is 50kA
(sym, rms, 3-phase fault on 400kV).
The transformer shall be capable of being operated without danger on any tapping at the rated
MVA with voltage variation of + 5% corresponding to the voltage of that tapping so as the
maximum voltage on any tapping is not to exceed 420 kV.
The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of maximum
harmonic voltage, especially the third and fifth so as to minimise interference with
communication circuit. The noise-level when energised at normal voltage and frequency with
fans/pumps running shall not exceed, when measured under standard conditions, the values
specified in IEC-60551.
Transformer shall be capable of withstanding thermal and mechanical stresses caused by
symmetrical or asymmetrical faults on terminals of any winding.
Tank and Tank Accessories

Tank shall preferably be of welded construction and fabricated from tested quality low carbon
steel of adequate thickness. All seams and those joints not required to be opened at site shall be
factory welded, and wherever possible they shall be double welded. After completion of tank and
before painting, dye penetration test shall be carried out on welded parts of jacking bosses, lifting
lugs and all load bearing members. The requirement of post weld heat treatment of tank/stress
relieving shall be based on recommendation of BS-5500 table. Tank stiffeners shall be provided
for general rigidity and these shall bedesigned to prevent retention of water.
198
The transformer shall preferably be of bell type tank with the joint at about 500 mm above the
bottom of the tank. In case the joint is welded it shall be provided with flanges suitable for
repeated welding. The joint shall be provided with a suitable gasket to prevent weld splatter
inside the tank. Proper tank shielding shall be done to prevent excessive temperature rise of the
joint.
Each tank shall be provided with:
a) Lifting lugs suitable for lifting the equipment complete with oil.
b) A minimum of four jacking pads in accessible position to enable the transformer complete
with oil to be raised or lowered using hydraulic jacks.
c) Suitable haulage holes shall be provided.
The tank cover shall preferably be sloped to prevent retention of rain water and shall not distort
when lifted.
At least two adequately sized inspection openings one at each end of the tank, shall be provided
for easy access to bushings and earth connections.
Bushing turrets, covers of inspection openings, thermometer pockets etc. shall be designed to
prevent ingress of water into or leakage of oil from the tank.
All bolted connections shall be fitted with weather proof, hot oil resistant, resilient gasket in
between for complete oil tightness. If gasket is compressible, metallic stops/other suitable means
shall be provided to prevent over-compression.
The transformer shall be mounted on rollers. The roller mounted transformers are to be provided
with flanged bidirectional wheels and axles. This set of wheels and axles shall be suitable for fixing
to the under carriage of transformer to facilitate its movement on rail track. Suitable locking
arrangement along with foundation bolts shall be provided for the wheels to prevent accidental
movement of transformer.
Main conservator shall have air cell type constant oil pressure system to prevent oxidation and
contamination of oil due to contact with moisture and shall be fitted with magnetic oil level gauge
with low oil level potential free contacts.
OLTC shall have conventional type conservator with prismatic oil level gauge.
Conservator tank shall have adequate capacity with highest and lowest visible-levels to meet the
requirements of expansion of total cold oil volume in the transformer The conservator shall be
fitted in such a position so that it can be removed for cleaning purposes. Suitable provision shall
be kept to replace air cell ,wherever applicable. Conservator shall be positioned so as not to
obstruct any electrical connection to transformer. Contact of the oil with atmosphere is
prohibited by using a flexible air cell of nitrile rubber reinforced with nylon cloth. Air cell of
conservator shall be able to withstand the vacuum during installation/maintenance periods.
Otherwise provision shall be kept to isolate the conservator from the main tank when the latter is
under vacuum by providing a vacuum sealing valve or other suitable means in the pipe connecting
main tank with the conservator. The connection of air cell to the top of the conservator is by air
proof seal preventing entrance of air into the conservator.
Conservator shall be fitted with a dehydrating filter breather.
Adequate number of pressure relief devices shall be provided at suitable locations. These shall be
of sufficient size for rapid release of any pressure that may be generated in the tank and which
may result in damage to equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure less than the
hydraulic test pressure of the transformer tank. It shall be mounted directly on the tank. One set
of electrically insulated contacts shall be provided for alarm/tripping. Discharge of pressure relief
device shall be properly taken through pipes and directed away from the transformer/other
equipment and this shall be prevented from spraying on the tank.
A double float/reed type Buchholz relay shall be provided. Any gas evolved in the transformer
shall collect in this relay. The relay shall be provided with a test cock suitable for a flexible pipe
connection for checking its operation and taking gas sample. A copper/stainless steel tube shall
199
be connected from the gas collector to a valve located about 1200 mm above ground level to
facilitate sampling with the transformer in service. The device shall be provided with two
electrically independent ungrounded contacts, one for alarm on gas accumulation and the other
for tripping on sudden rise of pressure.
Online condition monitoring equipment like HYDRAN /TRANSFIXshall be provided such as
dissolved/ evolved gas analyzer system with necessary accessories in complete shape.
Necessary provisions for Fire protection of transformer through Nitrogen ingection system shall
be incorporated.
TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
Oil Temperature Indicator (OTI)
All transformers shall be provided with a 150 mm dial type thermometer for top oil temperature
indication. The thermometer shall have adjustable, electrically independent ungrounded alarm
and trip contacts, maximum reading pointer and resetting device shall be provided in the OTI. A
temperature sensing element suitably located in a pocket on top oil shall be furnished. This shall
be connected to the OTI by means of capillary tubing. Temperature indicator dials shall have
linear gradations to clearly read at least every 2 deg C. Accuracy class of OTI shall be 1.5% or
better.
One PT-100 type duplex RTD shall also be provided for remote oil temperature indication
purpose.
Winding Temperature Indicator (WTI)
A device for measuring the hot spot temperature of each winding shall be provided (HV, and LV).
It shall comprise the following:
i) Temperature sensing element.
ii) Image coil.
iii) Auxiliary CTs, if required to match the image coil, shall be furnished and mounted in the
cooler control cabinet.
iv) 150 mm dial local indicating instrument with maximum reading pointer and two
adjustable electrically independent, ungrounded contacts; besides that required for
control of cooling equipment if any, one for high winding temperature alarm and one for
trip. Temperature indicator dials shall have linear gradations to clearly read at least every
2 degC.
v) Calibration device.
vi) Accuracy class of WTI shall be 1.5% or better.
vii) In addition to the above, the following equipment shall be provided for remote indication
of winding temperature for each of the winding:
a) Signal transmitter for each winding Signal transmitter shall have additional facility to
transmit signal for recording winding temperature at data acquisition system, for which a
duplex platinum-100 RTD with nominal resistance of 100 ohms at zero degree centigrade
shall be supplied. The RTD shall be three wire ungrounded system. The calibration shall be
as per SAMA (USA) standard or equivalent. The RTD may be placed in the pocket
containing temperature sensing element and image coil for WTI system which will be
used for both remote WTI and DAS. Necessary equipment for sending the signal to
remote WTI and DAS shall be provided. In lieu, separate RTD for each of the functions
shall be provided.
Any special cable required for shielding purpose, for connection between cooler control cabinet
and remote temperature indicator/DAS shall also be in the scope of supply.
EARTHING TERMINALS
200
Two (2) earthing pads (each complete with two (2) nos. holes, M 10 bolts, plain and spring
washers) suitable for connection to 75 x 12 mm galvanized steel grounding flat shall be provided
each at position close to earth of the two (2) diagonally opposite bottom corners of the tank. Two
earthing terminals suitable for connection to 75 x 12 mm galvanized steel flat shall also be
provided on cooler, marshalling box and any other equipment mounted separately.
CORE
The core shall be constructed from high grade, non-ageing, cold rolled, super grain oriented,
silicon steel laminations. The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static
discharges, development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure
and production of flux component at right angles to the plane of laminations which may cause
local heating. The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to withstand a
voltage of 2 KV (rms) for 1 minute. Core and winding shall be capable of withstanding the shock
during transport, installation and service. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent
movement of core and winding relative to tank during these conditions.
All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after cutting,
drilling and welding. Each core lamination shall be insulated with a material that will not
deteriorate due to pressure and hot oil. The supporting frame work of the core shall be so
designed as to avoid presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of tank
through drain valve or cause trapping of air during oil filling. Adequate lifting lugs will be provided
to enable the core and windings to be lifted.
WINDINGS
The Contractor shall ensure that windings of all 400 kV class transformers are made in dust proof
and conditioned atmosphere. The conductors shall be of electrolytic grade copper free from
scales and burrs. The insulation of transformer windings and connections shall be free from
insulating compounds which are liable to soften, ooze out, shrink or collapse and be non-catalytic
and chemically inactive in transformer oil during service. Coil assembly and insulating spacers
shall be so arranged as to ensure free circulation of oil and to reduce the hot spot of the winding.
The coils would be made up, shaped and braced to provide for expansion and contraction due to
temperature changes. The conductor shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to
minimize eddy currents and to equalise the distribution of currents and temperature along the
winding.
INSULATING OIL
The insulating oil shall conform to all parameters specified as per IS Samples for DGA shall be
taken from sampling device within 24 hours prior to commencement of temperature rise test and
immediately after this test. The acceptance norms with reference to various gas generation rates
during the temperature rise test shall be as per IS:10593 (based on IEC- 599).
Sufficient quantity of oil necessary for maintaining required oil level in tank, radiators,
conservator etc till commissioning shall be supplied in addition with 10% additional quantity as
spare.
TERMINAL ARRANGEMENTS
BUSHINGS
The electrical and mechanical characteristics of bushings be in accordance with IS: 2099 and IS:
3347.
Bushings for HV (420 KV) shall be of SF6 gas filled and suitable for connecting to GIS. Bushing for
voltage of 72 kV (HV Neutral) shall be of the oil filled condenser type. 17 kV bushing (LV Side)
shall be solid porcelain or oil communicating type.
201
As bushing current transformers are specified, the bushings shall be removable without disturbing
the current transformers.
Bushings of identical rating shall be interchangeable.
Clamps and fittings shall be of hot dip galvanised steel.
Bushing turrets shall be provided with vent pipes, to route any gas collection through the
Buchholz relay.
No arcing horns shall be provided on the bushings.
The terminal marking and their physical position shall be as per IS: 2026.
LV side shall be provided with Flange frame arrangement welded to the transformer top tank
cover for fixing the adapter cover for further termination of Isolated Phase Bus-duct.
NEUTRAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENT
The neutral terminal of transformer shall be brought to the ground level by a brass/tinned copper
grounding bar, supported from the tank by using porcelain insulators. The end of the brass/tinned
copper bar shall be brought to the bottom of the tank, at a convenient point, for making bolted
connection to two (2) 75 x 12 mm galvanised steel flats connected to grounding mat.
COOLING EQUIPMENT AND ITS CONTROL
The cooler shall be designed using 2 x 100% oil to water heat exchanger banks. Design of cooling
system shall satisfy the performance requirements. Each heat exchanger shall have oil and cooling
water adapters/ flange connection, oil pumps, oil flow indicator, shut off valves at the top and
bottom (80 mm size), Non return valves’ cooling water flow indicators, lifting lugs, top and
bottom oil filling valves, air release plug at the top, a drain and sampling valve and thermometer
pocket fitted with captive screw cap on the inlet and outlet. Two (2), 100% centrifugal or axial on
line oil pumps (out of which one pump shall be standby) shall be provided. Measures shall be
taken to prevent mal-operation of Buchholz relay when both oil pumps are simultaneously put
into service. The pump shall be so designed that upon failure of power supply to the pump motor,
the pump impeller will not limit the natural circulation of oil. An oil flow indicator shall be
provided for the confirmation of the oil pump operating in a normal state. An indication shall be
provided in the flow indicator to indicate reverse flow of oil/loss of oil flow. Oil pump motors shall
be suitable for operation from 415 volts, three phase 50 Hz power supply and shall conform to
IS:325. Each oil pump motor shall be provided with starter thermal overload and short circuit
protection. The motor winding insulation shall be conventional class 'F' type. Automatic
operation of pumps shall be provided with oil flow relay and timers, Selector switches and push
buttons, shall also be provided in the cooler control cabinet to disconnect the automatic control
and start/stop the pumps manually. Necessary indicating devices shall also be provided. Two
potential free initiating contact for all the above conditions shall be wired independently to the
terminal blocks of cooler control cabinet .
VALVES
All valves upto and including 100 mm shall be of cast steel.
Suitable means shall be provided for locking the valves in the open and close positions. All valves
flanges shall have machined faces. All hardware used shall be cadmium plated/electro galvanised.
TAP CHANGING EQUIPMENT
OLTC shall be motor operated for local as well as remote operation. An external handle shall be
provided for local manual operation. This handle shall be suitable for operation by a man standing
at ground level.
Each three phase transformer shall be suitable for local and remote control.
LOCAL OLTC CONTROL CABINET
The Local OLTC control cabinet shall house all necessary devices meant for OLTC control,
Protection and indication.
202
REMOTE TAP CHANGER CONTROL PANEL.
Suitable for remote operation of On load tap changing gear and cooler control operations and
alarms and indications.
FITTINGS
The following fittings shall be provided with each three phase transformer covered in this
specification:
Conservator for main tank with oil filling hole and cap, isolating valves, drain valve, Prismatic oil
level gauge, magnetic oil level gaugewith low level alarm contacts, Buchholtz relay with alarm and
Trip contacts and dehydrating breather.
Conservator for OLTC with drain valve, oil surge Relay, filling hole with cap, prismatic oil level
gauge and silicagel breather.
Oil Directed type Pressure relief devices with alarm/trip contacts.
Buchholz relay double float/reed type with isolating valves on both-sides, bleeding pipe with pet
cock at the end to collect gases and alarm and trip contacts.
Air release plug.
Inspection openings and covers.
Bushings with metal parts and gaskets to suit the termination arrangement.
Winding temperature indicators (for both HV & LV) for local and remote mounting. One remote
winding temperature indicator with a four point (HV,LV,OIL,OFF) selector switch shall be provided
for the winding.
Cover lifting eyes, transformer lifting lugs, jacking pads, towing holes and core and winding lifting
lugs.
Protected type mercury or alcohol in glass thermometer.
Bottom and top filter valves with threaded male adaptors, bottom sampling valve and drain valve.
Rating and diagram plates on transformers and auxiliary apparatus.
Flanged bi-directional wheels/Trolley for movement
Remote Tap Change and Cooler control cabinet.
On load tap changing gear.
Cooling equipment.
Set of Bushing current transformers.3 core class PS,PS,5P20 for HV line and neutral
Oil flow indicators.
Water flow indicators
Differential pressure gauges
Over flow pipe at cooling water inlet
Drain valves/plugs shall be provided in order that each section of pipe work can be drained
independently.
Ladder with anti climbing device
Terminal marking plates.
Valves schedule plates.
Necessary provisions such as Drain and admission valves as required for Fire protection of
transformer through Nitrogen injection Fire Protection system shall be incorporated.
203
Preferably bay control unit shall be envisaged for each transformer to collect all the I/O’s and
data of transformer and communicate to Unit controller / station SCADA to avoid excessive
cabling
The fittings listed above are only indicative and other fittings which generally are required for
satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be included.
TESTS
All standard routine tests, Type tests (Certificates for review if already conducted), additional
tests in accordance with IS:2026 shall be offered
PENALTY FOR DEVIATIONS OF GUARANTEED LOSS:
Penalty will be levied for every KW of deviation of Total losses on higher side at rated capacity
from the guaranteed value of losses quoted, at the rate of Rs. 2,43,000/- per KW. The penalty
amount so calculated shall be recovered from the contractor.
The purchaser reserves the right to reject or accept the transformer if the losses are more than
the declared losses beyond tolerance limits as per I.S. Transformer should be mounted on wheels
and rail track shall be provided from the transformer assembly bay to the transformer location.
SPARES
The following spares shall be supplied along with the equipment
i. 400 KV Bushing with metal parts - 6 Nos.
ii. 11 KV Bushings - 6 Nos.
iii. HV Neutral Bushing - 2 Nos.
iv. Bucholtz relay - 2 Nos.
v. OLTC Oil surge relay - 2 Nos.
vi. PRD unit - 2 Nos.
vii. Valves - 3 Nos. each type
viii. Oil Pumps - 4 Nos.
ix. Heat Exchangers - 4 Nos.
x. Gauges, Flow indicators, switches - 3 Nos. of each type
xi. OLTC - 1 No.
xi. OLTC spares - 1 LOT
1.7.3. 400 KV BUS REACTORS

Supply Erection, Testing & commissioning of 2no.s of 400 kV, 125 MVAR Shunt Reactor (Bus) with
all accessories, fittings including Gas-in-oil incipient fault monitor, maintenance tools, tackles and
terminal connectors etc. and with NIPS Fire protection system as per Technical Specifications
Drawings showing typical sectional views of the windings with details of insulation, cooling
circuits, method of coil bracing and core construction, tap changer construction etc, Bushing
assembly drawings, Control and wiring diagrams, Characteristic curves of neutral and phase-
bushing current transformers, Over fluxing withstand time characteristics of transformer,
Loading details for Bus reactor foundations and QAP shall be furnished
The bidder shall indicate values of load losses (copper losses). He shall indicate whether losses
are firm or subject to tolerance. In case losses are subject to tolerance, ceiling shall be indicated
204
for tolerance. In case no ceiling is specified it will be taken as per IS: 2026 and the losses shall be
capitalized accordingly.
1. STANDARDS:
Indian Standards Title Internationally recognized standards
IS : 2026 Power Shunt reactors IEC – 6076
IS : 3639 Fittings and Accessories for Power Shunt reactors
IS : 5553 Shunt Reactors
Part – I
Part – III Neutral earthing reactor and arc suppression coil. IEC – 60289
IS : 335 Insulating oils for shunt reactors and switchgears IEC – 60296, BS – 148
IS : 1866 Code of practice for maintenance and supervision of mineral insulating oil in a
equipment
IS : 9434 Guide for sampling and analysis of free and dissolved gas and oil from oil filled
electrical equipment. IEC – 60567
IS : 2099 Bushing for alternating voltage above 1000 voltsIEC – 137
IS : 3347 Specification for dimensions of porcelain bushings.
IS : 2705 Current Transformers. IEC – 185
IS : 3070 Lightning Arrestor IEC –99-1 IEC –TC-37 WG4
IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and
control IEC –60144
IS : 5 Colour for ready mixed paints
IS : 375 Internal wiring of marshalling box
IS : 3637 Gas operated relays
2. Bus Reactors shall be capable of operating continuously at a voltage 5% higher
than their rated voltage without exceeding hot spot temperature of 150 deg C at any part of
the reactor.
Temperature rise shall be guaranteed when shunt reactor is operating at 420 kV (Highest Voltage
of equipment).
The reactors shall be subjected to switching surge over voltage of 2.5 p.u. and temporary over
voltage of the order of 2.3 p.u. for few cycles followed by power frequency over voltage
upto 1.5 p.u. The reactor must withstand the stress due to above transient dynamic
conditions which may cause additional current flow as a result of changed saturation
characteristics/slope beyond 1.5 p.u. voltage.
3 Construction Details
Tank shall preferably be of welded construction and fabricated from tested quality low
carbon steel of adequate thickness. The quality of steel shall be as per IS 2062. The tank
bottom shall be of one plane and heavy rigid structure. In case of self supporting tank bottom
without heavy steel cross beams the bottom plate shall have a minimum thickness of 50mm. Tank
stiffeners shall be provided for general rigidity and these shall be designed to prevent
retention of water. Proper tank shielding shall be done to prevent excessive temperature rise of
the joint.
Each tank shall be provided with Four symmetrically placed lifting lugs, four jacking pads
The tank cover shall be designed to prevent retention of water and shall not distort when
lifted. The internal surface of the top cover shall be shaped to ensure efficient collection and
direction of free gas to the buchholz relay.
205
At least two adequately sized inspection openings, one at each end of the tank, shall be
provided for easy access to bushings and earth connections. The inspection covers shall not
weigh more than 25kg. Handles shall be provided on the inspection cover to facilitate
lifting.
The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets at the position of maximum oil temperature at
maximum continuous rating for bulbs of oil and winding temperature indicators. It shall be
possible to remove these bulbs without lowering the oil in the tank. The thermometer shall be
fitted with a captive screw to prevent the ingress of water.
Bushing turrets, covers of inspection openings, thermometer pockets etc. shall be designed to
prevent ingress of water into or leakage of oil from the tank.
All bolted connections shall be fitted with weather proof, hot oil resistant, resilient gasket
in between for complete oil tightness. If gasket is compressible, metallic stops/other suitable
means shall be provided to prevent over compression.
The reactor shall be provided with a 100mm nominal diameter pipe flange with bolted
blanking plate, gasket and shall be fitted at the highest point of the reactor for maintaining
vacuum in the tank.
The shunt reactor are to be provided with flanged bi-directional wheels and axles.
The rail track gauge shall be 4 rails with 1676 mm between adjacent rails on shorter axis and two
rails with 1676 mm between rails on longer axis.
To prevent reactor movement during earthquake, suitable a clamping device shall be
provided for fixing the reactor to the foundation.
Main conservator shall have air cell type constant oil pressure system to prevent oxidation
and contamination of oil due to contact with moisture, and shall be fitted with magnetic oil
level gauge with low oil level electrically insulated alarm contacts. Magnetic oil level gauge
shall be type tested. Magnetic oil level gauge and its terminal box shall conform to IP 55 degree
of protection. In addition to the MOG prismatic oil level gauge shall be provided for conservator.
Conservator tank shall have adequate capacity between highest and lowest visible-levels to
meet the requirements of expansion of total cold oil volume in the reactor and cooling
equipment from minimum ambient temperature to 100 ØC.
The conservator shall be fitted with integral lifting lugs in such a position so that it can be
removed for cleaning purposes. Suitable provision shall be kept to replace air cell and cleaning of
the conservator, wherever applicable.
The conservator vessel shall be fitted with two parallel breathers in which only blue silicagel (pink
coloured when wet) has been filled as a dehydrating agent. The containers for the dehydrating
agent and the oil trap shall be of transparent plastics.
Adequate number of pressure relief devices shall be provided at suitable locations. These shall
be of sufficient size for rapid release of any pressure that may be generated in the tank
and which may result in damage to the equipment. The device shall operate at a static
pressure less than the hydraulic test pressure of reactor tank. It shall be mounted directly
on the tank. One set of electrically insulated contacts shall be provided for alarm/tripping.
Discharge of pressure relief device shall be properly taken through pipe and directed away
from reactor/other equipment and this shall be prevented from spraying on the tank. The
terminal box/boxes of PRD should conform to degree of protection as per IP-55 of IS: 13947.
Following routine tests shall be conducted on PRD.
a) Air pressure test

b) Liquid pressure test
c) Leakage test
d) Contact test
206
e) Dielectric test
A double float type Buchholz relay shall be provided. All gases evolved in the reactor shall
collect in this relay. The relay shall be provided with a test cock suitable for a flexible pipe
connection for checking its operation and taking gas sample. A copper/stainless steel tube
shall be connected from the gas collector to a valve located about 1200 mm above ground
level to facilitate sampling with the reactor in service. The device shall be provided with two
electrically independent contacts, one for alarm on gas accumulation and the other for tripping
on sudden rise of pressure.
Bus reactors shall be provided with a 150 mm dial type thermometer for top oil
temperature indication and . The thermometer shall have adjustable, electrically independent
ungrounded alarm and trip contacts.
The maximum reading pointer and resetting device for the thermometer shall be mounted
in the marshalling box. A temperature sensing element suitably located in a pocket on top
oil shall be furnished. This shall be connected to OTI by means of capillary tubing.
Temperature indicator dials shall have linear gradations to clearly read at least every 2 C.
Accuracy class of OTI shall be ± 1.5% or better.
The setting of alarm and tripping contacts shall be adjustable at site and typical values are
as given below which will be reviewed during detailed engineering based on manufacturer’s
recommendation.
Alarm – 95degC
Trip – 105degC
WTI device for measuring the hot spot temperature of winding shall be provided on shunt
reactors only. It shall comprise the following:
(i) Temperature sensing element
(ii) Image coil
(iii) Auxiliary Current transformer if required to match the image coil shall be furnished and
mounted in the marshalling box.
(iv) 150 mmdia local indicating instrument with maximum reading pointer mounted in
marshalling box and with two adjustable, electrical independent, ungrounded
contacts, one for high winding temperature alarm and one for trip. Temperature
indicator dial shall have linear gradations to clearly read at least every 2 øC.
(v) Calibration device.
(vi) Accuracy class of WTI shall be ± 1.5% or better.
The setting of alarm and tripping contacts shall be adjustable at site and typical values are
as given below which will be reviewed during detailed engineering based on manufacturer’s
recommendation.
Alarm - 110deg
Trip - 120degC
(vii) In addition to the above, the following shall be provided for remote indication of winding
temperature for each reactor.
Signal Transmitter shall be provided for recording winding temperature at DAS/SCADA, for
which duplex platinum RTD (PT 100) with nominal resistance of 100 ohms at zero degree
centigrade shall be supplied.
The RTD shall be three wire ungrounded system. The calibration shall be as per SAMA
(USA) or equivalent standard. The RTD may be placed in the pocket containing
temperature sensing element and image coil for WTI system which will be used for both
remote WTI and DAS. Necessary equipment for sending the signal to remote WTI and DAS shall
be provided. In lieu, separate RTD for each of these functions shall be provided.
207
(b) Remote winding temperature indicator shall be suitable for flush mounting on RTCC
panel/CRP panel. This shall not be repeater dial of local WTI and will operate by signal
transmitter. Any special cable required for shielding purpose, for connection between
Marshalling box and remote WTI control circuit, shall be in the scope of Contractor. Drawing
showing the mounting details of RWTI shall be submitted to the Purchaser The difference
between local and remote WT indication at any time shall not exceed 1 deg C.
Two (2) earthing pads (each complete with two (2) nos. holes, M 10 bolts, plain and
spring washers) suitable for connection to 75 x 12 mm galvanised steel grounding flat shall
be provided each at position close to earth of the two (2) diagonally opposite bottom
corners of the tank.
Each Reactor shall be provided with one intelligent on-line continuous Gas-in-oil incipient Fault
Monitor& water ppm and shall include an intelligent Transmitter with no moving parts or pumps
to detect and continuously monitor the evaluation of the values of 8 gases i.e hydrogen, carbon
monoxide, acetylene, ethelene and water ppm etc.. through a gas permeable membrane include
a communications controller, to provide remote and local communications, dual level visual alarm
indicators and continuous display and a heat dissipater shall be mounted between the value and
the transmitter. The intelligent on-line detection and monitoring sensor shall be located on the
cooler return pipe or at another by the sensor manufacturer accepted location at the reactor. It
should work for both AC/DC. It should not fail for high voltage induction (400kv switch yard) or for
any voltage fluctuations. Communication protocols shall be of open protocols. It shall be provided
with analysis soft ware and latest laptop. Provision for load compensation shall be included.
The electrical and mechanical characteristics of bushings shall be in accordance with
IS:2099 and IS:3347. Bushing must have been type tested successfully as per IS:2099 /IEC
60237.
Bushing for voltage of 420kV shall be of oil filled condenser type and draw lead type to facilitate
removal. Bushing for voltage of 145kV shall be oil filled condenser type and shall be of draw lead
type. Mounting dimensions of 420kV and 145kv bushing shall be as per drawing.
Clamps and fittings shall be of hot dip galvanised steel.
Bushing terminal shall be provided with terminal connectors of approved type and size for
connection to external parts. Terminal connectors must have been type tested successfully as per
IS : 5561.
Bolts and nuts used shall be of stainless steel.
The terminal marking and their physical position shall be in accordance with IS:2026/IEC
60076.
Current transformers required for protection and metering on HV and LV side bushings shall be
provided as per standards and requirements of protection class. Current transformers shall
comply with IS:2705 /IEC-60185.
4. Neutral Earthing Arrangement
(a) The neutral of the shunt reactor shall be brought out through 145kV class oil filled
condenser bushing.
(b) Neutral of Bus Reactors shall be suitable for grounding directly or through a NGR of
rating 170 KVAR, 145 KV.
(c) The neutral terminals of Reactors (without NGR) shall be brought to the ground
level by a brass/tinned copper grounding bar, supported from the tank by using
porcelain insulators. The end of the brass/tinned copper bar shall be brought to the
bottom of the tank, at a convenient point, for making bolted connection to two (2) 75 x
12 mm galvanised steel flats connected to Employer's grounding mat.
5. Cooling Equipment
208
Oil immersed with natural cooling (ONAN)
(a) The radiator bank of the shunt reactor shall be separately mounted. For neutral
grounding reactor, the radiator, if required, may be tank mounted.
(b) Radiators shall be made from pressed steel.
(c) Each radiator bank shall be provided with the following accessories:
(i) Top and bottom shut off valve
(ii) Drain Valve and sampling valve
(iii) Air release plug
(iv) Two grounding terminals for termination of two (2) Nos. 75x12 mm galvanized
steel flats.
(v) Thermometer pockets with captive screw caps at cooler inlet and outlet.
(vi) Lifting lugs
(d) Each radiator bank shall be detachable and shall be provided with flanged inlet
and outlet branches.
(e) Expansion joint, if required, shall be provided on top and bottom cooler pipe connection.
A sheet steel marshalling box of tank mounted type of a suitable construction shall be provided
for the reactor ancillary apparatus and this shall be vermin, dust & weather proof. All the
terminals for remote indication shall be wired upto the marshalling box from the reactor
accessories. Necessary shorting of CT secondary terminals shall be done at the marshalling box.
The degree of protection shall be IP 56 in accordance with IS:2147
All internal wiring to be connected to the external equipment shall terminate on blocks,
preferably vertically mounted on the side of cabinet, junction box.
The terminals shall be non-disconnecting stud type equipment to Elmex type CAT-M4. Washers,
nuts and lock nuts shall be provided. Fot CT circuits ,they shall be disconnecting type.
Supply and erection of all cables and accessories required for proper termination from the control
cabinet/marshalling box to make transformer/reactor functional and to the control and
Protection system in complete shall be supplied and included.
6. Fittings
The following fittings shall be provided with each reactor
1. Conservator for reactor main tank with filling hole and cap, drain valve, isolating valve,
vent pipe and magnetic oil level gauge with low level alarm contacts.
2. Air release devices.
3. Dehydrating breather complete with first fill of activated silicagel.
4. Inspection openings and covers.
5. Rating &diagram plate for reactors and current shunt reactors. These plates shall be
of material capable of withstanding continuous outdoor service.
6. Terminal marking plate conforming to IEC-60289 / IS:5553
7. Two earthing terminals each on shunt reactor tank, radiators & marshalling box, SA
structures etc.
8. Ladder to climb up to the reactor tank cover with suitable locking arrangement to
prevent climbing during charged condition.
9. Double float/reed type Buchholz relay with alarm and trip contacts.
10. Bottom oil sampling valve and drain valves.
209
11. Filter valves at top and bottom.
12. Shut off valves on the pipe connection between radiator bank and reactor tank.
13. Shut off valves on both sides of Buchholz relay at accessible height.
14. Sampling gas collectors for Buchholz relay at accessible height.
15. Four jacking pads.
16. Lifting lugs or eyes for the cover.
17. Suitable terminal connectors for ACSR moose conductor on bushings(Shunt reactor shall
be in manufacturer scope.
18. Under carriage with provision for flanged bi-directional wheels, set of flanged bi-
directional wheels, set of flanged bi-directional rollers/trolley for transportation.
19. Drain valves/plugs shall be provided in order that each section of pipe work can
be drained independently.
20. Pressure relief devices with alarm/trip contacts.
21. Bushing with metal parts and gaskets to suit the termination arrangement.
22. Winding temperature indicators for local and remote mounting (only for shunt reactor).
23. Oil temperature indicator

24. Protected type mercury or alcohol in glass thermometer.
25. Marshalling box .
26. Haulage lugs.
27. Bushing CT
28. The fittings listed above are only indicative and any other fittings which generally
are required for satisfactory operation of the reactors are deemed to be included.
7. Factory Tests
Type test report of similar rating of shunt reactor would be acceptable instead of carrying out
type test
General Requirements for type, routine and special tests are as per given clause no. cl.7.1 of IS :
5553 (PART-II).
a) One shunt reactor out of similar rating shunt reactor shall be assembled and tested at the
manufacturer's works for all type tests as per clause 5.6. Routine tests shall be carried
out on all the shunt reactors, as per IS 5553(Part-II). The dielectric test corresponding to
method-2 as per IS 2026 (Part-III : 1981) Cl.No. 5.4.
b) Bushings, insulating oil and accessories shall be subjected to type and routine tests
specified in clauses below.
c) The insulation resistance of the windings is to be measured for 15 secs, 60 secs. and 10
mins. The Polarization Index (PI) is to be calculated with the ratio of IR value at 10
minutes to IR value at 60 seconds. The Absorption ratio is to be calculated with the ratio
of IR value at 60 seconds to IR value at 15 seconds. The PI Value shall be maintained as
2.0 for acceptance.
No equipment shall be dispatched until the test reports are duly approved by the purchaser.
Type tests shall be carried out as per IS:5553 (part-II). Measurement of auxiliary losses shall be
made along with the type test for calculation of temperature rise.
The following dielectric tests on 420 KV winding shall be carried out:-
210
a. Lightning impulse voltage (withstand) test on all the line terminals.
b. Switching surge voltage withstand test on all the line terminals.
c. Induced over-voltage withstand test with partial discharge measurement on all
the line terminals.
d. Separate source voltage withstand test on neutral terminal.
Routine tests shall be carried out as per IEC-289/ IS:5553
Following special tests in addition to type and routine tests shall also be carried out as per
IS:5553 part-II Cl.No.7.4 as applicable on one Reactor.
a) Measurement of zero seq. reactance clause 16.10 of IS:2026 part-I.
b) Measurement of mutual reactance on three phase reactors.
c) Measurement of harmonic level in no load current.
d) Measurement of partial discharges at a voltage of 364kV (i.e. 420 x 1.5/ √3) for 30
minutes between the HV line to ground as per IEC:6076-/IS:2026 part-III/1977.
e) Measurement of magnetization characteristics.
f) Measurement of vibration and stress measurement on tank.
g) Measurement of acoustic noise level:
This test shall be carried out in accordance with NEMA audible sound level test
procedure.
h) Capacitance Tan Delta Test:
Capacitance test shall be carried out with the help of ampere turn bridge method on fully
assembled shunt reactor (filled with oil) to determine capacitance and tan-delta between
winding and earth. The tan delta value of bushing / winding shall not exceed 0.7 at 20
deg. C.
(i) DGA of mineral oil used before and after heat run test as per IS : 10593 : 1983.
Shunt Reactor bushings shall comply in all respects with the type and routine tests laid down in
IS:2099 (as amended up to date). However lightning impulse test at 1425 (kVp) shall be
conducted on 400kV bushings as routine test on all bushings as per the latest IEC-60137. .
Samples of oil from each bulk consignment shall be tested in accordance with IS:335 & IEC:60296-
2000(as amended up to date) and latest CBIP before any oil is dispatched. Also as specified in
Clause 3.5 (a) (i) & (ii), Oil shall be subjected to tests including gas analysis both at site and works.
8. Technical Parameters:
a. Bus Reactor 125 MVAR
b. Rated Voltage 420kV (1.0pu )
c. System Fault level 50 kA (1 Sec.)
d. Connection Star with neutral brought out
e. Insulation level (for winding): Line: Neutral:
(a) Lightning impulse 1.2/50 µ Sec withstand voltage 1425 kVp 550
(b) 250/2500µ Sec rated Switching surge with stand voltage 1050 kVp NA
(c) One minute power frequency with stand voltage 630kV (RMS) 230kV RMS
(d) Insulation Graded Insulation
f. Maximum temp rise over an ambient temp of 50 0 C and at 420kV voltage
(a) of winding measured by resistance method 45 0 C
(b) of top oil measured thermometer 40 0 C
211
(c) The temperature of the hottest spot shall be as per relevant standards.
Note:
The temperature rise should be guaranteed when the reactor is operating at 420kV (highest
voltage for equipment) i.e., at 5% higher voltage the reactor shall be capable of operating
continuously without injuries heating.
g. Cooling System Natural Oil circulation (ONAN)
Type of cooling medium Mineral Oil as per IS : 335 latest revision.
h. Insulation level of neutral
(a) Impulse withstand voltage 550 kVp
(b) Power frequency voltage 230 kV(rms)
(c) Whether neutral is to be brought out Yes (through 145kV class
Oil filled condenser bushings)
i. Ratio of zero sequence reactance to positive between 0.9 & 1.0.
sequence reactance (X0/X1)
j. Range of constant impedance. Upto 1.5 p.u. voltage (the bidder shall furnish
complete saturation characteristics of The Reactors upto 2.5 puVoltage)
k. Tolerance on current 0 to +5%
l. Harmonic content in phase current The crest value of the third harmonic component
in phase current not to exceed 3% of the crest value of fundamental when reactor is
energized at rated voltage with sinusoidal wave form.
m. Permissible current unbalance among + 2%
different phases.
n. Minimum clearance in air. Phase to phase Phase to ground
Rated voltage of 420 kV 4000mm 3500 mm
145 kV 1220 mm 1050 mm
o. Noise level at rated voltage and frequency 81db (As per NEMA-TR-I)
p. Line Terminal 420kV SF6 Gas filled bushings suitable for connecting to GIS and without
arcing horns and neutral terminal is 145kV oil –filled condenser bushing and neutral is
brought out.
Bushing Line side Neutral sides
(a) Rated voltage 420 kV 145 kV

(b) Creepage distance
(25 mm /kV) NA 3625mm
For Highly polluted areas NA 4495mm
(c) Mounting Tank cover Tank cover
(d) 1.2/50 microsec. lightning
impulse withstand voltage (kVp) 1425 550
(e) Switching impulse
(250/2500 micro seconds)
withstand voltage (kVp) 1050 -
212
(f) One minute power frequency
with stand voltage (kV rms) 630 230
(g) Rated current (A) 800/1250 800/1250
q. Vibration and stress level at Not more than 200 microns peak to peak
rated voltage and frequency Average vibrations shall not exceed 60 microns
peak to peak. Tank stresses shall not exceed
2.0kg/sq.mm at any point on the tank.
r. R.I. Voltage 1000 micro volts at 305kV (rms)
Partial discharge 500 Pico Coulomb
Corona Extinction Voltage Not less than 320kV (rms)
213
MANDATORY SPARES FOR125MVAR 400KV BUS REACTOR – 1set
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Description Quantity in Nos.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. HV bushing with metal parts and gaskets 1
2. Neutral bushing with metal parts and gaskets 1
3. Magnetic oil level gauge with low oil 1
level alarm contacts
4. Winding temperature indicator with CCU 1
and Remote indicator
5. Oil temperature indicator 1
6. Pressure relief device 1
7. Buchholz Relay 1
7.8. STATION BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS.

2 sets of 220 V DC Batteries of minimum of 500-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity to meet
the station DC load including DC emergency lights for 20 hours shall be provided. The battery shall
be able to support the complete station load for a period of 20 hrs, without AC supply.
2 sets of 24 V DC Batteries of minimum of 800-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity For
SCADA and other applications of the station as necessitated shall be provided. The battery shall
be able to support the complete loads for a period of 20 hrs, without AC supply.
2 sets of 48 V DC Batteries of minimum of 150-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity For PLCC
and carrier protection as necessitated shall be provided. The battery shall be able to support the
complete loads for a period of 20 hrs, without AC supply.
Lead Acid type PLANTEbattery and Float and Float Cum Boost charger for each battery set with
static control circuits and Thyristor bridge rectifiers with complete automatic voltage, current
regulation shall be offered.
CONSTRUCTION
7.8.1 BATTERY Specification Shall confirm to IS 1652 :1991 third revision
1. The Battery shall be Lead Acid PLANTE Type for high discharge performance, if DC Lube oil
pumps are present in the system otherwise Medium discharge type stationery lead acid cells
and batteries using plante type positive plates. Cells containing pure lead plante plates of
lemelle type with pasted type negative plates. The battery containers shall be made of hard
rubber,glass, lead lined wood, plastics or fibre reinforced plastics(FRP). Glass containers shall
be sufficiently robust, transperant and free from flaws. Cell lids shall be Provided with a vent
plugs. Terminal posts shall be suitably sealed at the lid by means of rubber grommets or
other suitable devices to prevent acid spray.
2. The voltage of each cell shall be 2V. The supporting calculations for discharge characteristics
of cell/battery for different time durations (10 Hrs., 3 Hrs., 2 Hrs., 1 Hr. & 1 minute) at an ECV
of 1.85V/Cell shall be furnished
3. The battery shall be complete with positive and negative plates, separators, terminal posts,
vent plugs, electrolyte, spray arrestor, inter- cell connectors, inter bank connector, bolts and
nuts etc. as required.
214
a) Separators:shall confirm to IS 6071 :1986
b) Ventilation device:
Each cell shall be equipped with anti splash type device. There shall be two vent holes one
serving as a guide for acid level Indicator for checking the electrolyte level and other to
permit drawing of electrolyte samples, servicing, checking of specific gravity etc..
c) Type of plates:
positive plates shall be of the pure lead lamelle type with plante formation. Negative
plates shall be pasted construction.
d) Electrolyte:
The electrolyte shall be prepared from the battery grade H2S04 conforming to IS:266 and IS :
1069.
Connectors and Fasteners:
The connections between the cells shall preferably be bolted type. The bolts and nuts, the
connectors etc. shall be effectively lead-coated to prevent corrosion. Terminal plates of each cell
shall be clearly stamped as positive and negative. Connection cable between the charger and the
battery shall be made by single core FRLS PVC copper cables, which shall also be arranged by the
bidder. All connectors and lugs shall be capable of continuously carrying the 30 minutes discharge
current of battery and through short circuit current produced by the battery. The Bidder shall furnish
necessary calculation in support of this requirement. Connectors may be supplied either as separate
bars or alternately as part of the cell structure i.e. as suitably elongated heavy-duty Lead plated
copper strip connectors. The connectors shall be lead coated copper of suitable size to join the cells.
The connectors, which shall be of suitably, designed copper connectors and suitably coated to
withstand corrosion due to sulphuric acid and may be used where the cells are called upon to
discharge at very high rates. The coating should be adequate and tenacious.
The following information shall be indelibly marked on outside of each cell :
a) Manufacturer's name, address and trade mark.
b) Country and month & year of manufacture
c) Serial number
d) Nominal voltage
e) AH capacity at 10 hr. discharge rate, ECV etc.
f) Polarity marking
g) Voltage of float operation
Operation:
The DC battery will be operated without an internal ground. For indicating the incidence and degree
of a ground fault on the DC control circuitry, the midpoint of the battery shall be earthed through a
high resistance with a milli ammeter. The high resistance shall be so proportional that the current
flowing under the worst earth fault shall not exceed 100mA for 220V DC system.
7.8.2 BATTERY CHARGERS (Float and Float-Cum-Boost Charger)
2 sets of 220 V DC Battery chargerssuitable for 600-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity of
the batteries being provided as above.
2 sets of 24 V DC Battery chargerssuitable for 1200-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity of
the batteries being provided as above.
2 sets of 48 V DC Battery chargerssuitable for 150-Ampere Hour or suitable Higher capacity of the
batteries being provided as above along with suitable Load switches.
Charging System
215
The Battery Chargers as well as their automatic regulators shall be of static type. All Battery Chargers
shall be capable of continuous operation at the respective rated load in Trickle charging mode, i.e.,
Trickle charging the associated Batteries at 2.05 to 2.25 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load.
The chargers shall also be capable of Boost Charging the associated PLANTE type Batteries at 2.25 to
2.7 volts per cell at the desired rate. However, the terminal voltage of battery across the load shall
be limited to + 5% of the rated battery voltage. During charging, the battery shall operate on
constant voltage mode with current limit. The manufacturer shall recommend the optimum float
voltage for the batteries so that the battery will draw the necessary trickle charging current from the
float charger.
The bidder shall indicate the requirement of ventilation of the charger room. The fail – safe current
limits of chargers for operation at various over load conditions should be indicated in the bid
considering the maximum ambient temperature at site as 50°C.
Output Control
All Battery Chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual control of output
voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting the mode of output
voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual. When on automatic control mode during
float charging, the charger output voltage shall remain within +1% of the set value, for AC input
voltage variation of +10%, frequency variation of +3% & -5%, a combined voltage and frequency
variation of + 5% and a DC load variation from zero to full load.
Load Limiters
All chargers shall have load limiters which shall cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode,
a gradual lowering of the output voltage when the DC load current exceeds the load limiter setting
of the Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload or short
circuit in DC System shall not damage the Charger. Soft start feature should be in variably provided
to minimize the inrush current from the float charger to discharged battery.
Adjustment of Voltage setting
Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic modes) shall be
provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire, specified float charging output range.
Step less adjustments of the load-limiter setting shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the
rated output current for charging mode.
Battery under voltage protection
During the period the main AC Voltage is cut-off and the battery feeding the load current, a voltage
relay should be provided to cut off the battery from load once it is drained to sensing level of No. of
cells X 1.85V per cell (1.85 V / cell)
Filter Circuit
Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in the chargers. The ripple content (peak to peak) in the
output voltage shall not exceed 1%, irrespective of the DC load.
Contactors
All battery chargers shall have an AC contactors on the input side. It shall be of air break type and s
uitable for continuous duty. The operating coil shall be rated for 415 Volts AC.
Thermal Overload Relay
A thermal overload relay incorporating a distinct single phasing protection (using differential
movement of bimetal strips) shall also be provided for the AC input. The relay shall trip the above
contactor.
MCB/MCCBs
AC input and DC output MCB/MCCBs shall be provided in all chargers as an alternative to switch,
fuse,contactor and thermal over load relay and they shall be of heavy duty single through group
operated quick make, quick break type complying with IS: 8828 & IEC: 898-1987 and suitable for
216
415/240 V A.C and 220 V DC. All MCCBs shall be suitable for continuous duty. MCCBs should have
auxiliary contacts for annunciation for trip and off positions.
Rectifier Transformer
The rectifier transformer shall be copper wound resin cast continuously rated and natural air cooled
(AN)type. The rating of the rectifier, transformer shall correspond to the rating of the associated
rectifier assembly. The Bidder shall provide the supporting calculations for the transformer
capacity during design & detailed engineering. Temperature rise of the transformer during fully
loaded condition shall not cause damage to the electronic components of the charger. Necessary
ventilation arrangements have to be made to limit the temperature rise to safe limits.
Rectifier Assembly
3 Phase rectifier bridge assembly shall be full wave controlled shall be provided for both float and
boost charger. The rectifier assembly shall be designed to meet the duty as required by the
respective Charger. The rectifier shall be provided with their own heat sink having their own
dissipation arrangements with natural air-cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and semi
conductor fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.
Instruments
One each DC and AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be provided
for all Chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant. The
instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment. The instruments shall be of 1.0
accuracy class. A battery ammeter shall also be provided with centre zero scale and measuring range
of 200A on either side.
Indicating lamps shall be provided for the 3 Phase AC and DC supply.
Fuses
All fuses, where required shall be HRC link type.
Blocking Diode
Blocking diode of adequate rating shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each
charger to prevent current flow from the DC Battery into the Charger.
Annunciation System
Visual indications through bright LED with Mimic diagram shall be provided in all Chargers for the
following abnormalities:
i) AC Supply failure
ii) Rectifier charger fuse blown
iii) DC fuse failure
iv) Filter fuse failure
vi) Battery earth leakage
vii) DC under voltage/Load limiter operated
viii) DC Over voltage
ix) Any other annunciation if required
Potential free NO Contacts for above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for local & remote
indication. 'CHARGER TROUBLE' in both Purchaser's Control Board/DAS and Sub-station Monitoring
System /SAS.
Name Plates and Marking
The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each charger, on front as well
as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the charger. Name plates with
217
full and clear inscription shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the
various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.
Charger Construction
i) The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed cubicle
type with bottom cable entry and access for wiring & connections on the rear side. The
Bidder shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and hardware. The Chargers
shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel or 2.5 mm Hot Rolled Sheet and shall
have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables and lugs for power
cables shall be supplied by the Bidder. The lugs for power cables shall be made of
electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be advised to the Contractor at a
later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of gland plates. The Charger shall be
tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if provided shall be backed with screens.
All doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber gaskets. The chargers shall have
hinged double leaf doors provided on backside for adequate access to the charger internals.
All the charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger
enclosure shall be at least IP-54 as per IS: 2147.
ii) All indicating instruments and indicating lamps shall be mounted on the front side of the
charger.
iii) Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and
terminal blocks ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out with
1.1 KV PVC insulated, 2.5 sq.mm. Stranded copper wires, Control terminals shall be suitable
for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals shall be
numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bear a ferrule or tag on
each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits.
iv) The insulation of all circuits except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test
voltage of 2 kV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (20) mm shall be
maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever this
clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.
v) The low voltage electronic circuits tests shall be as per relevant standards and the bidder has
to furnish supporting documents for low voltage electronic circuits.
Sizing Calculation:
The Bidder shall furnish the transformer sizing calculation details along with the bid.
7.8.3 TESTS
BATTERY
All type and routine tests shall be carried out on cells of each type as per the latest IS:8320, and
IEC:60896.
All acceptance tests as required by the relevant Standards including those given below shall be
carried out at manufacturers works. The capacity test shall be carried out for 10 hour discharge
rating.
Cell
a) Capacity test
b) Watt hour and AH efficiency test
c) Container pressure withstand capability test for 5 hours at 20o C
Battery
a) Visual check & dimensional check
b) Normal voltage test
c) Automatic Voltage regulation operation
218
d) Checking of proper annunciation system operation
e) Capacity (AH) test at 10 hours and 5 hours
BATTERY CHARGER
Type tests and routine tests: The type and routine tests shall be carried out on the Battery Chargers
as per relevant ISS/IEC Standards. Rectifier transformer shall be subjected to short circuit test in
addition to type and routine tests as specified in IS: 4540. Along with the offer, the bidder shall
submit the test certificates for the following tests for similar equipment already supplied to other
organizations.
i) Temperature rise/Heat run Test (8 hours)
(At specified AC supply and DC load variation)
ii) Load test
iii) Automatic Voltage Regulator operation
iv) High voltage test on power and control circuits
v) Performance test on the completed panel.
vi) Insulation resistance test
vii) Surge withstand capability test as per ANSI-C-37-90A.
viii) Load limiting feature of trickle charger.
ix) Degree of Protection test
x) Efficiency & Power Factor Measurement
xi) Short circuit test on no load at rated voltage for sustained short circuit
xii) Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope.
7.8.4 DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

220V & 24V DC distribution boards for unit loads and station loads shall be fed through Fuse and
Double pole MCB’s with an LED indication on the front of the feeder for indication of its service.
Suitable no of feeders with 10% spareshall be considered as per the detailed engineering. The
Board shall be fed from Two Sources with Incomer MCCB’s and with a Bus coupler to avoid
paralleling of both. Necessary name plates, meters and indicators shall be envisaged.
7.9 AC & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
STANDARDS
The AC & DC Distribution Boards shall conform to the latest edition of the Indian Standard
Specification (ISS) or equivalent International Standards as amended upto date except where
specified otherwise in this specification.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF AC & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
All Distribution Boards shall be of metal-enclosed, indoor floor-mounted, free-standing type. AC &
DC Distribution Boards shall have to be designed with a high quality high level reliability and safety
for protection of life and the property as per IS: 8623 (Part-I) and IEC: 60439 (Part-I).
All Distribution Board's enclosures shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections
or pressed and shaped sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.0 mm in case of cold rolled or 2.5 mm
of hot rolled steel. The thickness of sheet for front rear side and top & base frame size shall be
given in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars. No buckling and warping due to the components
mounted, if any, on them. The sizes of the cable glands shall be got approved from the purchaser
during detailed engineering.
Base Frame: 2.5 mm; Gland Plate: 3.0 mm; Frame & Boards: 2.0 mm; Canopy: 1.6 mm
219
The complete structures shall be rigid, self supporting, free from flaws, twists, and bends. All
cut-outs shall be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges.
The doors of all Distribution Boards shall be provided with gaskets to make it dust and vermin
proof construction and shall be provided with a degree of protection of IP-54 as per IS:13947.
However, the busbar chamber having a degree of protection of IP-42 in accordance with IS: 13947
are also acceptable. Provision shall be made in all compartments for providing IP-54 degree of
protection, when circuit breaker module trolley has been removed. All cutouts shall be provided
with neoprene/synthetic rubber gasket.
The covers of the Main horizontal bus bar chamber for 1250A shall be provided with louvers backed
with perforated sheet.
Distribution Boards shall be of a single front uniform height of 2000 mm and uniform depth (suitable)
and the width is depending upon the current rating of the ACBs, MCCBs, MCBs, and Meters etc.
Distribution Boards shall be easily extendable on both sides, by the addition of the vertical sections
after removing the end covers.
Distribution Boards shall be supplied with base frame made of structural steel sections. All
necessary mounting hardware required for erection shall be supplied by the Bidder/Contractor.
Back doors shall be provided with proper ventilation (with mesh inner side).
All Distribution Boards shall be provided with internal insulated barriers to create distinct
compartment for bus bars, feeders, and cabling. Barriers shall have to be provided for preventing
accidental contact with live parts.
The temperature rise of horizontal & vertical busbars when carrying 100% of the rated current along
its full run shall in no case exceed 40oC over ambient temperature of 50o C.
Painting
All the sheet metal components shall be pre-treated using the Seven Tank Process and painted with
epoxy based powder paint. The standard shade RAL 7032 . The painting shall be uniform appearance
and semi glossy finish (visually) without blistering. There shall not be any peeling at intersecting
points or joints.
BUSBARS AND INSULATORS
All bus-bars and jumper connections shall be of high conductivity aluminium alloy of required size.
The bus-bars shall be rated in accordance with specified continuous and short time current rating.
Both the horizontal are vertical bus bars shall be rated for 25 KA. for 1 sec for DC and 40KA for 3 sec
for AC. The vertical bus droppers are accessible both from front and rear and the cable compartment
is accessible only from the rear side.
The Cross-Section of the bus-bars shall be uniform throughout the length of Switchgear and shall be
adequately supported to withstand the stress due to the specified short circuit currents.
All bus-bars shall be adequately supported by Non-hygroscopic, non-combustible, track-resistant and
high strength type Epoxy Moulded Insulators. Separate supports shall be provided for each phase
and neutral bus-bar. If a common support is provided anti-tracking barriers shall be provided
between the supports.
Bus-bar joints shall be avoided, if it is unavailable all bus-bar joints shall be provided with high tensile
steel bolts, spring washers and nuts, so as to ensure good contact at the joints. Non-silver plated
bus-bar joints shall be thoroughly cleaned at the joint locations and a suitable contact grease shall
be applied just before making a joint.
All bus-bars shall be colour coded as per IS:375.
Governing Standards shall be as per IS: 5082
The Bidder shall furnish calculations establishing the adequacy of busbar sizes for the specified
continuous & short circuit current ratings and temp. rise calculations.
220
EARTH BUS
A galvanised steel earthing bus shall be provided at the bottom of each panel and shall extend
throughout the length of each Distribution Board. It shall be welded/bolted to the frame work of
each panel and breaker earthing contact point. Vertical earth bus shall be provided in each vertical
section which shall in turn be bolted/welded to main horizontal ground bus.
The earth bus shall have sufficient cross-section to carry the momentary short circuit/ short time
fault
Tools
The following Tools shall be supplied along with the equipment
1. Battery condition Monitoring equipment
2. Independent cell charging equipment with current & voltage setting upto 100A & 15V
respectively
3. Digital Multi-meter of standard make
4. Digital DC and AC current measuring equipment of Range 10 mA to 50 A
Spares of Battery & Battery chargers
1. Charger control card and other PCB’s - 1 No. of each type
2. Switches, MCB - 1 No. of each type
3. Rectifier SCRs & Diodes - 2 Nos. of each type
4. Indication lamps -1 No. of each type/colour.
7.10 STATION UPS SYSTEM AND ACDBs
The contractor shall design and supply 2 sets of 20 KVA or higher capacity suitable for the
following requirements.
Separate battery sets are to be Provided, independent of Station battery system. 100% redundant
UPS system with Redundant battery set, along with static bypass and SVS unit which shall be able
to meet the loads of main control(SCADA) and HMIs and any instrumentation and other loads.
The UPS battery shall meet the UPS load for One hour back-up in case of AC supply failure at rated
load of UPS.
Power House emergency lighting load shall be considered on the second UPS system. The
contractor shall be taken care the extra lighting load on the UPS system while designing.
Necessary ACDB with required no of feeders for SCADA, controllers, Emergency lighting with
suitable MCBs , fuses and indicating lamps shall be provided.
Both the UPS systems shall come into service to the load in case of Emergency requirement. The
Distribution board shall be designed accordingly.
Spares of UPS
1. Control card - 1 No. of each type
2. Switches, MCB - 1 No of each type
3. Rectifier & Diodes - 2 Nos. of each type
7.11 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall design, supply, testing & commissioning of fire protection equipment along
with necessary control and annunciation arrangements comprising of
a) Fire Hydrant System
b) NIFPS System
221
c) Portable fire extinguishers
• Generator Transformers, station supply transformer and Bus reactors shall be protected
with NIFPS(Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System) type of Fire protection system.In
addition to NIFPS, water spray based fire protectionsystem(Mulsifire) shall also be
provided for theGenerator Transformers, station supply transformer and Bus reactors
• Fire Hydrant system with fire hydrants to be located at the specified locations all over the
Power House. The system shall be complete with Jockey Pumps, Diesel pumps, piping, fire
hose cabinets, fire hose and all other accessories required as per the applicable
standards.
• Portable Fire Extinguishers both wall mounting type and tyre mounted type with a
minimum of
a) CO2 type – 50 Nos.
b) Foam type –40 no.s
and in accordance with applicable standards. WHICHEVER IS MORE.
• Smoke / Heat detectors to be placed in the specified areas to generate automatic alarm in
case of fire to indicate the zone under fire.
• Linear Heat Sensing Cable shall be laid in the control cable-duct to sense the zone under
fire.
• In the event of fire on the Transformer, the NIFPS installation of the particular
Transformer/equipment shall come into operation to open the corresponding valve.
The station Fire Protection system shall comprise of
1. Fire Hydrant Pump House and Associated Equipment :
Water required for Fire Hydrant system will be drawn from the penstocks of two units
with inlet valves and duplex strainers and a common water bus is formed, from which
electrical and diesel driven pumps can pump the water into the fire hydrant pipe network.
The bidder shall submit the calculations regarding quantity of water and head required as
per standards duly taking into consideration the time and quantity requirement. The
Pump room shall be adjacent to the power house and shall be compete with electric,
diesel driven pumps, jockey pump, piping and control panelswith all necessary
equipment.
2. Fire Hydrant System :
i) Fire hydrant down comer (1 no) shall be tapped from the main water header to each
floor level in the pump house to provide 4 Nos. single headed hydrant landing valves
hosed in the fire hose cabinets. Other locations of installation of the hydrant landing
valves shall be provided as necessitated. The locations shall be as per site requirement.
ii) Fire hose cabinet shall be made of sheet steel and glass panel and shall be of suitable size
to accommodate 30 metres of 65mm size (in two lengths of 15mts each) standard unlined
flax canvass hose fold on automatic rack bracket and provided with a single headed
hydrant landing valve, brass nozzle of appropriate length, branch pipe, orifice, hose
coupling and a nozzle spanner. The nozzle shall be adjustable for the full range of stream
conditions from a solid stream to a fog and shall also be equipped with a stop to prevent
a solid stream or have the fog and off positions only.
iii) Hose cabinet front shall have a glass panel and shall be given a suitable enamel coating.
iv) The unlined flax canvass 65 dia. hose shall meet the requirements of IS:4927 in respect of
materials, Friction loss, flexibility, percolation and proof test, etc.,
v) Fire Hydrants:- Fire Hydrants provided shall be of single headed type. Necessary reducers
shall be supplied to suit the fitting requirements of inlet and outlet. The hydrant shall
comply and subject to tests in accordance with the relevant Indian standards.
222
NIFPS System
1. Nitrogen Injection Fire Protection System shall be incorporated for 12 nos. 100 MVA
transformers and 2 no 20 MVA transformer and for 2 Nos. Bus reactors.
For spare 100MVA Power transformer, no fire protection arrangement is required.
Brief Technical specification for design, supply, erection and commissioning of Nitrogen Injection
system for Protection against the fire & explosion of transformers & reactors is as follows.
Each oil filled transformer / reactor shall be provided with a dedicated Nitrogen Injection system
for prevention against the transformer explosion which shall use nitrogen as quenching medium.
The system shall prevent transformer / Reactor oil tank explosion and possible fire in case of
internal / external cause. In the event of fire by external causes such as bushing fire. OLTC fires,
fire from surrounding equipment etc., it shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. It shall
accomplish its role as fire preventer and extinguisher without employing water or carbon dioxide.
Fire shall be extinguished within reasonable time (not more than 3 minutes so as not to harm the
transformer) of system activation and within 30 seconds (maximum) of commencement of
nitrogen injection.
The system shall be provided with automatic controls to prevent the explosion of
Transformers/Reactors. Besides automatic control, remote electrical pushbutton control at
Control box and local manual control in the cubicle shall also be provided. The following electrical-
signals shall be used for activating the system under prevention mode/fire extinguishing mode.
Auto Mode
For prevention:
• Differential relay operation.
• Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (Rapid Pressure Rise Relay)
• Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV & LV/IV side) associated transformer/ reactor is the
Pre-requisite for activation of system.
For extinguishing
• Fire Detector
• Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve or RPRR (Rapid PressureRise Relay).
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV & LV/IV side) associated with transformer /reactor isthe
pre-requisite for activation of system.
Manual Mode (Local / Remote)
Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV & LV / IV side) associated with transformer/ reactor is the
Manual Mode (Mechanical)
• Tripping of all circuit breakers (on HV & LV / IV side) associated withtransformer / reactor is the
The system shall be designed to be operated manually in case of failure of powersupply to the
system.
General description
Nitrogen Injection system should be a dedicated system for each oil filled transformer / reactor. It
should have a Fire Extinguishing Cubicle (FEC) placed on a plinth at a distance of 5-10 m away
from transformer / reactor or placed next to the firewall. The FEC shall be connected to the top of
transformer / reactor oil tank for depressurization of tank and to the oil pit (steel tank) (capacity
is approximately equal to 10% of total volume of oil in transformer / reactor tank / or existing oil
223
pit) from its bottom through oil pipes.
The FEC should house a pressurized nitrogen cylinder (s) which is connected to the oil tank of
transformer/reactor oil tank at bottom. The Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve (TCIV) is
fitted between the conservator tank and Buchholz relay. Cable connections are to be provided
from signal box to the control box in the control room, from control box to FEC and from TCIV to
signal Box
Detectors placed on the top of transformer / reactor tank are to be connected in parallel to the
signal box by Fire survival cables. Control box is also to be connected to the respective
transformer/Generator relay panel provided for receiving system activation signals.
Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, the system shall drain a pre-determined volume of hot oil from
the top of tank (i.e. top oil layer), through outlet valve, to reduce tank pressure by removing top
oil and simultaneously injecting nitrogen gas at high pressure for stirring the oil at pre-fixed rate
and thus bringing the temperature of top oil layer down. Transformer conservator isolation valve
blocks the flow of oil from conservator tank in case of tank rupture / explosion or bushing
bursting. Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating layer
over oil in the tank and thus preventing aggravation of fire.
System components
Nitrogen Injection system shall broadly consist of the following components. However, all other
components which are necessary for fast reliable and effective working of the system shall
deemed to be included in the scope of supply.
FIRE EXTINQUISHING CUBICLE (FEC)
The Cubicle Frame shall be made of CRCA sheet of 3.0 mm (minimum) thick complete with the
base frame, painted inside and outside with post office red colour (shade 538 of IS -5). It shall
have hugged / hinged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. The degree of
protection of the cubicle shall be IP55. The following items shall be provided in the Cubicle.
• Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact manometer.
• Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
• Electro mechanical control equipment for draining of oil of pre-determined volume and
injecting regulated volume of nitrogen gas.
• Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release.
• Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
• Butterfly valve with flanges on the top of panel for connecting oil drain pipe and nitrogen
Injection pipes for transformer / reactors.
• Panel lighting (LED Type)
• Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.
• Space heater.
Control box
Controls are to be incorporated in and along with the RTCC/Trf oil cooler control panel for
monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation. The following alarms,
indications, switches, push buttons, audio signal etc. shall be provided / extended.
• System Oil.
• TCIV open.
• Oil drain valve closed.
• Gas inlet valve closed
224
• TCIV closed
• Detector trip
• Buchholz relay trip
• Oil drain valve open
• Extinction in progress
• Cylinder pressure low
• Differential relay trip
• PRV / RPRR trip
• Transformer / reactor trip
• System out of service
• Auto / Manual / Off
• Extinction release on / off
• Lamp test
• Visual / Audio alarm for AC supply fail
• Visual / Audio alarm for DC supply fail
Potential Free contacts shall be made available for alarm troubles for input to SCADA system.
Also, separate hooter & emergency trip provision shall be provided in Remote panel
Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve.
Transformer conservator isolation valve (TCIV) to be fitted in the conservator pipeline, between
conservator and buchholz relay which shall operate for isolating the conservator during abnormal
flow of oil due to rupture / explosion of tank or bursting of bushing. The valve shall not isolate
conservator during normal flow of oil during filtration or filling or refilling, locking plates to be
provided with handle for pad locking. It shall have proximity switch for remote alarm, indication
with visual position indicator.
The TCIV should be of the best quality as malfunctioning of TCIV could lead toserious
consequence. The closing of TCIV means stoppage of breathing of transformer / reactor. Locking
plates shall be provided for pad locking.
Detectors
The system shall be complete with adequate number of detectors (quartz bulb) fitted on the top
cover of the transformer / reactor oil tank.
Signal box
It shall be mounted away from transformer / reactor main tank, preferably near the transformer
marshalling box, for terminating cable connections from TCIV & detectors and for further
connection to be control box. The degree of protection shall be IP55.
Cables
Fire survival cables (capable to withstand 75000 C.) of 4 core x 1.5 sq. mm size for connection of
detectors in parallel shall be used. The fire survival cable shall conform to BS 7629-1, BS 8434-1,
BS 7629-1 and BS 5839-1, BS EN 50267-2-1 or relevant Indian standards.
Fire Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) cable of adequate size shall be used for connection of signal box
/ marshalling box near transformer / reactor and FEC mounted near transformer/ reactor with
control box mounted in control room.
Pipes
Pipes complete with connections, flanges, bends and tees etc. shall be supplied along with the
system.
225
Other items to be supplied.
(a) Oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer /reactor tank at
suitable locations.
(b) Flanges between Buchholz relay and conservator tank for fixing TCIV.
(c) Detector brackets on transformer / reactor tank top cover.
(d) Spare potential free contacts activating the system
(e) Pipe connections between transformer / reactor and FEC and between FEC and oil pit
required for collecting top oil.
(f) Cabling for detectors mounted on transformer / reactor top cover.
(g) Inter cabling between signal box, control box and FEC.
(h) Butterfly valves / Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe which should be
able to withstand full vacuum.
(i) Any other item required for satisfactory operation of system.
Mandatory Spares
Cylinder filled with Nitrogen of required Pressure =3 No.s
Detectors required for transformer = Three sets.
Regulator assembly - 3 Nos.
Oil Release Unit - 3 Nos
Gas release unit - 3 Nos
Oil drain assembly – 3 sets
Pressure / limit switches – 3 sets
Tests
Contractor has to submit valid type test reports as per relevant IS/IEC.
All routine tests shall be conducted as per relevant IS/IEC standards in respectof various bought
out items including test reports for degree of protection for FEC / control box / signal box and
shall be submitted.
The supplier shall demonstrate the entire functional test associated with the following as Factory
Acceptance Tests:
• FEC, Control Box
• Fire Detector
• Transformer Conservator Isolation Valve
The performance test of the complete system shall be carried out after erection of the system
with transformer at site.
Detailed layout drawings, equipment drawings along with Operation and Maintenance manual
along with soft copies (In CDs) shall be submitted by the supplier.
Erection, Maintenance and Testing tools and equipment
Special tools and equipment, if any, required for initial installation, testing and subsequent
maintenance of the system shall be included in the scope of supply.
Standards: The design, manufacture and testing of various equipment covered by this
specification shall comply with latest edition of the following and other relevant
India/International Standards. The general principle of this order is to permit the adoption of
226
modern manufacturing standards.
(i) IS:3034 Code of practice for fire safety of industrial buildings Electrical generating and
distributing stations.
(ii) IS:1239 M.S. Tubulars and other wrought steel fittings.
(iii) IS:3589 Specification for electrically welded steel pipes for water and gas and sewerage
(200mm to 2000mm dia.)
(iv) IS:95 Fog-Nozzles for file brigade use.
(v) IS:3844 Code of practice for installation of internal firehydrants in multistoriedbuildings.
(vi) IS:1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General)electrical installations.
(vii) IS:2175 Specification for heat sensitive fire detectors for use in automatic electrical fire alarm
system.
(viii) IS:5312 Specification of switching check type reflux (non-return) valves for water works
purposes.
(ix) IS:1648 Specification for fire house deliver coupling, branch pipes, nozzles and nozzle
spanner.
(x) IS: 7760 Specification for steel glass front cabinets
(xi) IS:1648 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Fire Fighting equipmentsand its
maintenance.
(xii) IS:2189 Code of practice for installation of automatic fire alarm system, using heat sensitive
type fire detectors.
(xiii) IS:9972 Specification for automatic sprinkler heads
(xiv) IS:901 Specification for coupling, double make and double female, instantaneouspattern for
fire fighting purpose.
(xv) IS:5290 Specification for landing valves (internal hydrant).
(xvi) IS:4927 Specification for unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting
(xvii) IS:884 Specification for First-Aid Hose Reel for fire fighting for fixed installations
And Any Other Relevant IS/IEC Standards
7.12. POWER HOUSE AND SWITCHYARD LIGHTING

a)Complete lighting system shall be provided for the following places in the Power House. The
illumination levels as requires in various locations of Power House are as given below.
Sl Place/Location Type of lighting Fixture Lighting level
No
1 Main control room and Decorative LED fixtures 300 lux
conference rooms
2 Other areas inside Single or Twin LED lamps 100 lux

The power house
3 Machine hall (high bay) High bay fixtures LED lamps 260 lux
4 Transformer bay High bay fixtures LED lamps 100 lux
5 Draft tube gates Medium bay fixtures LED lamps 70 lux
6 400 KV GIS Flood light fixtures LED lamps 150 lux
7 Around the Power House and Street light fixtures LED lamps 70 lux
otherapproach Roads
227
Necessary Mounting arrangements, Marshalling boxes, lighting poles etc are to be supplied
A). Auxiliary supply: 415+/- 10%, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50HZ AC supply grounded neutral shall be
provided for lighting system:
b). Layout of wiring:
i) LT Power Cables from main lighting board shall be run in surface conduits or in trays to
the branch lighting boards or S.D.B. The wiring from SDB to the individual lighting point
shall be in surface PVC conduits of size 25mm dia. The conduits shall be supported by
suitable places. In all types of wiring, neatness and good appearance shall be maintained.
No joint shall be made at intermediate point in the run of cables unless the length of
route is more than the standard length of coil as given by the manufactures.
II) TO ELIMINATE THE STROBOSCOPIC EFFECT FROM CONTINUOUS ROW OF
LUMINARIES,THE ALTERNATE LAMPS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO DIFFERENT PHASES OF
THE 3 PHASE SYSTEM.
III) THE MAIN LIGHTING BOARDS SHALL BE ENERGISED FROM THE STATION AUXILIARY
BOARD WHERE NORMAL AC SUPPLY IS AVAILABLE. FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL
SHALL BE AUTOMATIC TO CHANGE OVER TO UPS SUPPLY FOR LIMITED ILLUMINATION
iv) Main lighting boards shall have MCCB (40KA) on incoming and outgoing circuits deputing
upon load requirement.
v) Lighting boards (LDB) shall have MCCB with 40KA short circuit capacity incoming and
outgoing SP MCB (9KA) as four ways or 6 ways as required or Depending upon the lighting
fixture.
c) Emergency lighting:
Emergency lighting shall be provided with 230V, AC, LED type fixtures on UPS system.
These fixtures shall be fed from the sub/circuits of UPS distribution boards. The UPS
lighting wiring shall be laid in independent conduit system.
e) Portable lighting units:
Portable type (6 hours discharge capacity) self-charging light units shall be provided.
These lighting units shall be complete with battery charges etc.
f) 1 phase and 3 phase sockets:
i) 1 phase, 240V, 5A and 15A 3 pin/ industrial type socket outlets for light and power
circuits along with MCB shall be provided at least in 10 locations for each area / unit (
total – 100 no.s). The socket outlets shall be suitable for wall/column mounting while
those in office room and control room shall be recessed in wall.
ii) 415V, 30A power outlets each controlled by MCB (industrial type) shall be provided at
least in 2 locations in each floor for each area / Unit (total 40 no’s). Connections to the
sockets shall be given by means of independent sub circuits from AC LDB or MLB.
g) Inspection lighting socket outlets:
24 volts, 5A, 1 phase socket outlets meant for inspection lighting purpose in the generator
barrel shall be provided. These sockets fed from 500VA, 240/24V AC 1 phase air-cooled
transformer, and these shall be fed from LDB. The wiring for these sockets shall be run in
separate conduits.
g) Main lighting board (MLB):
The metal clad MLB shall be of freestanding, totally enclosed, dust vermin and drip proof
and shall be compartmentalized. The panel (MLB) shall be made of 2.0mm CR sheet or
2.5mm hot rolled sheet and having smooth finish and elegant appearance. All door
panels and removable covers shall be provided with gaskets to render effective
protection against dust.
228
Each vertical panel of all boards shall be equipped with space heaters and shall be
provided with voltmeter and ammeter and shall be illuminated suitably by lamps.
i) All in coming and outgoing power cables shall enter bottom.
ii) Lighting distribution boards shall be provided for unit wise to draw the lighting loads of
the unit area and control panel lighting
i) Lighting distribution boards (LDB)/Sub distribution board (SDB):
LDB shall be suitable for mounting on wall or column. The enclosure shall be constructed
of sheet steel of thickness 2.0mm.
j) Conduits & other Accessories:
a) Conduits:
Conduits shall be of rigid PVC with dia of 25mm. All conduits in Air-conditioned areas
where false ceiling is provided shall be concealed in the false ceiling.
However in these areas conduits leading to switches and sockets shall be concealed in
walls.
Screwing of conduits shall be carried out to give clean threads standard bends, inspection
type fittings shall be used. All conduits shall be terminated by screwing and securing by a
lock nut to the respective accessory, outlet or luminaire and fully protected from the
weather. Opening through walls and floors for conduits shall be sealed and made
weather proof.
b) Junction boxes:
FRP junction boxes shall be used. The size of such J.B. shall be adequate to house the
bends and extra length of PVC wires and double check nuts for conduits termination.
c) Cables/Wires:
The LT power cables shall be 1.0 KV grade Aluminium stranded conductor, PVC sheathed
(un -armoured) confirming to standards. The lighting wires shall be 650V grade copper
PVC insulated single core (sheathed) confirming to standards Colour code for respective
phase and black for neutral shall be maintained within enclosure such as for switches, J.B.
and sockets etc, shall be used with green colour PVC wire.
d) Brackets and supports:

Wherever necessary, brackets and supports shall be provided for luminaries. All brackets
and supports shall be of hot-dip galvanized.
e) Earthing:
All the equipments of lighting system such as MLB’s LDB’s lighting fixtures sockets etc.
shall be provided with earthing terminals ,all accessories and shall be connected to
purchaser’s ground mat. To achieve perfect electrical, earthing continuity, the grounding
wire shall run through the PVC conduits throughout the installation of lighting fixtures.
f) Illumination level verification:
After completion of lighting installation in the Power House, the illumination level at
different locations shall be measured by lux meter as per requirement. If measured
illumination levels are lower than the specified extra lighting fixtures shall be added so as
to achieve the specified lux level.
SPARES for lighting system
The following spares are to be supplied along with the equipment
1. LED lamps - 20 Nos. of each type
2. Chokes - 10 Nos. of each type
229
3. Capacitors and indicators - 10 Nos. of each type
4. Decorative & other fixtures - 5 Nos.of Each type
or 10% of quantity installed which ever High.
7.13 EOT CRANES
Two cranes for lifting of the Heaviest Assembly in Tandom operation with lifting beam shall be
envisaged and same shall be provided. The capacity of each crane shall be of 175/40 Tons or
suitable higher capacity to handle the heaviest package or assembly to be Liftedwith 10%
additional margin to be selected. The capacity of the unloading bay crane shall be of 150/30
Tons or suitable higher capacity to handle the heaviest package or assembly to be lifted with 10%
additional margin to be selected . The type of cranes shall be of Indoor type electrically operated
over head traveling with main & auxiliary hoists for each crane. The main hook of crane shall be
of Ram-shorn type swiveling hook with standard depressed type safety latch where as the
Auxiliary hook of crane shall be of C-shank type.
Main and Auxiliary Hoists, Long and Cross Travel motions shall be provided with micro operations
also with 10% of the rated speed of the main motions.
The scope and supply covers the design, manufacture, testing at works, supply erection, testing
and commissioning of 2 Nos. 175/40T, and 1 no.150/30 T indoor, bridge type electrically operated
over head cranes of continuousDutyM5 Class as per IS 807 are to be considered for Erection with
VVVF drives controlled from cabin through master controllers. The cranes shall be supplied along
with the hoist with Main and auxiliary hooks , Girders, wheels and rails, end carriages, trolleys,
walkways, ladders, hooks, hoist ropes, rope drums, slings, sheaves, drives, Shrouded down shop
leads etc. complete with all other accessories and necessary mounting fittings , maintenance and
erection tools and spares etc.
The crane shall be conformed to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship and shall
also conform to IS 807 and 3177 with latest amendments.
The cranes will be normally used for erection and maintenance works of turbines, generators,
transformers and other associated equipment connected with the Power House.
1. SALIENT FEATURES OF THE CRANES:
SR. POWERHOUSE
PARAMETER UNITS UNLOADING BAY GIS AREA
NO. AREA
Double Girder Double Girder EOT Single Girder EOT
1. Type /
EOT Crane crane Crane
Designation
2. Number of Nos. 2 1 1
Cranes
M5(ClassI)asper M5(ClassI)asper M5(ClassI)asper
3. Duty class of
IS:3177andIS:807 IS:3177andIS:807 IS:3177andIS:807
cranes
4. Rated Capacity Ton 175/40 150/30 5
CraneSpan(Cent As As As Reuired
5. er M Reuiredwithminim Reuiredwithminimu
toCentreofGantr um margin of m margin of
y/ TrackRails) 400mmdistance 400mmdistance
between runway between runway rails
rails on either on either side
side
RunwayLen As required based on As required based on As required based on
6. M
gth the power house the power house the power house
(approx..)
230
design design design
As required based on As required based on As required based on

7. Total height of M the power house the power house the power house
lift design design design
Normal Operating
8. Speeds (at rated Max./Min. Max./Min. Max./Min.
load):
As per
8.1 Long travel m/min 20 / 2.0 20 / 2.0 manufacturer
As per
8.2 Cross travel m/min 10 / 1.0 10 / 1.0
manufacturer
As per
8.3 Main hoist m/min 1.0 / 0.1 2 / 0.2
manufacturer
8.4 Auxiliary hoist m/min 8 / 0.8 12 / 1.2 Not Applicable
10-100% 10-100% through 10-100% through
9. Speed Regulation
through VVVF drive VVVF drive
VVVF drive
Ramshorn type Ramshorn type
10. Hook type (MH)andC- (MH)andC-shank C-shank type
shank type (AH)
type (AH)
Acceleration /
11.
Deceleration:
11.1 Long travel cm/sec2 9.0 9.0 As per IS: 3177
11.2 Cross travel cm/sec2 7.0 7.0 As per IS: 3177
Lowest factor of As per IS with latest As per IS with latest As per IS with latest
12.
safety: amendments amendments amendments
Cabin + Radio Cabin + Radio

13 Type of control Cabin + Radio
Remote Remote
Remote
Antifriction type Antifriction type Antifriction type
14. Bearings
Roller & Ball Roller & Ball Roller & Ball
15 DSL system Shrouded Copper Shrouded Copper Shrouded Copper
16 Duty or class of
crane as per ISS
latest
Crane structure Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
16.1
Main Hoist Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
16.2
Auxiliary Hoist Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
16.3
Cross travel Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
16.4
Long travel Class 2 Class 2 Class 2
Bridge Girder and The individual bridge girders shall be of box girder construction
17 walkways: without rigger girders. Diaphragms and rigs shall reinforce the box
section.
Design A seismic co-efficient of 0.1 shall be used for all structural design.
18
231
requirements for
structure:
Side clearance from 500mm 500mm 500mm
19 roof column to
crane Bridge Girder
end
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF CRANE AND CRANE STRUCTURE:
The design of the crane and its structure shall be such that:
Low Head room.
Possible to X-ray/Standard butt weld testing practice as per applicable standards all the
main butt-weld joints of the web and flange plates of the crane girders.
Pleasing appearance.
Easy maintenance.
Anti-vibration design:
The crane shall be designed for strength and deflection and also to avoid excessive vibrations in
order that the crane as a whole shall have a greater service life. The box girder of the crane
offered shall be designed to limit the natural vibration damping time less than 15 seconds. The
crane shall be designed so as to avoid the vibration in the crane rail also due to vibration in the
crane bridge.
End carriage & Girder joints:
The contractor shall incorporate taper thickness plate design for joining the end carriage to the
main girders, thereby ensuing smooth flow of stresses and avoiding sharp bends which result in
concentration of stresses.
The frame work shall be fabricated from steel sections fully welded together and carries the
hoisting and cross –traverse machineries.
For the trolley, eight flanged die forged steel hardened wheels shall be provided. Special type
bearing support blocks of ‘L’ type design shall be provided on either side of cross traverse wheels
incorporating the following features.
To provide two load bearing surfaces at right angles to each other.
To transfer to the structure through the machined grooves in bearing housing and machined pad
welded to the structure due to skew wheel load. No unnecessary shear on the holding bolts.
It shall be possible to change the completed assembly in a matter of minutes.
The cross traverse wheels shall be press-fitted on axis supported on spherical roller bearings
which not only can withstand more axial thrust but also shall allow the axle to take un-
constructed bending reflection and linear expansion due to temp. rise.
In the hoisting and cross traverse motions complete suction shall be by means of totally enclosed,
oil immersed suction gears having machine cut teeth of high carbon steel only. The hoisting and
cross traverse long travel motors shall be directly coupled with flexible couplings respective gear
boxes and an electro hydraulic thruster brake shall be provided. The brake shall apply
automatically when the current supply is “ OFF”. One additional Electro Magnetic Brake
(preferably of DC) shall be provided for Hoisting operations i.e., both Main and Auxiliary Hoist.
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:

Auxiliary power supply 415V, 3 phase, three wire 50 cycles/ second with voltage variation of 10%
and frequency variation of + 5%.
DIMENSIONS OF THE POWER HOUSE:
232
The main particulars and dimensions of the Power House are detailed below as per the cross
section of the Power House enclosed. The drawings and technical particulars furnished in this
specification are for tender purpose only. However the EOT crane shall be manufactured based on
the Actual dimensions/data finalized after detailed engineering.
MAINTENANCE/ SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKES:
The contractor shall furnish a complete list of maintenance tools required for proper maintenance
of the crane in the offer.
RAILS FOR EOT CRANE:
Suitable size rails section of required length with all accessories shall be supplied and erected by
contractor
HOIST CONTROL:
Hoist control with VVVF drives shall be designed to ensure:
Automatic low speeds irrespective of load. The load shall not over-haul the motor under any
operating conditions so that slow speeds for lowering heavy loads may be obtained. Smooth
operation and regulated speed control with speed and precision. Highly accurate “ Spotting”
control through zero speed.
Hoist control scheme may comprise counter-torque and regenerative braking (Electric motor
braking), load inductor and pilot generator type control eddy current braking, mechanical load
brake or thrust or controlled brake connected across the motor circuits.
COLLECTOR –GEAR:
Insulators for collectors shall be robust, heavy duty porcelain, strain and non-shatter type
collector arms shall be so positioned that there is ample over running ( at least 15mm) of the
collector and over edge of the conductor-angle to provide adequate contact with the conductor
for any position of the trolley or the crane. Arm design shall be such that in the event of an arm
leaving the conductor it shall not be possible for the supply to become short circuited or earthed.
Current collectors for use with shrouded conductors shall be of the slide-shoe type with necessary
spring loading type and shall assure continuous contact and prevent arcing and over heating.
A suitable inspection case shall be provided with access ladder underneath the collector-gear for
longer-travel for maintenance purposes.
DRAWINGS TO BE FURNISHED:
The contractor shall submit the following drawings. General arrangement of the equipment
offered ( scope of supply and total weight of crane to be indicated). Detailed dimensioned
drawings and descriptive literature of all the components supplied along with the Electrical wiring
diagram during detailed engineering.
INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

The supplier shall furnish ten bound copies of instruction and maintenance manuals for
installation, operation and maintenance of all the equipment furnished by him. The manuals shall
be specific to the equipment furnished and not of general nature.
PROTECTIVE TREATMENT:
The crane will be required to operate in a hot and humid climate (ambient temperature of
50degC). All parts of the crane shall be designed to withstand such atmospheric conditions,
without any deterioration. Necessary protective treatment to withstand against fungi, rust,
condensation and corrosive atmosphere, shall be given to all electrical and mechanical
components, parts etc., of the crane, crane girders, structures etc.,
233
TWO COATS OF Anti-bee paint Coat shall be done FOR ALL CRANES at site on completion of
erection of cranes
CODES AND REGULATIONS:

The crane in its entity shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety
codes relative to the design, construction and operation of crane in the locality where the crane
will be installed. Nothing in these specifications shall be construed to relieve the seller of his
responsibility.
In particular, the crane shall conform to the latest addition of the following standards with latest
amendments:
a) BS:466 : “Electric overhead traveling Crane”.

b) BS:3037 : “Tyres for crane rail wheels”
c) BS:302, 621 : “ Steel wire ropes for cranes, excavators &general
engineering purposes”
d) BS:482, 2903 : “General requirements for lifting hooks “
and 3017 : M.S. shackles”
e) BS:825 or BS 3032 : “ High tensile steel shackles”
f) BS:436 or BS:544 or : “ Spur and helical gears”
BS:721. : “ Bevel gears ( machine cut)” “ Worm gearing”.
g) BS:46 : “ Keys and keyways and taper pine:.
h) BS:2059 : “Straight sided.
i) BS:2613 : “ The electrical performances of rotating electrical
machinery”
j) BS 587 : “ Motor starters and controllers”.
k) IS:807 : “ Code of practice for design, manufacture, erection and
testing of cranes and hoists”.
l) IS:226 : “ Structural steel ( Standard quality)”.
m) IS:1364 : “ Precision and turned hexagonal bolts”.
n) BS:1856 : “ General requirements for the metal arc welding or mild steel”.
o) BS:2573 : “ Permissible stresses in cranes”.
p) BS: 229 : “ Flame proof enclosures of electrical apparatus”.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND GUARANTEE:

The crane shall be capable of raising, lowering, holding in any position and transporting an
occasional load of 125 percent of rated load without any damage or distortion to any crane part.
The crane and each hoist shall operate within the following tolerances. With hook carrying 100
percent of rated load and with all hoist brakes properly adjusted and operating normally, it shall
be possible to control the vertical movement to within 2mm. Motion of bridge and trolley shall
be controllable to within 6 mm under all normal and overload conditions of loading as specified
herein. However, the cranes proposed are with VVVF drives, The values required for erection of
equipment shall be achieved and to be designed accordingly. The crane shall be guaranteed by
the manufacturer to be of accepted modern design, free from inherent defects in either
workmanship or material and to safely handle its rated capacity load without undue deflections in
its structure or mechanism. All materials shall be best of the respective kinds. Any parts found
234
defective within 12 months from the date of commissioning shall be replaced to the complete
satisfaction of the purchaser free of charge.
DESIGN AND DRAWINGS:

Supplier shall furnish for the purchaser’s review three copies of complete design calculations for
the structural design, general arrangements drawings of the crane, trolley and bridge, structural
detail drawings showing equipment with identifying name plates, warning signs, framed
instructions etc., and all electrical drawings complete with dimensions necessary to understand
and install all electrical equipment circuit diagrams elementary panel wiring, inter connections
diagrams, resistor connections and electrical bill of material showing all material required
electrical rating of motors, switches, starters and heaters.
Examination and approval of drawings by the purchaser shall not relieve the supplier from the
entire responsibility for engineering design, workmanship and material under the contract.
SHOP ASSEMBLY:
Shop Assembly of all structural parts of crane shall be made to ensure that all parts are properly
fitted to minimize erection labour. The hoists, trolley and bridge drives shall be assembled, wired
up and shop tested to ensure satisfactory operation, after fitting, reaming and other
manufacturing operation. All parts shall be match marked. Erection instructions and a complete
erection sequence diagram shall be furnished showing location and number of each part.
Complete crane wiring diagram giving sizes and cores of cables, type of cables and their modes of
connection and any other information which will be helpful in the erection of the crane at job site
shall also be furnished.
CRANE ACCEPTANCE AND TEST CERTIFICATES:

The supplier shall provide at his expense, a competent, experienced representative, who shall on
completion of the crane installation check and certify that the crane has been properly erected,
demonstrated to the purchaser the crane operation, lubrication and periodic maintenance
adjustments, and also direct the purchaser in the initial crane operation to demonstrate its
satisfactory performance for acceptance by the purchaser.
PAINTING:-
All fabricated steel material shall receive one shop coat of anti-corresive paint after having been
thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scales, rust and foreign matter. Machine finished surfaces
shall be coated with white lead and yellow before dispatch. Paint shall be applied at temperature
of 4-5o C or lower. Paint shall be stirred frequently to keep the pigment in suspension. One
additional coat of read lead paint shall be applied for all steel work after erection.
The interior surfaces of box sections and surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, shall be
thoroughly cleaned and painted with two coats of red lead paint or any other anti-corrosive paint,
before assembly.
Any steel scratches during erection shall be touched up after erection with lead paint. All bright
parts shall be applied with suitable rust preventive paint which can be easily removed during
erection.
STRUCTURAL
GENERAL:-
The crane bridge shall consist of two bridge girders each carrying one of the two track rails on
which a four wheeled trolley is to run. The bridge trucks and trolley frames shall be of built up
235
structural steel members. Access walkways with neat hand railing are required along with full
span length of drive side bridge girder.
Structural work in bridges, and carriages and trolley frames may be either of riveted or welded
construction subject to the approval of the purchaser.
CODES, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
Unless otherwise specified herein the design, materials, manufacture, workmanship, erection and
testing shall conform to the latest editions of one or as many as applicable of the following
standards with latest amendments.
a) Indian standard “ Code of practice for design, manufacture, erection and testing of cranes
and hoists” part-I structural portion IS: 807.
b) Indian Standard ‘ Code of practice for use of structural steel in General Building
Construction” IS: 807.
c) Indian standard specification for structural steel standard quality IS: 226.
d) Indian standard specification for structural steel ( Fusion welding quality)
IS: 2062. Indian standard specification for rolled steel beam, channel and angle section
IS: 808. Indian standard “ Code of practice for use of metal are welding for general
construction in mild steel” IS: 816
e) Indian standard” Code of practice for use “ Covered electrodes for metal arc welding in
mild steel” IS: 814
f) Indian standard “ Code of practice for training and testing of welders’ IS: 817
g) Indian standard “ Procedure code for manual metal arc welding of structural steel” IS: 823
h) Indian standard “ Recommendation for earth quake resistant design of structures” IS:
1893.
Steel supplied shall be of standard quality conforming to IS: 2062 except that plates, that have to
be welded such as for plate girders etc., and those more than 20mm thick shall conform to IS:
2062. Mill test certificates for the steel supplied shall be furnished to the purchaser for approval.
The bridge girders shall be designed to carry safely the loads specified in IS: 807 Part –I, with
latest amendments.
TRUCKS AND TROLLEY FRAMES:
Bridge and Trolley trucks shall be of built – up structural steel members. Duel wheel trucks of all
welded construction shall be stress relieved.
Mountings shall be so designed as to facilitate easy removal of the wheels, bearings and journals.
Wheel mountings shall be complete with safety lugs to prevent a drop of more than 2.5cm. in
case of broken axle.
The end carriages shall be designed so as to ensure that the crane remains square and prevent
skewness. Jacking pads shall be provided for end carriages for maintenance purpose.
Trucks of structural frame work carrying mechanical and electrical driving equipment shall be
fitted with stiffening plates of adequate thickness, riveted or welded on and machined to true
surfaces.
OPERATOR’S CABIN:
The operator’s cabin shall be of open type, of fire proof construction, braced and large enough to
allow ample space for control equipment except the magnetic control boards and associated
resistors which may be located else where, as approved by the purchaser. The crane operator
cabins shall be provided on the upstream of the Power House.
The platform shall be of a no-slip surface and cabin size should be approximately 2.15 m x 1.85m x
2.0m
236
The cabin shall be provided with a protected ladder access to the crane walkway, adequate
illumination and swing way operator’s seat. It shall be oil drop proof. The cabin and its access
ladder shall be so arranged as to prevent personnel from making accidental contact with run way
conductors. In addition, complete concise instruction covering the crane operation, maintenance
and lubrication shall be mounted in the cabin in a permanent frame for convenient reference.
Suitable guard shall be provided in the cabin. The fan shall have a 14” sweep and equipped with a
separate regulator.
WALKWAYS AND LADDERS:
Walkways shall be at least 50 cm. Clear inside with a non-skit 10mm thick chequered plate surface
and 6mm thick two plates projecting 7.5cms. above the floor. Walkways shall be of rigid
construction and designed to sustain a distributed load of not less than 300kg/m2.
Hand rails shall be of galvanized steel pipe of flush welded construction, ground smooth using
32mm nominal bore light type pipe, provided with double rail, top rail about 1 metre above
platform walkway level and posts spaced not more than 1.75 metres apart.
Ladders shall be 450mm clear with 20 mm rungs spaced 300mm apart and shall be equipped with
safety cages when the latter is more than 6.5 metres high.
Walkways and ladders shall be provided with the following:
a) Access walkways with hand railing along the dam side bridge girder for the full span
length.
b) One ladder for access from the walkways at girder level (these walkways are provided by
the purchaser) to walkways over each end carriage access ladder shall be provided from
the crane walkway to the operator’s cabin.
STOPS AND SWEEPS:
Bridge & trolley stops shall be provided as follows:
Steel rail stops to prevent rails from creeping and trolley from running off the bridge shall be
abutted against ends of rails and welded to the girders.
Ramp type bridge stops will be furnished by the supplier to suit run way rail size and wheel radius
as required by the supplier. Stops will be curved to engage crane wheels.
Ramp type trolley stops shall be furnished and shall be of steel conforming to IS:226 or IS:2062 as
the case may be and of bolted or riveted construction to form minimum thickness of 3.7 cm.
Rail sweeps shall be provided at the ends of the end carriages.
GUARDS:
All gear wheels, pinions and chain drives shall be completely encased unless such parts are so
situated in relation to the structure of the crane are to be as safe as if complete encasement were
provided. All moving parts which might constitute hazard shall be guarded
Effective guards shall be provided for revolving shafts and couplings unless every set screw bolt or
key on any revolving shaft is hunk, shrouded or otherwise effectively guarded. However long
travel cross shafts shall be guarded throughout their length.
The sheaves of hook blocks fitted with two sheaves or more shall be guarded to prevent trapping
of hand between a sheave and the in running rope.
ERECTION:
During erection, care must be taken that no damage is caused to the existing plant machinery
and/or structures and protect all existing plant, structures, piping, conduits, equipment and
facilities against damage during erection. The work shall be executed in a manner which no way
endangers the operations of any existing plant, structures etc.,
In case of any faulty erection all such dismantling and re-erection required will be at free of cost.
237
MECHANICAL:
MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION:
All iron and steel castings, steel forgings, steel shafting, bronze, babbit metal and other materials
shall conform to latest approved editions of the Indian standard specifications wherever these are
applicable.
BRIDGE AND TROLLEY DRIVES:
Drive assemblies shall be provided as follows:
Atleast 25% of the wheels shall be driven. The motors shall be located near the end of girders and
shall be connected to the gear boxes by means of flexible coupling. The output shafts of the gear
boxes shall be connected to the wheels by means of flexible couplings. The manufacturer shall
ensure that the motors start simultaneously.
The trolley shall be driven by two electric motors mounted on the trolley frame and connected to
atleast one driving wheel one each side of the trolley through flexible, coupling and totally
enclosed gearing and shafting.
Bridge and trolley control system shall be so designed such that movement of bridge and trolley
during inching in forward or reverse directions could be limited within 6mm.
BRAKES:
Bridge and trolley motors shall be equipped with electrically released, spring set, friction-shoe
type brakes having torque capacity at least equal to the full operating torque of the motor.
Brakes shall apply when either the motor controller or the main switch is in ‘ OFF’ position or in
the event of power failure.
Thruster type and Electromagnetic type brakes shall be provided for all the motions.
Brakes shall be class ‘B’ insulated and shall be suitable for 700C rise over a maximum ambient
temp. of 500C. Auxiliary equipment for the brake shall comprise brake contactor, relays, economy
and discharge resistors double wound transformer, rectifier, all in separate enclosure for
mounting.
For hoisting motors, brakes conforming to either of the following alternatives and as further
specified under sub-paragraphs (a), (b), (c) & (d) following shall be provided.
Alternative-A: One electrically stopping and holding brake ( located on the load side) and one
mechanical type load brake.
Alternative-B: Two electrically stopping and holding brakes, and one electrical hoist control
device ( of the two electrically hoist brakes, one should be located in the motor extension shaft
and the other on the load side).
a) Each electrically stopping and holding brake for main and auxiliary hoist shall operate
automatically and be of the electrically released spring set friction shoe type capable of
stopping and holding 1 ½ times the full rated hook load when the power is off.
b) Mechanical load brakes shall be automatic brakes of the multiple disc type operating in
an oil bath. Brakes shall be of proper size to stop and hold 1 ½ times the rated hook load
and shall be designed to prevent loads from lowering unless power is applied to the hoist
motor in a lowering direction. Brakes shall be capable of controlling the speed of
lowering under all conditions.
c) Electrical hoist control devices shall be capable of controlling the lowering speed under all
conditions, upto 1 ½ times the rated load on hook. No lowering of load shall occur unless
power is applied to hoist motor in a lowering direction.
d) Brake drum shall be separately mounted and coupling halves shall not be used as brake –
drum.
238
WHEELS AND RAILS;-
Bridge and trolley truck wheels shall be rim toughened hast treated, wrought carbon or low alloy
steel and shall be double flanged with cylindrical ‘ Straight’ or ‘ Taper’ tread.
The wheel diameter and rail sizes shall be such that the maximum wheel load in pounds does not
exceed 1,000 times the product of the wheel tread diameter and the gross width of the rail head
both dimensions being in inches.
Bridge and trolley truck wheel bearings shall be antifriction roller bearing with cartridge
mounting.
Crane runway rails shall be of suitable size as required by design standards and shall be as per
Indian Railway specification.
The steel tyred wheels shall conform to BS: 3037 “ Tyres for crane rail wheels”.
One set of wheel assembly both for driving end and non-driving end, shall be quoted as spares in
addition to the spares that are generally needed.
HOOKS:-
Hooks shall be solid, forged, heat treated alloy or carbon steel of rugged construction of the single
hook type or remshorn type and provided with a standard depress type safety latch. They shall
have swivels and operate on ball or roller thrust bearings with hardened races. Locking
arrangement to prevent hooks from swiveling shall be furnished. The tension in the stem shall be
limited to 10,000 p.s.i and the combined tensile and bending stress in the hook proper shall be
limited to20,000 p.s.i for carbon steel calculated according to Timoshenke’s theory of bending in
curved beams. Stress limits for alloy steel hooks shall bear the same ratio to the above stated
values which the ultimate stress of the alloy used bears to 60,000 p.s.i.. The lifting’s hooks shall
comply with the requirements of BS:482, BS: 2903 or BS: 3017 as applicable.
HOIST ROPE:
Hoist rope shall be extra flexible, improved plough steel /fibre core rope with well lubricated
hemp core of suitable capacity with an ultimate tensile strength of 100/110 tons/sq.inch. The
rope shall be fastened to the drum with an attachment having strength equal to that of the roe.
Rope shall be of sufficient length so that two full laps shall remain on the drum at extreme low
position of the hook. Reverse bends or cross bends are to be avoided. The breaking loads for the
main and auxiliary hoist ropes shall not be less than six times the calculated load in the ropes at
the drums block, plus the weight of rope.
DRUMS:
Rope drums shall be either cast carbon or low alloy steel or welded carbon or low alloy steel
reinforced to sustain concentrated loads resulting from rope pull. If of welded before machining.
In no case, the pitch diameter shall be less than 24 times the diameter of extra flexible rope for
best operating conditions. Drums shall be machine grooved right and shall be of proper length to
handle all the rope needed to make the required lift plus the two dead laps at or shrunk on and
keyed to the drum head. Combined bending and crushing stress shall not exceed 14, 000 p.s.i for
cast or fabricated steel drums. Hoist drum out board bearing is to be of the roller type anti-
frictions or sleeve type in oil bath.
SHEAVES:
Top sheaves shall be of rolled cast steel with a pitch diameter of at least 24 times the diameter of
extra flexible rope. Grooves shall be machined to the proper shape for the rope used. Sheaves
shall be equipped with anti friction type bearings. Sheaves shall be fully guarded so that the rope
cannot come off.
239
PROVISION FOR SPECIAL SERVICES:
Drums and sheaves shall be arranged so that both main and auxiliary hoists may be used
simultaneously for the special operation of turning over components of the turbine during
installation and maintenance. This operation will spread the hooks transverse to the bridge
travel. Total load on both hooks will not exceed the rated capacity of the main hook. All trolley
components, including drum mounts and sheave housings shall be designed for this angular pull.
GEARS:
Gears shall be cut from solid cast or forged steel blocks or shall be of stress relieved welded steel
construction or build up from steel billets and welded together to form one piece gear section.
Allowances for strength and wear shall conform to clause 29 ( clause –2) of BS: 466 latest edition.
Pinions shall be of forged carbon or heat treated alloy steel. Face and pitch of gears and pinions
and designs, manufacturing and testing shall be in accordance with British Standards for gears BS:
438, BS: 545 and BS: 721 latest editions. Split gears shall not be used. Gears and pinions shall be
pressed on and keyed to shafts. All gears are to be totally enclosed type carrier in fabricated steel
gear cases which must be dust proof and firmly sealed to prevent oil leakages and are to be
horizontal and arranged so that top half can be removed for inspection. They shall be fitted with
bolted type machined inspection covers and with cast steel cartridged housing for carrying roller
bearings for such shafts, of each gear. Dip sticks or indicator shall be provided for measuring the
oil level in the gear case. Guards shall be strong enough to retain the whole gear or any part that
might otherwise fall. No over hanging gears shall be used unless adequate provision is made to
prevent them from falling in case of breaking or working loose. Drip pans shall be provided for all
gears not otherwise provided with means for preventing dropping of oil or grease. Drain plugs
shall be provided on all gear cases.
BEARINGS:
All anti-friction bearings shall be of SKF type or/make which are interchangeable only with
corresponding sizes of SKF bearings. Bearings shall have a minimum life expectancy of 5000 hours
and may be ball, roller or removable bronze bushing type except that motor bearing shall be of
the ball or roller type. Babbitted bearings shall be permitted for bridge and trolley drive shaft
bearings only. Bearing housings shall be split or so designed, so far as practical, to exclude dirt
and to prevent leakage of oil or grease. Drip pans shall be provided for all bearings which cannot
be completely sealed so as to prevent dropping of grease.
ROTATING AND STATIONARY SHAFTS:
Shafts and axles shall have ample strength and rigidity and adequate bearing surfaces for their
purposes. They shall be furnished straight and if shoulders, shall be provided with fillets as large
radius as possible and/ or be tapered to suit.
KEYS, KEY –WAYS SPLINES AND SERRATIONS:

Keys and Keyways shall comply with BS:46 Part-I “Keys and Keyways” except where design
considerations necessary departure from the specification. Splines and serrations shall be of
involute or straight sided and shall comply with BS: 2059. Allowance shall be made for keys and
splines in sortioning the shaft.
LUBRICATION:
Crane lubrication shall be as outlined below.
a) Centralized grease lubrication unit with hand operating grease pump are to be provided
for anti- friction bearings, one unit for line shaft anti-friction bearings in bridge platform
and another unit on trolley for top sheave and drum anti-friction bearings.
b) All other anti-friction bearings as for bridge and trolley track wheels, gear boxes and
bottom sheaves on hook are to be lubricated manually by hand operated grease pump
through respective grease nipples. Accessibility shall be such that parts may be safely
lubricated from the walkways or ladder when the crane is not in motion.
240
c) The supplier shall supply first filling of lubricants and oils.
DUTY FACTORS:
All wearing mechanical parts such as gears, bearings, journals, couplings etc. shall be designed to
give adequate durability consistant with the crane duty service. The duty factors for strength and
wear for the design of mechanical parts shall not be less than those given in BS: 486 latest
editions.
TOOL BOX:
A steel toolbox with a hinged cover shall be provided conveniently located and permanently
secured in the cab or fastened to the bridge girder side of the walkway for storing of tools, oil can,
grease and waste. It shall contain proper tools necessary for minor repairs and adjustments of
crane, oil can, lubricating shaft, assorted spanners, grease gun, instructions for operation and
maintenance of crane etc.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER:
A 2.5 Kg CO2 gas type fire extinguisher bearing the under-writers lable shall be provided in the
cab.
NAME PLATE:
Name plate showing year of manufacture, trade mark, make, rated capacity and other required
details of each hoist shall be placed on either side of the crane girder in such a manner so as to be
easily legible from the ground or floor.
Note: Necessary design calculations for selecting the motor, wire rope, gear ratio, wheel
diameter etc., shall be submitted for approval along with the drawings before manufacturing.
ELECTRICAL
(if VVVF drives are envisaged, all the equipment required for the relevant application shall be
envisaged duly following the standards)
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT:
Electric equipment shall consist of necessary motors, electrically operated brakes, VVVF drive
controllers and resistors with magnetic contractors where necessary. Overload relays or fuse
panels with necessary wires and conduits, conductors and current collectors, limit switches, lights,
bridge wiring, crane runway wiring, all complete with hardware, insulators, anchors, and any
other equipment necessary for the installation and proper and safe operation of the crane.
STANDARDS:
Manufacture and installation of all electric equipment shall comply with the requirements of the
latest editions of the following BSS standards or equivalent ISS standards.
BSS:446 : “Electric overhead traveling cranes for general use infactories,
workshops and warehouse.”.
BSS:587 : “Motor starters and controllers”.
BSS:816 : “ Requirements for electrical appliances and accessories”.
BSS: 2613 : “ The electrical performance of rotating electrical machinery”.
BSS: 325 : “ Three phase induction motors”.
ISS: 732 : “Code of practice for electrical wiring installations”.
Indian Electricity Rules, Latest Edition.
ELECTRICAL DRIVES:
A separate electric drive equipped with flexible couplings shall be provided for each motion. The
drives shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled, variable speed, reversible slip ring wound rotor type(if
VVVF drives are envisaged, all the equipment required for the relevant application shall be
241
envisaged duly following the standards)suitable for 3 phase 50c/s, 415V AC supply built specially
for heavy duty crane service. The crane manufacturer shall determine drive ratings so that the
crane will not demand more than full load torque of any drive of rated performance. All drives
shall be provided with sealed anti-friction bearings of SKF or equivalent make. Drives shall be
braced and insulated to withstand plugging, heavy shocks and vibrations transmitted by driven
machinery. All crane motors shall comply with the stipulations of the enclosed specification for
Low voltage auxiliary motors. Gear type flexible couplings are preferred for all motors. The
electric drives shall comply with latest ISS/BSS standards.
CONTROLLERS:
All controllers shall be mounted so as to be readily accessible for maintenance purposes.
Controllers for motors be of variable voltage variable speed, reversing drum type, self contained
with large contacts and contact fingers. Drum type controllers shall me rated for intermittent duty
for maximum 3 phase 50c/s AC of 100Amps, 415V giving stator full reversing and plugging as well
as rotor plain starting and regulating duty for slip ring machines. Controllers for motors shall be of
the magnetic reversing type, shall be suitable for intermittently rated AC slip ring motors for
starting, speed controlling and reversing. Control handle for magnetic controller shall have spring
return to OFF position and shall be mounted in properly ventilated enclosure.
Control equipment mounted in the cab shall be provided with uniform indelible nameplates
identifying the various controls and indicating the direction of motion.
All contact tips and fingers shall have renewable tips and shall be easy to replace and adjust.
Controllers with atleast five uniformly proportioned steps of control in each direction shall be
provided for all motions.
Magnetic reversing type master controller shall be cam operated with removable cover and self
aligning contacts each having double break, silver tipped contacts fitted with star wheel and pawl
to give positive notching position for various points of operation.
The controller shall comply with the relevant and latest IS standards.
RESISTORS:
Resistors shall be properly ventilated and covered to avoid injury to personnel and guard against
mechanical damages. Resistors shall be rust proof, unbreakable grid type, suitable for starting and
regulating duty, intermittent ten minutes rating (Pause not exceeding 4 minutes on first point,
remaining points traversed in 6 minutes with equal pauses followed by 5 minutes rest), with a
maximum temp. rise not exceeding 220°C over an ambient of 50°C. Hoist resistors shall be graded
to pass 75% full load current on first notch and the trolley and bridge resistors shall be graded to
pass 100% full load current. Resistors shall be mounted in pressed sheet and plates with drip-
proof and loubred side covers, in separate units.
All resistors shall be provided with terminal boards with suitable brass studs and double nuts in
the side and bottom of the resistor unit for connections to outgoing standard aluminum copper
cables. All resistors shall comply with latest relevant IS standards.
LIMIT SWITCHES:
Hoist shall be provided with an approved type of automatic reset limit switch with normally
closed contacts for controlling the hoist motor main power circuit to prevent over hoisting. Limit
switch shall be located so as to accessible for inspection and so that it will be operated directly by
the hook block. When the hook reaches upper limit of travel, the hoist motor circuits shall be
opened. The operation of the limit switch shall not prevent lowering of the hook by the controller.
Limit switches shall also be provided in each of the long travel and cross travel motions to switch
off the power circuit automatically to prevent over traveling of the crane in both the directions.
Warning lights with identifying name plates shall be provided in the cab to alert the operator
when trolley has traveled to within 25 centimeters of rail stops.
CONTROL PANELS:
242
All control panels shall be floor-mounting type enclosed in sheet cubicles of robust construction
and shall be provided with hinge double fold front door. All control panels except protective panel
and trolley cross conductors shall be mounted on the platform of the same side bridge girder that
carries the operator’s cabin. The long travel drives shall be provided at the back of the panels to
attend to the rear side. All resistors shall be located along side and adjacent to their respective
panels with provision of atleast 50mm clear space at front and rear of each panel. The operator’s
cabin shall house the protective panel, master switches or controllers, cabin fan, warning horn
(outside), all light control switches, plug-receptacle and lighting and hand lamp transformers.
The protective panel shall comprise equipment for protection of the crane motors against low
voltage, short circuit or overloads on any of the motor circuits. The operation of the overload
relay for any of the crane motors shall operate the main line contactor to cut off power supply to
all the motors. It shall not be possible to re-close the main line contactor until all motor
controllers have been returned to OFF position. The equipment shall include the following
components mounted and front connected on a slate or abonysindanyo base and shall be totally
enclosed in a dust protecting sheet steel case with front hinged two fold doors and bolted type
removable back cover.
a. One 3 pole iron clad isolating main switch fuse mechanically interlocked with the
door giving access to the panel. The incoming terminals of the isolating switch
shall be shrouded to prevent accidental contact when the door is open. Continuous
rating of the switch shall be equivalent to 150% full load current of the main host
and bridge drive motors operating simultaneously.
b. One 2 pole control switch knife type with 30 amps HRC fuses.
c. One suitably rated double wound transformer to provide control circuit power at
not more than 250V and two re-wireable type fuses for the control circuit.
d. One 3 pole air break main line contactor with N/C and N/O auxiliary contacts,
renewable type contact tips, powerful blowout and arc chutes suitable for
continuous current rating equivalent to 150% full load current of main hoist and
bridge drive motors operating simultaneously.
e. Three over current relays for each motor duly calibrated shall be provided with an
inverse type time lag to prevent tripping on momentary over loads of small
magnitudes.
f. One push button with external operating mechanism for resetting the line
contactor.
g. One terminal board with brass terminal studs and double nuts for motor power
circuits.
h. One TB similar to above for the control circuit wiring.
i. One Pilot lamp with amber colored cover and 230V AC lamp mounted on the front
door with necessary fuses and resistor.
A durable scheme diagram plate showing connections of the protective panel shall be fixed to
inside of the front door of the panel. For separate mounting and to work in connection with the
protective scheme the following are to be provided.
a. One MCCB of suitable capacity shall be provided on the bridge platform as close to the
main collector as possible to isolate the main power.
b. One MCCB of 15 amps capacity shall be mounted in the cabin for emergency stop to be
operated by the operator for cutting off the main supply in all operations.
c. Four 15 amps MCCBs to be fitted at the four corners of the crane so as to be accessible
while standing on the crane – gantry platform. They shall be wired up in series with the ‘
dead-man’ contacts ( if any) of master controllers, emergency stop switch or push button
and the overload relay auxiliary contacts in the ( holding), normally open contact circuit of
the main contractor. The reset button along with all the ‘OFF’ main closed contacts of the
243
master controllers and / or drum controllers shall be connected across the above
normally open (holding) contact of the main line contactor.
d. One set of signal lamps consisting of coloured glass jars and fittings with ES holders to
house 60 watts, 230 volt lamps shall be mounted in a conspicuous and accessible
position. The ‘Green’ lamp and the ‘Red’ lamp shall be connected respectively in series
with normally closed contact and normally open contact of the main contactor.
RUNWAY CONDUCTORS:
Flexible runway conductors both for crane and trolley shall be copper or high conductivity rolled
low carbon steel suspended from the trolley which will run on a track fitted along with the length
of the span shall be provided for the runway length with feed boxes, circulators, brackets,
supports for mounting. Conductors shall be four in number , three for main power supply and
fourth one to serve as earth conductor to be connected to the earthing of power station as per
I.E.E rules. The conductors shall be arranged in vertical formation. The bottom one being the
earth conductor spaced adequately for case of arranged in vertical formation. The bottom one
being the earth conductor spaced adequately for case of maintenance and prevention against
short circuit or earth fault. The brackets carrying the insulations shall be suitably space.
Conductors shall be well protected to prevent injury to personnel and to guard against
mechanical damage. Due consideration shall be given in the design for future extensions.
COLLECTORS:
Current collectors for use with shrouded copper conductors shall be of the slide-shoe type with
necessary spring loading type ( shrouded DSL )and shall assure continuous contact and prevent
arcing and over heating.
CRANE LIGHTING:
Lighting shall be provided with all necessary electrical equipment accessories for the crane.
Lighting circuit components shall be suitable for 240V single phase AC operation.
Main lighting circuit shall be tapped from the live side of the main isolating switch in the
operator’s cabin through one double pole, 15 amps 600 volts iron – clad switch – fuse located in
close proximity to the above main isolating switch. This switch fuse shall be connected to 415V
side of a 415/240 volts single phase, 50 c/s dry type lighting transformer, of adequate capacity.
Lighting transformer shall be provided with+ 2 ½ % and + 5% taps on 415 V side. Mid point of
240V winding shall be earthed. 240V winding shall be connected to the main switch of the
lighting distribution board.
Lighting transformer and the distribution board are to be located in the operator’s cabin.
Distribution board with the enclosed bus bars shall comprise the following circuits.
a. One incoming circuit controlled by 3 amps MCCB.
b. One outgoing circuit supplying power to;
i. One 200 watt bulk –head light with prismatic glass fixtures, shock mounted and
located in cabin so as to be clear off operator’s head. A toggle switch shall be
provided to control this sub-circuit.
ii. One warning horn.
iii. One 30 cm. Sweep, non-swiveling but adjustable cabin type 230 volt, single phase
A.C. ceiling fan complete with guard mesh toggle switch and regulator.
c. One outgoing circuit controlling 3 Royrolle or equivalent type, 3 pin 230 volt polarized
inter locked power receptacles. Receptacle locatings shall be; one in cabin, one near
middle of the bridge platform and one in control panel cabin.
d. One outgoing circuit for crane job lighting, feeding 4 high bay type 500 watt lighting
fixtures ( two for each girder) shock mounted in a convenient manner to enable the lights
to be serviced from the platform.
244
CABLES AND CONDUITS:
All cables and wiring shall be furnished and installed in rigid galvanized steel conduits with
threaded type fittings, galvanized outlet and pull boxes. Conduit for power or control circuits
shall be not less than size recommended by Indian Electricity Rules for the conductors that are to
be installed therein. The entire conduit system shall be installed so that any moisture will be
drained away from terminal boxes and electric devices. No conduit of size shatter than 25mm
diameter shall be used. Power wiring and control wiring shall be kept in separate conduits.
Alternatively cables may be mounted on perforated trays and clamped securely.
Wiring of all equipment and control devices located in the cabin shall be completed in the shop
and wires shall be terminated on terminal blocks, housed in a junction box. Magnetic control
board and resistors mounted on the bridge shall be shop wired and wires shall be terminated on
suitable terminal blocks housed in a junction box. Trolley shall be completely wire construction,
shall be cut to length and insulators shall be attached and every thing shall be boxed for shipment
assembled. The cable wire shall be 660V grade PVC insulated PVC sheathed with stranded
aluminum conductors.
Wiring adjacent to resistors and control panel shall be stranded, soft-drawn copper or aluminum
with 660V grade, false, heat and moisture resistant insulation, suitable for operating at high
temperatures. Conductor size shall be as required but not less than 10 Sq.mm. Panel control
wiring and lighting circuit wiring shall be 10.0sqmm Aluminium( minimum) stranded 660V
standard switch board wire insulation with cotton braid jackets.
Wires for motor primary and secondary circuits shall have adequate current carrying capacities to
carry full load current of the motors. All wires shall terminate in approved lugs or other approved
devices which will maintain good connections under rough usages. No splices shall be made in
any wiring on the panel or in conduit. All insulation ad all clearances to ground shall be designed
so that the live parts will withstand a high potential test of not less than 2500V at 50 c/s for one
minutes. No part of the panel supporting structures shall be cut away to give the required.
Clearances.
Conductor areas for main power circuits shall be selected taking into consideration simultaneous
operation of the main hoist and bridge motors.
Where the installation is necessary, all cables for power, lighting and control circuits shall be
provided separately in coils with 15 percent extra length over the computed lengths for each size,
so required for complete wiring of all the equipment on the cane.
TESTS AND TEST REPORTS:

Type and routine tests on all electrical equipment in accordance with approved standards shall be
performed and test certificates shall be furnished to purchaser for approval.
SAFETY EARTHING:
Crane structure, motor frames and metal cases of all electrical equipment including metal conduit
and cable guards shall be effectively earthed.
All motors, brakes, limit switches, panels, switches, drum controllers, resistors unit sets shall be
provided with two studs for earthings.
A separate long travel conductor rail shall be fitted on the runway crane girder in the same plane
as the three main power rails to serve as the ground bus. The ground bus shall be solidly bonded
to effective earthing stations at independent points.
A separate collector shoe, identical to the main power collector shoe shall be provided to engage
with the runway earth conductor rail. Duplicate earthing circuits shall be tapped and taken round
the bridge platform and cabin from this earth collector shoe. Two earth terminals shall be
provided at both the ends of the ground bus for connecting to purchaser’s stations grounding
system.
245
An additional earth collector shall be provided to engage with the cross travel earthing rail
located below all other rails.
All electrical equipment on the bridge and cabin shall be solidly bonded to the bridge earth circuit
similarly all electrical equipment in the trolley shall be solidly bonded to the earthing circuit
tapped from the cross travel earth collector.
The adequacy of conductivity of collector gear components and bonding shall be ensured.
WARNING HORN:
An electric warning horn shall be provided and mounted on under-side of the cabin. Control shall
be arranged so that horn operates automatically when bridge travel motor is energized . In
addition ,manual control shall be provided in operator’s cabin at a location convenient to the
operator. Horn shall be heavy duty hooter 95 db as 3.5 metres double ball projector suitable for
230V AC operation.
The Cranes shall be suitable for Tandom operation during handling of heavy weights such as
stator and Rotor etc. All provisions shall be incorporated in terms of electrical and mechanical
features to operate the cranes in combined / tandom and shall be supplied along with the
cranes.
The cranes shall be suitable for operating them with remote near to the job instead from the
cabin. Necessary system shall be included in the scope
The slings, D - shackles of various capacities for general purpose, spares for five years of
operation & maintenance and special tools, tackle etc., shall also be supplied.
The LIFTING BEAM REQUIRED FOR LIFTING AND ERRECTION OF THE HEAVIEST ASSEMBLY SHALL
BE SUPPLIED AS PER THE REQUIREMENT OF THE MAIN GENERATOR-TURBINE EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURER
SPARES FOR EOT CRANES

The following spares are to be supplied along with the equipmentfor each EOT crane.
1. Bearings - 1 No. of each type
2 Thrustors & DCEM - 2 Nos. of each type
3. Brake liner& Rivets - 2 sets
4. Power &control cards - 1 No. of each type
5. Thyristor drive unit (VVVF) - 1 set
6. Power contactors - 1 No of each type
Note: Hand rails shall be arranged both sides i.e., Upsream and Down stream sides of power house all
along the crane runwayi.e., from Unloading bay to end wall at unit#12 side end panel wall as per factories
act.
7.14. POWER & CONTROL CABLES, CABLE TRAYS, LAYING AND TERMINATION
a. Supply of the 11/11KV UE XLPE copper/Aluminium cable
Required length and sizes of XLPE cables for connection from 400 / 11 Kv Station Transformers to
incomer VCB of 11 KV Substation , from 11 KV Outdoor Substation to Indoor 11 KV panels and
from indoor 11 KV panels to Auxiliary transformers and Isolation transformers are to be supplied
b. Supply of 1100V grade Aluminum and copper LT power , control & Instrumentation
cables
Required length and sizesofAluminum / copper LT power, control & Instrumentation FRLS
PVC/XLPE insulated cables shall be supplied. The quantity and types of power & control cables,
cable trays and their accessories shall be estimated by the Contractor and shall be indicated in
the tender. The design, manufacture, testing and packing of the FRLS PVC copper control and
246
power cables and Aluminum Power cables covered by this specification shall comply with the
latest editions of the following standards and other relevant Indian Standards.
IS: 694 (Part-I) : Specification for PVC insulated cables (For voltages up to1100V)
IS.1554 (Part –I) : PVC Insulated (Heavy duty) Electrical cables for working
voltages upto and including 1100V.
IS:7098 (Part-I) : Specification for cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
sheathed cables for working voltages upto and including
1100v
IS:7098 (Part-II) : Specification for cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC
sheathed cables for working voltages from 3.3kv upto and
including 33kv
IS.8130 : Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
IS.5831 : PVC insulation and sheath of Electric cables.
IS.3961 : Recommended current ratings for cables
IS.10418 : Specification for drums for electrical cables.
IS.10810 : Methods of tests for cables.
ASTM.D – 2843 : Standard test method for density of smoke from the burning
of decomposition of plastics.
ASTM.D – 2863 : Standard method for measuring the minimum oxygen
combustion for support candle like combustion for plastics.
IEC. 754 (Part – I): Test on gases during combustion of electric cables.
IEC. 331 : Fire resisting characteristics of Electric Cables.
IEC. 332 (Part – I & III ) :Flammability characteristics of cables.
SS. 4241475 :Flammability characteristics of cables class F3.
7.14.1 Cable specification
1 Copper Control cables:
General Features
1. No. of cores and C/S area : as per requirement
2. Length of the cable : as per requirement
3. Voltage grade & type : 650/1100 V Grade, unarmored& armoured
FRLS(Fire Retardant low smoke) PVC insulated
4. Reference : IS: 1554 (Part-I) latest revision for control
cables.
5. Conductor : Stranded circular non- compacted conductor
made of high conductivity annealed tinned
copper.
6. Conductor size : As per IS : 1554
7. Minimum No. of wires : 3.
8. Insulation : PVC type C to IS 5831, colour coded.
9. Thickness of insulation : As per IS: 1554 (Part-I)
247
(Nominal) in “mm” As per IS: 694 (Part-I) .
10. Minimum Thickness of : As per IS:1554 (Part-I)
Inner Sheath in “mm” As per IS: 694 (Part-I)
11. Outer sheath : FRLS(Fire Retardant low smoke) PVC type STI
confirming to requirements of IS: 5831& temp.
Index not less than 250 C.
12. Armouring : As per IS:1554(P-I) for Armoured cables
13. Thickness of outer sheath : As per IS:1554 (Part-I)
Minimum .in “ mm”
14. Approx. Overall diameter : As per IS:1554 (Part-I)
of the cable in “mm”
15. Approx. net weight of cable : As per IS:1554 (Part-I)
in Kg/Km
16. DC Resistance per Km at : As per IS:1554 (Part-I)
20 Degree C (max)
17. Core to core capacitance : 100 Pico Farad/Meter.
per meter (nominal)
2 ALUMINIUM CABLES:
General Features:
1. Voltage Grade and type : 650/1100V Grade, AYY unarmored type Heavy
duty extruded FRLS(Fire Retardant low smoke)
PVC sheathed Power Cables complying with
IS:1554 OR IS:7098.
2. Conductor : Stranded round/sector shaped
aluminum conductor Class 2 to IS:8130
3. Insulation : PVC type C. to IS 5831 colour coded.
4. Inner sheath and filler : Shall be provided with extruded PVC
Insulated type ST-2
5. Armouring : As per IS:1554(P-I) for Armoured cables
6. Outer sheath : FRLS(Fire Retardant low smoke) PVC sheath
Type ST-2
7. Extruded or wrapped : Extruded.
8. Color of outer sheath : Black
9. Color of cores
Core 1 : Red
Core 2 : Yellow
Core 3 : Blue
Core 4 (Neutral) : Black
3 Screened cables and Instrumentation Cables:
248
General Features for Screened cables and Instrumentation Cables:
1. Voltage grade & type : 300/500V unarmoured FRLS PVC insulated
complying with IS 1554
2. Conductors : 0.5 Sq.mm dia, tinned electrolytic grade
annealed copper stranded conductor as per IS
8130.
3. Insulation : Conductors shall be insulated with PVC type
Cinsulation.
4. Colours of insulation : Cores are identified with different types ofcolour
scheme as per relevant strands.
5. Pair/Triad : Two/Three cores shall be uniformly twisted
together to form a pair/triad.
6. Individual shielding : Individuals pairs/triads shall be laid with
polyester isolation tape with numbering for easy
identification.
7. Laying of pairs/Triad : Pair/Triad shall be laid up with suitable lay. The
outer most layers are right hand lay & successive
layers are laid up with opposite lay.
8. Binder : A non-Hygroscopic binder tape shall be provided
to bind up pair/triad
9. Collective Screen : An aluminium/polyester tape shall be applied
over the laid up pairs with the metallic side down
and in Continuous contact with a 0.5mm2 tinned
copper drain wire.
10. Inner sheath : Extruded inner sheath or wrap with PVC tape.
11. Outer sheath : The sheath material shall be of FRLS PVC
compound.
12. Rip cord : To simplify jacket removal, high tensile strength
nylon
rip cord shall be provided over laid up of
pair/triad below the outer sheath.
249
7.14.2 General Design Requirements:
Cables shall be designed and manufactured so that damage will not result from transportation,
installation and operation under any/or all the climatic and operating conditions to which they
may be subjected. The cables shall have current ratings and derating factors as per relevant
standards.
For power applications of auxiliaries the Aluminum cables selected shall be minimum of 3 ½ core
x 25 sq mm. Aluminum cables lesser than this cross section are not allowed and the sizes below
25 sq.mm shall obviously be copper cables.
All control cables. Instrumentation cables and cables connected to DC circuits shall be invariably
copper conductor cables.
Aluminum cables are not allowed to be used in DC circuits what ever the capacity it may be.
Cable terminations shall be terminated with copper lugs only for DC circuits.
Cables shall be suitable for laying in conduits, ducts, trenches, trays or for direct burial in ground
in both wet and dry locations.
Cable shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under power supply system frequency variation
of +/- 5% and voltage variation of +/- 10%.
For PVC cables, current rating shall be given based on protection by class R fuse for circuit
breaker/contactor with setting not exceeding 1.5 times the rated current for installation of cable
in air and duct of 1.3 times the rated current for installation in ground.
While selecting the size of the cable 70% derating factor shall be considered. Accordingly higher
size to be selected.
The max. Temperature of conductor for continuous operation of Copper cables shall be 70 degree
C and for Aluminum cables it shall be 85 degree C for FRLS cables.
All cables shall carry the manufacturer’s data in a permanent and legible manner. The
manufacturer’s data shall include the name, cable size, voltage rating, type of insulation, length
of the cable in meters for every meter length, together with any other information which the
manufacturer considered appropriate.
Cables shall be extruded PVC type designed to withstand all mechanical, electrical and thermal
stresses developed under steady state and transient operating conditions as specified.
The cable cores shall be laid up with fillers between the cores wherever necessary. It shall not
stick to insulations and inner sheath.
The oxygen index of FRLS cables shall be minimum 30%.
The smoke density factor of all FRLS cables shall be  60%
The Acid gas of all FRLS cables shall be 20% by weight.
7.14.3 MARKING:
The marking that will be done on the cable drum shall have the following information:
a. Trademark
b. Name of the Manufacturer
c. Nominal cross sectional area of the conductor of the cable
d. Number of cores
e. Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable
f. Length of cable on the drum
g. Weight of the drum with cable in kgs.
h. ISI certification mark
250
i. Purchase order number against which the supply is made
j. Cable core
k. Direction of protection of drum
l. Year of manufacture
7.14.4 Specific Requirements of Power & Control Cables:Unarmored&armoured Copper Control Cables
& Aluminum power Cables:
650/1100 V grade Annealed tinned high conductivity, stranded copper conductor Polythene
insulated cores laid up, thermo plastic taped, thermo plastic taped again and PVC sheathed
overall as per relevant ISS.
650/1100V Grade heavy duty continuous current carrying capacity unarmored AYY. Type FRLS
(Fire Retardant low smoke) PVC insulated stranded round / sector shaped Aluminum conductor,
suitably laid up PVC inner sheathed and PVC jacketed over all and colourcoded as per
specification and generally confirm to ISS mentioned in Clause No.3.03 of latest suitably designed
and manufactured to with stand a maximum conductor temperature of 85 °C.
NOTE: XLPE Cables confirming to IS:7098 Part-1 can also be offered for LT Power Cables instead
of PVC insulated Cables as these are superior, high current carrying capacity and and less
weight.
7.14.5 Standard sizes:
Copper / Aluminium conductors: The dimensions and resistances of standard circular conductor
shall be in accordance with the values given in I.S. 8130 of 1976 (or latest issue).
The permissible tolerances on the standard diameters of wires of stranded conductors shall be in
accordance with IS: 8130 of 1976 (or latest issue).
7.14.6 Construction of Power & Control Cables:
1) Conductors :-
The conductors of Control Cableshall be of multi strand copper conductor annealed
tinned high conductivity copper wire of respective sizes as specified.
The conductors of Control Cableshall be of round / sector shaped Aluminum scheduled
Class 2 of IS 8130 with a maximum operating temperature of 85°C.
2) Insulation:
The copper conductor shall be insulated with PVC Type-C.
The Aluminum conductor shall be provided with PVC insulation of Type C PVC compound
confirming to IS 8130 of 1984.
There shall be no joints in any of the cores in the entire length of the cable supplied in
each drum.
3) Color scheme for identification of cores:
The individual cores of cables containing two or more cores shall be identified by different
colour coding of the PVC insulation.
The following colour scheme shall be adopted for Control Cable:
For 4 core cable : Red, Yellow, Blue and Black.
For 2 Core cable : Red and Black.
In case of multicore cables, two adjacent cores (counting core and direction core) in each
layer shall be coloured blue, yellow, and remaining cores light gray. Colour code of Red,
Yellow, Blue, Black shall be adopted for Aluminum power cables
4) Inner Sheath:
251
The laid up cores shall be provided with an inner sheath applied by extrusion. It shall be ensured
that it is as circular as possible. The inner sheath shall be so applied that it fits closely on the laid
up cores and it shall be possible to remove it without damage to the insulation.
The value of thickness of inner sheath shall be as per IS 1554(Part-I).
When one or more layers of proofed tape or plastic tape is applied over laid up cores as a binder,
the thickness of such tapes shall not be constructed as a part of the inner sheath.
5) Outer sheath:
Composition of sheath for Copper Cables:
The compound used for sheathing shall be Type ST2 FRLS PVC compound (Grey coloured)
confirming the requirements of IS 5831 – 1989 and shall be extruded flame retarding PVC Type, as
given in the insulation clause. The sheathing compound shall be so designed as to afford a high
degree of mechanical protection and shall also be oil and weather resisting.
Composition of Sheath for Aluminum Cables:
The compound used for sheathing shall be of Type ST2 FRLS PVC compound confirming the
requirements of IS 5831 – 1989 and shall be extruded flame retarding PVC Type, The sheathing
compound shall be so designed as to afford a high degree of mechanical protection and shall also
be oil, weather resisting.
The outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion over the inner sheath of multi core cables. The
outer sheath shall be so applied that is fits closely over insulation, inner sheath. It shall be
possible to remove it without damage to the insulation/ inner sheath.
Standard colors of sheath:
The standard colours of FRLS PVC compound sheath shall be gray.
Thickness of sheath:
The thickness of the sheath arrived at by taking the average of a number of measurements shall
not be less than the standard values.
7.14.7 Current Ratings:
Bidders must confirm that the current ratings and rating factors for the cables they have offered
shall be as per those given in I.S. 3961. Any deviation from the above I.S. Shall be specifically
mentioned in the proposals.
7.14.8 Tests:
The cables shall be tested in accordance with IS; 1554 of 1976 / IS:7908 and other relevant IS of
the latest issue. The tests shall include all type tests and routine tests listed in the above
standards. All tests shall be carried out on the cables before despatch in the presence of the
purchaser’s representative. The type test certificates shall be furnished with the tender.
ROUTINE TESTS
i) Conductor Resistance Tests
ii) Insulation Resistance Test
iii) High Voltage Test
iv) Partial Discharge test
TYPE TESTS
i) Annealing test (for Copper)
ii) Tensile test and wrapping tests (for Aluminum)
iii) Dielectric Power factor Test
iv) Test for thickness of Insulation and Sheath
252
v) Tensile strength and elongation test for Insulation and Sheath
vi) Ageing test, Loss of mass test, shrinkage test, Hot deformation tests for Insulation and
Sheath.
vii) Flammability test.
viii) Oxygen & Temperature Index test.
ix) Smoke density test
x) Acid gas emission test.
The cables shall be laid in galvanized Iron (GI) perforated trays. The trays shall be run under the
panels/in trenches as the case may be and shall be supported on mild steel painted supports
inside the power house and GI supports out side the power house. The cable trays for vertical
supports shall be Ladder type and For Horizontal shall be perforated type shall be used. The sizes
shall be selected based on the requirement. Necessary covers with clamps shall be provided for
the cable trays other than in cable gallery.
7.14.9 Armouring
No armouring is required for cables laid inside the power house. GI strip/wire Armouring shall be
provided for cables laid outside the power-house. All LT and HT cables shall be of FRLS .
7.14.20 Laying
All the cabling required between the panels and equipment shall be done with the cables supplied
and laid as per the design requirements and approvals. Cables shall be laid in ducts and in Cable
trays. Segregation shall be made in laying the control and power cables. Cables shall have
identification tags. Approval of cable laying principles shall be adopted before carrying out the
work. All necessary civil works and steel structural fabrication works and painting of the same are
included in the scope with all men and material complete. Binding of cables shall be done with
cable tags intermittently.
7.14.21 Termination
The cables shall be terminated to the panels / equipment with suitable cable glands. The cores of
the cable shall be terminated with suitable copper lugs and identification ferrules. The ferrules
provided for identification shall have the termination identification to which it is being terminated
and also the identification of the termination at other end for clear understanding. The
terminations shall be carried out based on the customer approved cable schedules and
termination drawings. After completion of termination and testing of cables the cable entries of
the panels shall be filled with fire proof asbestos compound to avoid any entry of fire into the
panels.
7.14.22 CABLE TRAYS & ACCOSSERIES
Perforated Cable trays, Ladder type cable trays of suitable sizes along with covers are to be
supplied and installed for routing of the Power,control and other cables. Accessories such as GI
bolts,Nuts and clamps for fixing of covers etc are to be supplied for complete work.
For Power cables and Verticle cable routing Ladder type cable trays are to be envisaged. For
others perforated GI cable trays are to be envisaged.
7.15 POWER HOUSE EARTHING & GROUNDING
Power House Earthing shall be provided with suitable size of Mild steel (MS) flat as per the
standards from the bottom most point of powerhouse. The earthing system shall be suitable to
meet the earthing of all the electrical equipment in the powerhouse. Raft earthing mat of the
pump house raft shall be 75 X 16 mm or higher. Necessary spikes as required shall be drilled and
32mm spike rods shall be placed and the mat shall be welded for the same. Raisers connecting to
the equipment above the mat shall be 75 x 16 mm and the raisers exposed out for connection to
the equipment shall be of Galvanised flats of sizes 50 X 8 mm or higher. Flexible. copper cable
253
connections shall be adopted for the local equipment earthing from the main raisers according to
the requirement.
All the electrical equipment shall be grounded at two points. Earthing shall be provided by means
of an earth mat laid right into the tail race to keep the earth resistance to minimum of the order
of 0.4 ohm . The earth mat shall be designed duly taking into consideration of the local soil
particulars. The earth mat requirements shall be designed as per the standardsand to be got
approved by the purchaser.
Raisers shall be made available with Galvanised 50 X 6 mm (minimum size) flat from the ground
earth mat at all areas and floors including service bay, erection bay and Unloading bay during the
civil works stage and same shall be extended to the equipment as required
Raisers shall be made available with Galvanised 100 X16 mm flat from the ground earth mat for
grounding of Generator and 75 X 12 mm flat for grounding of Busduct and its equipment.
ELECTRONIC EARTHING: Provision for separate electronic earthing as per the standards should be
provided. For this two sets of TWO Earth pits each shall be arranged (with inter connection amidst
two pits) at two different locations should be done. The Earth connection shall be extended to all
the require panels is included in the scope.Any alternatives can be finalised during detailed
engineering.
Design of earthing shall be done as per IEEE 80 standard
7.16. AIR CONDITIONING & VENTILATION

To provide cooled air ventilation by circulating chilled water from chiller plantWater spray cooled
air ventilation system (Air Washer Units) to maintain temperature in the power house complex
and other areas at less than 3036 degree C with 65 % RH and air conditioning the areas like the
Main control room, Unit Controller, Station controller ares, GIS control room & Office Roomsat
less than 24 degree C with 55% RH with Air Cooled Packaged AC Units / Split ACs.
Return air duct shall be as minimum as possible and preferably to be provided at the top of the
service bay with the help of exhaust fans if necessary. The Ventilation and Air conditioning
system shall consist of the following equipment for full functioning and easy maintenance and for
installation.
The plant shall be offered in complete shape with Chillers, Packaged/ SplitAir conditioning units,
centrifugal fans, blowers, Air Washer units, electric motors, starters, Distribution Boards, Cabling,
control panel, valves, filters, dampers, air ducts insulation, piping, fittings etc., and other parts
which are essential for effective air conditioning & ventilation system.
a. Ventilation Equipment
Blowers, Fans, air filter units, diffusers, dampers, louvers, circulating water pumps, water spray
system with bronze nozzles and their fittings including painting and foundations.
b. Air - Conditioning Equipment
Air-handling units, refrigerating machines, Chiller units, circulating pumps/Packaged/ SplitAir
conditioning unitsand their fittings including painting, thermal insulation and foundations.
c. GI Air duct
Air duct, air dampers,air outlets and inlets and their fittings including painting and thermal
insulation.
d. Electrical Equipment
Power source panel, operating panel, control system conduit tubes and cables for the ventilation
and air conditioning system, and their fittings including painting.
e. Water piping
Purpose Expansion tank, headers, water pipes and fitting such as elbows, bees, couplings, valves,
supports etc. for air-conditioning system including painting and thermal insulation.
f. Refrigerant piping
254
Refrigerant pipes and fitting such as elbows, bees, coupling valves, supports etc for air
conditioning system including painting and thermal insulation. Two sets of equipment shall be
considered for power house complex to ascertain in minimizing the Ducts sizes and space
constraints. The HVAC system equipment rooms shall be placed outside the power hose premises
at either ends and the ducts shall be routed to centre.
Each set shall be designed such that, its equipment requirement shall be selected keeping 33
50% margin for spare( 2 working & 1 stand by) after designed parameters are finalized for the
total requirement
Cooling water required shall be tapped from Head race or tail race at Turbine floor from 2 units
and water supply bus shall be formed with necessary valves and the water shall be pumped with
service water pumps ( 1 working + 1 stand by )with required pressure. All equipment required
along with pipelines, valves. Control panels etc are in the scope of supply and erection.
36 Nos. Wall mounted type axial flow Exhaust fans of each capacity approx. 25000CMH complete
with Drive motor, exhaust cowl and bird screen shall also be envisaged.The final sizing and
quantity shall be decided during Detailed Engineering.
No. of Air changes : minimum 6 changes/ houras per IS 4720 code of practice for
Ventilation of surface Hydel Power Station or more To suit type of usage of space and shall be at
uniform pressure at all the levels and areas.
The air duct work for the entire ventilating system shall be designed, fabricated and neatly
erected as per IS:655. Galvanized sheet confirming to IS: 277 shall be used for construction of
ducts, thickness of the Galvanized steel sheets shall confirm to the requirements of table - I of IS:
655.
The supplied air in to the lower elevations i.e up to gallery level of the power house, after taking
away the heat load rises through different openings to the upper floors and is then finally to be
exhausted out by means of wall mounted exhaust fans provided on Up stream /down stream side
walls of the power house at below roof level.
In case of fire inside the Power House, the circulation of air shall be stopped with the help of
remote control / Automatic.
Disigning of the system with IS standards shall be done and got approved by the purchaser before
execution.
7.17. DG SET 1000 KVA
Contractor shall design and supply 2 (Two) No. 1000 KVA (Ecoustic Enclosure type), 3 phase, 11 KV
50Hz or suitable higher capacity Diesel Generator with control & protection panels, Battery,
Battery charger, AVR and Remote starting facility.
The starting of DG set engine shall be by electrical self-starting unit with source of energy from
batteries. Its cranking device should be so designed that it would operate automatically
whenever starting impulse is received. The priming of the fuel oil system and the pressure
lubrication of the bearings and cylinder valves should also start simultaneously to obviate any
chance of seizure of pistons and bearings as well as air locking in the fuel supply system.
The engine should be suitable for running on high-speed diesel oil as available in India. The
engine shall be capable of running on load within 15 to 20 seconds of its starting.
The cooling of the engine shall preferably be by water filled radiator.
Generator Specification
1. Rating : 1000 KVA or suitable higher capacity
2. Power Factor : 0.85 lagging
3. Rated Voltage : 11 KV
4. Rated frequency : 3
6. Type of insulation : Class F
255
7. Noise level : <75 Db
DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be stationary type, four-stroke, preferably in-line cylinders, normally aspirated or
super charged with inter-cooler and pre-combustion chambers capable of developing adequate
Horse Power to deliver 1000 KVA at generator terminals at the site conditions of average 50
degrees Centigrade ambient air temperature and maximum ambient temperature of 5550degrees
centigrade.
7.18 LIFTS
i) 3 (Three) Nos. ‘13’ passenger traction type lifts with lifting capacity 884 Kgs each excluding the
weight of car shall be with variable voltage (V3F) drive controller and operating speed shall be 1
m/sec.
ii) The Traveling distance is from the lowest point at Powerhouse to top of Power House
(unloading bay).
iii) Each of the passenger lifts shall provide but not be limited to the following:
a) One (1) - car plat form
b) One (1) - Enclosed car frame with all specified car fixtures and operating devices.
c) One (1) - Car gate complete with automatic door devices.
d) One (1) - Set of cylindrical sliding assembly guides/counter weight guides and fastenings
suitable for lubricating and cleaning during servicing of lift.
e) One (1) - Set of car safety and governing devices.
f) One (1) - Set of suspension ropes, suspension pulling with accessories.
One set of terminal buffers.
One set of terminal and ultimate limit switches complete with electro-mechanical interlocks.
One set of AC electric driving equipment and DC operated controller.
One set of hoist way equipment and controller for each landing.
One set of brakes, switches, indicators as required.
Electric wiring, power and control complete from elevator control cabinet, to its drives and all
control points in the cabin and on each landing.
One set of ARD (Automatic reserve device).
One set of over load indicator.
One set of full screen infrared sensor in the car enclosure.
Essential and trouble-free maintenance spare parts for 5 years operation of the lift.
Erection, operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
iv) The lift shall be designed in accordance with following latest codes and standards.
a) IS:1860-1968 : code of practice for installation operation and maintenance
of electric passenger and goods lifts.
b) IS:4666 :Electric passenger and goods lifts.
c) IS:2365 :Steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, Elevators and Hoists
d) Code No. A17.1 – 1965 : American standard safety code for Elevators,
and Escalators.
e) IS 14665 Electric Traction Lift.
v) Design Requirements:
a) Machine:
256
Worm gear consists of worm wheel of centrifugally cast bronze and worm of specially forged
steel. Very precise teeth cutting of worm wheel and worm followed by careful matching ensures
smooth and noiseless operation. Automatic lubrication of all internal bearings and each access to
all parts is provided to facilitate easy maintenance. Worm gear is coupled to a specially designed
motor, suitable for elevator duty.
Arrangement for releasing the brake manually and bringing the car to the nearest landing by a
hand wheel/fly wheel is provided, in case the elevator stops in between the floors due to any
reason, Automatic Rescue device shall Automatically bring the Stranded Lift to the nearest
landing.
b) Car Frame, Safety &Governor :
Structural steel car frame to support the car platform and enclosure shall be provided with
suitable safety gear fixed, underneath the frame. The safety, which is actuated by a speed
governor, automatically and compulsorily brings the car to an immediate stop by clutching the car
mechanically between the guide rails, in case the car speed exceeds a pre-determined limit in
downward direction. A safety switch is provided to cut off the control circuit and apply the brake
as soon as safety switch is actuated.
c) Control Board:
Control Board with enclosure shall be installed in the machine room and shall consist of required
components, duly wired with copper conductors to ensure safe and trouble free operation. The
control circuit shall ensure safety for elevator users and incorporate all protections as per Indian
Standard.
d) Automatic Door Operator:
It consists of a motor operated device on elevator car for smooth and quite opening and closing
of car and landing doors simultaneously. Contact less electric braking is applied just before the
fully closed position, as well as just before the fully open position to prevent banging of doors in
either direction.
e) Guide Rails & Counter Weight:
Guide Rails shall be of machined ground mild steel T-section with suitable fixing arrangement.
Counter weight shall be of structural steel frame loaded with appropriate filler weights.
f) Lubricator:
Provided for automatic lubrication of guide rails.
g) Suspension Ropes:
Steel wire ropes of preformed construction shall be provided.
h) Buffers:
Special Spring / Buffers shall be provided as per standard.
i) Limit Switches:
Suitable switches shall be provided to, automatically disconnect the power supply and apply
brakes, should the elevator over-run the terminal landings.
j) Electro Mechanical locks:
Electro mechanical locks shall be provided for each landing door and shall have mechanical inter
locking with built- in electric contacts to prevent movement of the car away from the landing until
the door s are perfectly locked in closed position.
k) Operating Devices:
Suitable operating devices, as per the standard design, shall be provided in the car and at the
landings with required buttons switches and indicators. And the maintenance board shall be
provided on car top. All operating devices such as car board, landing boards and indicators shall
have stainless steel servicing faceplates.
257
l) Electric Cable/Wiring:
Electric Cable/Wiring shall be provided as per the IS codes.
Indoor type passenger lifts with lighting capacity of 884 Kgs (13 Persons) each excluding the
weight of car lift shall be with Variable-speed A/C motor drive with DC operated control. The
speed shall be 1.0 (one) meter per second. The traveling distance is from the lowest point of
Power House to top of Power House (unloading bay) and one stoppage shall be provided for each
floor. One lift shall be located at the entrance of Power House and the other is on the other side
of the Power House as per the site conditions. The lifts and their auxiliaries shall be as per the
latest Indian/International standards.
7.19 COMMUNICATION AND PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
SCOPE OF SUPPLY
a) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
i) One (1) EPABX equipped with 64 extension and 8 P&T lines including one operator
console and Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and Power supply unit rated 240 V, 50Hz
communication system at Power House.
ii) One (1) EPABX equipped with 24 extensions and 4 P&T lines including one operator
console and MDF and Power supply unit rated 240, V, 50Hz for communication system at
office site.
iii) One hundred (100) Push button type telephone sets
iv) Twenty five (25) outdoor telephone sets with ringer
v) Two (2) sets of telephone cables for interconnection between Power House and office site
to ensure reliability in communication.
vi) One (1) complete set of cables, fixing and erection material for telephone exchange at
P.H. and offices.
vii) One (1) set of tools, handling devices, testing instruments etc. for erection, testingand
maintenance of the exchange.
viii) One (1) set of spare parts sufficient for 5 years of operation as detailed below:
DESCRIPTION Qty.
- Telephone handsets for each type used 2 nos
- Siren, horn or klaxon, as used in noisy 1 no
environments and the switchyard
- Siren, horn or klaxon lamp actuating 2 nos
assemblies and relays
- Lamps for light signaling devices used in 6 nos
noisy environments
- Noise-canceling telephone transmitter 3 nos
inserts.
- Fuses of each type and rating used 10 nos
- Both way tie-line interface circuit cards 2 nos
- Line interface cards 2 nos
Internal telephones shall be provided in the following areas with digital Electronic Exchange with
minimum 64 (Sixty Four) lines.
1 Main control room.
2. Unit control Boards.
258
3. Conference hall.
4. Security Gate.
5. Machine hall.
6. Governor floor.
7. Dewatering.
8. Transformer bay.
9. Unit Auxiliary Control panels.
10. Switchyard.
11. Other important places.
Minimum two phones shall be provided in each floor. Provision shall also be made to extend the
telephone calls received from outside the powerhouse either telephone department or carrier
phones. All the phone instruments shall be of push button type with call transfer facility.
b) PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

A public address system for remote calling of operating personnel, fire/emergency warning in the
Power House comprising.
i) One (1) Power amplified Station for Public Address System with radio,cassette tape or similar
equipment to transmit announcement and record player and Power Supply Unit, rated 240V, 50
Hz.
ii) One (1) Master control Unit with microphone, mixer and selection panel for Public Address
System described at (a)
iii) Fifty (50) loud speakers indoor type for Public Address System
iv) Five (5) Loudspeakers outdoor type for Public Address System
v) Complete set of cables, fixing and erection material for Public Address System
vi) One (1) set of tools, handling devices, testing instruments for erection,
testing and maintenance of the complete system
vii) One (1) set of spare parts sufficient for 5 years of operation as detailed below:
Description Qty.
External loudspeaker 1 no
Internal loudspeaker 1 no
C) PROVISIONS
The EPABX interface and the telephone etc. shall be as per the relevant CCIIT recommendation of
ITU. The exchange shall be compatible for interconnection to other similar exchanges through
fiber optics link as well as overhead line alignment for trunk working.The exchange shall
incorporate a built in diagnostic unit, which shall assist in identification and localization of various
system faults. Visual and audible alarm shall be provided in the system for fault conditions.
Suitable interconnection between powerhouse and dam site by means of fiber optic cable shall be
provided. Public address system shall be interconnected to EPABX through suitable interface
paging system.
D) SPARES
1. Power supply unit 1 no of each type
259
2. control cards 1 no
7.20. TESTS
a) All the type tests on the following equipment shall be done as per relevant Indian or
International standards, list of type tests and test certificates of similar equipment shall be
furnished along with the bid.AlternativelyRelevant type test report not older than 10 year from
date of bid submission shall be submitted during detailed engg stage.
b) All the routine tests shall be carried out as per the relevant Indian or International
standards on the equipment, in the factory before dispatch in the presence of purchaser’s
representatives.
c) All the major components used in the equipment shall have under gone type tests as per
their relevant standards. Test certificates shall be submitted with the bid.
1. Generator,GT,Line, Transformer, Bus Bar etc., Protection & Relay Panels
2. Sequence control and data acquisition,.
3. 11 KV segregated Phase Busduct
4. Station Auxiliary Transformers(Indoor type)
5. 415 V LT Distribution Boards (UABs, SABs & RBs)
6. Unit auxiliary control panel
7. LAVT Cubicles
8. Generator Transformers
9. Station transformer(Out door type)
10. Generator Transformers control & protection panels
11. Feeder control & protection panels
12. 220V DC Station Battery, Charger and DC Distribution Boards
13. Power House & Switchyard lighting
14. EOT Cranes
15. Power & Control Cables, Cable Trays
16. Power House earthing & Grounding
17. A/C & Ventilation
18. Internal telephone system
19. DG Set 1000 KVA
20. UPS System
21. Fire Fighting System
22. Switchyard Equipment
23. Current Transformers
24. Testing Equipment
25. Any other equipment supplied and missed in the above list of eqpt.
260
SECTION – VIII
400 KV GISSWITCHYARD
8.0 GENERAL
Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of 400 KV INDOOR GIS Switchyard. This GIS
shall receive 400 KV supply from 12 Nos. Generator Transformers and shall feed to (2)
TWO feeders and two 400/11KV station transformers through 2 (two) bus sections. Two
no.s Bus reactors are envisaged.
NOTE-The GIS manufacturer from whom it is intended to procure should have designed,
tested, supplied and commissioned at least 2 (two) nos. of 400KV or higher class GIS
substations consisting of minimum 6 (Six) circuit breaker equipped GIS bays of
voltage rating of 400 KV or above at 50 KA short circuit level or higher. Similar type or
higher voltage class GIS equipment should have been supplied during the last Ten
years at least in two Power stations/sub stations outside the country of manufacturers
Origin or in India and should be in successful operation for 2 years without any failure as
on the date of submission of Bid.
At least one (1) number of GIS substation of the said capacity, should have been
commissioned in India and is in satisfactory operation as on the date of submission of
Bid.
The bidder should offer type tested GIS equipment only.
For the Indian GIS manufacturer, the experience of their Subsidiary of the parent
company/Parent/Holding company is also acceptable provided they fully meet the
eligibility Criteria mentioned above. Un-conditional support letters from the Subsidiary
company/Parent /Holding company whose experience is proposed to be used for meeting
the eligibility criteria has to be submitted by the Company participating in bid. The
company participating in the bid shall also submit a letter from the parent company
indicating that the parent/Holding company owns majority shareholding and
management control in boththe subsidiary companies (Company participating inthe bid &
company whose credentials are being used).
All the GIS and its equipment shall be designed and suitable for 63 KA for 3 Sec. fault
current
The GIS shall consist of.
1. Generator bays 12 Nos.
2. Bus coupler bays 2 Nos.
3. Bus sectionalisers 2 Nos.
4. Line /Feeder bays 2 Nos.
5. station supply transformer Bay 2 nos.
6. CVT bays 4 Nos
7. Bus Reactor bays 2 Nos.
8. CVTs, CT required for boundary metering shall be As required
ensisaged as per TRANSCO requirement
In addition to the above following 400 KV outdoor equipment for power evacuation are
also to be envisaged
400 KV Lighting Arrestors 7 Nos. ( 1 no spares)
400 KV CTs 2000-1000/1A - 7Nos.( 1 no spare)
400 KV CVT’s 7no.s.( 1no spare)
400KV Isolator with earth switch motor operated 2 no.s
261
Wave traps 4 no.s
Pipe type /Bus bar connector & associated Equipments - Lumpsum
Special tools & plant - As required
Cables As required
Sub station equipment Grounding and earthing – As required
G.I. Structures ( Towers& Supports). –As required
Lightning protn. system - AS REQUIRED
Bus conductors clamps, connectors etc. As required
Spares and all other necessary equipment.
SF6 gas and hydraulic oil used shall be supplied with 10% extra quantity in addition to the
initial filling quantities.
PLCC Equipment is also in the scope of the bidder. The Bidder has to carryout the
errection including structures and Foundations & commissioning as per the requirement
Supply and ETC of PLCC for 2 transmission lines SDH type (OLTE+MUX)- 2 sets i.e for
both ends of each line.
8.1.0 SCOPE OF THE CONTRACT:

This section covers the supply erection, testing and commissioning along with necessary
civil works and foundations of 400KV GIS equipment, , Power and Control cables, cable
trays, Power evacuation equipment structures, Ground mat conductors, etc. as per SLD
Layout of GIS & Switchyard, Location for switchyard control room for placing switchyard
controller, protection panels for feeders, switchyard DC distribution board is to be
decided by the contractor and necessary drawings to be submitted for approval before
commencement of work.
8.1. 1 TERMINAL POINTS:
The terminal points for scope of work of switchyard are given below:-
a) Supply of 400KV GIS with double bus arrangement and 400KV switchgear
equipment with all interconnections for power evecuation
b) Inter Connections from Generator transformers to 400KV GIS with suitable sf6
gas insulated bushings and accessories required.
c) Formation of foundations, earth mat layout, RCC Concrete works for foundations,
fencing, transportation etc including erection testing and commissioning of all the
equipment.
d) Provision of Suitable structures at Line take off bays for terminating the
transmission lines by APTRANSCO.
8.1.2 GIS SPECIFICATION
1.1 General
The specification covers scope of design, engineering, fabrication, manufacturing, shop
assembly, inspection and testing before supply,transportation, delivery at destination,
unloading & storage at site, site erection, site testing, commissioning and putting in to
successful operation complete with all materials, support structures, anchoring bolts,
accessories, commissioning spares & maintenance spares, special spanners, tools &
tackles, any specific required ancillary services, SF6 Gas for first filling &spare, etc., for
efficient and trouble free operation along with for 400 kV metal (aluminum alloy)
encapsulated SF6 gas insulated switchgear suitable for INDOOR installation.
1.2 Design Concept, construction & performance of SF6 GIS
Considering of safety, reliability and serviceability, the switch gear offered shall meet the
minimum requirements detailed below.
262
The GIS equipment layout and rating shall be based on the single line diagram and
general layout enclosed. The supplier has to work out an optimum layout.
All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have tropical (as required) protection,
involving special treatment of metal and insulation against fungus, insects and corrosion.
All grounding connections must remain operational during and after an arc fault.
Proper grounding for mitigating over voltages during disconnector operationshall be
included.
Viewing windows shall be provided at the Disconnectors and earthing switches to ensure
that each contact position can be inspected easily from the floorlevel. Each section shall
have plug-in modules or easily removable connection pieces to allow for easy
replacement of any component with the minimum of disturbance to the remainder of the
equipment.
The number of transport/shipping splits shall be minimized to keep installation time of
GIS to a minimum. The arrangement shall afford maximum flexibility for routine
maintenance.
Equipment removal and SF6 handling should be accomplished with ease.The ease of
operation shall be ensured.
Modular Design & Future extensions
The GIS switch gear shall be of modular design offering high degree of flexibility.
Each Line / Generator / Reactor feeder module, Bus coupler / sectionalizer module shall
be complete with SF6 gas circuit breaker, Disconnectors, Maintenance Grounding
switches / fast Earthing switches, voltage transformers, Current transformers, bus &
elbow sections enclosures, L.A , local control cubicle and all necessary components as
required for safe & reliable operation and maintenance. All the three phases of the bus
bars and associated equipments like breakers, disconnectors, instrument transformers &
earthing switches etc., as detailed in enclosed single line diagram are to be encapsulated
phase wise in separate metallic enclosures.
The Main Bus bars shall be of passive(Partitioned) Bus bar configuration with
suitable sectionalization. To avoid total shut down on main Bus bars due to
fault on any of the bay equipment and ease of maintenance of the break down
equipment passive Bus bar arrangement is preferred. The bus bars shall be sub-
divided into compartments including the associated bus bar disconnector. Bus bars are
partitioned at each bay with an objective to isolate Busbar compartment for the purpose
of extension and at the same time to avoid damage to adjacent bays in the event of fault.
The switchgear shall be of the freestanding, self-supporting dead-front design,with all
high-voltage equipment installed inside gas-insulated, metallic grounded enclosures, and
suitably sub-divided into individual arc and gas proof compartments.
Arc faults caused by external reasons shall be positively confined to the originating
compartment and shall not spread to other parts of the switchgear.
In case of any internal arc fault in a busbar, busbar disconnector or circuit breaker, of
double bus system, repair works must be possible without shutting down complete
station and at least one busbar and the undisturbed bays must remain in operation as Bus
Coupler / sectionalisers are specified. Documents indicating sequence of repair work
steps and description of necessary restrictions during work shall be specified in the
manuals to be supplied.
Each bay module should be equipped with suitable arrangement for easy dismantling and
refitting during maintenance without disturbing other units.
The maximum temperature in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not
exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards.
263
There shall not be any kind of interference to the connected & nearby equipment and
system, when the equipment is operated at maximum service voltage.
Maintenance and repair of a circuit breaker
The positioning of the circuit breaker in the GIS shall be such that it shall be possible to
access the circuit breaker of any feeder from the front side for routine inspection,
maintenance and repair without interfering with the operation of the adjacent feeders.
The GIS shall be so designed that any component of the GIS can be removed easily.
Interchangeability
As much as possible, all the parts shall be of standard manufacturer with similar parts and
assemblies being interchangeable.
Future Extension
The modular design of GIS switch gear shall be capable of extension in the future on
either end by the addition of extra feeders, bays, bus-bars without drilling cutting,
welding or dismantling any major part of the equipment. The arrangement shall be such
that expansion of the original installation can be accomplished with minimum GIS down
time. In case of extension, the interface shall incorporate facilities for installation and
testing of extension to limit the part of the existing GIS to be re-tested and to allow for
connection to the existing GIS without further dielectric testing. Future extension
provisions shall be provided both sides.
The SF6 GIS shall be of INDOOR type having degree of protection as IP-42 and suitable for
the atmosphere of the project location.
1.3 Specification requirements
The 400 kV GIS switch-gear shall be with Double bus bar (as indicated in SLD with BOQ)
design having phase wise separate enclosure. This configuration shall meet within the
given area indicated in layout plan attached with the tender.
1.4 Current Rating
The current rating of the switchgear should be of 4000 Amps
The GIS equipment proposed shall be Capable of handling power to an extent of as to an
ambient day-time mean temperature between – 5 deg C and + 50 deg C
The GIS equipment is intended for continuous duty at the specified ratings and under all
system operating conditions including sudden change of load and voltage within its
ratings and at specified ambient conditions.
The rating of the power transformer/s, reactors and lines are given in SLD.
1.5 Electrical, Mechanical and Thermal Capability
The assembled equipment shall be capable of withstanding the electrical, mechanical and
thermal ratings of the specified system. All joints and connections shall be required to
withstand the forces of expansion, vibration, contraction, and specified seismic
requirements without deformation or malfunction and leakage. The apparatus shall be
capable of withstanding the specified environment.
1.6 Insulation level
The switchgear and other equipment shall be designed for a maximum operating voltage
and rated impulse withstand voltage as specified below
Rated System Voltage / Highest System/Equipment Voltage - 400/420 KV
One min. Power frequency withstand voltage - 610 kV rms
Across open isolator - 610kV rms
Across the open gaps of CB - 520 kV rms
264
Rated Lightning Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs peak value)
Phase to phase - 1425 kVp
Phase to earth - 1425 kVp
Across open isolator - 1425kVp +240 kVp on opp.
polarity
Across the open gaps of CB - 1425 kVp
Rated Frequency - 50 Hz
Rated Continuous current at 40 0C ambient temperature Bus bar, – 4000 Amps
Feeder and Transformer Bays
Rated Short circuit Withstand current for 3 seconds - 5063 kA
Rated dynamic withstand current - 100 kAp
Partial Discharge (at 1.1 Un) - 5(max.)pico coulombs
System Neutral earthing - Solidly earth
Maximum SF6 Gas leakage rate per year - 0.3 % per year
1.6.1 Auxiliary Supply:
For Operation, control and signaling: 220 Volts DC (+10% & -20%)
Note: The control voltage shall be considered as per the station battery provisions.
For other loads: 440 / 230 Volts, AC 50 Hz. (+10% & -15%)
1.6.2 Seismic requirements:
The GIS shall comply with IEEE STD 693 –1984 guideline to ensure functional adequacy
under seismic disturbances. The maximum ground acceleration shall be 0.5 g/The
maximumGround Acceleration shallbe as per IS: 1893 (Latest revision).
1.7 Physical arrangement

The layout shall be properly designed to completely accommodate the requirements of
the Power station as per the furnished single line diagram and the enclosed layout plans.
They may be adjusted as necessary to suit the manufacturer’s standard design and
Project need.
The arrangement of the switchgear offered must provide adequate access for checking
and maintenance.
Optimized arrangements are required so as to reduce installation time, minimize
maintenance & repair cost, provide ease of operation and facilitate future expansions.
1.8 Gas Sectionalisation
The switch-gear gas enclosures must be sectionalized, with gas tight barriers between
sections or compartments. The sections shall be so designed so as to minimize the extent
of plant rendered inoperative when gas pressure is reduced, ether by excessive leakage
or for maintenance purposes, and to minimize the quantity of gas that has to be
evacuated and then recharged before and after maintaining any item of equipment.
The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such that it is possible to
extend existing bus-bars without having to take out of service another section of the bus-
bar at a time.
For limitation of any internal arc to the concerned bay and to reduce the extent of
necessary gas works of each section of the bus-bar must be sectionalized bay by bay.
Sectionalisation shall ensure that circuit breaker enclosure will not include anyother
equipment in its gas compartment.
265
1.9 Expansion Joints and Flexible Connections
The layout shall sufficiently take care of the thermal expansion / contraction of the
assembly by the provision of expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be placed in between
any bay section of the bus-bar. All joint surfaces shall be machined, and all castings shall
be spot faced for all bolt heads or nuts and washers. If necessary, the number and
position of expansion joints or flexible connections are to be determined by the
manufacturer to ensure that the complete installation will not be subject to any
expansion stresses which could lead to distortion or premature failure of any piece of the
SF6 equipment, support structures or foundations.
Bracing shall be provided for all mechanical components against the effects of short
circuit currents. The design of the equipment shall be such that the agreed permitted
movement of foundations or thermal effects does not impair the assigned performance
of the equipment.
The continuity of service during thermal expansion / contraction and vibrations shall be
ensured. Expansion joints, flexible connections and adjustable mountings shall be
provided to compensate for reasonable manufacturing and construction tolerances in the
associated equipment to which the GIS may be connected. Required sliding plug-in
contacts for conductors shall be provided.
This is to ensure that un reasonably excessive accuracy is not required when installing
such equipment and constructing the associated foundations or support structures, e.g.
transformers or the interconnection of isolated sections of switch-gear by means of long
GIS bus-bar or duct installations. Flexible joints may also be provided to allow more
efficient maintenance and future extensions of the GIS.
1.10 Barrier and Non-Barrier Insulators
Support insulators shall be used to maintain the conductors and enclosure in proper
relation. These support insulators may be of two types. Barrier insulators which are
employed to isolate gas compartments and non-barrier insulators which allow the gas
pressure to equalize.
The gas barrier insulators sealing to the conductors and the enclosure wall shall be
designed to withstand the maximum pressure difference that could occur across the
barrier, i.e. maximum operating pressure at one side while a vacuum is drawn at the
other side & in case of internal arc fault with asafety factor of 2.
The support insulators and section barriers / insulators shall bemanufactured from the
highest quality material. They shall be free from all voids and the design shall be such as
to reduce the electrical stresses in the insulators to a minimum. They shall also be of
sufficient strength to ensure that the conductor spacing and clearances are maintained
when short circuit faults occur. Tests shall be carried out during the manufacture of the
Switchgear to ensure that all parts of the equipment are free of partial discharge with a
partial discharge extinction voltage which is at least 10% higher than the rated voltage.
1.11Gas seals, Gas Density & pressure and other requirements.

Single sealing of O-ring type shall be used for sealing the connections between the
switch-gear modules. The leakage rates shall be kept to an absolute minimum under all
normal pressure, temperature, electrical load and fault conditions. The guaranteed
leakage rate of each individual gas compartment and between compartments must be
less than 0.5% p.a. for the service life of equipment.
Piping and fittings for gas monitoring and gas supply shall be made of copper or brass.
The gas monitor device should be installed at each individual compartment of the
module. Each gas compartment must be independent, external gas pipe connections
should be avoided to minimize leakage.
266
All gas compartments shall be fitted with filter material which absorbs the residual
moisture and moisture entering inside the High-voltage enclosure. Filters in gas
compartments with switching devices must also be capable to absorb the gas
decomposition products resulting from the switching arc. The rated pressure of the SF6
insulating gas in the metal-clad equipment shall be as low as is compatible with the
requirements for electrical insulation and space limitations to reduce the effects of leaks.
The SF6 switch-gear shall be designed for use with SF6 gas complying with the
recommendations of IEC – 60376 at the time of the first charging with gas.
Connections including bolts and nuts shall be adequately protected from corrosion and
easily accessible with the proper tools.
All components shall be fire retardant and shall be tested in accordance with relevant
standards. Gas emissivity when the Material is heated shall be minimal.
1.12 Gas Treatment Requirements
Under normal operating conditions it shall not be necessary to treat theinsulating SF6 gas
between major overhauls. In all gas compartmentspermanent efficient filters and
desiccants shall be effective for the duration oftime between major overhauls. Not
withstanding this, the insulators in thecircuit breaker shall be made of epoxy resin
composition that will resistdecomposition products in contract with moisture.
1.13 Gas Monitoring Devices
Gas density or pressure monitoring devices shall be provided for each gascompartment.
The devices shall provide continuous and automaticmonitoring of the state of the gas.
The SF6 gas monitoring device shall havetwo supervision and alarm settings. These shall
be set so that, an advancewarning can be given that the gas density/pressure is reducing
to an unacceptable level. After an urgent alarm, operative measures can be taken to
immediately isolate the particular compartment electrically by trippingcircuit breakers
and opening disconnectors. It shall be ensured that there isno chance of the gas
liquefying at the lowest ambient temperature.
The gas monitoring device shall monitor at least the following, locally and onremote.
i) "Gas Refill" Level- This will be used to annunciate the need for gasrefilling.
ii) "Breaker Block" Level- This is the minimum gas density at which themanufacturer will
guarantee the rated fault interrupting capability of thebreaker. At this level the device
contact shall trip the breaker and blockthe closing circuits.
iii) Over pressure alarm level- This alarm level shall be provided to indicateabnormal
pressure rise in the gas compartment.(Any other alternative for this if needed) will be
examined during detailed Engineering)
It shall be possible to test all gas monitoring relays without de-energizing the primary
equipment and without reducing pressure in the main section.
Disconnecting type plugs and sockets shall be used for test purposes; the
pressure/density device shall be suitable for connecting to the male portion of the plug.
Two potential free electrical contacts shall be provided with each and every alarm
condition.
1.14 Conductors
The conductors shall be made of aluminumalloysuitable for specified voltage and current
ratings. The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall be made by
means of multiple contact connectors (plug-in type) so that electrical connection is
automatically achieved when bolting one section to another. Field welding ofconductor is
not acceptable. The surface of the connector fingers and conductor on such connections
shall be silver plated. Both, the conductors as well as the contacts for the conductor
connections must be designed for the continuous rated current of the switch gear under
the ambient conditions furnished, and shall not exceed the permissible temperature rise.
267
1.15 Enclosures
The metal enclosures for the SF6 gas insulated equipment modules shall be made from
Aluminum alloy. Suitable anti corrosive paints shade RAL 7035must be applied on the
exterior of the enclosures. The external fixtures should be made of corrosion-resistant
material and should be capped where required.
Bellow compensators shall be made of Stainless steel to preserve the mechanical strength
of the equipment at the connection portions to deal with the following problems:
a) Expansion and Contraction of outer enclosure and conductor due to temperature
variations.
b) Mismatch in various components of GIS.
c) Vibration of the transformer and switching equipment.
d) Dimensional variations due to uneven settling of foundation.
e) Seismic forces as mentioned in climatic condition.
The gas-filled enclosures shall confirm to the pressure vessel code applied in the country
of manufacturer. Gas section barriers including seals to the conductor and enclosure wall
shall be gas-tight and shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure differential
that could occur across the barrier, i.e., with a vacuum drawn on the one side of the
barrier and on the other side, at least the maximum gas pressure that can exist under
normal operating or maintenance conditions and in case of internal arc fault.
The finish of interior surfaces of the metal-clad enclosures shall facilitate cleaning and
inspection. High quality primer followed by two coats of anticorrosive paint of glossy
white shade shall be used such that they will not deteriorate when exposed to the SF6
gas and other vapors, Arc products,etc., which may present in the enclosures. They shall
also not contain anysubstances which could contaminate the enclosed gas or affect its
insulating properties over a period of time.
1.16 General Finish and Cleaning

The equipment shall be manufactured and assembled at the manufacturer’s works under
conditions of the utmost cleanliness. Very dusty / sandy conditions may exist at the site
hence, whenever possible, the complete feeders or major assembly of components
should be shipped as transport units. Before the metal clad enclosed sections are joined
together and charged with the SF6 gas they must be thoroughly cleaned.
Sufficient quantities of all paints and preservatives required for touching up at sites shall
be furnished with GIS.
1.17 Gas filling and Evacuating Plant

All apparatus necessary for filling, evacuating, and recycling the SF6 gas into and from the
switch-gear equipment shall be supplied along with GIS to enable any maintenance work
to be carried out.
Where any item of the filling and evacuating apparatus is of such a weight that it cannot
easily be carried by maintenance personnel, it shall be provided with facilities for lifting
and moving with the overhead cranes. The apparatus for filling, evacuating and recycling
all gases to be used shall be provided with all necessary pipes, couplings flexible hoses,
tubes and valves for coupling to the switch-gear equipment.
The gas compartments shall preferably be fitted with permanent vacuum couplings
through which the gas is pumped into or evacuated from the compartments.
Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus that will be supplied, and also a description
of the filling, evacuating and recycling procedures, shall be provided.
268
The initial gas filling of the entire switch-gear including the usual losses during
commissioning shall be supplied. In addition to this, 10% over and above the required
quantity shall also be supplied as Spare gas.
Gas filling and Evacuating Plant shall have gas storage facility of sufficient capacity.
1.18 SF6 Gas Processing Unit:

a) An SF6 gas-processing unit suitable for evacuating, liquefying, evaporating, filling,
drying and purifying SF6 gas during the initial installation, subsequent maintenance and
future extension of GIS shall be provided. The cart shall be equipped with rubber wheels
and shall be easily maneuverable within the GIS building.
b) A wheeled maintenance unit shall be supplied which shall be self-contained (except for
additional gas storage bottles and external power supply at 415 VAC, 3-phase, 50 Hz) and
fully equipped with an electric vacuum pump, gas compressor, gas drier, gas filter,
refrigeration unit, evaporator, gas storage tank, full instrumentation for measuring
vacuum, compressor inlet temperature, tank pressure and temperature, valving and
piping to perform the following operations as a minimum requirement:
i) Evacuation from a gas filled compartment using the vacuum pump,
ii) Transfer of SF6 gas from a system at some positive or negative pressure to the storage
tank via the gas drier and filter;
iii) Recirculation of SF6 gas in the storage tank through the drier,
iv) Recirculation of SF6 gas in any switchgear or bus duct compartment through the drier
and filter;
v) Evaporating and filling SF6 gas,
vi) Drawing off and liquefying SF6 gas,
vii) A combination operation of filling SF6 gas into a gas system and evacuating a second
gas system using the vacuum pump.
c) Adequate length of hoses with necessary adaptors shall be provided for filling of SF6
gas in any of the gas compartment with the help of gas cart.
d) GA drawing and Schematic drawing for gas processing unit shall be submitted for
approval.
1.18 Support Structures
All supporting structures necessary for the support of the GIS equipment including
associated parts such as anchor bolts, beams etc. shall be supplied. Sufficient attachment
points to the apparatus and concrete foundations shall be furnished to ensure successful
installation, with required clearances, while taking into account thermal expansion and
contraction. Earthquake requirements are also to be considered.
Any scaffolding or a movable platform, required for maintenance, shall alsobe supplied.
All steel structure members shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Unless
otherwise specified, minimum mass of zinc coating for Galvanizing shall be 610
gm/square meter. Under marine environment, the fabricated structures shall have a
minimum overall Zinc coating of 900 gm/square meter.
All field assembly joints shall be bolted. Field welding shall not be acceptable.
Non-corrosive metal or plated steel shall be used for bolts and nutsthroughout the work.
Manufacturer shall provide suitable foundationchannels and anchor bolts to support the
switchgear assemblies. Allmounting bolts, nuts and washers shall be provided to fasten
the switchgearbase frames to the foundation channels.
Foundation channels and anchor bolts shall be installed in the civil works inaccordance
with instructions provided by the manufacturer.
269
1.19 Auxiliary Equipment
The following items shall be included for a complete installation:
a) Control system including local control cabinets.
b) FRLS Cables and wiring between individual items of supplier supplied equipment.
c) Name plates.
d) All ladders, platforms, stairs, walkways, and supports necessary tooperate and
maintain all equipment safely and efficiently.
e) Special tools and tackles for installation.
f) Special tools and tackles for maintenance.
1.20 Safety Precautions
The switch-gear must provide a maximum degree of safety for the operators and others
in the vicinity of the switch gear under all normal and fault conditions. The safety
clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevant standards.
1.21 INTERLOCKS:
Mechanical & electrical interlocks must be provided to ensure absolute and reliable
protection against potentially harmful Mal-operation of the switchgear. All interlocks that
prevent potentially dangerous mal-operations shall be so constructed such that they
cannot be defeated easily, i.e. the operator must use tools and/or technique to over-ride
them only in case ofemergency.
The following functions shall be provided:
1) The operator must be forced in to the only safe and logical sequence to actuate the
circuit breakers, disconnectors & earthing switches.
2) The actual, completely closed or completely opened position of all switching devices
must be checked before and after each move.
3) Implementation of logic checks and issuing the resultant signals Enabled or Blocked for
the switching device.
If in spite of all possible safety measures if any arc occurs, the following is required.
1. The effects of an internal arcing fault must be limited to the related gas compartment.
2. Each gas compartment must have its own automated external pressure relief device to
provide instant and safe discharge of accidental overpressureduring internal arc. Rupture
diaphragms shall be preferably used aspressure relief mechanisms. The bursting pressure
of relief device should be effectively coordinated with the rated gas pressure and the
pressure rise dueto arcing.
3. All earthing connections must remain operational.
4. The enclosure of the switch gear must withstand the thermal effects of anarc at the full
rated short circuit current until the nearest protective relay hasacted and tripped the
breaker.
5. To limit the effects of an internal arc the switch gear shall be suitablysubdivided into
individual arc and gas-proof compartments
6. The following requirements are to be followed.
a.The bracing/welding of all components subject to mechanical forces caused by short
circuit currents shall be capable so as to withstand the effects of at least 2.5 times the
rated symmetrical short time withstand current.
b.The thermal rating for all current carrying parts and insulating materials shall be a
minimum of three seconds for the rated short time withstand current.
270
c.All components of the switch gear which are on ground potential shall beelectrically
interconnected and effectively earthed.
1.22 Special tools, tackles and equipments

Special tools, tackles and equipment that are required to perform installation,
commissioning, operation & maintenance of the gas insulated switch gear shall be
included in scope of supply. Minimum following tools shall be supplied.
1 Dew point measurement meter
2 SF6 gas leakage detectors (2 Nos)
3 Precision pressure gauge ( 3 Nos)
4 Gas-service carts (with Gas filling and Evacuating Plant / Gas reclaimer) (SF6 Gas
evacuation and filling equipment with filters of adequate capacity)- 2 sets
5 On line PD monitoring system for 400 kV GIS modules.Portable PD monitoring systems
shall be envisaged. But all necessary arrangements to readily connect to the system shall
be incorporated in the entire system and in portable Equipment.
6. Breaker timing measurement KIT

7. 10 KV DIGITAL insulation tester MEGGER make
2. Gas purity detectors
3. Nylon slings for handling of GIS equipment
10 Any other special tool/tackle required.
The requirement of HV testing until final commissioning and until completion of Guarantee
period or repairing or replacement shall be fulfilled by successful bidder by arranging the
required HV testing equipment at no extra cost to Purchaser. No delay shall be permitted on
account of the non- availability of the HV test equipment.
1.23 Grounding of GIS:
GIS will be housed on GIS floor. The bidder shall provide under-ground mat below the GIS
station. The bidder shall also provide adequate number of Galvanized steel risers to be
connected to grounding mat, as per relevantstandards and as per approved drawings of the
purchaser during detailed engineering.
The bidder shall supply entire material for ground bus of GIS such as conductor, clamps,
joints, operating and safety platforms etc. to be laid /embedded in GIS floors. The bidder is
also required to supply all grounding connectors and associated hardware material for:
i) Connecting all GIS equipment, Bus duct, enclosures, control cabinets, supporting
structures etc. to the ground bus of GIS
ii) Connecting ground bus of GIS to the ground mat risers.
iii) connecting of ground mat to the tail race earth mat and station earth mat.
The grounding arrangement of GIS shall ensure that touch and step voltages are limited to
safe values as per IEEE std. 80-2000. The enclosures of the GIS shall be grounded at several
points such that there shall be a grounded cage around all live parts. The ground continuity
between each enclosure shall beaffected over flanges, with or without links or straps to
bridge the flanges.Copper/Aluminum straps shall however bridge the metallic expansion
bellows.
271
The grounding switches shall be connected to ground through the enclosure. Individual
ground leads for the ground switches are not allowed. The inductive voltage against ground
in each part of the enclosure shall not be more than 65Volts.
Where operating mechanism cabinets are mounted on the switchgear, the grounding shall
be made by separate conductor. Bay control cabinets shall be grounded through a separate
conductor. All conduits and control cable sheaths shall be connected to the control
cabinetgrounding bus. All steel structures shall be grounded.
Each removable section of catwalk shall be bolted to the support structure forground
continuity.
The enclosure grounding system shall be designed to minimize circulating currents and to
ensure that the potential rise during an external or internal faultis kept to an acceptable
level. The guidelines of IEEE Std. 80-2000 on GIS grounding, especially the transient ground
potential rise caused by high frequency phenomena, shall be taken into consideration while
designing the grounding system for GIS.
The manufacturer shall furnish readily accessible connectors of sufficient mechanical
strength to withstand electromagnetic forces as well as capable of carrying the anticipated
maximum fault current without overheating by at least from two paths to ground from the
main ground bus.
Provisions of IEC 517 & 694 regarding safeguards in grounding of connected cables, testing
during maintenance and other safety measures shall be ensured.
Earthing conductors shall be designed to allow flow of short circuit current. Conductors with
copper bars are preferred over copper wires.
1.24 Climatic Conditions:

The equipment and the accessories to be supplied against this technical specification shall
be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the tropical conditions specified in
the tender document.
1.25 Standards
Common clauses for high voltage switchgear &control gear: IEC 60694
High voltage metal enclosed switchgear for 72.5KV & above: IEC 62271-203
Specification for acceptance of new Sulphur Hexa fluoride: IEC 60376
Guide to checking of Sulphur Hexa fluoride taken from Electrical equipment: IEC 60480
Surge Arresters : IEC 60099
High voltage test techniques : IEC 60060
Insulation coordination : IEC 60071
Electrical Relays : IEC 60255
High voltage switches : IEC 60265
Partial discharge measurement : IEC 60270
Degree of protection : IEC 60529
Pollution levels : IEC 60815
EMC : IEC 61000
Use and handling of SF6 gas : IEC 61634
Standards for station grounding. : IEC 60364/60479/IEEE 80
Pressure vessel code : CENELEC/SVDB
Recommendation for heat treated Aluminum alloy busbar material
272
of the aluminum magnesium-silicon type : IEC 60114
IEEE Guide for Gas-Insulated Substations : IEEE std C37.122.1-1993
Seismic design : IEC 693
Instrument Transformers
Instrument transformers : IEC 60044
Current transformers : IEC 60185
Voltage transformers : IEC 60186
Circuit Breaker
High voltage Alternating current circuit breakers : IEC 62271-100
Report on Synthetic testing of high voltage alternating Current Circuit breakers :IEC
60427
Disconnectors and earthing switch
Alternating current Disconnectors(isolators) and earthing Switch : IEC 60129
IEC 62271-102
Alternating current disconnectors, Bus transfer current Switching by disconnectors: IEC
61128
Alternating current earthing switches, Induced current Switching: IEC 61129
Artificial pollution test on HV insulators to be used on ac system: IEC 60507
Gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear for rated voltages of 72.5 kVand above: IEC
60517
Classification of degree of protection : IEC 60529 provided by enclosures
2.0 Electrical data:

Rated System Voltage /Highest System/Equipment Voltage -400 /420 KV
One min. Power frequencywithstand voltage -610 kV rms
Across open isolator - 610kV rms
Across the open gaps of CB - 520 kV rms
Rated Lightning Impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs peak value)
Phase to phase - 1425kVp
Phase to earth - 1425 kVp
Across open isolator - 1425kVp +240 kVp on
opp.polarity
Across the open gaps of CB - 1425 kVp
Rated Frequency - 50 Hz
Rated Continuous current at 40 0C ambient temperature Bus bar,–4000 Amps
Feeder and Transformer Bays
Rated Short circuit Withstandcurrent for 3 seconds - 63 kA
Rated dynamic withstand current - 100 kAp
Partial Discharge (at 1.1 Un) - 5(max.) pico coulombs
System Neutral earthing - Solidlyearth
273
Maximum SF6 Gas leakage rate per year - 0.3 % peryear
Auxiliary Supply:
For Operation, control and signaling : 220Volts DC(+10% & -20%)
Note: The control voltage shall be considered as per the station battery provisions.
For other loads: 415 / 230 Volts, AC 50 Hz.(+10% & -15%)
Seismic requirements:
The GIS shall comply with IEEE STD 693 –1984 guideline to ensure functionaladequacy
under seismic disturbances.
The maximum ground accelerationshall be 0.5 g.
3. Detailed technical requirements for GIS Components

3.1 Circuit Breaker:only circuit breakers for shunt reactor bay are to be supplied with
CSD (Controlled Switching Device)
General:
The GIS circuit breakers shall comply with the following general requirements for circuit
breakers and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC-62271-100 specifications Circuit –
breakers shall be of single pressure, single break, self compressionself blast / auto puffer
type with SF6 as arc quenching & insulation medium and with a minimum- maintenance
contact system
Circuit breakers are to be supplied with Controlled Switching Device (CSD) compatible to
SCADA remote operation with IEC 61850 protocols.
Ratings of the circuit breaker shall be as per enclosed technical parameters.
Each circuit-breaker shall have spring/Hydraulic/ combined drive mechanism ensuring
proper closing and opening, and shall permit checking of adjustments and
opening/closing characteristic. The ON/OFF latches shall be mechanically interlocked with
each other. The circuit breaker shall be completely factory assembled, adjusted and
tested.
The total break time from energizing the trip coil at rated control voltage to final arc
extinction shall be as short as possible, but in any event not greater than 3 cycles i.e. 60
ms.
The circuit breaker shall be capable of breaking all currents from zero up to the specified
maximum fault current in accordance with the relevant IEC Recommendations.The
breakers are to be restrike-free.
The circuit-breakers shall be capable of tripping and re-closing (Autoreclose) according to
the specified duty cycle without derating: O – 0.3 s –CO – 3 min. – CO.
Breaker shall be suitable for following switching duties:
• Terminal faults
• Short line faults
• Out of phase switching
• Interruption of small inductive current including transformer magnetizing inrush
currents.
• Interruption of line and cable charging currents.
The circuit breaker and cable characteristics for any type of fault or fault location, and
also for line charging and dropping when used on an effectively grounded system. Effect
of second circuit in parallel shall also be considered.
274
The circuit breakers shall be capable of being operated locally or from remote. Local
operation shall be by means of an open/close control switch located in the bay control
cabinet.
The minimum guaranteed nos. of maintenance free operations of complete GIS shall be
10000 nos. at rated capacity.
The breaker layout arrangement shall be vertical or horizontal but shall provide higher
mechanical stability and ease in maintenance. The operating principle of the breaker shall
ensure minimized dynamic floor loading. Low reaction forces on foundations especially
dynamically, are favorable and considered in the elevation.
PIR shall be envisaged for 400kV GIS Breakers
Closing Devices
The closing coils shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between110% and 80% of
the nominal control voltage measured at the device terminals
The breaker shall close correctly when an electrical closing pulse of 50msec. duration is
applied to the closing coil.
Tripping Devices
All electrical tripping coils shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 110%
and 70% of the nominal control voltage measured at the device terminals.
Each circuit-breaker shall be equipped with two shunt trip system. The one shunt trip
system shall be electrically separated from the other system.
An emergency hand tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in the operating
mechanism.
Anti-Pumping
The circuit-breaker mechanism shall be provided with means to prevent pumping while
the closing circuit remains energized, should the circuit breaker either fail to latch, or be
tripped during closing due to the operation of the protective relays.
Operating Mechanism
The breaker shall include suitable spring/Hydraulic/combined operating mechanism to
assure proper opening & closing operations. The provision shall be made for checking
adjustments and opening characteristics. The mechanism shall be capable of re-closing
within the range specified in the applicable standards. The mechanism shall include dual
trip coils. Charging of opening mechanism shall be possible in the event of failure of the
motor drive.
a. Spring Operated Mechanism
Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor, opening spring, closing spring
with limit switch for automatic charging and all necessary accessories to make the
mechanism a complete operating unit.
As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of closing and opening
operations shall be possible.
After failure of power supply to the motor, at least Open-close-open (O-C-O) operations
of the circuit breaker shall be possible.
Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used solely for
compressing the closing spring.
Motor rating shall be such that it requires only about 30 seconds for fully charging the
closing spring.
Closing action of the circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping.
275
When closing springs are discharged after closing a breaker, closing springs shall
automatically be charged for the next operation.
b. Hydraulic Operated Mechanism

Hydraulic operated mechanism shall comprise self contained operating unit with power
cylinder, control valves, high and low pressure reservoir, motor, etc. A hand pump set
shall also be provided for emergency operation.
The oil pressure controlling the oil pump and pressure in the high pressure reservoir shall
be continuously monitored. Necessary hardware to achieve this, including the loose
pressure gauge, instruments and interconnecting piping etc shall form integral part of this
mechanism.
The mechanism shall be suitable for at least Open-close-open (O-C-O) operations after
failure of AC supply to the motor.
The mechanism shall be in a dust proof (IP42) box for indoor installation of Gas Insulated
Switchgear. one sheet steel cabinet of adequate size shall be provided for housing the
operating mechanism, aux relays, control and auxiliary equipment and for terminating all
control, alarm and auxiliary circuits in suitable terminal boxes. The control cabinet shall
be provided with hinged doors with provision for locking and removable cable gland
plates for cable entry. Viewing windows shall be provided for observation of the
instruments without opening the cabinet. Suitably engraved name plates shall be
provided to identify all equipment in the control cabinet.
c. Auxiliary Switches
Each breaker shall have auxiliary switches with adequate number of NO and NC contacts
all wired to terminals located in the local control cabinet of the circuit breaker bay. 20 %
spare contacts should be provided.
d. Indicating Devices
Position indicators shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit breaker is open
or closed.
Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with an operation counter to record the number of
tripping operations performed. The counter may be located at the local control cabinet.
e. Gas Connections
Necessary valves and connections shall be provided to assure ease in handling the SF6
gas.
f. Timing Test
Timing tests are to be carried out after the switch gear has been completely charged with
SF6 gas.
Technical Data Requirement

Disconnectors:
1) Enclosure material - Aluminum Alloy
2) Rated voltage - 420 kV
3) Rated current - 4000 A
4) Rated short-time current Duration - 63 kA rms, for 3 sec
5) Rated control and operating voltage 220 V DC
276
6) Type of operating mechanism for circuit Breaker - Spring –Spring/hydraulic/combined
7) Rated short-circuit making current - 100kAp
a) Power frequency withstand voltage - 520 kV rms
b) Lightning impulse withstand voltage - 14451425 kV peak

9) Mechanical Endurance class M2
10) Electrical Endurance class E1
11) Restriking probability class C1
3.2 Disconnector Switches and Maintenance Grounding switches

General
The GIS disconnector switches and grounding switches shall comply with the following
general requirements of disconnect switches and the latest version of the relevant
specifications IEC 60129, 61128, 61129, 61259.
Disconnector switches shall be gang operated and separate phase wise, group operated,
no break, with one common motor operated mechanism for all the three poles.
They shall also have facilities for emergency manual operation and necessary handles
shall be provided.
Maintenance earthing switches shall be gang operated and separate phase wise, group
operated, no break, with one common motor operated mechanism for all the three poles.
They shall also have facilities for emergency manual operation and necessary handles
shall be provided.
Disconnect switches and grounding switches shall have electrical and Mechanical
interlocks to prevent grounding switch from closing on an energized section.
Interlocks with other bays for bus transfer switching shall be done through bay control
cabinets. Actuation of the emergency manual operating device shall also disable the
electrical control. Disconnectors in open condition shall be secured against re closure.
Disconnecting switches and adjacent safety grounding switches shall have electrical
interlocks to prevent closure of the grounding switches when thedisconnecting switches
are in the closed position and to prevent closure of the disconnecting switch when the
grounding switch is in the closed position. The disconnector shall be pad lockable in the
close & open position.
Interlocking devices must provide absolute and positive protection against potentially
harmful mal-operations of the switchgear. The following functions shall been assured:
Electrical interlocking arrangement shall be fail-safe type.
Mechanical interlocks for isolator & Earthing Switch shall be fail-safe type.
All main contacts, male and female, shall be silver plated.
Each disconnect switch and grounding switch shall open or close only due to motor driven
or manual operation independently. The switch contact shall not move due to gravity or
other means, even if a part fails. Once initiated, the motor mechanism shall complete an
open or close operation without requiring the initiating contact be held closed. Operation
of respective end position limit switches shall only disconnect the motor mechanism.
There should also be a pre-set timer in motor circuit for protection against time over –run
in case of inadvertent failure of drive mechanism in any intermediate position of the
disconnector travel path.
277
The disconnect switches and grounding switches shall be located as per the Single Line
Diagram.
The disconnect switches shall be capable of interrupting the charging current of the
connected GIS bus & associated components.
Duty requirements:
The disconnecting switches shall have breaking capabilities as per IEC requirements.
Contact shielding shall be designed to prevent re strikes and high local stresses caused by
the transient recovery voltages when currents are interrupted.
The bus disconnecting switches shall reliably handle capacitive currents due to the
making and breaking of switchgear components as well as commutation currents due to
bus bar reconfiguration.
The fast acting ground switches, used for overhead double circuit lines and underground
cable feeders shall be capable of switching induced current as per IEC requirement.
Short Circuit Requirements
The rated peak short-circuit current or the rated short time current carried by an isolator
or earthing switch for the rated maximum duration of short circuitshall not cause:
a) Mechanical damage to any part of the isolator or earthing switch.
b) Separation of the contacts or contact welding.
c) A temperature rise likely to damage insulation.
Operation Mechanism.
Mechanism shall be arranged mechanically, electrically, so that all three phases of any
particular disconnect switch or grounding switch operate simultaneously.
All mechanisms shall be suitable for electrical motor operation to achieve a fully
automatic operation. For emergency situations manual operation shall be possible.
Handles or hand cranks shall be provided, together with allnecessary operation rods and
rod guides. Manual operation shall beprevented if the interlocking system does not allow
the operation of theswitch.
The auxiliary supply shall be electrically decoupled from the motor when the switch is
operated manually.
The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open and in the closed position.
Facility shall be available to allow the switch to be padlocked in anyposition.
Disconnecting operating mechanism of all disconnector/ isolator &earthswitches shall be
at easy operable height.
It shall not be possible, after final adjustment has been made, for any part of the
mechanism to be displaced at any point in the travel sufficiently to allow improper
functioning of the isolator when the isolator is opened or closed at any speed.
The operating mechanism design shall be such that during the operation of the isolator
(especially manual operation), once the moving blades reach the sparking distance,
springs shall take over to give a quick, snap action closing so that the isolator closing is
independent of manual efforts. Similarly, the springs must assist during the opening
operation to give quick breaking feature.
Disconnector and high speed motor operated earthing switch mechanisms shall be
provided with a mechanism with stored energy to always assure completed operations.
Auxiliary Switches:
All disconnecting switches shall be provided with electrically independent auxiliary
switch, directly driven by the common operating shaft. Each disconnect switch and
278
grounding switch shall furnished with sufficient Nos. of NO – NC as per entire scheme
requirement plus two (2)NO-NC electrically independent contacts terminated up to
terminal board, at user’s disposal. The auxiliary switches shall indicate the position of the
switch contacts, and shall be independent of the motor operation.
Position Indicators
Mechanically connected position indicators shall be provided externally topermit
observation of close/open position of the disconnect switch andgrounding switch. The
place of Position Indicators should be easily visiblefrom the place of operation of
respective equipment.
Open position - Green
Closed position - Red
Technical Data Requirement
Disconnectors:
1) Enclosure material - Aluminum Alloy
2) Rated voltage - 420 kV
3) Rated current - 4000 A
4) Rated short-time current Duration - 63 kA rms, for 3 sec
5) Rated control and operating voltage 220 V DC
6) Type of operating mechanism Motor operated
7) Type Mechanically & electrically ganged operated
a) Power frequency withstand voltage
- phase to phase, between phases 520 kV rms
- Across the isolating distance 610 kV rms
b) Lightning impulse withstand voltage
- phase to phase, between phases 1425 kV peak
- Across the isolating distance 1665 kV peak
9) Mechanical Endurance Class M1
Low-voltage test provision:
A low-voltage test provision may be supplied with a grounding switch to permit test
voltages of up to 10 kV (optional 2.5kV) and up to 200 A to be applied to the conductor
without removing SF6 gas or other components, except for ground shunt leads.
3.3 Current Transformers:
General
The current transformers provided for each phase shall be supplied in accordance with
the following general requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC 60044
specifications.
The current transformers must be suitable for continuous operation
The current transformer shall be ring / toroid type, multi ratio with fullydistributed
secondary windings with relay accuracy as per IEC 60185 (1987),incl. IEC 60044-4 (1992),
multi core as per requirement and shall be mounted inside the high voltage enclosure.
279
The secondary terminals of current transformers shall be placed outside the high voltage
enclosures, mounted in suitable, accessible terminal boxes and the secondary leads of all
the current transformers shall be wired to shorting type terminals. It shall be possible to
test each current transformer without the removal of gas through the insulated
grounding switches. The number and position of the current transformers shall be
relative to the circuit-breakers, disconnecting switches and ground switches as per the
protection and metering requirements .
The rating, No of cores, ratios, accuracy class, characteristics etc. for the individual
current transformer secondary cores shall be as specified below.
REQUIREMENTS FOR 420kV CTs OF RATIO
For Line Bays / Bus sectionalisers/Bus Couplers 4000-2000/1-1-1-1-1
No. Core Applicatio Current Output Accura Minimum Maximum Maximum
of No. n ratio burden cy class knee point C.T exciting
Cores (VA) voltage secondary current in mA
winding at knee point
(Volts)
resistance voltage
(ohms) at
75 deg. C
5 1 Bus diff --- PS
2 Bus diff --- PS 4000/ 2000 10/5 30 / 60
20 0.2 S --- --- ---
3 Metering
4 Line 2000- ---
protectio 1000/1
PS 4000/2000 10/5 30/60
n Main-II
5 Line ---
protectio
PS 4000/2000 10/5 30/60
n Main-I
For GENERATOR/REACTOR / StnTrf Bays 250/1-1-1-1-1
No. Core Applicati Current Output Accura Minimum Maximum Maximum
of No. on ratio burden cy knee point C.T exciting
Cores (VA) class voltage secondary current in mA
winding at knee point
(Volts)
resistance voltage
(ohms) at
75 deg. C
5 1 Bus diff --- PS
2 Bus diff --- PS 400 10/5 60
20 0.2 S --- --- ---
3 Meterin
g 250/1
4 Overall ---
Diff
PS 400 10/5 60
Protn
280
5 Other 20 5P20
Protn
Note:
All relaying CTs shall be accuracy class (PS) as per IS: 2705
The Instrument security factor for metering core shall be less than five (5) at all ratios.
The CT ratios shall be achieved through secondary tappings only without any primary
reconnection.
For the purpose of Boundary metering, Station Transformer and Backup metering,
Separate (Dedicated) CTs, PTs and Meters of suitable ratings and Spec., should be
incorporated in the scheme and should be provided as per the prevailing APTRANSCO
Norms.
Each current transformer shall be provided such that the enclosure current does not
affect the accuracy or the ratio of the device or the conductor current being measured.
Provision shall be made to prevent arcing across the enclosure insulation.
Rating and Diagram Plates
Rating and diagram plates shall be provided. The information to be supplied on each plate
shall be as specified in the relevant IEC specification, which shall be given for the tap for
which the rated performance is specified and for each transformer core.
3.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER:
Each voltage transformer shall be metal enclosed, SF6 insulated inaccordance with
relevant IEC 60044. The location, polarity, ratios, and accuracy shall be as specified.
Construction: VTs should be in segregated compartment and not forming a part of
busbar.
Transformers should be of either plug-in construction or the disconnect-link type, and be
attached to the gas-insulated system in such a manner that they can be easily
disconnected while the system is being dielectrically tested. Alternately, a voltage
transformer designed so that it does not have to be disconnected during dielectric testing
may be specified. The metal housingof the transformer should be connected to the metal
enclosure of the GIS with a flanged, bolted, and gasket joint so that the transformer
housing is grounded to the GIS enclosure. Adequate measures shall be provided to
prevent any unacceptable impact on the secondary control and protection circuits, which
might result from fast transients (VFT) or Ferro-resonance.
Covers and shields:
Special covers and any necessary corona shields should be supplied so that the system
can be pressurized and dielectrically tested after removal of the transformer.
Primary and secondary terminals:
Primary and secondary terminals should have permanent markings for identification of
polarity, in accordance with IEC. Provision shall be made for grounding of the secondary
windings inside the local control cabinet.
Test condition for tests at site: Power frequency tests for the completed GIS at site shall
be possible without removing the VT. The primary and secondary neutral terminal points,
intended to be earthed, should be insulated and shall withstand power frequency voltage
of 3 kV rms for 1minute.
Technical Data Requirement:
1 Rated voltage - 400kV
2 Highest system voltage - 420 kV
281
3 Rated frequency 50 Hz
4 P F (dry) withstand voltages 610 kV
5 Voltage factor 1.2 continuous
6 1.2/50 micro sec. lightning impulse withstand voltage 14501425/kVp
7 Earthing Effective
REQUIREMENTS OF 420kV VT / CVT

Sl.No. Description Requirements
1 Rated voltage primary 400 /_/ 3 kV
2 Type Single phase capacitor voltage transformer
3 No. of secondaries 3
4 Rated voltage factor 1.2 – continuous
1.5 for 30 seconds
5 Capacitance 4400; + 10% ,- 5% Pico farads
6 Rated secondary voltage Secondary – I Secondary – II Secondary – III

(V)
110 / _ /3 110 / _/3 110 / _/3
7 Application Protection Protection Metering
8 Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2 S
9 Output burden (VA) 50 50 50

(Minimum)
3.5 BUSHINGS:
Outdoor bushings shall be provided for connection of conventional external conductors
to SF6 GIS for line feeders for evacuation of Power from the station as indicated in the
general layout plan. Suitable clamp & connectors shall be supplied with bushing. The
dimensional and clearance requirements for the metal clad enclosure shall be maintained
as per requirement of relevant standards.
282
All the bushings shall have an impulse & power frequency withstand level that is higher
or equal to the level specified for GIS
Only SF6 insulated composite silicon bushings will be accepted. The terminals on the
outdoor bushings shall be a solid stem with required dimensions.
3.6 Metal-Enclosed Surge Arresters:

360KV, 20kA, Cl-4hermetically sealed, Gapless, ZnO, Surge arrestor, suitable for use
with GIS shall be provided as indicated in SLD/BOQ for Indoor GIS. Each Surge Arrester
shall be provided with self leakage current monitoring device at convenient elevation.
They shall have adequate thermal discharge capacity for severe switchingsurges, long
duration surges and multiple strokes. The surge arresters whenprovided with pressure
relief devices shall be capable of withstanding theinternal pressures developed during the
above discharges without operationof the pressure relief devices.
The metal housing of the arrester shallbe connected to the metal enclosure of the GIS
with a flanged, bolted joint.
The ground connection shall be sized for the fault level of the GIS. It shall be insulated
from the GIS-enclosure and grounded externally to permit periodic maintenance and
monitoring of the leakage current.
If the arresters are not equipped with removable links, special covers and any necessary
corona shields should be supplied so that the system can be pressurized and dielectrically
tested after removal of the arrester.
Access to the arrester ground connection, when it is provided with means forleakage
current monitoring should not be obstructed.
3.7 Insulating Gas and gas leakage rate
The GIS shall be furnished with sufficient sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6) gas to pressurize the
complete system in a sequential approach, one zone or compartment at a time to the
rated nominal density. The guaranteed leakage rate of each individual gas compartment
and between compartments must be less than 0.3% p.a. for the service life of
equipment.
The quality of new filled-in SF6 gas shall meet the following requirements inline with IEC
60376.
SF6 > 99.90 % by weight
Air < 500 ppm by weight (0.25 vol.-%)
CF4 < 500 ppm by weight (0.1 vol.-%)
H2O < 15 ppm by weight (0.012 Vol-%)
Mineral oil < 10 ppm by weight
Acidity, in terms of HF < 0.3 ppm by weight
Hydrolysable fluorides,
In terms of HF < 1 ppm by weight
3.8 Reuse or recycling of removed gas:
The supplier should provide guidelines or recommended practices for the reuse or
recycling of SF6 gas removed from the equipment. These guidelines should be consistent
with current industry practices, as they pertain to the effect of SF6 on global warming; i.e.
283
SF6 gas should be reused and recycled whenever possible and never be unnecessarily
released into the atmosphere.
Clear instructions shall be provided by bidder about handling, recycling & treatment of
new and used SF6 gas.
During commissioning dew point of SF6 gas shall be measured and documented.
Components may be filled with N2 for transportation and refilled with SF6 at site.
3.9 Gas sections

The GIS enclosures shall be divided into several gas sections separated bygas-tight
barriers. Each section shall be provided with necessary valves to allow evacuation and
refill of gas without evacuation of any other section.
Location of gas barrier insulators is to be clearly discriminated outside the enclosure by a
band of distinct colour normally used for safety purposes.
The gas system proposed shall be shown on a “gas single line diagram” and provided for
approval. It should include the necessary valves, connections, density monitors,
gasmonitor system and controls, indication, orifices, and isolation to preventcurrent
circulation. Means of calibrating density monitors without deenergizingthe equipment
should be specified by the supplier.
For the purpose of gas monitoring and maintenance, the GIS shall be dividedinto various
individual zones in each bay. The CB gas zone shall beindependent from all other gas
compartments and shall meet the requirement of relevant IEC.
Each gas zone shall be furnished with a gas monitoring system consisting of a gas density
continuous monitoring device provided with two electrically independent contacts which
operate in two stages as follows:
a) First alarm : At a gas density normally 5 to 10% below the nominal fill density.
b) Second alarm : Minimum gas density to achieve equipment ratings.
In special cases determined by the supplier, a third stage with a set of contacts may be
necessary in certain areas.
Provisions shall be made for connecting pressure gauges, service cart, and moisture test
instrumentation to any one of the gas sections.
Permanent Gas Treatment Devices: Means shall be provided inside each enclosure for
treating the SF6 gas by the
use of Desiccants, driers, filter, etc. to remove impurities in the gas.
All gas compartments shall be fitted with static filter material containers that willabsorb
residual and entering moisture inside the high voltage enclosures.
Filters inside the breaker compartment shall also be capable of absorbing
gasdecomposition products resulting from the switching arc.
3.10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PORTABLE PD MONITORING SYSTEMFORGAS
INSULATED SWITCHGEAR
GENERAL
The equipment shall be used for detecting different types of defectsin Gas Insulated
Stations(GIS) such as Particles, Loose shields and PartialDischarges as well as for detection
of Partial discharges in other types ofequipment such as Cable Joints, CTs and PTs.
It shall be capable for measuring PD in charged GIS environment as EHVwhich shall have
bandwidth in order of 10 KHz – 500 KHz with possibility toselect a wide range of
intermediate bandwidths for best measurementresults will be finalised during
284
detailed Engineering based on the merits.. The principal of operation shall be on acoustic
technique and themethod of measurement shall be non-intrusive. The instrument is able
todetect partial discharges in cable joints, terminations, CTs and PTs etc., withthe hot
sticks.
Detection and measurement of PD and bouncing particles shall be displayedon built in
large LCD display and the measurement shall be stored in theinstrument and further
downloadable to a PC for further analysis to locateactual source of PD such as free
conducting particles, floatingcomponents, voids in spacers, particle on spacer surfaces
etc.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:
Measurement shall be possible in noisy environment.
Stable reading shall be possible in presence of vibrations withincomplex GIS assemblies,
which can produce signals similar to PD.
Equipment should have necessary synchronizing circuits to obtain PDcorrelation with
power cycle and power frequency.
The equipment shall be battery operated with built-in-battery charger.It shall also be
suitable for 230V AC/50 Hz input.
Measurement shall be possible in the charged switchyard in thepresence of EMI/EMC.
Instrument shall be supplied with standard accessories i.e., relocatable sensors with
mounting arrangements, connecting cables(duly screened) to sensors, Lap-top PC,
diagnostic software,carrying case, rechargeable battery pack with charger suitable
for230V AC, 50Hz supply connecting cables (duly screened) to view instorage.
The function of software shall be covering the following:
- Data recording, storage and retrieval in computer
- Data base analysis
- Template analysis for easy location of fault inside the GIS
- Evaluation of PD measurement i.e, Amplitude, PhaseSynchronization etc.
- Evaluation of bouncing/loose particles with flight time andestimation on size of particle.
- Report generation
To prove the suitability in charged switchyard condition, practicaldemonstration shall be
conducted before acceptance.
Supplier shall have “Adequate after sales service” facility in India.
Necessary training may be accorded to personnel to make use of thekit for locating PD
sources inside the GIS at site during commissioning.
Instrument shall be robust and conform to relevant standard.
3.11 GIS Connection:
GIS to SF6 gas bushing of TRANSFORMER/REACTOR:
When the SF6 to the bushing of an oil-insulated transformer / reactor is connected,the
transformer/reactor bushing must be oil-tight, gas-tight and pressureresistant. Any
temperature related movement and irregular setting of theswitchgear’s or transformer’s
/reactor’s foundations are absorbed by the expansionfittings.
GIS to LINE:by GIS SF6 to air bushing
3.12 Local & Remote Control and Operation
One local control cabinet (LCC) of OEM of GIS shall be supplied for the local controland
operation of each bay. Each LCC shall contain the local control, interlocking,operation and
indication devices for the associated GIS bay.
285
The LCC shall be mounted on each GIS bay. The LCC’s shall be located withsufficient space
for access and the possibility to work at the equipment even when theLCC doors are
open, or directly at the switch-gear in front of the related circuitbreaker.
The control and operation circuits shall be well shielded andwith safety measures to
protect operator from touching energized parts. Powerfrequency withstand of control
circuits shall be 2 kV for 1 minute.
The LCC should have required arrangement for control and operations of GISfrom
Remote i.e. from the control room through SCADA as well as SCADAcompatible control
and protection panel.Necessary bay controllers may be envisaged to avoid excess cabling.
The LCC shall include all required functions for control and supervision of a completeGIS
as well as the marshalling of all connections to and from the GIS bays.
The LCC’s shall be provided with the following features:
a) A mimic diagram showing the single line diagram. Position indictors, on/off switches
forthe HV devices and local / off / remote switches shall be installed on or adjacent to
thevarious symbols of the mimic diagram.
The following devices shall be supplied as a minimum:
- Circuit breaker control switch with ON – OFF indicating lamps.
– Circuit breaker“local-remote” selector switch.
- Disconnect switch, control switch with ON – OFF indicating lamps.
- Grounding switch, control switch with ON – OFF indicating lamps.
- Mimic bus including symbols according to the single line diagram.
- Monitoring control of all high voltage switching devices in a bay.
- Digital display of current, voltage, active and reactive power, power factor etc.
b) Any interposing relays and control switches associated with the circuit breakers,
disconnect switches, grounding switches etc.
c) The alarm and indication for devices specified e.g. gas, DC & AC supervision.
d) Fuses and links. These shall be installed in the interior of the LCC’s
e) Terminal blocks for the terminating and marshalling of auxiliary supply circuits,
control,interlocking, and indication & alarm circuits from the GIS and for cable
connections tothe remote control room or the owner’s control system.
f) Each LCC shall be furnished with a guarded resistance heater to prevent the
internalequipment from humidity deposit. The heater shall be rated 230 V AC and fed
through atwo pole fused disconnect switch.
g) A fluorescent lamp and a duplex convenience outlet rated 230 V AC, 15 amps
withground fault interrupter shall be installed in each LCC.
h) The Local control cubicle shall be fitted with pre wired interface terminal blocks
forconnectionto control& protection panels. The interface includes CT & PT inputsfor
protection & Measuring system, Protection trip 1 & 2 signals, Aux switch contactsetc.
3.13 Wiring Requirements
Wiring shall be complete in all respects to ensure proper functioning of thecontrol,
protection, and monitoring and interlocking schemes.DC circuit for trip coil 1 & 2 shall be
wired separately.
Wiring shall be done with flexible 1100V grade, FRLS, PVC insulated,switchboard wires
with 2.5 mm2 stranded copper conductor. The control wire ina grouped environment
shall not convey flame, continue to burn. Wiringbetween equipment and control cubicle
shall be routed through G.I. rigid Trays/conduits and shall be done by FRLS PVC
286
&screened cable only, with safetymeasures to protect operator from touching energized
parts.
Each wire shall identify at both ends with permanent markers bearing wirenumbers as
per supplied wiring diagram.
Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulatingsleeves.
Wires shall not be spliced between terminals.
All spare contacts of relays, push buttons, auxiliary switches etc. shall be wiredup to
terminal blocks in the control cubicle.
Terminal blocks shall be 1100V grade, stud type CATM4 removable with “Minus screw
driver” with engraved numberssuitable for termination of at least two numbers of 2.5
mm2 stranded copperconductor. Terminal blocks for CT, PT, auxiliary AC & DC supply
shall be CATDM4 disconnecting link type.
Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal.
Spare terminalsequal in number to 20% active terminals shall be furnished.
Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access. Wiring shall be soarranged that
individual wires of an external cable can be connected toconsecutive terminals.
Terminal connectors that carry power supply should be shrouded fromadjoining
connectors.
Manufacturer shall provide all control wiring and terminations internal to theswitchgear,
and connecting the switchgear to the bay control cabinets.
All control cables shall be shielded. Cable shields shall be grounded.
Grounding connections shall be as short and direct as possible and shallterminate at the
point of entry to cabinets or terminal boxes.
Any cabling within GIS shall be supported on cable tray. No cable shall be inhanging
position.
All cable connections between the various GIS modules and the LCC’s shall be madeby
prefabricated multi-core cables with multipoint plug in connections on both theends. PTs
& CTs circuit shall be wired with crimped type copper lugs.
All cables shall be shielded and adequate for their application (indoor / outdoor).
Thecables shall be fire retardant low smoke.
The length and the number of terminal points of control wiring & SF6 gas
connectionsshall be minimized.
The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall preferably be madeby
means of multiple contact connectors so that electrical connection is
automaticallyachieved when bolting on section to another. The surface of the connector
fingersand conductor tubes on such connections shall be silver plated.
3.14 Name plates
Name plates of the following types shall be furnished in a convenient central locationto
provide information for operation and maintenance.
a) Gas Single Line Diagram showing all HV devices in a single line diagram withthe gas
sectionalizing of the GIS indicated. Also shown shall be the GISnomenclature, a legend,
Manufacturer’s type and serial number and year ofmanufacture.
b) GIS Rating / Name plate:
Manufacturer’s name & address, type & designation, Sr. No, Maximum
ambienttemperature, System frequency, Maximum continuous voltage, Maximum
continuouscurrent at 40oC ambient temperature, Basic Impulse Level, Power Frequency
oneminute voltage, Short circuit current, rms., symmetrical Short time (rms) current
&duration, symmetrical Momentary current, peak, Total weight of gas at rated
287
density,Rated gas pressure at 20oC. Opening pressure of the bursting disc,
recommendedmoisture limits of insulation gas (PPMV), Auxiliary voltages,
Contract/Purchase Ordernumbers, Total weight of the equipment
c) Equipment nameplate containing nameplate rating information for all HV modules(like
circuit breaker, disconnect switches, current transformer, voltage transformer,surge
arrester, etc.) as required in relevant IEC.
d) Nameplates showing serial numbers and similar data specific to individualcomponents
shall be mounted on the components. Each instrument transformermust have its own
rating plate mounted adjacent to each terminal box cover, will allterminal and ratio
markings. Each bay auxiliary control cubicle must be identifiedwith its designation to
which it is assigned.
3.15 Type Tests:
Following type test reports from NABL laboratory, as specified in IEC standard 62271– 203
&62271-100 (amended up to date) shall be submitted for the offered type,rating of GIS
invariably with the technical bid. Bid without type test reports will not beconsidered for
evaluation. The type test reports shall be valid up to date of bid submission.However, the
type test report for higher class/rating can also be accepted.
1. Tests to verify the insulation level (Lightning impulse, Switching impulseand ac
withstand test with PD) test on each GIS device (CB,Disconnector, bus, etc).
2. Dielectric tests on auxiliary circuits.
3. Tests to prove the radio interference voltage (RIV) level.
4. Tests to prove the temperature rise of any part of the equipment andmeasurement of
the resistance of the main circuit.
5. Tests to prove the ability of the main and earthing circuits to carry therated peak and
the rated short time withstand current.
6. Tests to verify the making and breaking capacity of the includedswitching devices.
7. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation of the included switchingdevices.
8. Tests to prove the strength of enclosures.
9. Verification of the degree of protection of the enclosure.
10. Gas tightness tests
11. Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC).
12. Additional tests on auxiliary and control circuits.
13. Tests on partitions.
14. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation at limit temperatures.
15. Tests to prove performance under thermal cycling and gas tightnesstests on
insulators.
16. Corrosion test on earthing connections (if applicable).
17. Tests to assess the effects of arcing due to an internal fault.
18. Tests on solid dielectric components (operating rods, spacers, etc)
19. Seismic test
20. Test on Auxiliary switches (Electrical & Mechanical Endurance, Heatrun, IR & HV test)
Routine / Acceptance Testing:
During manufacture and on completion, all equipment shall be subjected to theRoutine
tests as laid down in IEC Standard IEC 62271-203. All the acceptance testsshall be carried
288
out in presence of purchasers representative on offering the material forinspection and
testing by successful bidder. Tests shall include the following:
1. Dielectric test on the main circuit.
2. PD test
3. Tests on auxiliary and control circuits.
4. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.
5. Tightness test.
6. Design and visual checks.
7. Pressure tests of enclosures.
8. Functional tests
9. Tests on auxiliary circuits, equipment and interlocks in the controlmechanism.
10. Pressure test on partitions
11. LCC – Complete functional & interlock test as per approved drawings with LCC duly
connected to respective Bay GIS module in all respect.
- IR test
- HV test
Test Certificates:
a. Certified reports of all the tests carried out at the works shall be furnished inrequired
number copies for approval of the purchaser.
b. The equipment shall be dispatched from works only after receipt of Purchaser's written
dispatch clearance & approval of the test reports.
c. Routine test certificates of bought out components shall be furnished.
d. Type test certificate on any equipment or component if so desired by the purchaser
shall be furnished. Otherwise the equipment shall have to be typetested, free of charge,
to prove the design.
Tests after installation of complete GIS at Site:
After installation and before being put into service, the GIS shall be tested inorder to
check the correct operation and dielectric integrity of the equipment aslaid down in IEC
62271-203. The supplier shall furnish acommissioning test plan and a statement method
for the tests on site.
Tests shall include the following:
1. Dielectric tests on the main circuits.
2. Dielectric tests on auxiliary circuits.
3. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit.
4. Gas tightness tests.
5. Checks and verifications.
6. Gas quality verifications.
7. On site power frequency voltage withstand test with PD test.
8. Tests as per IEEE C37.122.1 clause 4.10.5
9. Functional & interlock tests for all items
10. Demonstration of operational compatibility with SCADA
11. Visual inspection, checks & verifications.
289
12. Mechanical operation tests of circuit breakers, Disconnectors and earthing switches
13. Insulation resistance measurement
14. Tests on CTs and PTs
15. Tests on Surge Arresters
Required test equipment

During the onsite tests, the supplier shall provide all necessary test facilities and
equipment for the switch-gear power frequency tests, i.e. test bushing or test cable, test
adapter, test transformer or resonant test set etc.
3.16 LIST OF MANDATORY SPARES:
1. Spacers / Insulation Barriers - 6 Nos of Each type used.
2. Seal of Bushings - 6 Nos of each of the types used
3. Closing & Trip Coils of Breaker - 4 Sets.
4. Catch Gear Mechanism of Breaker - 2 Sets.
5. Motors/Springs for Breaker/Isolator operating mechanism - 2 Sets of each
6. Male & Female contact Sets - 6 type used
7. SF6 Gas pressure monitoring switches - 6 Nos of each type
8. SF6 Gas pressure gauges / indicators - 6 Nos of each type
9. Position Switches/ Cam switches for Breakers,
Isolators, Earth Switches etc. - 3 Sets of each type.
10. Special tools, tackles & spanner required for
Commissioning, operation and maintenance. - 1 Set.
11. Moisture absorbing material - lot

3.17 DRAWINGS, DATA & MANUALS:
Drawings, Data and Manuals shall be supplied as specified in General Conditions on
Contract and/orelsewhere in this specification for approval and subsequent distribution.
To be submitted with the Bid:
1. Typical general arrangement drawings of the equipment indicating spacerequirement,
room dimensions, crane capacity etc.
2. Technical Specifications of equipment and special tools explaining construction
features, principle of operation, special features etc.
3. Comprehensive QAP, FQP, SLD, Gas Schematic diagram, Technicalbrochures, building
requirements, Earth mat design, List of recommended spares, special tools or fixtures,
O&M manuals, environmental guide for handling SF6 gas & decommissioning, estimated
time schedule for installation & commissioning, bill of materials, and any other
documents required for successful commissioning & operation of complete GIS.
4. Control and protection:
Block & principle diagram showing proposed scheme, layout & equipment arrangement
drawings, catalogues & brochures of offered devices.
290
The following drawings & data for approval before commencement of supply:
1. A comprehensive Manufacturing Quality assurance plan with effective quality
assurance system.
2. Field Quality plan indicating instruction & procedures sequenced for storage, assemble,
maintenance and disassembly.
3. Assemble and maintenance clearance requirements.
4. Dimensional general arrangement drawing showing disposition of variousfittings, name
plates indicating equipment ratings.
5. Structure Plan with details and loading
6. Foundation plan indicating loadings for all GIS equipment, supporting structure and
anchor bolt arrangements.
7. Assembly drawing for erection at site with part numbers and schedule of materials
Transport/shipping dimensions with weights.
8. Control schematic and wiring diagrams.
9. Gas schematic Diagram
10. Gas system installation procedures, gas handling procedures.
11. Grounding arrangement and ground bus details including Manufacturer’s
recommendation on Grounding of reinforcement bars of Column foundation.
12. Calculation of Voltage rise for GIS enclosure
13. Calculated point to point resistance for each assembly.
14. Calculation for Surge Protection
15. Design Calculations for Bus-bar sizing, Short circuit forces and vibration on Bus-bar &
each equipment, thermal stability and losses.
16. Any other relevant drawing or data necessary for satisfactory installation, operation
and maintenance.
17. Operating instruction & manuals for GIS and its accessories
18. The manual shall clearly indicate method of installation, checkups and teststo be
carried out before commissioning of the equipment.
19. The bidder shall note that the approval of drawings & documents by the purchaser
does not relieve him of his contractual obligation.
The bidder may note that the drawings, data and manuals listed herein are
minimumrequired only. The bidder shall ensure that all other necessary write-up, curves,
etc require to fully describe the equipment are to be submitted.
The paper copy of the drawings & document shall besubmitted for approval & reference.
All final drawings and documents shall be submitted in CD in Auto CAD version and MS
office format as applicable for purchaser’sfuture reference.
3.18 MAINTENANCE:
The operational integrity of the GIS switchgear shall not subject to external influences,
such as pollution, moisture, dust etc. As a consequence of this GISswitchgear should be
practically maintenance free, however, the details of inspection required at regular
interval shall be indicated in the offer. Visual inspection shall berequired not below 2
(two) years interval. Inspection shall not be required often thanevery 10 years. During
inspection it must not be necessary to open the switchgearenclosures for interrupt
operation of substation. Provision of functional testing of theclose and trip coils, auxiliary
switches, pressure and control switches etc. shall beprovided.
291
Following minimum maintenance period shall be accepted.
(a) Circuit breaker: 5000 closing and opening or 20 interruption at max rated current
(b) Disconnector: 5000 closing and opening operations.
The bidder shall provide the services of experienced persons, supervisors, engineers,
experts, etc., for complete specified work for satisfactory operation.
The bidder shall have dedicated localized after sales & service team which should be
capable any activity to operate complete GIS satisfactorily.
3.19 GIS Building overhead traveling crane.
Overhead traveling crane of suitable capacity has to be included in the supply and should
be provided in the GIS building for erection and maintenance of the GIS equipment
3.20 Design information to be submitted.
The bidder shall provide complete floor plan detailing the fixing positions,levels and size
of fixing bolt pockets and foundation required for all equipments. Drawings giving similar
details shall be provided.
All static and dynamic loads plus dimensional tolerances shall be given onthese drawings.
3.21 Guaranteed and technical particulars as called for in attached SCHEDULE ‘AD’shall be
furnished along with the technical bid.
3.22 Training:
Training to purchasers on construction, installation,commissioning and O&M shall be
imparted by bidder free of cost. The complete training shall be covering minimum
belowspecified curriculum. Any other specific area may be brought to notice andincluded.
1. General Explanation for GIS
2. Layout and Architecture of GIS
3. Gas Sectionalisation of GIS
4. Construction of CB
5. Operating Mechanism of CB
6. Maintenance of CB
7. Overhaul of CB (Interrupting chamber)
8. Overhaul of CB (Operating Unit)
9. Construction of DS/ES
10. Maintenance of DS/ES
11. Overhaul of DS/ ES
12. Overhaul of various transformer connections
13. Operation of GIS with SCADA
14. Construction & Maintenance of Lightning Arrester
15. Construction & Maintenance of VT/CT
16. Construction & Maintenance of Local control panel
17. Erection of GIS at site.
18. Installation & Testing of GIS at site
19. Type tests of GIS
20. Routine tests of GIS.
21. Faults simulation of GIS
292
22. Localization of GIS fault.
Bidder shall at his cost arrange for the above training facilities and in addition shallbear all
living expenses plus inland travel expenses of all the trainees.
3.23 Shipment storage and installation:
All equipments shall be suitably packed and protected during shipment/transportation.
Each shipping unit shall be sealed in a clean dry condition with leak-tight shippingcovers
securely mounted for shipment. All covers to be removed during installationshall be
clearly marked. Each shipping section shall be carefully sealed and filled withdry gas to a
slightly positive pressure to prevent the entrance of moisture andcontamination.
The packing method for the GIS equipment shall be standard and it shall beguaranteed
that each component of the equipment will not be damaged, deformed orlost. The
storage instructions shall be submitted by bidder for long term storage.
Component requiring indoor storage shall be so identified.
Gas insulated switchgear (GIS) shall be properly packed to protect during oceanshipment,
inland transport, carriage at site and outdoor storage during transit and atthe site.
Completely assembled bays (subject to transport limitations) of the GIS shallbe
transported as one shipment unit.
Packing materials shall be dust and waterproof. All packages shall be clearly, legiblyand
durably marked with uniform block letters on at least three sides. Fragile itemslike
bushings, CTs, VTs, LAs and fully assembled bays shall be securely packagedand shipped
in containers. Silica gel or approved equivalent moisture absorbingmaterial in small
cotton bags shall be placed and tied at various points on theequipment wherever
necessary.
Impact recorders (Accelerometers) shall be provided on the packages to confirm thatGIS
has not suffered any shocks during shipment, transport, handling, etc. Theimpact
recorders readings are to be noted on receipt of equipment at site andreported to user &
manufacturer, in case the readings are exceeding the permissiblevalues. It shall be at
discretion of user to accept or reject the same.
3.24 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Superior quality control system shall be adopted to assure high product quality.
Raw materials of the best commercial grade quality and high reliability shall beused in the
manufacture of GIS. High reliability of materials shall be ensuredso as to keep
maintenance work to a minimum.
A quality assurance plan for major components such as breakers,disconnecting switches,
lightning arrestors, earth switches, etc. with in-processinspection methods, tests, records,
etc. shall be submitted with the technicalbid. Customer hold points will also be included
in the plan, which shall bemutually agreed by the PURCHASER and MANUFACTURER, and
approved.
The contractor shall also furnish the following for the approval before execution of
outdoor type equipment and its layout for power evacuation upto terminal point
It shall also includes
i) Power and Control Cable schedules.
ii) Earth mat design & Lightning Protection design.
i) Structural design of switch yard Bus structures and equipment support
structures, Gantry tower structures, connectors, clamps and equipment
layout.
STANDARDS:
293
The design, manufacture, testing and performance of equipment and services provided
under this Contract shall comply with the latest edition of the following standards,
Rules and Acts*.
1. IS:1653 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
2. IS:3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring.
3. IS:2667 Fitting for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
4. IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring.
5. IS:1239 Mild steel tubes.
6. IS:458 Specification for concrete pipes.
7. IS:5216 Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical
works.
8. IS:280 M.S. Wire for general engineering purpose.
9. IS:8309 Compression type tubular terminal ends for aluminum
conductors of insulated cables.
10. IS:8394 Soldering and welded type terminal ends for conductors of
insulated cables.
11. IS:513 Cold rolled carbon sheet steel.
12. IS:2633 Methods of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.
13. Indian Electricity Act 1948.
14. Indian Electricity Rules.
* Note: IEC standards or equivalent standards are acceptable
The Scope of supply also includes power evacuation equipment kept at Outdoor area
a. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ISOLATORS CUM EARTHING SWITCHES ( outdoor
type 4 no.s 2 Nos.)
This specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, inspection and testing at
manufacturer's works, packing and delivery at site of the 420kV outdoor type air break
Isolators with associated earthing switches and auxiliary equipment for installation .
The offered equipment shall be capable of performing continuous operation. The offered
equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble
free operation and interfacing along with specified associated equipment, interlocks,
control and protection schemes etc. Such components shall be deemed to be with in the
scope. All similar parts particularly removable ones shall be interchangeable.
It is intended to install sub-station monitoring system 400Substation control room.
Components/ Switches/ Modules/ Contacts required to be provided with Isolators for
interfacing with the monitoring system.
STANDARDS
1. IS:1818 Alternating current isolators
IS:9921 (Part I to V) (dis-connectors) and earthing switch
2. IEC:60129(Amd1-1992) Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
3. IS:2544/1996 } Tests on indoor and outdoor
IEC:60168 } post insulators of ceramic material or glass
4. IEC:60273(1990) Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post
insulators
5. IS:731/1971 }
294
IS:5350/1970/71/73 } Porcelain insulators
IS:2099-1986 }
6. IEC:60233(Amd1-1988) Test on hollow insulators for use in electrical
equipment
7. IS:2147 & Degree of protection
IS:4691 provided by enclosures.
8. IEC:60815(1986)Guide of the selection of insulators in respect of polluted conditions
9. IEC:60507 (1991)Artificial pollution tests on high-voltage insulators on a a.c. system
10. NEMA Pub.107 Radio Influence Voltage
IEC:60437 (1997) Tests Radio Interference
Test on high- voltage insulators
11. IEC:61000 Electromagnetic compability
12. IS:325 & IS:996 Three phase induction motors.
13. IS:4722 Rotating electrical machines.
14. IS:2699 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising of iron and steel.
15. IS:4759 Hot dip galvanisation coating on structural steel.
16. IS:2633 Method of testing weight thickness and uniformity of coating on fasteners.
17. IS:1573 Electro plated coating of zinc on iron and steel.
18. IS:3033/3063 Spring washers
19. IS:2016 Plain washers
20. I.E. Rules Indian electricity Rules 1956
21. CISPR Pub.1-1972 International special committee on Radio Interference
on Measuring current for RIV Tests.
22. IS:5561 Power connectors
23. IS:1554-1988 PVC cables
24. IS:375 marking and arrangement for switchgear bus bar
main connectors and auxiliary wiring.
25. IS:3961-1967,68 Recommended current rating for PVC insulated & PVC sheathed
heavy duty cables.
26. IS:1239 Standard for ERW pipes
TYPE AND DUTY REQUIREMENTS :
420kV Motor operated horizontal Centre Break Isolator cum Earthing switches shall be a set
of three individual poles single horizontal centre break type having two rotating posts per
pole with one/two earthing blades per pole suitable for fixing mechanically on either side of
the pole. Necessary inter pole cabling is also included in the scope of supply.
The isolators shall be capable of making/breaking the magnetising and capacitive currents
of 0.7 amp. at 0.15 power factor.
The isolator design shall be such that it is free from visible corona discharge in both closed
and open position at the visible discharge test voltage specified for the insulators. Necessary
grading rings or shields shall be provided to meet these requirements.
The earthing switches shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the transmission
lines.
The isolator cum earthing switches shall be able to bear on the terminals the total
295
forcesincluding wind loading and electrodynamic forces on the attached conductor
without impairing reliability or current carrying capacity. The safety factor against break
of an isolator cum earthing switches shall be at least 1.25 times the simultaneously acting
forces plus operating forces. This shall be supported by furnishing calculations of tests
performed, if any, along with the bid.
Contacts:
The horizontal break type isolators and earthing switches shall have heavy duty self-aligning
and high pressure contacts. The contacts shall be made of hard drawn electrolytic grade
copper strip. High pressure type contacts shall wipe the contact
surface while opening and closing. The contacts shall be so designed that the wiping action
shall not cause scouring or abrasion on the contact surfaces. The wiping action shall be
sufficient to remove any film of oxide which may be formed during the operation of the
switches and so designed that binding cannot occur after remaining closed for prolonged
periods of time in polluted atmosphere
The contacts and other current carrying parts shall be so designed that their temperature
rise under specified conditions of operation shall not exceed the values stipulated in
relevant standard. The temperature rise due to the passage of rated short circuit current
for a period of 1 second shall not cause any annealing or welding of contacts.
Moving contacts shall be dimensioned to withstand the rated short circuit current during
service. The surface of the contact shall be rendered smooth and shall be silver plated. The
thickness of silver plating shall not be less than 25 microns.
The female contact and its tensioning by spring shall be designed such that there will be
always a positive contact with adequate pressure to give enough contact surface for the
passing of current. The springs provided shall not go out of alignment or get entangled with
the male contact during operation.
Necessary arrangement shall be provided for proper alignment of the contacts. Factory
adjustment shall be arranged on each pole that no changes in the field are required on
the isolator-cum-earthing switches supplied. Gang operated links shall be so designed
that all phases shall make and break simultaneously.
Blades:
All metal parts shall be of non-corroding metal. Current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous
material. Bolts screws and pins shall be provided with lock washers. Keys or equivalent
locking facilities, if provided on current carrying parts, shall be made of non-ferrous and
non-corroding material. All castings except current carrying parts, shall be made of cast iron
or cast steel. No grey iron shall be used in the manufacture of any part of the isolator.
420kV HCB Isolators moving arms can be of Aluminium. But the main contacts/Tips shall be
of Copper with silver plating of thickness of minimum 25 microns.
The isolators and earthing switches shall be designed such that lubrication of any part is not
required at frequent intervals. Self- lubricating components shall be preferable and this
aspect shall be brought out in the bid.
The design of isolator-cum-earthing switches shall provide for positive control of blades in all
positions with the minimum of mechanical stress on the insulators. Fixed guides shall be
so provided that proper seating of contacts shall be obtained when a blade is out of
alignment even by 25mm in either direction. All movable parts which may be in current
path shall be shunted by flexible copper conductors of adequate cross-section and
strength.
BASE :
296
Each pole of the isolator shall be provided with a complete galvanised steel base
provided with holes and designed for mounting on a supporting structure. The base shall
be rigid and self supporting and shall require no guying or cross bracing between
phases other than the supporting structures.
The base for each isolator pole shall have levelling screws for easily adjusting insulator
columns in relation to the base.
INSULATORS
The type of insulators used for the isolators and isolator cum-earthing switches shall be as
specified in Section Auxiliaries. The porcelain used shall conform to the requirements
stipulated in Section-Auxiliaries and shall comply with the requirements of IS: 2544 (as
amended up-to-date). The insulators shall be manufactured by the wet process. The
porcelain and metal parts shall be assembled together with such material and in such
manner that any thermal expansion of the metal and the porcelain part throughout the
range of operating temperature shall not loosen the parts or create undue stress adversely
affecting the mechanical and electrical strength. The solid core insulators to be used shall
have creepage distance of 25mm/kV.
EARTHING SWITCHES
Earthing switches shall be operated locally only.
The earthing switches shall be motor operated and mechanically interlocked with the
isolator so that the earthing switches can be operated only when the isolator is open.
The earthing switches shall be of the same current carrying capacity including the capacity to
carry fault currents as the main blades of the associated isolator and shall with stand all
dynamic stresses, which might occur. Each earthing switch shall be provided with flexible
copper strips for connection to grounding system. These strips shall have the same short
time current rating as the earthing switch blade.
The transfer of fault current through swivel connection will not be accepted.
All electrical clearances and characteristics of the earthing switch shall be fully coordinated
with the associated isolator. The earthing switches shall be supplied with auxiliary contacts
and interlocking devices.
The frame of each isolator and earthing switch shall be provided with two reliable earth
terminals for connection to the earthing system.
Earthing switches shall consist of three earthing links per isolator, which will normally rest
against the frames when the connected isolator is in closed position. The earthing links for
three phases shall be capable of being fitted on either side of the isolator.
OPERATING MECHANISM OF ISOLATOR-CUM-EARTHING SWITCHES:
A three phase AC motor operated type with well synchronised operating mechanism shall be
provided for each pole of 420kV H.C.B. Isolator. The H.C.B. Isolator shall be remote
controlled. Manual operating mechanism shall be provided for H.C.B. isolator and earthing
switches. Inter-pole cables required for 420kV H.C.B isolators shall be in the supplier's scope.
Limit switches for control shall be fitted on the isolator-cum-earthing switch shaft, within the
cabinet to control the open and close positions of the isolator-cum-earthing switches.
OPERATION
The height of the operating handle for manual operation shall be approximately 1000 mm
above ground level. Earthing switch shall be suitable for manual operation for all types of
isolators-cum-earthing switches. Manual operation facility should be provided with
necessary interlock to disconnect motor.
The operating mechanism operating time for a complete open to close or close to The design
297
shall be such as to provide maximum reliability under all service conditions. All operating
linkages carrying mechanical loads shall be designed for negligible deflection. The length of
inter insulator and inter-pole operating rods shall be capable of adjustments, by means of
screw thread which can be locked with a lock nut after an adjustment has been made. The
isolator and earth switches shall be provided with suitable device in the operating
mechanism to prevent accidental opening by wind, vibration, short circuit forces or
movement of the support structures.
TERMINALS, CONNECTORS AND EARTHING TERMINALS

The isolator-cum-earthing switches shall be provided with aluminium alloy bimetallic clamp
type terminal connectors suitable for SCA conductor or aluminium tube for taking line and
bus connections. The exact size of the conductor will be intimated to the successful Bidder.
Each isolator-cum-earthing switch and control mechanism shall be provided with at least two
numbers of grounding terminals and clamps for receiving ground connection.
Interlocks are required to be provided for:

i) to prevent opening of the isolators on load;
ii) to prevent closing of the earthing switch when the isolator is closed;
iii) to prevent closing of the line isolator when the earth switch is closed.
The electrical interlocking scheme shall operate on 220 V D.C. supply as specified in the
specification. It shall not be possible to operate the isolator either manually or electrically
when the 220 V DC core of the electro magnet is not energised.
Auxiliary switches (contacts) shall be provided for automatic indication of the isolator and
isolator-cum-earthing switch position, control, interlocking and other supervisory purposes.
They shall be mechanically actuated by the operating mechanism of its associated isolator
and isolator-cum-earthing switch. Design, which permits the change of normally closed
contact to a normally open contact or vice versa with minimum modification would be
preferred. Auxiliary switches shall be mounted in a weather-proof housing confirming to IP55
which shall have provision for entry of conduits of proper sizes or for fixing of cable glands.
GALVANISATION
All ferrous parts of the isolators shall be hot-dip galvanised as per IS:2629-1969 (as
amended up-to-date) or any other equivalent authoritative standard (refer to Section -
Auxiliaries).
TESTS
The isolator-cum-earthing switches shall comply with all the type tests and shall be
subjected to all the routine tests as per IS:9921/IEC:60129.
RATING AND OTHER PARTICULARS:
The isolators shall be designed for the following rating and other particulars:
Type motor operated
No,of poles Three
Rated voltage 425KV
Rated normal current 4000 A
Rated frequency 50Hz
System neutral earthing Effective
Rated short time withstand current `63 KA(rms) for 1 sec50 KA rms for 3 Sec
298
Rated peak withstand current 100kA Peak.
RATING AND OTHER PARTICULARS FOR EARTHING SWITCHES:
The earthing blades shall be designed for the following rating and other particulars.
i. Type : Manually operated vertically mounted vertical air break type suitable for
outdoor installation.
ii. Rated voltage : Associated with respective245 kV rated voltage isolators
iii. Rated frequency : 50 Hz
iv. No. of poles : Three
v. Rated short time withstands current 50 kA (rms) for 1 s. 50 KA rms for 3 Sec
vi. Rated peak make and withstand current 100 kAp
Rated voltage (kV, rms.) : 420
Rated frequency (Hz) : 50
No. of poles : 3
Design ambient temperature : 50 deg C
Rated Insulation levels
1 Full Insulation levels :
between line terminals and ground : + / - 1425 kV peak
Switching impulse withstand Voltage (250 / 2500 micro
Second) dry and wet between line terminals and ground : + / 1050 kV peak
One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage
between line terminals and ground : 630 kV rms.
Min Creepage Distance Phase to ground (mm): 10500
Seismic acceleration : 0.3 g horizontal
Partial discharge : Not exceeding 10 p C
System neutral Earthing : Effectively earthed
Technical Parameters of Bushings/ Hollow Column Insulators / support insulators

(a) Rated Voltage (kV) 420
(b) Impulse withstand +/- 1425
voltage (Dry & wet) (kVP)
(c) Switching surge withstand + /- 1050
voltage (dry and wet) (kVP)
(d) Power frequency withstand 630
voltage (dry and wet) (kV rms)
(e) Total Creepage(mm) 10500
(f) Insulator shall also meet requirement of IEC-815 for 420kV system, as applicable
having alternate long & short sheds.
(g) Pollution class III Heavy (as per IEC 91) and as specified in section 2 for all class of
equipment
b. INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
299
GENERAL :
The instrument transformers and accessories shall conform to the latest version of the
standards specified
Current transformers IEC : 44-1 / IS: 2705
Capacitance Voltage transformers
The instrument transformers shall be complete with its terminal box and a common
marshalling box for a set of 3 instrument transformers.
The instrument transformers shall be of with Composite insulators with SF6 gas filled /
Live tank type with all accessories
All the instrument transformer shall be of 50 KA short circuit current rating
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES :
The features and constructional details of instrument transformers shall be in accordance
with requirements stipulated here under:
Bushing / Insulators:
Instrument transformers shall be of 420 kV class, SF6 Gas filled with composite bushings /
Insulators suitable for outdoor service and upright mounting on steel structures.
Instrument transformers shall be hermetically sealed units.
Polarity marks shall indelibly be marked on each instrument transformer and at the lead
terminals at the associated terminal block.
The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC-60376,60376A& 60376B and shall be suitable for use in
the switchgear under operating condition.
Name Plate :
Name plate shall conform to the requirements of IEC incorporating the year of
manufacture. The rated current, extended current rating in case of current transformers
and rated voltage, voltage factor in case of voltage Transformers shall be clearly indicated
on the name plate. The rated thermal current in case of CT shall also be marked on the
name plate.
The intermediate voltage in case of capacitor voltage transformer shall be indicated on
the name plate.
1. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ( 0.2 s class for boundary metering):
Current transformers shall have single primary either ring type, or hair pin type and
suitably designed for bringing out the secondary terminals in a weather proof (IP 55)
terminal box at the bottom. These secondary terminals shall be terminated to stud type
non disconnecting terminal blocks inside the terminal box. In case “Bar primary” inverted
type current transformers are offered the manufacturer will meet following additional
requirements :
The secondaries shall be totally encased in metallic shielding providing a uniform equi-
potential surface for even electric field distribution.
The lowest part of the insulation assembly shall be properly secured to avoid any risk of
damage due to transportation stresses.
The upper part of insulation assembly resting on primary bar shall be properly secured to
avoid any damage during transportation due to relative movement between insulation
assembly & top dome.
Bidder/Manufacturer shall recommend whether any special storage facility is required
for spare CT.
Different ratios specified shall be achieved by secondary taps only and primary
reconnection shall not be accepted.
300
Core lamination shall be of cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel or other equivalent
alloys. The cores used for protection shall produce undistorted secondary current under
transient conditions at all ratios with specified CT parameters.
Facilities shall be provided at terminal blocks in the marshalling box for star delta
formation, short circuiting and grounding of CT secondary terminals.
Current transformer’s guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as
simultaneous for all cores.
For 420kV class CTs, the rated extended primary current of the CTs shall be 120% of rated
primary on all tap ratio. Current transformer, characteristics shall be such as to provide
satisfactory performance of burdens ranging from 25% to 100% of rated burden over a
range of 10% to 100% of rated current in case of metering CTs and up to the accuracy
limit factor / knee point voltage in case of relaying CTs.
The current transformer should be suitable for mounting on lattice support structure in
accordance with stipulations of Section- General Technical Requirement. The required
mounting bolts shall be supplied with the Instrument Transformer.
The CT shall be designed as to achieve the minimum risks of explosion in service.
420kV current transformers shall be suitable for high speed auto reclosing.
2. Capacitor Voltage Transformers:(0.2 class for boundary metering)
420kV Voltage transformers shall be capacitor voltage divider type with electromagnetic
units and shall be suitable for carrier coupling.
Voltage transformers secondaries shall be protected by HRC cartridge type fuses for all
the windings. In addition fuses shall be provided for the protection and metering
windings for fuse monitoring scheme. The secondary terminals of the CVTs shall be
terminated to the stud type non-disconnecting terminal blocks in the individual phase
secondary boxes via the fuse.
CVTs shall be suitable for high frequency (HF) coupling required for power line carrier
communication. Carrier signal must be prevented from flowing into potential
transformer (EMU) circuit by means of a RF choke/reactor suitable for effectively blocking
the carrier signals over the entire carrier frequency range i.e. 40 to 500 KHz. Details of
the arrangement shall be furnished along with the bid. H.F terminal of the CVT shall be
brought out through a suitable bushing and shall be easily accessible for connection to
the coupling filters of the carrier communication equipment, when utilised. Further
earthing link with fastener are to be provided for HF terminal.
The electromagnetic unit comprising compensating reactor, intermediate transformer
and protective and damping devices should have separate terminal box with all the
secondary terminals brought out.
The damping device which should be permanently connected to one of the secondary
windings, should be capable of suppressing the ferroresonance oscillations.
The accuracy of 0.2S on secondary III should be maintained through out the entire burden
range upto 100VA for 400kV kV CVTs on all the windings without any adjustments during
operation.
.A protective surge arrester shall be provided to prevent breakdown of insulation by
incoming surges and to limit abnormal rise of terminal voltage of shunt capacitor /
primary winding, tuning reactor /RF choke etc. due to short circuit in transformer
secondaries.
FOR 420kV CT/CVT

Rated voltage (kV, rms.) : 420
Rated frequency (Hz) : 50
301
No. of poles : 1
Design ambient temperature : 50 deg C
Rated Insulation levels
Full Insulation levels :
between line terminals and ground : + / - 1425 kV peak
Switching impulse withstand Voltage (250 / 2500 micro
Second) dry and wet between line terminals and ground : + / 1050 kV peak
One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage
between line terminals and ground :630 kV rms.
Corona extinction Voltage (kV rms) :320 (min)
Max. radio Interference Voltage for Frequency between
0.5MHz and 2 MHz at 266kV rms :1000 micro volts
:500 for SA
Min Creepage Distance Phase to ground (mm) :10500
Seismic acceleration :0.3 g horizontal
Partial discharge :Not exceeding 10 p C
System neutral Earthing :Effectively earthed
Technical Parameters of Bushings/ Hollow Column Insulators / support insulators
(a) Rated Voltage (kV) :420

(b) Impulse withstand :+/- 1425
voltage (Dry & wet) (kVP)
(c) Switching surge withstand :+ /- 1050
voltage (dry and wet) (kVP)
(d) Power frequency withstand :630
voltage (dry and wet) (kV rms)
(e) Total Creepage(mm) :10500
(f) Insulator shall also meet requirement of IEC-815 for 420kV system, as
applicable having alternate long & short sheds.
(g) Pollution class III Heavy (as per IEC 91) and as specified in section 2 for
all class of equipment
TESTS :
In accordance with the requirements Current and Voltage Transformers should have been
type tested and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IEC : 44-1/IS:2705
and IEC : 186/IS:3156 respectively.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :
420Kv CURRENT TRANSFORMERS :
Rated Primary current 4000-2000 A
Rated short time thermal current 50 kA for 3 Sec.
Rated dynamic current 100 kA (peak)
302
Maximum temperature rise over design ambient As per IEC : 44-1
temperature
One minute power frequency withstand voltage 5 kV
sec. Terminal & earth
Number of terminals All terminals for wiring of control circuits upto
marshalling box plus 20% spare terminals evenly
distributed on all TBs.
Type of insulation Class A
420 KVCurrent transformers shall also comply with requirements of Table-I.
420kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS :
System fault level 50 kA for 3 Sec.
Standard reference range of frequencies for 96% to 102% for protection and
which the accuracies are valid
99% to 101% for measurement
High frequency capacitance for entire carrier Within 80% to 150% of rated capacitance
frequency range
Equivalent series resistance over the entire Less than 40 ohms.
carrier frequency range
Stray capacitance and stray conductance of the As per IEC : 358
LV terminal over entire carrier frequency range
One minute power frequency withstand voltage: 10kV (rms) for exposed terminals and 4kV (rms)
for terminals enclosed in a weather proof box
Between LV (HF) terminal and earth terminal
3kV (rms)
For secondary winding
Maximum temperature rise over design ambient As per IEC: 186
temperature
Number of terminals in control cabinet All terminals for wiring of Control Circuits upto
marshalling box plus 12 terminals exclusively for
Purchaser’s use.
Rated Total Thermal burden (VA) 750
420 KV Voltage Transformers shall also comply with the requirements of Table-IV
REQUIREMENTS OF 420kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Sl.No. Description Requirements
1 Rated voltage primary 400 /_/ 3 kV
2 Type Single phase capacitor voltage transformer
3 No. of secondaries 3
4 Rated voltage factor 1.2 – continuous
1.5 for 30 seconds
5 Capacitance 4400; + 10% ,- 5% Pico farads
6 Rated secondary voltage Secondary – I Secondary – II Secondary – III
(V) 110 / _ /3 110 / _/3 110 / _/3
7 Application Protection Protection Metering
8 Accuracy 3P 3P 0.2
9 Output burden (VA) 50 50 50
303
(Minimum)
c. TECHNICAL SPECIICATION FOR SURGE ARRESTERS

GENERAL:
Scope:
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, shop testing, supply, delivery at site including
unloading, testing and commissioning of 400kV gap less surge arresters required. The Surge
Arresters are required complete with discharge counters, insulating base and all associated
accessories and auxiliaries.
The surge arresters covered in this specification shall conform in general to IEC 60099-4 (1998) or its
latest version and the applicable provisions of IS:3070 (1993) except to the extent modified in the
specification. All accessories, terminal connectors etc. shall conform to relevant standards as
amended to date.
The equipment shall conform to the following standards of latest issue.
a) Application Guide for Metal Oxide :IEEE Std.C62-22
Surge Arrester for AC System 1991
b) Lightning Arresters :IS:3070 (1993)
IEC-60099-4
c) Large hollow porcelain for
use in Electrical installation :IS:5621
d) Tests on hollow insulators for :IEC:60233
use in electrical equipment
e) Method of HV Testing : IS:2071(Part I,II& III)
f) H.V. Test Techniques :IEC-60060, Part 1,2
g) Method of partial discharge :IS:6209
Measurement
h) Partial discharge measurements : IEC-60270 (1981)
IS:3070(Part-III)
i) Artificial pollution testing on :IEC:60099-3(1990)
Surge Arresters IEC:60815(1996)
IEC:60507(1991)
j) Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) :IEC:61000
k) Radio Interference test on high- : IEC:60437(1997)
voltage insulators
l) Electrical equipment for :IEC:61326(2000)
measurement, control and
Laboratory use-EMC requirements
304
m) Recommended practice for hot dip
galvanising of Iron and Steel :IS:2633
n) Terminal connectors :IS:5561
o) Precision and semi-precision
hexagon bolts, screws, nuts &
lock nuts :IS:1364
p) Insulation Coordination : IEC 60071-1,2 (P1-1993, P2-1990)

The Surge arresters are provided to protect the following equipment whose insulation levels
are indicated as under:
Equipment to be Lightning impulse Switching Surge (kVp)
protected (kVp) for 420kV for 420kV system
system
1 2 3
Power transformer + 1300 + 1050
Instrument + 1425 + 1050
transformer
CB/Isolator Phase to + 1425 + 1050
ground
Across open contacts + 1425 (-/+ 240) + 900 (-/+ 345)
The duty cycle of Circuit Breakers taken in this substation shall be 0-0.3 secs-CO-3 minutes-
CO.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
The surge arresters shall be of hermetically sealed units, self supporting construction
suitable for vertical mounting on a galvanised horizontal steel structure /steel tubular plat
form. The surge arresters shall be fitted with pressure relief devices suitable for preventing
shattering of porcelain housing in the event of arrester failure. Arrester housing shall be
manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC:60233/IS:5621. Arresters shall be complete
with insulating bases, fasteners for stacking units together discharge counters with leakage
current meters and terminal connectors. Grading corona control rings, if necessary shall be
provided on each complete arrester pole for proper stress distribution. The terminal
connectors shall be suitable for twin ACSR conductor or Aluminium tube for horizontal or
vertical take off. The terminal pad shall be of high conductivity bronze alloy of copper or
aluminum.
WIRING:
All wiring shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, PVC insulated stranded copper wires.
The minimum size of the standard copper wires used for internal wiring shall be as
follows:-
a) All circuits, except CT, CVT circuits = 2.5 sq. mm.
b) CT, CVT circuits = 4 sq.mm.
For current transformer, terminals with short circuit facilities and earthing-link terminals
of CT and VT circuits, insulated testing sockets shall be provided.
EARTHING:
305
Positive earthing of the metallic enclosures shall be ensured by providing two separate
earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on the earthing pad and secured by
the use of star or self etching washers.
HV-TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
1 Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as perIS:5561 and shall be
suitable for twin MOOSE ACSR conductor.
2 All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
The terminal pads shall be of high conductivity bronze, or copper and shall be plated with
hot flowed electro-tin.
3 No part of a clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick.
4 All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanised confirming to IS:2633.
5 For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum thickness of 2 mm shall
be cast integral with aluminium body.
6 Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium sheets.
7 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
8 Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with requirements
stipulated in IS:5561.
9 All test/checks on terminal connectors shall be as per IS:5561. In addition the
contractor shall carry out an additional test to demonstrate withstand capability of
windload. The test procedure and acceptance norms shall be furnished for owner's
approval.
10 Terminal connectors supplied shall also be suitable to withstand all forces due to
twin MOOSE ACSR jumper of approximately 16/12 mtrs/aluminum pipe . length of
equipment interconnecting bus with 4" aluminium tube as specified.
8.3. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM:
Scope:
Scope covers design, Supply Erection Testing And Commissioning of the direct stroke
lightning protection system covering the entire POWER HOUSE, HM STRUCTURES,
OUTDOOR YARD POWER EVACUATION EQUIPMENT etc. from the direct stroke of
lightning as per applicable Standards.
Standards:
The design of the direct stroke lightning protection system shall be based on a proven
design method as per the applicable Standards/Specifications. The
specifications/authority followed for the design shall be got approved
The following Indian Standards or equivalent of any international standards shall be
followed:-
Protection of buildings and IS:2309:1969
Allied structures against lightning.
Code of Practice for Earthing IS:3043-1987
Indian Electricity Rules.
Assumptions, if any, on which design or the direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP)
offered is based shall be clearly indicated.
Design requirements:
306
Lightning protection system down conductors shall not be connected to other conductors
above ground1 level. Also no intermediate earthing connection shall be made to
lightning arrester, transformer and voltage transformer earthing leads which shall be
directly connected to pipe electrode.
The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic
service ducts and cables.
Dimensioned drawing of Earthing electrode and connections of the same to the direct
stroke lightning protection system shall be furnished & to be got approved prior to
execution.
8.4 TOWERS & STRUCTURES:
Galvanized steel lattice structures for towers of the Power evacuation bay and its
equipment and also the Gantry towers Terminal point is GIS side String insulator to string
the conductors /terminate the Power evacuation lines by APTRANSCO with QUAD Moose
conductor. They shall be designed to with stand the loads required for.
Terminal points for 400kV GIS Switchyard is following. At 400kV outgoing line gantry
Tension insulator at outgoing line gantry is not in scope.- is confirmed
8.5 STATUTORY APPROVALS:

Getting Statutory Approvals from CEIG and Factory Inspector etc., is in the scope of
Contractor including the Fees/expenditures for approvals and any modifications enforced
by the Statutory Authorities whether these are exclusively mentioned in the Tender
specification or not
307
SECTION – IX
1. Technical specifications for SDH Type Optical Line Terminal Equipment (OLTE) with integrated
Access Multiplexer equipment
1.0 Design, manufacture, factory testing before dispatch, packing, supply, installation, testing
and commissioning of SDH type optical line terminal equipment (OLTE) with a capacity of
STM4 upgradable to STM16 with 1+1 path protection at optical level in each direction for
signal transmission on 1310 nm & 1550 nm with Primary Multiplexer, DACS, Tele-
protection equipment and combined NMS for voice, data and protection signaling etc. on
400 KV EHT line sections.
1.1 The digital multiplex equipment shall be designed to operate in electrical high-voltage
networks and shall be suitable for installations in substations with harsh environment and
high electromagnetic interference. It shall be highly reliable and provide secure
communications for real time signals such as VOICE, SCADA, TELEPROTECTION, DATA
including IP/ETHERNET and status/control signals. The equipment offered shall already be
working successfully in telecommunication networks operated by power utilities. It shall
comply with the latest ITU-T recommendations and ETSI standards and be able to be
interconnected with legacy multiplex and other telecommunication equipment.
1.2 It is not the intent of this specification to specify completely herein all details of the
design and construction of the equipment or materials to be supplied or services to be
rendered. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
operation as per latest international standards, in hostile electrical environments
prevailing near extra high voltage grid substations, in absence of any air-conditioning
environment. The purchaser will interpret the meanings of drawing, documents
and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material, which in his
judgment is not in accordance therewith.
1.3 All fiber optic links as specified above shall be implemented by the contractor without
repeaters
In order to meet the link budget requirement, the contractor shall provide all the
necessary equipments only in the end stations . The contractor may provide the optical
amplifier, wave length translator, optical cards or high capacity SDH equipment with
suitable rack/subrack to meet the maximum distance limit . All the provided equipments
shall be monitored by centralized NMS.
The actual fiber cable length may exceed the route lengths on account of extra cable
requirement due to sag, jointing & splicing, approach cabling etc. The exact cable lengths
shall be determined by the contractor during the survey. The same shall be used by the
contractor for final link design during the detailed engineering of the project.
1.4.1 The equipment shall be in line with current practice as followed by Dept. of
Telecommunication (Govt. of India) or by internationally accepted practices for
communication system.
1.4.2 All the tools and testing equipment etc required for installation, testing and
commissioning of the system shall be provided by the bidder and no additional
claim shall be entertained by the purchaser at any stage of the contract.
1.6 Integration: It is the total responsibility of the bidder to integrate the entire supplied
equipment with the existing communication system (PLCC, OLTE, OFC, MUX, EPAX and
RTU etc.) For transmission of speech, real time data the necessary information for
integration will be furnished during engineering stage. However the bidder should supply
any necessary cables, connectors etc required for integration without any additional cost.
308
1.7.1 Training of purchaser staff :
The supplier shall be required to provide facilities for imparting training of putchaser
Engineers for OLTE and associated equipment. An important objective of training is to
increase the ability to control, supervise and carry out maintenance work on plant and
equipment supplied and installed by the contractor.
1.8 CABLING:
ALL SIGNALLING CABLES WITHIN THE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND THE POWER
SUPPLY CABLES ARE PART OF CONTRACTOR’S DELIVERY AND INSTALLATION. SIGNAL
CABLES AND POWER SUPPLY CABLES SHALL BE PLACED APART FROM EACH OTHER
(MINIMUM DISTANCE 150 MM). REDUNDANT CABLES AND CABLES TO REDUNDANT
EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PLACED IN SEPARATE CABLE ROUTES. ALL CONTRACTORS
SUPPLIED INSIDE PLANT CABLES AND CABLE ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED FROM
NON-PVC, FIRE/SMOKE RESISTANT MATERIALS.
WHETHER CALLED FOR SPECIFICALLY OR NOT, ALL ACCESSORIES (ATTENUATORS, PATCH

CARDS, TEST PROBES ETC) REQUIRED FOR NORMAL AND SATISFACTORY OPERATION (AS
DEEMED FIT BY THE PURCHASER) SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE A PART OF THE TENDERERS
BASIC SCOPE OF SUPPLY AND NO CLAIM FOR EXTRA PAYMENT WILL BE ACCEPTED ON
THESE GROUNDS.
1.9 EQUIPMENT SHELF:
AN EQUIPMENT SHELF BE PROVIDED TO HOLD ALL EQUIPMENT MODULES AND SHALL

PROVIDE A BACKPLANE FOR SYSTEM POWER AND INTER MODULE COMMUNICATIONS.
THE SHELF SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING MOUNTED ON A STANDARD EIA 19 INCH RACK.
IF MORE THAN ONE SHELF IS REQUIRED AT ANY SITE, MULTIPLE SHELVES SHALL BE
COMBINED AND SHALL FUNCTION AS ONE INTEGRATED NODE.
2.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF OLTE & HARDWARE

2.1.1 THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MODULAR IN DESIGN, COMPACT AND COMPOSITE
CONSTRUCTION INCLUDING POWER SUPPLY, SWITCHING AND CONTROL UNITS.
2.2 THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FULLY SOLID STATE, FIELD PROVEN AND ADOPT STATE-OF-ART
TECHNOLOGY.
2.3 THE MECHANICAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF EACH UNIT SUB-ASSEMBLY SHALL
BE INHERENTLY ROBUST AND RIGID UNDER ALL CONDITIONS OF OPERATION,
ADJUSTMENT, REPLACEMENT, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT.
2.4 THE EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE SELF COOLING ARRANGEMENT. NO FORCED COOLING
USING FANS ETC. IS ENVISAGED.
2.5 THE EQUIPMENT SHALL OPERATE FROM A NOMINAL 48VDC OR 60VDC BATTERY,
POSITIVE GROUNDED. THE EQUIPMENT SHALL WORK SATISFACTORILY OVER BATTERY
VOLTAGE VARIATIONS OF +20% / –15% (40.8VDC - 72VDC). REDUNDANT POWER-SUPPLY
(1+1 PROTECTION) SHALL BE SUPPORTED. THE EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT DUAL
POWER FEED I.E. THAT TWO POWER SOURCES CAN BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE
EQUIPMENT (TWO CONNECTION POINTS).
2.6 THE PLUG IN UNITS, WHOSE REMOVAL OR INSERTION, WHEN IN OPERATION MIGHT
ENDANGER THE RELIABILITY OR PERFORMANCE OF THE UNITS, SHALL HAVE SUITABLE
PROTECTION.
2.7 ALL IMPORTANT SWITCHES/CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH

SUITABLE SAFEGUARDS SUCH AS INTERLOCK SYSTEM TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL OPERATION
BY THE MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL.
309
2.8 The equipment shall be made vermin proof, protected against dust and insects. The indoor
equipment shall conform to IP52 and outdoor equipment to IS-2147.
2.9 THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE ABLE TO WORK IN SALINE ATMOSPHERE IN COASTAL AREAS
AND SHOULD BE PROTECTED AGAINST CORROSION.
2.10 ALL COMPONENTS SHALL BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE FOR TESTING. SIMILARLY ALL BAYS AND
BAY PANEL WIRING SHALL BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
2.11 SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED FOR WIRING ARE INCLUDED WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE
SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL BE PROVIDED ALONG WITH THE EQUIPMENT.
3.0 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENT.

3.1 EACH SUB-ASSEMBLY SHALL BE CLEARLY MARKED TO SHOW ITS FUNCTION, SCHEMATIC
REFERENCE SO THAT THEY ARE IDENTIFIABLE FROM THE COMPONENT LAYOUT DIAGRAM
IN THE HANDBOOK.
3.2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY IS TO REPLACE FAULTY UNITS AFTER QUICK ANALYSIS OF

MONITORING AND ALARM INDICATIONS AND BUILT-IN TEST EQUIPMENT. THE ACTUAL
REPAIR WILL BE UNDERTAKEN AT SUITABLE CENTRALIZED REPAIR CENTRE. THE
INSTALLATION AT SITE SHALL INVOLVE SIMPLY PLUG - IN CONNECTION ONLY.
3.3 EACH STATION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH ALARM INTERFACE CARD TO TAKE UP TO 8
EXTERNAL ALARMS (SAY AIR CONDITIONED FAILURE ETC.)
3.4 The healthy, unhealthy and change of status condition of the units shall be displayed by
LEDs and also should be seen from the Network Management System (NMS).
4.0 GENERAL
THE FIBER OPTIC EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED UNDER THIS PROJECT SHALL BE BASED ON THE
SYNCHRONOUS DIGITAL HIERARCHY (SDH) TECHNOLOGY. THE SDH SYSTEM SHALL BE
DESIGNED FOR DIGITAL TRANSMISSION USING SINGLE MODE FIBER OPTICS AND SHALL
COMPLY WITH ITU-T G.707. THE TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK SHALL MAINLY USE
FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM INCLUDING OPTICAL SDH EQUIPMENT AND ASSOCIATED
ACCESSORIES.
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AN ULTRA-COMPACT, CARRIER CLASS, AND COST

EFFECTIVE BANDWIDTH PROVISIONING EQUIPMENT DESIGNED TO MANAGE AND DELIVER
SERVICES FROM THE OPTICAL CORE TO THE ACCESS.
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CONFIGURED AS A TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER (TMUX), ADD-

DROP MULTIPLEXER (ADM), AND IN-LINE AMPLIFIER OR AS STAND-ALONE CROSS-
CONNECT.
SDH equipment shall be a STM-4/16 platform, has been envisaged to address the growing
demand for an ultra-compact STM-4/16 Add-drop Multiplexer (ADM) and provide Ethernet-
over-SDH/SONET mapping functions, including Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS)
with Virtual Concatenation (VCAT).
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING INTERFACES—STM-1O/E, STM-4O,

STM-16O, E1/DS1, E3/D3 AND 10/100BASET/X AND GE INTERFACES.
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CONFIGURED IN VARIOUS TOPOLOGIES SUCH AS LINEAR, RING

AND BUS.
THE MULTIPLEXING STRUCTURE OF THE PROPOSED SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL PERMIT THE
EXTRACTION OF INDIVIDUAL CIRCUITS FROM HIGH CAPACITY SYSTEMS HAVING A WHOLE
STM-4 FRAME. 1+1 CROSS CONNECT FACILITY SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ENABLE
INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN DIFFERENT CHANNELS AND NETWORK COMPONENTS. THE
310
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL CONSISTS OF REDUNDANT CROSS CONNECT CARD WITH STM-4
OPTICAL INTERFACES AND INTERFACE SLOTS FOR EQUIPPING E1 AND ETHERNET
INTERFACE MODULES.
THE SDH OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER EQUIPMENT SHALL PERFORM BOTH MULTIPLEXING AND
OPTICAL LINE TERMINAL FUNCTIONS. ALL FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE SDH
MULTIPLEXER EQUIPMENT SHALL BE READILY SOFTWARE CONFIGURABLE TO SUIT
OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF THE FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM.
ALL OPTICAL SDH PORTS SHALL SUPPORT SFPS (SMALL-FACTOR PLUGGABLE UNIT) FOR
SHORT, MEDIUM, LONG AND EXTRA-LONG OPTICAL COMMUNICATION. ALS (AUTOMATIC
LASER SHUT-DOWN) SHALL BE FULLY SUPPORTED.
4.1 SDH EQUIPMENT:
THE RACK MOUNTABLE STM-4 SYSTEM SHALL BE CAPABLE OF OFFERING BOTH DATA AND
TDM AND ETHERNET SERVICES ON A SINGLE PLATFORM.
STM-4 UP-GRADABLE TO STM-16 EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH STM-4 OPTICAL

INTERFACES, N X 63 E1S, N X 8 PORT 10/100 MBIT/S, L2 ETHERNET INTERFACES AND
GIGABIT ETHERNET INTERFACE.
SDH STM-4/16 EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE EQUIPPED WITH 1+1 PROTECTION FOR CROSS
CONNECT & TIMING MODULE. SYSTEM SHOULD PROVIDE STM-4/16 INTERFACES ON EACH
OF THE CROSS CONNECT CARDS CONFIGURABLE AS 1+1 MSP AND SNCP.
THE SDH TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE A NEXT GENERATION OPTICAL SYSTEM

CAPABLE OF TRANSPORTING BOTH CIRCUIT BASED TDM TRAFFIC AS WELL AS PACKET
BASED DATA TRAFFIC AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF BEING CONFIGURABLE IN LINEAR, 1+1
LINEAR AND RING CONFIGURATION
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHELF SHOULD PROVIDE SPARE SLOTS FOR EQUIPPING STM-16
(ELECTRICAL / OPTICAL) INTERFACES IN FUTURE.
SDH STM-4 EQUIPMENT SHALL BE UP-GRADABLE TO STM-16 BY CHANGING THE OPTICAL

INTERFACE (SFP) WITHOUT REPLACING THE COMMON CONTROL CARDS.
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE MULTI-SERVICE PROVISIONING PLATFORM WITH

ADD/DROP, TERMINAL AND CROSS-CONNECT FUNCTIONALITY FOR UNIVERSAL
INSTALLATION AT ALL NETWORK LEVELS AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING
REGENERATION IN THE SAME PLATFORM.
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT GFP –F ENCAPSULATION FOR ETHERNET DATA. IT
SHALL SUPPORT STATUS MESSAGE SCHEME (SSM) FOR SDH TIMING. NETWORK
PROTECTION TIMING SHALL BE AS PER ETSI/ITU
4.2. CROSS CONNECTION CAPABILITY OF THE SDH EQUIPMENT
SDH EQUIPMENT SWITCHING MATRIX SHALL BE PROVIDED IN 1+1 REDUNDANT

CONFIGURATION AND SHALL SUPPORT FOR FULLY NON-BLOCKING CROSS CONNECTIONS:-
A) CROSS-CONNECT CAPABILITY WITH A GRANULARITY OF VC-4, VC-3 AND VC-12 BIT RATE
B) THE CROSS-CONNECTS ARE NON-BLOCKING AND CAN BE CREATED DYNAMICALLY
BETWEEN STM RINGS TERMINATING ON THE SDH NETWORK ELEMENTS.
IT SHOULD ALLOW DIRECT MAPPING OF ANY 2 MBPS INTO ANY STM-4 AGGREGATE.
311
THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH REDUNDANT, DECENTRALIZED CROSS-
CONNECTION FUNCTIONS. THE CROSS-CONNECT CAPACITY SHALL BE AT LEAST 40X
2MBIT/S (I.E. 1200X 64KBIT/S) AND NON-BLOCKING. FOR HIGH-DENSITY APPLICATIONS
THE CROSS-CONNECT CAPACITY SHALL BE UPGRADEABLE UP TO 128X 2MBIT/S WITH A
GRANULARITY OF 64KBIT/S. CROSS-CONNECTION SHALL BE POSSIBLE AT LINE TO LINE,
LINE TO TRIBUTARY, TRIBUTARY TO LINE, TRIBUTARY TO TRIBUTARY.
4.3 OPTICAL AGGREGATE INTERFACES
THE MULTI-SERVICE SDH TRANSPORT SYSTEM SHALL SUPPORT MULTIPLE OPTICAL

INTERFACES IN THE SAME PLATFORM. THE INTERFACE SHOULD BE COMPLIANT WITH ITU-T
G.957 SDH SPECIFICATIONS.
IT SHOULD SUPPORT FOR 1+ 1 MSP ON STM 4/16 LEVEL AND SNCP ON VC-12/VC-3/VC-4
LEVEL.
ACCESS INTERFACES
THE OFFERED SDH STM-4/16 EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT FOLLOWING SERVICE

INTERFACE MODULES:-
A) CROSS-CONNECT AND TIMING AND CONTROL SYSTEM REDUNDANCY CARDS.
B) STM-4 OPTICAL INTERFACE CARD
C) 32X E1ELECTRICAL INTERFACE CARD
D) 8 PORT FE LAYER 2 ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD
4.4 E1 INTERFACE CARD (32XE1/DS1)
THE E1 INTERFACE CARD SHALL PROVIDE LINE INTERFACES TO 32 E1 CHANNELS

RESPECTIVELY IN BOTH ADD AND DROP DIRECTIONS.
THE E1 INTERFACE CARD SHALL HAVE TWO EURO CONNECTORS AT THE FRONT PROVIDING
AN INTERFACE FOR 32 AND 31 E1/DS1 CHANNELS RESPECTIVELY. STATUS AND ACTIVE LEDS
ARE PROVIDED TO INDICATE THE POWER ON AND WORKING STATUS OF THE E1 INTERFACE
CARD.
E1S SHALL BE DRAWN FROM SDH EQPT. ONLY AND PDH EQPT. SHOULD NOT BE USED
BETWEEN SDH EQPT. AND PRIMARY MUX.
4.5 8XFE SWITCHING CARD (STM4 BACKHAUL)
ETHERNET INTERFACE MODULE SHALL PROVIDE 8 LAN PORTS 10/100 BASE-T (RJ-45) AND
TWO (2) SFP SLOTS FOR GE INTERFACES.
ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD SHALL BE A TRIBUTARY INTERFACE CARD, WHICH PROVIDES

LINE INTERFACE TO 8X10/100 MBPS (FE) ETHERNET PORTS. IN ADDITION TO SUPPORTING
EOS APPLICATIONS WITH AN UPLINK BANDWIDTH OF STM-4, THE ETHERNET CARD SHALL
CAPABLE OF SWITCHING AT L2 LEVEL AND DOING TRAFFIC CLASSIFICATION FROM L2 TO L7
LEVEL.
STATUS AND ACTIVE LEDS SHALL INDICATE THE POWER ON AND WORKING STATUS OF THE
ETHERNET INTERFACE CARD.
ETHERNET L2 SERVICES EPL, EVPL, ELAN SERVICES WITH THE FOLLOWING FEATURES SHALL
BE SUPPORTED:
A) IT SHALL SUPPORT AUTO-NEGOTIATION FEATURE.

B) AT LEAST EIGHT 10/100 MBPS TX/FX ETHERNET PORTS
C) IEEE 802.3 FLOW CONTROL
312
D) SUPPORT FOR DYNAMIC PROVISIONING USING LCAS AS PER ITU-T G.7042.
E) VLAN TAGGING AND PRIORITY AS PER 802.1 P/Q
F) ADVANCED LAYER 2 PROTECTION
G) SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL AS PER 802.1D
H) RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL AS PER 802.1 W
I) MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE AS PER 802.1S
J) VLAN, MAC LEARNING AND FORWARDING
4.6 SDH CAPABILITIES
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT 1+1 MSP FUNCTION ON STM-4 INTERFACE. SDH
EQUIPMENT SHALL PROVIDE BIDIRECTIONAL AND UNIDIRECTIONAL SNCP AT VC-12/3/4
LEVELS.
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT GFP-F（ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303）ENCAPSULATION FOR

ETHERNET DATA.
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT VC-12/3/4 - XV VIRTUAL CONCATENATION (ITU-T

G.707/Y.1322)
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT LCAS (ITU-T G.7042) AT VC12/3/4 -XV LEVEL, WHICH
SHALL PROVIDE DYNAMIC BANDWIDTH ADJUSTMENT.
IT SHOULD SUPPORT THE SYNCHRONOUS STATUS MESSAGE SCHEME (SSM) FOR SDH
TIMING
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT DCC TRANSPARENCY FUNCTION. BY USING D1-D3 OR D4-
D12 CHANNELS, SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL TRANSPARENTLY PASS THROUGH THE
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION OF THIRD PARTY NES.
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT EOW INTERFACE USING E1, E2 CHANNELS.
TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FORM EMERGING LASER LIGHT IN THE CASE OF THE FIBER
BREAK, SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT AUTOMATIC LASER SHUTDOWN (ALS) FUNCTION
ACCORDING TO ITU-T G.958 AND ITU-T G.644.
4.7 1+1 PATH PROTECTION
THE EQUIPMENT SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT 64KBIT/S CHANNELS. THE

PROTECTION SHALL BE END TO END FROM ONE INTERFACE (TELEPHONE, DATA,
PROTECTION SIGNALING) TO THE OTHER. IT SHALL SWITCH AUTOMATICALLY FROM THE
MAIN CHANNEL TO THE STANDBY CHANNEL. IT SHALL BE CONFIGURABLE WHETHER THE
SYSTEM SWITCHES BACK TO THE MAIN CHANNEL (REVERSIBLE SWITCHING) OR NOT
(NON-REVERSIBLE).
IF A PATH HAS SWITCHED TO ITS STANDBY ROUTE BECAUSE THE MAIN ROUTE IS
DISTURBED THIS SHALL BE INDICATED WITH AN ALARM. THE SWITCHING SHALL BE DONE
WITHIN THE MULTIPLEXER WITHOUT USING THE NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
4.8 1+1 section protection
THE EQUIPMENT SHALL PROVIDE MEANS TO PROTECT STM-4 (MSP). IT SHALL BE

POSSIBLE TO USE TWO INDEPENDENT LINKS: ONE AS THE MAIN AND THE OTHER AS THE
STANDBY. THE SYSTEM SHALL AUTOMATICALLY SWITCH TO THE STANDBY CONNECTION
AND GENERATE AN ALARM IF THE MAIN CONNECTION IS DISTURBED.
THE SWITCHING SHALL BE DONE WITHIN THE MULTIPLEXER WITHOUT USING THE
NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
4.9 SYNCHRONIZATION AND TIMING

313
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL DERIVE ITS CLOCK FROM THE FOLLOWING SOURCE:
LINE-TIMED MODE: IN THIS MODE, SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL DERIVE ITS CLOCK FROM ANY
ONE OF THE E1/DS1 TRIBUTARIES OR STM- 4/16 (OC-3/12) SIGNALS.
EXTERNALLY TIMED MODE: IN THIS MODE, AN EXTERNAL 2048 KHZ OR 2.048 MBPS SIGNAL
SHALL BE USED AS THE CLOCK SOURCE.
HOLDOVER MODE: IN THIS MODE, SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL USE THE STORED TIMING DATA
TO CONTROL THE OUTPUT FREQUENCY FOR A SHORT DURATION (OF AROUND 24 HRS).
BEYOND THIS IT SHALL USE ITS OWN INTERNAL OSCILLATOR IN A FREE-RUNNING MODE.
4.10 PROTECTION
4.11 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SWITCHING
EQUIPMENT PROTECTION SWITCHING SHALL ACCOMMODATE VARIOUS HARDWARE

FAILURES WHILE THE TRANSPORT FACILITY IS STILL FUNCTIONAL. IN AN EVENT OF
HARDWARE FAILURE, THE HARDWARE SHALL BE SUBSTITUTED WITHOUT AFFECTING THE
TRAFFIC.
4.12 CROSS-CONNECT CARD REDUNDANCY
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL FACILITATE THE CROSS-CONNECT REDUNDANCY BY HAVING

MAIN AND STANDBY CROSS-CONNECT CARDS. SOFTWARE ON EACH CROSS-CONNECT
CARD DECIDES WHICH CROSS-CONNECT CARD IS THE ACTIVE CONTROLLER. THE ACTIVE
CROSS-CONNECT CARD TAKES CONTROL OF ALL THE PROCESSOR BUS SIGNALS ON THE
BACKPLANE. THE PROCESSOR BUS IS SHARED ACROSS ALL THE TRIBUTARY CARDS.
ALL THE TRAFFIC RELATED DEVICES ON EACH CROSS-CONNECT CARD IS ALWAYS UNDER
THE CONTROL OF THE ACTIVE CROSS-CONNECT CARD.
4.13 POWER SUPPLY REDUNDANCY
THE SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE TWO POWER SUPPLIES TO FACILITATE POWER SUPPLY
REDUNDANCY. THE OUTPUT OF BOTH THE POWER SUPPLIES ARE SHORTED TOGETHER ON
THE BACKPLANE AND THEN IN TURN GIVEN TO ALL THE CARDS.
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL BE POWERED FROM DC POWER SOURCES. THE POWER SUPPLY
CARD SHALL SUPPORT -48 V (RANGE –40.8 V TO -72 V) DC POWER.
THERE SHALL BE TWO POWER SUPPLY SLOTS LOCATED ON THE CHASSIS FOR EQUIPPING
THE POWER SUPPLY MODULES.
4.14 PROTECTION AND REDUNDANCY
SDH EQUIPMENT SHALL SUPPORT MULTIPLE LAYER NETWORK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

AND MULTIPLE LAYER PROTECTION ESCALATION. THE NETWORK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
SUPPORTED SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
A) MSP 1+1 PROTECTION AT STM-4/16, UNIDIRECTIONAL OR BI-DIRECTIONAL, REVERTIVE

OR NON-REVERTIVE MODES, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ITU-T G.783/841
B) SNCP AT VC-12, VC-3 AND VC-4 LEVELS, SINGLE ENDED, NON-REVERTIVE AND REVERTIVE
IN COMPLIANCE WITH ITU-T G.783/841.
C) THE SWITCHING TIME FOR ABOVE PROTECTIONS IN CASE OF FAILURE SHALL BE LESS
THAN 50 MILLISECONDS
D) LCAS PROTECTION
314
E) RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (ON CARDS INCORPORATING LAYER 2 SWITCHING
CAPABILITIES), IN COMPLIANCE WITH IEEE 802.1W, SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL SHALL
PREVENT AGAINST LOOPS AT THE ETHERNET LEVEL OF THE NETWORK WHILE PROVIDING
L2 PROTECTION.
THE OPTICAL LINE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (OLTE) SHALL CONVERT ‘AT THE SEND END’ STM-
4 DIGITAL SIGNALS BASED ON THE 2048 KBPS HIERARCHY, INTO OPTICAL SIGNAL FOR
TRANSMISSION OVER AN OPTICAL FIBRE MEDIA AND PERFORM THE RECIPROCAL
FUNCTION ON THE RECEIVE SIDE. SEPARATE FIBRES SHALL BE USED FOR TRANSMIT AND
RECEIVE. TRANSMIT/RECEIVE ON SINGLE FIBRE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
4.15 OLTE SHALL COMPRISE FOLLOWING MODULAR UNITS.
TRANSMIT UNIT
- CODE CONVERTER (TRANSMIT),
- OPTICAL TRANSMITTER,
RECEIVE UNIT
- OPTICAL RECEIVER,
- CODE CONVERTER (RECEIVE),
MISCELLANEOUS UNITS
- ALARM CONTROL UNIT,
- PROTECTION SWITCHING,
- ORDER WIRE UNIT/ SERVICE DATA INTERFACE UNIT
- POWER SUPPLY UNIT.

-
4.16 OPTICAL TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER
THE TYPE OF OPTO-ELECTRONIC DEVICES PROPOSED SHALL BE STATED BY THE TENDERER

AND SHALL BE TO THE APPROVAL OF THE APTRANSCO. DATA CONCERNING THE RELIABILITY
OF THE OPTO-ELECTRONIC DEVICES, ACCELERATED TESTS OF DEVICE LIFE TIME AND MEAN
TIME BETWEEN FAILURE (MTBF) CALCULATIONS ETC SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL.
FULL AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC) SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR THE OPTICAL RECEIVER TO
COVER A WIDE RANGE OF INPUT LEVELS, DUE TO VARIOUS CABLE LENGTHS, AND TO
PROVIDE TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION OF THE DETECTING DEVICE.
THE OUTPUT POWER OF THE TRANSMITTER OPTICAL DEVICE AND OPTICAL POWER AT THE
RECEIVER SHALL BE DESIGNED SUCH AS TO PROVIDE THE SAME MEAN BER IN EACH SECTION
AS SPECIFIED IN THIS TENDER.
4.17 CODE CONVERTER (TRANSMITTER)
THE CODE CONVERTER (TRANSMITTER) SHALL REGENERATE AND EQUALISE THE ITU-T
STANDARD CODED SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM THE DIGITAL MULTIPLEXER EQUIPMENT AND
CONVERT THIS TO BINARY BIT STREAM. OVERHEAD BITS FOR THE SERVICE DATA CHANNEL
SHALL BE INSERTED INTO THE AGGREGATE DATA STREAM BEFORE CONVERSION TO THE
CHOSEN OPTICAL SIGNAL CODE.
4.18 CODE CONVERTER (RECEIVER)
THE CODE CONVERTER (RECEIVER) SHALL CONVERT THE RECEIVED OPTICAL SIGNAL TO
BINARY FORM AND EXTRACT THE OVERHEAD BITS FOR THE SERVICE DATA CHANNEL BEFORE
315
FURTHER CONVERSION TO THE ITU-T STANDARD CODE USED AT THE REMOTE
TRANSMITTER. THE STANDARD CODED SIGNAL SHALL THEN BE PASSED TO THE DIGITAL
MULTIPLEXER EQUIPMENT.
4.19 ALARM CONTROL UNIT
THE OPERATING CONDITIONS AT EACH TERMINAL AND AT EACH REPEATER SHALL BE

MONITORED BY AN ALARM CONTROL UNIT ASSOCIATED WITH THAT EQUIPMENT. THIS
INFORMATION SHALL BE TRANSMITTED TO EACH TERMINAL EQUIPMENT FOR PROCESSING
VIA THE SERVICE DATA CHANNEL. IT SHALL ASCERTAIN ALARM CONDITIONS TO BE
DETECTED AND A COMMAND SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE PROTECTION SWITCHING TO
CHANGEOVER TO THE STAND-BY SYSTEM. THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM FAULTS SHALL CAUSE
LINE SWITCHING TO OCCUR:
- LOSS OF OPTICAL INPUT SIGNAL,

- LOSS OF OPTICAL OUTPUT SIGNAL,
- LOSS OF SYNCHRONISATION,
- EXCESSIVE BIT ERROR RATE.
4.20 PROTECTION SWITCHING
THE OLTE SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH TWO OPTICAL TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER PAIRS (ONE
USED AS NORMAL SYSTEM, THE OTHER AS STAND-BY SYSTEM) CONNECTED TO TWO
DIFFERENT FIBRES ON THE TRANSMISSION SIDE, AND TO ANOTHER TWO ON THE RECEPTION
SIDE.
ON RECEIPT OF A COMMAND FROM THE ALARM CONTROL UNIT, THE PROTECTION

SWITCHING SHALL AUTOMATICALLY TRANSFER ALL TRAFFIC FROM THE NORMAL TO THE
STAND-BY SYSTEM. TRAFFIC SHALL RESUME ON THE NORMAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
WHEN THE FAULT DETECTED BY THE ALARM CONTROL UNIT HAS BEEN CLEARED. PROVISION
SHALL HOWEVER BE MADE TO PERMIT TRAFFIC TO STAY ON THE STAND-BY SYSTEM UNTIL A
FAULT OCCURS ON THE STAND-BY SYSTEM, EVEN IF THE NORMAL SYSTEM IS RESTORED TO A
HEALTHY CONDITION.
PROVISION SHALL ALSO BE MADE FOR TRAFFIC TO BE FORCED SWITCHED BY BYPASSING THE
CONTROL CIRCUIT WITH A MANUALLY OPERATED SWITCH. SWITCH OVER SHALL ALSO BE
POSSIBLE BY A REMOTE COMMAND ISSUED FROM A CENTRALISED FAULT SUPERVISION
SYSTEM.
EQUIPMENT ENTERING THE REDUNDANT STATE SHALL INITIATE ALARM INDICATIONS AND
SHALL ALSO INITIATE THE CHANGEOVER SIGNAL. THE SWITCHING CRITERIA IN THE
AUTOMATIC MODE SHALL BE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING FAULT CONDITIONS BEING
DETECTED WITHIN THE SYSTEM:
- AN ALARM INITIATION SIGNAL (AIS),
- LOSS OF INCOMING SIGNAL (LIS),
- BIT ERROR RATE (BER) > 5 X10-4.
BOTH AIS AND LIS SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS MAJOR FAULT CONDITIONS. THE STATUS OF ALL
SIGNAL PATH SWITCHES SHALL BE INDICATED ON THE EQUIPMENT. SWITCHING SHALL BE
COMPLETED WITHIN 50 MS FROM TIME OF DETECTION OF FAULT CONDITION THAT
INITIATES THE PROTECTION SWITCH TO TIME OF CHANGEOVER OF SIGNAL PATH.
4.21 ENGINEER ORDER WIRE TELEPHONE
IN ORDER TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE OF THE FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AN

ORDER WIRE TELEPHONE CHANNEL SHALL BE PROVIDED. SELECTIVE CALLING, USING DUAL
TONE MULTI-FREQUENCY (DTMF) SIGNALLING, SHALL BE PROVIDED.
316
THE ENGINEER ORDER WIRE TELEPHONE SIGNAL SHALL BE PCM TO PRODUCE DIGITAL
SIGNALS AT 64 KBITS/S. THESE SIGNALS SHALL BE PRESENTED TO THE SERVICE DATA
INTERFACE FOR INCLUSION IN A COMPOSITE SIGNAL TO BE PROCESSED BY THE CODE
CONVERTERS FOR TRANSMISSION IN THE SERVICE DATA CHANNEL.
THIS 64 KBPS CHANNEL SHALL BE OVER AND ABOVE 8MBPS TRANSMISSION CAPACITY OF
THE EQUIPMENT.
4.22 CLOCK SIGNAL:
THE SYSTEM SHALL HAVE ITS OWN INTERNAL CLOCK FOR SYNCHRONISATION PURPOSE.
ALSO IT SHALL HAVE THE CAPABILITY TO REGENERATE CLOCK SIGNAL FROM THE 2 MB
STREAM RECEIVED FROM NEARBY STATION. THE SYSTEM SHALL ALSO ACCEPT EXTERNAL
CLOCK SIGNAL TO BE GIVEN FROM ANY REFERENCE STATION.
THE PRIORITY OF WORKING OF THE CLOCK SIGNALS IS AS BELOW:
1. EXTERNAL CLOCK FROM REFERENCE STATION.

2. CLOCK REGENERATED FROM 2 MB STREAM
3. INTERNAL CLOCK
5.0 DIGITAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME.

DIGITAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME WITH A CAPACITY OF 63 E1S SHALL BE PROVIDED. INITIALLY,
DDF IS TERMINATED WITH 32 E1S (E1 TRIBUTARY CAPACITY) WITH ALL NECESSARY CABLES
AND CONNECTORS BOTH FOR TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER. INTERFACING CABLES FOR 32
E1S SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH CONNECTORS FOR SDH EQUIPMENT SIDE TO INTERFACE
WITH THE MULTIPLEXES OR EXISTING FIBRE OPTIC EQUIPMENT IN APTRANSCO.
ALL SUITABLE CONNECTORS FOR BOTH ENDS ALONG WITH 100 METRES CABLE AND 2
NOS. CRIMPING TOOL SHALL BE SUPPLIED AS MANDATORY SPARE TO TERMINATE SPARE
E1S IN FUTURE.
6.0 SNMP COMPATIBILITY:

THE OFFERED EQUIPMENT UNDER THE PRESENT PROJECT (OLTE, MUX AND DIGITAL TELE-
PROTECTION EQPT.) SHALL BE COMPATIBLE TO SNMP (SIMPLE NETWORK MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL). IT SHALL BE ABLE TO INTEGRATE TO THE THIRD PARTY NETWORK
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. THE SUPPLIER SHALL HANDOVER THE MIB (MANAGEMENT
INFORMATION BASE) FILE OF THE OFFERED EQUIPMENT TO PURCHASER AND SHALL EXTEND
HIS COOPERATION FOR INTEGRATION OF THE EQUIPMENT TO THE 3RD PARTY NETWORK
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DURING THE EXECUTION OF THE PROJECT OR AFTER. THE SUPPLIER
SHALL SHOW DEMONSTRATION ON HOW HE IS GOING TO INTEGRATE HIS EQUIPMENT TO
THE ONE OF THE EXISTING NMS AVAILABLE WITH APTRANSCO. THE BIDDER CAN VIEW THE
EXISTING NMS AT APTRANSCO WITH A PRIOR INTIMATION AND APPROVAL BEFORE
FINALISATION.
7.0 Technical specifications for multiplexer (MUX) equipment
THE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM TO BE OFFERED SHALL COMPRISE OF OPTICAL FIBRE

SYSTEM WHICH IS INTENDED TO BE USED FOR:
- VOICE COMMUNICATION.
- TELE-PROTECTION SIGNALLING.
- DATA TRANSMISSION.
- FACSIMILE COMMUNICATION.
- VIDEO CONFERENCES
317
7.1 MULTIPLEX EQUIPMENT (MUX) PCM:
• THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DESIGNED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-T G.742
AND G.823 RECOMMENDATIONS. SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH OPTICAL INTERFACES FOR
DISTANCE AND DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (IEEEC37.94)
THE 2 MBPS MULTIPLEXER SHALL BE STANDARD PCM MULTIPLEXER, PROVIDING 30 DIGITAL
AND/OR ANALOGUE CHANNELS WITH ASSOCIATED SIGNALLING, IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-
T G.711, G.712, AND G.732 RECOMMENDATIONS. THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED
WITH REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY MODULE. AT EACH STATION THE PCM MUX SHALL BE
PROVIDED SUITABLE FOR 120 CHANNELS SO THAT IN FUTURE THE CHANNEL CAPACITY CAN
BE INCREASED BY JUST INSERTING THE INTERFACE MODULES.
PCM multiplexer should take one clock input of 2 MHz for synchronization and shall able to
give at least one-clock outputs for synchronization of other equipment in a station.
THE EQUIPMENT SHALL SERVE AS THE BASIC SYSTEM FOR THE HIGHER DIGITAL HIERARCHY
LEVELS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-T G.702 RECOMMENDATION. DIGITAL INTERFACES AT 64
KBITS/S AND 2,048 KBITS/S SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-T G.703
RECOMMENDATION.
PCM TRANSMISSION SHALL BE BASED ON A SAMPLING RATE OF 8,000 SAMPLES/S OF EACH

INCOMING VF ELEMENT. THE ENCODING LAW USED SHALL BE A-LAW USING 8 BINARY DIGITS
PER SAMPLE, THUS GENERATING A 64 KBITS/S SIGNAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-T G.711
RECOMMENDATION.
32 CHANNELS OF 64 KBITS/S EACH, TRANSMITTED IN 32 TIME SLOTS OF 8 BITS PER FRAME,

SHALL BUILD UP TO A DIGITAL BIT STREAM OF 2,048 KBITS/S. 30 CHANNELS,
CORRESPONDING TO 30 TIME SLOTS, SHALL BE FOR SPEECH/ DATA CHANNELS. TIME SLOT #
0 SHALL BE USED FOR FRAME ALIGNMENT AND REMOTE SUPERVISION WHILST THE
REMAINING TIMESLOT (TIMESLOT #16) SHALL BE USED FOR CHANNEL ASSOCIATED
TELEPHONE SIGNALLING.
SIGNALLING UNITS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT BOTH SUBSCRIBER AND EXCHANGE ENDS OF THE
SYSTEM FOR PCM LINE WORKING. THE TYPE OF SIGNALLING UNIT SHALL BE AS STATED IN
THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.
THE RATED SUPPLY VOLTAGE SHALL BE 48 TO 60V DC, HOWEVER THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE
ABLE TO WORK IN THE RANGE OF 48 V (-15%. TO +20%)
THE MULTIPLEX AND SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH CIRCUITS TO

DETECT AT LEAST THE FOLLOWING:
- LOSS OF INCOMING SIGNAL (2,048 KBIT/S),
- LOSS OF FRAME ALIGNMENT,
- BIT ERROR RATE (BER) GREATER THAN 10-3,
- ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL (AIS) DETECTION,
- FAILURE OF 64 KBITS/S INTERFACE (SIGNALLING ONLY),
- FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY.
THE SPEECH COMPANDING LAW EMPLOYED IN ENCODING AND DECODING SHALL FOLLOW
THE LOGARITHMIC A-LAW WITH THE VALUE OF A=87.6 AND APPROXIMATED BY 13
SEGMENTS. SINGLE CHANNEL CODE STRUCTURE IS PREFERRED. THE MTBF SHALL BE  105
HOURS AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS. THE TENDERER SHALL INDICATE THE
MTBF AT STANDARD TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS.
318
THE PCM MULTIPLEXERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SAME DISTRIBUTION RACK AS THAT FOR
OLTE.
DIGITAL INTERFACES AT 2,048 KBITS/S SHALL BE PROVIDED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITU-T

G.703 RECOMMENDATION.
SIGNAL BIT RATES SHALL BE 2,048 KBITS/S +/ - 50PPM AND SIGNAL CODE FORMAT SHALL BE
HDB3. THE IMPEDANCE SHALL BE 75 OHM UNBALANCED.
LOSS OF FRAME ALIGNMENT SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO HAVE OCCURRED WHEN 4

CONSECUTIVE FRAME ALIGNMENT SIGNALS ARE INCORRECTLY RECEIVED IN THEIR
PREDICTED POSITIONS. WHEN 3 SUCCESSIVE FRAME ALIGNMENT SIGNALS ARE CORRECTLY
DETECTED, THE SYSTEM MAY BE DEEMED TO HAVE REGAINED FRAME ALIGNMENT.
IN A GIVEN FRAME, THE STATUS OF THE CYCLIC BIT CONTAINED IN THE JUSTIFIABLE DIGIT
TIME SLOT ASSOCIATED WITH A PARTICULAR TRIBUTARY SHALL BE INDICATED BY MEANS OF
3 RELEVANT JUSTIFICATION CONTROL BITS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 1 OF ITU-T G.742
RECOMMENDATION. POSITIVE JUSTIFICATION SHALL BE INDICATED BY THE SIGNAL 111; AND
NO JUSTIFICATION BY THE SIGNAL 000.
THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LIMITS OF JITTERS AT THE 2,048 KBITS/S INTERFACES SHALL BE
IN ACCORDANCE WITH TABLE 1 OF ITU-T G.823 RECOMMENDATION.
WITH THE FOLLOWING INPUT SIGNALS ENCODED IN HDB3 FORMAT, AT A BIT RATE OF 2,048
KBITS/S  50PPM, CONNECTED TO ANY 2,048 KBITS/S INPUT PORT, THE ERROR RATE
INTRODUCED AT THE CORRESPONDING 2,048K BITS/S OUTPUT PORT, SHALL BE LESS 5.10-11 :
- A RATED AGGREGATE SIGNAL
- A REPETITIVE SIGNAL HAVING A BLOCK LENGTH OF 8 BITS,
- AN ALL BINARY ZEROS SIGNAL,
- AN ALL BINARY ONES SIGNAL.
THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL BE MET FOR ALL SIGNAL CONDITIONS ON THE REMAINING 2,048
KBITS/S INPUT PORTS. THE OUTPUT TRIBUTARY BIT RATES OF ALL TRIBUTARY OUTPUTS
SHALL REMAIN WITHIN 2,048 KBITS/S ± 50 PPM WHEN ANY 2,048 KBITS/S INPUT TRIBUTARY
SIGNAL IS LOST.
WITH THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS AT ONE OR MORE INPUT PORTS, THE REMAINING
TRIBUTARIES SHALL CONTINUE TO FUNCTION WITHIN THEIR SPECIFIED LIMITS:
- NO INPUT SIGNAL,
- INPUT SIGNAL OUTSIDE THE LIMITS OF THIS SPECIFICATION,
- REMOVAL OR INSERTION OF ANY OF THE TRIBUTARY CARDS
OTHER THAN THOSE CARDS APPROPRIATE TO THE TRIBUTARY
UNDER TEST.
THE FOLLOWING FAULT CONDITIONS SHALL BE DETECTED AND ALARM INDICATIONS

PROVIDED, IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLAUSE 10 OF ITU-T G.742 RECOMMENDATION:
- FAILURE OF POWER SUPPLY,
- LOSS OF INCOMING, 2,048 KBITS/S TRIBUTARY SYSTEM AT INPUT PORT,
- LOSS OF FRAME ALIGNMENT, ALARM INDICATION SIGNAL (AIS) FROM

REMOTE MULTIPLEX EQUIPMENT.
- BIT ERROR RATE (BER) GREATER THAN 10-3,
319
- FAILURE OF MULTIPLEX-DEMULTIPLEX TIMING,
- FAILURE OF 2,048 KBITS/S AIS CLOCK,
ALL THE E1S SHALL BE DERIVED FROM THE SDH FRAME ONLY AND NO PDH SHALL BE USED.
E1 TRIBUTARY CARD SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE SDH EQPT
ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE OF MODULAR CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLED IN THE SAME

DISTRIBUTION RACK AS OF THE OLTE. THEY SHALL BE WIRED FOR THEIR MAXIMUM
CAPACITY AT 64 KBPS & 2 MBPS LEVEL; FUTURE EXTENSION SHALL BE POSSIBLE BY SIMPLE
FIELD INSTALLATION OF THE APPROPRIATE MODULES.
For testing purpose remote/local loop back at 64 kbps as well as at 2 Mbps shall be possible
by using software. Bidder shall explain how the testing will be carried out by using these
loops.The rated supply voltage shall be 48 to 60 V DC, however the equipment shall be able
to work in the range of (-48 -15% to +20%) V DC. Redundant power supply shall be provided.
THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COMPATIBLE TO THE EXISTING ONE IN ORDER TO CATER FOR
ANY UPGRADING WITHOUT LIMITATION. AT PRESENT 2 MBPS SYSTEM IS ENVISAGED.
SYNCHRONISATION AT 2 MBPS LEVEL WITH EXTERNAL SIGNALLING RECEIVED FROM THE
EXISTING OLTES SHALL BE POSSIBLE.
EQUIPMENT AT EACH END STATION SHALL BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING 60 CHANNELS SO

THAT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT CHANNELS CAN BE INCREASED IN FUTURE BY JUST
INSERTING THE INTERFACING MODULES.
BIDDER SHALL PROVIDE THE FULL CAPACITY TERMINATION FOR UNUSED 2 MBPS SIGNALS AT
EACH STATION WHICH SHALL PROVIDE TRANSPARENT 2 MBPS INTERFACES FOR
TRANSMISSION OF 2 MBPS SIGNAL FROM THESE STATIONS TO OTHER DIRECTIONS.
CONFIGURATION OF MUX EQUIPMENT SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING INTERFACE CARDS

AT EACH STATION:
1. VOICE FREQUENCY MODULES SUITABLE FOR 2 HOT LINES.
2. VOICE FREQUENCY 4W E&M MODULES SUITABLE FOR MIN 16 PORTS
3 .G.703 DATA INTERFACE MODULES SUITABLE FOR MIN 4 PORTS
4. V.35 DATA INTERFACE MODULES SUITABLE FOR MIN 4 PORTS OF N X 64 KBPS
5. V.24 / V.28 DATA INTERFACE MODULE SUITABLE FOR MIN 4 PORTS.
6. V.11 DATA INTERFACE MODULE SUITABLE FOR MIN 4 PORTS
7. EXTERNAL ALARM INTERFACING FOR 8NOS.
7.2 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME
Main Distribution Frame with a capacity of 100 krones for termination of voice and data
circuits shall be provided. Subscriber lines and Trunk lines are to be terminated on the
MDF on one side of the terminal-block with the legend of the terminal connections
clearly indicated in alphanumeric. The MDF shall be provided with individual surge
protection.
KRONE TAG BLOCKS ARE PREFERRED TO BE USED FOR THE MDF. THE SUPPLY OF
RELEVANT WIRE TERMINATING TOOL (KRONE TOOL) SHALL BE SUPPLIED.
ALL THE SUBSCRIBER LINES AND THE TRUNK LINES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SURGE
PROTECTION. INVARIABLY SUITABLE SURGE PROTECTORS IN THE FORM OF GAS
320
DISCHARGE TUBES AND FUSES ARE TO BE PROVIDED TO PROTECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY
OF THE MUX EQUIPMENT FROM THE DAMAGES DUE TO EXTERNAL SURGES /SPIKES.
MINIMUM MAINTENANCE AND FREE WORKABILITY ON THE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE
ENSURED.
8.0 DIGITAL ACCESS CROSS CONNECT SYSTEM

The contractor shall be required to provide digital access cross connect systems (DACS)
capable of switching 16 or more E-1 lines in compliance with the electrical input-output
characteristics provided in Table 8.0. DACS shall be fully compatible with CEPT E-1
tributary standards.
DACSS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT LOCATIONS SPECIFIED IN THE APPENDICES AND SHALL BE

USED TO ESTABLISH AND RECONFIGURE CROSS-CONNECTIONS AT THE TRIBUTARY LEVEL
OF UP TO 480 X 64KB/S CHANNELS. DACS E-1 LINE INTERFACE SHALL BE FULLY CAPABLE
OF ACCESSING EACH E-1 LINE.
WITHIN THE CONTEXT OF THIS SPECIFICATION, SIZING OF DACS SYSTEM IS DEFINED AS 4

X N WHERE N IS THE MAXIMUM SIZE OF THE PORT SWITCHING MATRIX. THUS A DACS
SIZED AS 8 X 16 MEANS THAT 8 E1 PORTS ARE INTERFACED OVER A 16 PORT (E1) MATRIX.
A DACS SYSTEM SHALL CONSIST OF THE SWITCH MATRIX, ALL ROUTING LOGIC AND
TIMING CIRCUITRY FOR INTERNALLY SOURCED, LINE DERIVED OR EXTERNALLY SUPPLIED
NETWORK TIMING AND FULL SOFTWARE SUPPORT.
THE DACSs TO BE PROVIDED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL CONSIST OF AT LEAST A 16

PORT-SWITCHING MATRIX, WITH 16 PORTS EQUIPPED, i.e. 16 X 16 SIZE. THE DACS SHALL
ALSO BE ABLE TO SWITCH THE SIGNALING OF THE VOICE CHANNELS ALONG WITH THE
VOICE CHANNELS. THE DACS SHALL NOT USE, DECREASE OR BLOCK THE SPECIFIED
CAPACITY OF THE SWITCHING MATRIX WHILE SWITCHING THE SIGNALING. THE DACS
SHALL SUPPORT THE CHANNEL ASSOCIATED SIGNALING (CAS) AND COMMON CHANNEL
SIGNALING (CCS) BOTH AS PER ITU-T G. 704.
THE DACS SHALL PROVIDE USER-FRIENDLY CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE.

THE USER SHALL BE ABLE TO OPERATE THE DACS LOCALLY THROUGH CRAFT TERMINAL,
VIA AN RS-232 INTERFACE OR REMOTELY UNDER TMN SUPERVISORY CONTROL.
321
TABLE 8.0
CEPT E-1 Digital Access Cross Connect System
Required Operating Characteristics
E-1 TRUNK CAPACITY: MINIMUM 16-PORT SWITCH MATRIX
MINIMUM 4-PORT I/O PER CARD
TRIBUTARYcAPACITY: 30 X 64 Kbps
COMPATIBILITY: CEPT E-1, CEPT E-1 TRIBUTARY CHANNEL
FRAME DELAY: MINIMUM< 1 FRAME
MINIMUM< 2 FRAMES
E-1 PORT interface: 2.048 Mb/s ± 50 ppm
INTERFACE CODE: HDB3
IMPEDANCE: 75 ohmUNBALANCED (120 BALANCED)
PEAK LEVEL @ 75 ohm: 2.37 volts ± 10%
MAXIMUM INSERTION LOSS: 6 db
SIGNAL WAVEFORM: Per CCITT G.703
FRAME STRUCTURE: Per CCITT G.742
JITTER PERFORMANCE: Per CCITT G.823
SYNCHRONIZATION: INTERNAL, EXTERNAL SOURCE AND SYNCHRONIZED ON

INCOMING E-1
ROUTING: FULLY NON- BLOCKING TRIBUTARY TO/FROM E-1

CHANNEL
ROUTING TABLE CAPACITY:
MINIMUM OF 9 ROUTING TABLES FOR
RECONFIGURATION
SUPERVISORY PORTS: SERIAL COM PORTS
SUPERVISORY PORT INTERFACE: RS-232
INTERFACE: STANDARD ASCII ANSI COMPATIBLE TERMINAL
SUPERVISORY CHANNEL AYNC DATA RATES, SOFTWARE SELECTABLE:
SPEED OF 110-9600 BPS, ODD OR EVEN PARITY 7 OR 8

BITS
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE: -48 VDC
322
8.1 Required DACS Applications
The DACS provided shall be fully capable of implementing standard applications such as “Groom
and Fill”, drop & insert/Bypass, Broad cost and Alternative Routing.
Menus and Reports
DACSs throughout the network shall be required to function as fully integrated subsystems of the
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN).
The DACS software shall provide menu driven management of DACS and shall provide at least the
following:
I. Active Configuration: The user shall be able to modify the current active
configuration.
II. Configuration: The configurations other than the active one shall be listed,
edited, viewed, renamed, deleted and activated. Actions shall be allowed
manually, upon a carrier failure or specified alarm condition, remotely or on a
scheduled basis.
III. Reports: The user shall have selection of pre formatted specific reports and
“Report Options” to be used to select where the next reports will be sent.
IV. Administration: This shall provide the user, options to control, view and maintain
various logs and the DACS Software.
V. Alarms: This shall display Alarm Status on all active ports and shall have an alert
mechanism that readily identifies an alarm event to the user through TMN
(locally as well as remotely). The alarms shall have different colours based on the
importance of the alarm.
323
9.0 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The Network Management System shall be common for primary OLTE, multiplexer and
Digital Tele-protection equipment. The hardware platform shall be PC based. The man
machine interface shall use mouse and window technique. The software of MIB file of
OLTEs, MUX and Digital Tele-protection equipment should be provided to interface with
existing NMS of APTRANSCO and shall be demonstrated by integrating with existing NMS
and to configure from central site as required by APTRANSCO.
The network manager shall be able to address any of the primary multiplexer and second
order multiplexer. The network manager shall have four levels of interaction with
password protection limiting the access to the users. From the software it shall be
possible to program the multiplexers, do the level settings etc without any necessity of
hardware settings. It shall be possible to do the monitoring and configuration of remote
network element from NMS station. The necessary embedded operation channel for the
NMS shall be provided by the bidder. This embedded operation channel shall be in
addition to the engineer order wire mentioned elsewhere in the specification. It shall be
possible to remotely configure the system from the master station upto 64 kbps level
thus obviating the need for any handheld terminals at other stations.
THE NMS PROGRAM SHALL BE BASED ON WINDOWS WITH ITS WELL KNOWN MOUSE
OPERATED “PULL DOWN MENU AND INTERACTIVE COMMUNICATION BOX TECHNOLOGY.
BY USING EMBEDDED DATA CHANNEL IT SHALL BE POSSIBLE TO CONFIGURE ALL
NETWORK ELEMENTS REMOTELY FROM NMS.
THE MAIN OBJECTIVES OF THE NMS SOFTWARE ARE:
• CHECKING THE USER AUTHORIZATION AND ALLOW/DENY ACCESS TO THE USER

• DISPLAY OF THE SW VERSION
• TO BE USED AS A TOOL TO WRITE AND STORE THE CONFIGURATION FILES
• CONTROL THE INTERACTIONS BETWEEN PC AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
• IDENTIFICATION OF PARTICULAR COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
• LOADING THE CONFIGURATION DATA TO THE DATABASE OF THE COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT
• COPYING THE DATABASE OF THE EQUIPMENT AND CONVERT/STORE IT AS A CONFIGURATION
FILE
• ALLOW TEMPORARY CHANGES OF THE CONFIGURATION FOR TEST PURPOSES
• SETTING INDIVIDUAL PARAMETERS
• PRINTING REPORTS
• IT MUST SUPPORT TO INTEGRATE WITH EXISTING NMS AS REQUIRED BY APTRANSCO.
CONFIGURATION FOR LAPTOP PC
Laptop PCs to be supplied under this specification shall meet the following requirements:
Make: IBM / HP / DELL or equivalent
Processor: Intel core-II Duo E8400 (3.00 GHz 6 M cache)
RAM : 4 GB DDR SDRAM
HDD :500GB
Graphics :512MB
DVCD/RW combo, Built in webcam
Serial ports: 2 Nos.
USB ports: 2nos.
Built-in modem,
Intel 10/100 MBPS Ethernet
Ultra NAV (touch pad + track point)
324
Intel pro/ wireless network connection 802.11b/g
Monitor: wide Screen (15”)
Power adaptor: suitable to operate on 230 V AC and with battery backup for four hours.
Carrying case: Good leather carrying case with safety belts.
Thumb memory: : 32 GB
Software: Windows latest, driver software, anti virus s/w.

Laptop PCs shall be loaded with OLTE / MUX equipment software and tested for
monitoring of the equipment. Necessary interfacing cables and connectors shall also be
supplied along with the equipment. However the bidder shall choose the relevant
operating system software suitable for running the equipment software for monitoring
the OLTE / MUX equipment.
10.1 Installation of OFAC:

Installation in cable trenches and on cable trays.
Each OFAC shall be pulled in HDPE pipe of 40 mm diameter and required thickness (mm)
placed in cable trench (separate trays for OFAC’s). There shall be spare HDPE pipes for
the OFAC’s to be decided by the Purchaser. The pulling instructions and minimum-
bending radius shall be indicated by the bidder. The route for laying the OFAC shall be
decided by the contractor in consultation with the Purchaser. Contractor shall terminate
the fibres in Fibre Distribution Panel and OFAC shall be spliced with OPGW at the gantry.
The route for laying the OFAC shall be decided by the contractor in consultation with the
Purchaser.
11. PIGTAIL CORDS.
The pigtail cords will be used for the interconnections of the approach cables with the
respective optical terminal equipment. The optical fibres of the pigtail cords and
approach cable shall be fusion spliced and protected in an approved type terminal box.
On the optical equipment side, FC-PC type optical connectors shall be used. Insertion loss
shall not exceed 0.5 d B and return loss shall not be less than 35 dB.The pigtail cords
with optical connectors, terminal boxes and flexible corrugated tubes are an integral
part of the scope of supply of the UG OFC/OFAC manufacturer. The technical
specifications of the pigtail cord with a connector, terminal box and of the tubing
offered shall be provided with the bid.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
DIGITAL TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT
11.0 PROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT (COMPATIBLE TO FIBRE OPTIC EQUIPMENT)
The protection signalling equipment is intended for providing (i) intertripping (ii) direct tripping
(iii) blocking commands OF HV lines.
DIGITAL PROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WHICH SHALL BE SUITABLE

FOR COMMUNICATING THROUGH FIBRE OPTIC EQUIPMENT.
DIGITAL TELE-PROTECTION COUPLER EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF OFFERED

OLTE & MUX EQUIPMENT FOR THE LINKS AS SPECIFIED IN ITEM NO.1 OF SCHEDULE OF
REQUIREMENT. DIGITAL TELE-PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH VISUAL TRIP
COUNTERS EVENT REGISTERS TO REGISTER EVENTS WHICH CAN BE DOWN LOADED IN TO PC OR
LAPTOP.
THE PROTECTION SIGNALING EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE DIGITAL ELECTRICAL OUTPUT PREFERABLY
V.11 OR V.35 INTERFACE. BIDDER SHALL QUOTE FOR PROTECTION SIGNALING EQUIPMENT
SUITABLE FOR 8 COMMANDS WITH TRIP COUNTERS EVENT REGISTERS IN EACH EQUIPMENT
AND SUITABLE FOR TRANSMISSION ON V.11 OR V.35 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE .
325
HIGH SECURITY AND DEPENDABILITY SHALL BE ENSURED BY THE CONTRACTOR. PROBABILITY OF
FALSE TRIPPING AND FAILURE TO TRIP SHALL BE MINIMUM. CURVES / FIGURES INDICATING
ABOVE-MENTIONED MEASURES SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH THE TENDER PROPOSAL.
IF NOT OTHERWISE STATED ROUTINE AND TYPE TESTS OF THE PROTECTION SIGNALLING
EQUIPMENT SHALL CONSIDER THE IEC RECOMMENDATIONS AND SUGGESTIONS OF THE LATEST
REVISION.
11.1 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION DURING NORMAL OPERATION PROTECTION SIGNALING

EQUIPMENT SHALL TRANSMIT A SECURED GUARD CODE. IN CASE PROTECTION SIGNALING
EQUIPMENT RECEIVES ONE OR MORE COMMAND IT SHOULD INTERRUPTS THE GUARD
CODE AND SHALL TRANSMIT THE COMMAND CODE IN SEQUENCE. THE RECEIVER
RECOGNIZES THE COMMAND CODE AND ABSENCE OF THE GUARD CODE AND GENERATES
THE COMMAND.
ALL SIGNAL PROCESSING I.E. THE GENERATION OF TRIPPING SIGNAL AND THE EVALUATION OF
THE SIGNALS BEING RECEIVED SHALL BE PERFORMED COMPLETELY DIGITALLY BY USING DSP. THE
DIGITAL TECHNIQUES THUS EMPLOYED OBVIATE ANY NEED FOR CALIBRATION.
11.2 LOOP TESTING AN AUTOMATIC LOOP TESTING ROUTINE SHALL CYCLICALLY CHECKS THE
TELE-PROTECTION CHANNEL. THE TEST SIGNAL SHALL BE TRANSMITTED IN THE SAME WAY
AS THE GENUINE TRIPPING SIGNAL SHALL BE RECOGNIZED BY THE RECEIVER AND SHALL BE
REFLECTED BACK TO THE TRANSMITTER. IN CASE TEST SIGNAL DOES NOT REACH THE
TRANSMITTER THE TEST SHOULD BE REPEATED AUTOMATICALLY FOR ATLEAST 5 TRIALS
AND ALARM SHOULD BE GIVEN IN CASE THE TEST STILL FAILS.
IT SHALL ALSO BE POSSIBLE TO INITIATE A LOOP TEST MANUALLY AT ANY STATION BY

PRESSING A BUTTON ON THE FRONT OF THE EQUIPMENT.
INTERNAL TEST ROUTINE SHALL CONTINUOUSLY MONITOR THE AVAILABILITY OF THE

PROTECTION SIGNALING EQUIPMENT.
PROPER TRIPPING SIGNAL SHALL ALWAYS TAKE THE PRIORITY OVER THE TEST PROCEDURE.
THE HIGH SPEED DIGITAL PROTECTION SIGNALING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE DESIGNED AND
PROVIDED WITH FOLLOWING FEATURES.
• SHALL EMPLOY LATEST DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING TECHNOLOGY.

• SHALL BE ABLE TO MONITOR THROUGH SAME NMS OF OLTE & MUX EQUIPMENT. I.E.
DIGITAL TELE-PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE AN INTEGRAL PART OF OLTE & MUX EQPT.
FOR THE OFFERED OLTE & MUX EQUIPMENT IF REQUIRED DIGITAL PROTECTION COUPLER
SHALL ALSO BE INTERFACE WITH OPTICAL INTERFACE TO THE MUX EQUIPMENT.
• SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY UNIT
• SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH OPTICAL INTERFACES FOR DISTANCE AND DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION (IEEEC37.94)
• SHALL WORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH PCM MULTIPLEXER
• IT SHALL COMMUNICATE ON 64KBPS CHANNEL PREFERABLY ON V.11 OR G.703.
• ALL I/OS ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED
• FULL DUPLEX OPERATION
• PERMISSIVE TRIPPING
• DIRECT TRIPPING
• BLOCKING, UNBLOCKING
• AUTO LOOP TEST FACILITY SHALL BE PROVIDED
• SHOULD MEET IEC 834-1 STANDARD
• SHALL PROVIDE AN INTERFACE FACILITY TO CONNECT HANDHELD TERMINAL OR PC FOR
INDICATING STATUS, ALARM MESSAGES, AND TRANSMISSION TIME ETC.
• SHALL HAVE THE ADDRESSING FACILITY
326
• SHALL ABLE TO TRANSMIT UPTO 8 COMMANDS IN ONE 64 KBPS CHANNEL
• TRANSMISSION TIME SHALL BE < 7MS.
• THE TELE PROTECTION EQPT. SHALL BE ABLE TO PROGRAMMED THROUGH HANDHELD
TERMINAL / PC.
• THE TELEPROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL HAVE A VISUAL CONTAINS.
• VISIBLE COUNTERS FOR EACH COMMAND (INPUT/OUTPUT SHOULD BE PROVIDED.
12.0 PROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT DESIGN

THE TELE-PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE OF MODULAR CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL BE AN
INTEGRAL PART OF THE OPTICAL TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER EQPT AND SHALL BE COMPLETELY
SOLID STATE USING SEMICONDUCTORS, MICRO-PROCESSORS AND SELF-SUPERVISION,
PROVIDING ALARMS IN THE CASE OF EQUIPMENT FAILURE (TX / RX), ABSENCE OF THE GUARD
FREQUENCY SIGNAL, POWER SUPPLY FAILURE, ETC.
THE INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE TO THE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BY MEANS OF

RELAYS AND THE INPUT/OUTPUT RACK WIRING SHALL BE CAREFULLY SEGREGATED FROM OTHER
SHELF/CUBICLE WIRING.
THE ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS OF THE PROTECTION INTERFACE SHALL BE FOR 2 KV RMS.
12.1 EACH TELE-PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH REDUNDANT POWER

SUPPLY UNIT.
ALL COMMAND CHANNELS ARE OPERATIONALLY INDEPENDENT FROM EACH OTHER AND
THEY MEET THE FOLLOWING PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS:
❖ EQUIPMENT OPERATING TIME < 6 MS (8 CHANNELS)

❖ PROBABILITY OF MISSING COMMAND PMC (AT BER < 10-3) <10-9
❖ MEAN TIME BETWEEN UNWANTED COMMANDS
(AT TSES< 0.005 % AND TES< 0.1 %) 100000 A
The error control procedure in the 64 kbit/s channel is based on the use of a block code
specifically developed to be used for tele-protection signaling via telecommunication networks
based on the ITU-T recommendations. the error control procedure includes a means to identify
the origin of the incoming 64 kbits / s.
COMMAND-TYPE TELE-PROTECTION APPLICATIONS ARE NORMALLY PLACED IN THREE
CATEGORIES ACCORDING TO THE NATURE OF THE INFORMATION CONVEYED BY THE TELE-
PROTECTION COMMANDS: PERMISSIVE, BLOCKING AND INTER-TRIPPING SCHEMES.
THE TELE-PROTECTION SIGNALING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MANAGED FROM NETWORK

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM OF PRIMARY MULTIPLEXER.
THE TELE-PROTECTION EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TRIP COUNTERS FOR BOTH TX
AND RXCOMMANDS IN THE FORM OF EVENT REGISTER.
Main characteristics:
64 kbit/s interface :
THE 64 KBIT/S INTERFACE MEETS THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ITU-T RECOMMENDATION G.703.
BOTH TIMING MODES, CO-DIRECTIONAL AND CONTRA-DIRECTIONAL, ARE PROVIDED.
Command interfaces:
COMMAND INPUTS:
THE COMMAND INPUTS SHOULD BE GALVANICALLY ISOLATED INPUTS, WHICH GENERATE

INTERNALLY THE OPERATING VOLTAGE FOR THE INPUT CIRCUIT.
327
A) POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS (VIA INTERNAL DC-DC CONVERTER WITH NOMINAL OPERATING
VOLTAGE 24 VDC)
B) OPERATING CURRENT 10 MA
C) WETTING CURRENT 15 MA
COMMAND OUTPUTS :
THE COMMAND OUTPUTS SHOULD BE GALVANICALLY ISOLATED OUTPUTS. EACH OUTPUT HAS
ONE MOS-FET CHANGEOVER CONTACT.
A) NOMINAL OPERATING VOLTAGE 250 VDC OR AC
B) MAXIMUM SWITCHING POWER 100 VA
C) MAXIMUM SWITCHING CURRENT 1 A
Command interface-related requirements:
All interfaces with the protection relay logic comply with the following requirements of IEC 255 /
IEC 834-1.
COMMAND INPUTS:
INSULATION RESISTANCE >100 MOHM (MEASURED AT THE VOLTAGE OF 500 VDC)
a) ISOLATION VOLTAGE TEST VOLTAGE 1 KV AC / 1 MINUTE

b) IMPULSE TEST VOLTAGE 1.2/50 MS 2 KV (DIFFERENTIAL AND COMMON MODE)
c) HIGH FREQUENCY DISTURBANCE TEST 1.0 KV (DIFFERENTIAL MODE)
d) HIGH FREQUENCY DISTURBANCE TEST 2.5 KV (COMMON MODE)
Command outputs:
a) INSULATION RESISTANCE >100 MOHM (MEASURED AT THE VOLTAGE OF 500
VDC)
b) ISOLATION VOLTAGE TEST VOLTAGE 2 KV AC / 1 MINUTE
c) IMPULSE TEST VOLTAGE 1.2/50 MS 2 KV (COMMON MODE)
d) HIGH FREQUENCY DISTURBANCE TEST 2.5 KV (COMMON MODE)
OPERATING VOLTAGES:-20 TO –70 VDC
13.0 Type Testing
TYPE TESTS” SHALL BE DEFINED AS THOSE TESTS WHICH ARE TO BE CARRIED OUT TO PROVE THE
DESIGN, PROCESS OF MANUFACTURE AND GENERAL CONFORMITY OF THE MATERIALS TO THIS
SPECIFICATION. TYPE TESTING SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING:
a) ALL CABLE & EQUIPMENT BEING SUPPLIED SHALL CONFORM TO TYPE TESTS AS
PER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION.
b) THE TEST REPORTS SUBMITTED SHALL BE OF THE TESTS CONDUCTED WITHIN
LAST FIVE (5) YEARS FOR TELECOM EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO THE DATE OF BID
OPENING. IN CASE THE TEST REPORTS ARE OLDER THAN FIVE YEARS (5) FOR
TELECOM EQUIPMENT ON THE DATE OF BID OPENING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL
REPEAT THESE TESTS AT NO EXTRA TO THE PURCHASER.
c) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT, WITHIN 30 DAYS OF CONTRACT AWARD,
COPIES OF TEST REPORTS FOR ALL OF THE TYPE TESTS THAT ARE SPECIFIED IN
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND THAT HAVE PREVIOUSLY (BEFORE CONTRACT AWARD)
BEEN PERFORMED. THESE REPORTS MAY BE ACCEPTED BY THE EMPLOYER ONLY
IF THEY APPLY TO MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT THAT ARE ESSENTIALLY
IDENTICAL TO THOSE DUE TO BE DELIVERED UNDER THE CONTRACT AND ONLY IF
328
TEST PROCEDURES AND PARAMETER VALUES ARE IDENTICAL TO THOSE
SPECIFIED IN THIS SPECIFICATIONS CARRIED OUT AT ACCREDITED LABS AND
WITNESSED BY THIRD PARTY / CUSTOMER’S REPRESENTATIVES.
IN THE EVENT OF ANY DISCREPANCY IN THE TEST REPORTS OR ANY TYPE TESTS
NOT CARRIED OUT, SAME SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BY CONTRACTOR WITHOUT
ANY ADDITIONAL COST IMPLICATION TO THE EMPLOYER.
d) TYPE TESTS SHALL BE CERTIFIED OR PERFORMED BY REPUTED LABORATORIES

USING MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS AND TEST PROCEDURES THAT
HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY THE EMPLOYER. THE TEST PROCEDURES SHALL BE
FORMATTED AS DEFINED IN THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SHALL
INCLUDE A COMPLETE LIST OF THE APPLICABLE REFERENCE STANDARDS AND
SUBMITTED FOR EMPLOYER APPROVAL AT LEAST FOUR (4) WEEKS BEFORE
COMMENCEMENT OF TEST(S). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE EMPLOYER
AT LEAST 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE OF THE PLANNED COMMENCEMENT OF
EACH TYPE TEST.
e) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A DETAILED SCHEDULE FOR PERFORMING ALL
SPECIFIED TYPE TESTS. THESE TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED IN THE PRESENCE OF
A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE EMPLOYER IF REQUIRED.
f) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE THAT ALL TYPE TESTS CAN BE COMPLETED
WITHIN THE TIME SCHEDULE OFFERED IN HIS TECHNICAL PROPOSAL.
g) IN CASE OF FAILURE DURING ANY TYPE TEST, THE SUPPLIER IS EITHER REQUIRED
TO MANUFACTURE A FRESH SAMPLE LOT AND REPEAT ALL TYPE TESTS
SUCCESSFULLY OR REPEAT THAT PARTICULAR TYPE TEST(S) AT LEAST THREE
TIMES SUCCESSFULLY ON THE SAMPLES SELECTED FROM THE ALREADY
MANUFACTURED LOT AT HIS OWN EXPENSES. IN CASE A FRESH LOT IS
MANUFACTURED FOR TESTING THEN THE LOT ALREADY MANUFACTURED SHALL
BE REJECTED.
13.1 TYPE TEST SAMPLES
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL ONLY AFTER THE QUALITY ASSURANCE
PLAN HAS BEEN APPROVED BY THE PURCHASER. THE EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL SHALL BE
MANUFACTURED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN.
13.2 LIST OF TYPE TESTS
THE TYPE TESTING SHALL BE CONDUCTED ON THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT/ITEMS
(a) SDH EQUIPMENT WITH ALL TYPES OF CARDS (OPTICAL CARD, TRIBUTARY CARD
OR ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT AS PART OF REPEATER LESS LINKS)
(b) DROP – INSERT MULTIPLEXER WITH SUBSCRIBER INTERFACE CARD
(c) DACS
(d) APPROACH CABLE
13.3 LIST OF TYPE TEST TO BE CONDUCTED ON TELECOM EQUIPMENT
THE TYPE TESTS FOR SDH EQUIPMENT WITH ALL TYPES OF CARDS, PRIMARY MULTIPLEXER &
DROP INSERT MUX WITH SUBSCRIBER INTERFACE CARD AND DACS ARE DESCRIBED BELOW:
13.3.1 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY TESTS
THE TESTS LISTED BELOW ARE DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068.
a) LOW TEMPERATURE TEST: OPERATION TO SPECIFICATIONS
329
LOW TEMPERATURE TESTS SHALL BE CONDUCTED AS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-1,
TEST METHOD AD, WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
1) TEST DURATION: THE EQUIPMENT IS STARTED UP AS SOON AS THERMAL

EQUILIBRIUM HAS BEEN REACHED AND OPERATED FOR SIXTEEN (16) HOURS.
ITS PERFORMANCE IS CHECKED DURING THE TEST.
2) DEGREE OF SEVERITY: TEST SHALL BE DONE AT 0ºC
3) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: NO DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCE DURING AND

AFTER THE TEST.
(B) LOW TEMPERATURE TEST: OPERATION WITHOUT DAMAGE
LOW TEMPERATURE TESTS SHALL BE CONDUCTED AS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-1,

TEST METHOD AD, WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:

EQUILIBRIUM HAS BEEN REACHED AND OPERATED FOR 72 HOURS. ITS
PERFORMANCE IS CHECKED DURING THE TEST AND AFTER THE TEST AS SOON AS
THE THERMAL EQUILIBRIUM IS REACHED AT THE ROOM TEMPERATURE (POST –
TEST)
2) DEGREE OF SEVERITY: TEST SHALL BE DONE AT - 10ºC
3) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCE IS ALLOWABLE

DURING THE TEST, HOWEVER THERE SHALL BE NO DEGRADATION OF
PERFORMANCE IN THE POST-TEST.
(C) DRY HEAT TEST: OPERATION TO SPECIFICATIONS
DRY HEAT TEST SHALL BE DONE AS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-2, TEST METHOD BD,
WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:

PERFORMANCE IS CHECKED DURING THE TEST.
2) DEGREE OF SEVERITY: AS PER TABLE 13.3.1: OPERATION TO SPECIFICATION
RANGE.
3) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: NO DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCE DURING AND
AFTER THE TEST.
TABLE 13.3.1ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING LIMITS
Temperature Range (UN CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT)
SPECIFICATION 0 TO 45ºC
OPERATION WITHOUT DAMAGE –10 TO 55ºC
SHIPPING/STORAGE –40 TO 60ºC
RELATIVE HUMIDITY, NON-CONDENSING UPTO 90%
ELEVATION:
OPERATING TO 3,000 M
NON-OPERATING TO 10,000 M
330
(D) DRY HEAT TEST: OPERATION WITHOUT DAMAGE
DRY HEAT TESTS SHALL BE DONE AS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-2, TEST METHOD BD,
WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS:
AC DC TELECOM
Sl.No. IMMUNITY TEST CONTROL&SIGNAL PARAmETRES
POWERSUPPLY POWERSUPPLY LINE
1. VOLTAGE FLUCTUATIONS Yes Yes N/A N/A TABLE 11 OF

IEC 60870-2-
2. VOLTAGE DIPS AND Yes Yes N/A N/A 1: 1995 –
INTERRUPTIONS LEVEL : I
3. 100/1300 µs sURGES Yes Yes N/A N/A TABLE 12 OF

IEC 60870-2-
1: 1995
4. 1.2/50 – 8/20 µs sURGES Yes Yes Yes N/A

TABLE 12 OF
5. FASTtRANSIENTbURSTS Yes Yes Yes Yes IEC 60870-2-
1: 1995 –
Level : 4
6. DAMPEDoSCILLATORYwAVES Yes Yes Yes Yes
7. 10/700 µs sURGES N/A N/A N/A Yes
8. ELECTROSTATICdISCHARGE Yes TABLE 13 OF

IEC 60870-2-
1: 1995 –
LEVEL : 4
Yes
9. POWER FREQUENCY
MAGNETIC FIELD TABLE 14 OF
IEC 60870-2-
Yes 1: 1995 –
10 DAMPED OSCILLATORY LEVEL : 4
MAGNETIC FIELD
Yes
11 RADIATED Table 15 of
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD IEC 60870-2-
1: 1995 –
Level : 4
12 POWER FREQUENCY N/A N/A Yes Yes IEC 61000-4-

VOLTAGE ON CONTROL AND 16: 2002-07
SIGNAL LINES – Level : 4
331
13 DC VOLTAGE ON CONTROL N/A N/A Yes N/A IEC 61000-4-
AND SIGNAL LINES 16: 2002-07
– Level : 4

PERFORMANCE IS CHECKED DURING THE TEST AND AFTER THE TEST AS SOON AS
THE THERMAL EQUILIBRIUM IS REACHED AT THE ROOM TEMPERATURE (POST-
TEST).
2) DEGREE OF SEVERITY: TEST SHALL BE DONE AT 55ºC.
3) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: DEGRADATION OF PERFORMANCE IS ALLOWABLE

DURING THE TEST, HOWEVER THERE SHALL BE NO DEGRADATION OF
PERFORMANCE IN THE POST-TEST.
(E) DAMP HEAT TEST
DAMP HEAT TESTING REVEALS AGING WITH RESPECT TO THE HUMIDITY LEVEL AND APPLIES
BASICALLY TO ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT. THIS TEST SHALL BE DONE AS DEFINED IN IEC
PUBLICATION 60068-2-3 WITH THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATION.
(1) TEST DURATION: THE EQUIPMENT IS STARTED UP AS SOON AS THERMAL

EQUILIBRIUM HAS BEEN REACHED AND OPERATED FOR 10 DAYS. ITS
PERFORMANCE IS CHECKED DURING THE TEST.
(2) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: THE EQUIPMENT SHALL MEET THE SPECIFIED

REQUIREMENT AND THERE SHALL NOT BE ANY DEGRADATION IN BER.
(F) TEMPERATURE VARIATION TEST
TEMPERATURE VARIATION TESTING SHALL BE AS PER IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-14 (GRADUAL

VARIATIONS, METHOD NB). THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE POWERED ON AND VARIOUS
PARAMETERS SHALL BE MONITORED CONTINUOUSLY DURING THE TEST PERIOD.
1) NUMBER OF CYCLES REQUIRED IS FIVE (5)
2) THE DEGREE OF SEVERITY: TEMPERATURE TL: 0ºC, TH: AS PER TABLE 5-1
(OPERATION TO SPECIFICATION RANGE)
3) CYCLE DURATION FOR EACH TEMPERATURE IS THREE (3) HOURS.
4) RAMP: 1ºC/MINUTE
5) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA: THE EQUIPMENT SHALL MEET THE SPECIFIED

REQUIREMENT AND THERE SHALL NOT BE ANY DEGRADATION IN BER.
14.0 POWER SUPPLY AND EMI/EMC TESTS
The test procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in IEC 60870-2-1.
(a) Immunity Tests
THE LIST OF IMMUNITY TESTS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW IN TABLE 14.0:
Table 1.3: Recommended Immunity Tests
(b) Emission Tests
332
THE LIST OF EMISSION TESTS ARE SPECIFIED BELOW IN TABLE 14.1
Table 14.1:
Recommended Emission Tests
Sl.N EMISSION tEST AC DC CONTRO TELECO PARAmETRES

o. POWER POWER L& M LINE
SUPPLY SUPPLY SIGNAL
1. LF DISTURBANCE VOLTAGE N/A Yes N/A N/A TABLE 17 OF IEC

CCITT RECOMMENDATION 60870-2-1: 1995 –
P.53 CLASS : B
2. TRANSIENT DISTURBANCE Yes Yes N/A N/A

VOLTAGES
3. RF DISTURBANCE VOLTAGES Yes Yes N/A N/A

CISPR 22
4. RF DISTURBANCE CURRENTS N/A N/A N/A Yes

CISPR 22
5. RF RADIATED FIELDS CISPR 22 Yes
(c) INSULATION WITHSTAND VOLTAGES
AS PER SECTION 6 OF IEC 870-2-1, RECOMMENDED CLASS: VW1 OF TABLE 18.
14.2 Mechanical Tests
(a) MECHANICAL VIBRATION TEST
THE PROCEDURE FOR THIS TEST IS DESCRIBED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-6. THE TESTING
PROCEDURE SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN THE SEQUENCE 8.1 + 8.2.1 + 8.1 AS DESCRIBED IN
DOCUMENT 68-2-6.
FOR THE VIBRATION RESPONSE INVESTIGATION (CLAUSE 8.1 OF 60068-2-6), THE TEST SHALL BE
CARRIED OUT OVER A SWEEP CYCLE UNDER THE SAME CONDITIONS AS FOR THE ENDURANCE
TEST (DESCRIBED LATER), BUT THE VIBRATION AMPLITUDE AND THE SWEEP RATE MAY BE
DECREASED BELOW THESE CONDITIONS SO THAT THE DETERMINATION OF THE RESPONSE
CHARACTERISTICS CAN BE OBTAINED.
THE ENDURANCE TESTS CONDITIONS ARE SELECTED ACCORDING TO THE VIBRATION WITHSTAND
REQUIREMENTS.
TRANSPORTATION TESTS SHALL BE PERFORMED WITH THE EQUIPMENT PACKED ACCORDING TO

THE CONTRACTOR’S SPECIFICATIONS.
(B) SHOCK TEST
THE PROCEDURE OF THIS TEST IS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-27 (EACH TEST) WITH A
SEMI SINUSOIDAL SHAPE (CLAUSE 3.1.1.2).
333
THE RECOMMENDED SEVERITY SHALL BE A = 294 M/S2, D = 18 MS. THREE SHOCKS PER AXIS PER
DIRECTION SHALL BE APPLIED TO THE EQUIPMENT PACKED ACCORDING TO THE CONTRACTOR’S
SPECIFICATIONS.
Or Free Fall Test
THIS TEST COULD BE PERFORMED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO THE SHOCK OR BUMP TEST. THE
PROCEDURE IS DEFINED IN IEC PUBLICATION 60068-2-32. THE EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PACKED
ACCORDING TO THE CONTRACTOR’S SPECIFICATIONS. THE DROP HEIGHT SHALL BE DEFINED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH IEC 68-2-32. THE SURFACE OF THE PACKING CASE WHICH COMES INTO
CONTRACT WITH THE GROUND IS THE SURFACE ON WHICH THE PACKING CASE NORMALLY
RESTS; IF THE PACKING DOES NOT HAVE ANY FEATURES (INSCRIPTION, SPECIAL SHAPE, ETC.)
IDENTIFYING THIS SURFACE, THE TEST IS CARRIED OUT SUCCESSIVELY ON ALL THE SURFACES OF
THE PACKING.
OR BUMP TEST
THIS TEST COULD BE PERFORMED AS AN ALTERNATIVE TO SHOCK TEST OR FREE FALL TEST. THE
PROCEDURE IS DEFINED IN IEC 60068-2-29.
14.3 Type Tests for Fibre Optic Approach Cable
THE TYPE TESTS TO BE CONDUCTED ON THE FIBRE OPTIC APPROACH CABLE ARE LISTED IN TABLE
6-8: TYPE TESTS FOR FIBRE OPTIC APPROACH CABLE. UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE IN THE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OR THE REFERENCED STANDARDS, THE OPTICAL ATTENUATION OF
THE SPECIMEN, MEASURED DURING OR AFTER THE TEST AS APPLICABLE, SHALL NOT INCREASE BY
MORE THAN 0.05DB/KM.
Table 14.3
Type Tests Fibre Optic Approach Cable
S.No. Test Name Test Procedure
1 WATER INGRESS TEST (IEC 60794-1-f5/EIA 455-82B) TEST

DURATION:24 hours
2 SEEPAGE OF FILLING COMPOUND (EIA 455-81A) PRECONDITIONING: 72 hOURS,

TEST DURATION: 24 hOURS
3 CRUSH TEST (IEC 60794-1-E3/EIA 455-41)
4 IMPACT TEST (IEC 60794-1-E4/EIA 455-25A)
5 STRESS STRAIN TEST (EIA 455-33A)
6 CABLE CUT-OFF WAVELENGTH TEST (EIA 455-170)
7 TEMPERATURE CYCLING TEST (IEC 60794-1-F1/EIA-455-3A)-2 cycles
334
14.4 Impact test
THE IMPACT TEST SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH IEC: 60794-1-E4. FIVE SEPARATE
IMPACTS OF 2.0 KG SHALL BE APPLIED AT DIFFERENT LOCATIONS. THE RADIUS OF THE
INTERMEDIATE PIECE SHALL BE THE REEL DRUM RADIUS ± 10%. A PERMANENT OR TEMPORARY
INCREASE IN OPTICAL ATTENUATION VALUE GREATER THAN O.O5 DB/KM SHALL CONSTITUTE
FAILURE.
14.5 Factory Acceptance Tests
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS SHALL BE CONDUCTED ON RANDOMLY SELECTED FINAL

ASSEMBLIES OF ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE SUPPLIED. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING SHALL BE
CARRIED OUT ON APPROACH CABLE AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE FITTING, FODP, SDH
EQUIPMENTS, ASSOCIATED LINE & TRIBUTARY CARDS, TERMINATION EQUIPMENTS
(DROP/INSERT MULTIPLEXER, DACS, ASSOCIATED SUBSCRIBER LINE INTERFACE CARDS ETC),
NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. AND ALL OTHER ITEMS FOR WHICH PRICE HAS BEEN
IDENTIFIED SEPARATELY IN THE BID PRICE SCHEDULES.
MATERIAL SHALL NOT BE SHIPPED TO THE EMPLOYER UNTIL REQUIRED FACTORY TESTS ARE
COMPLETED SATISFACTORILY, ALL VARIANCES ARE RESOLVED, FULL TEST DOCUMENTATION HAS
BEEN DELIVERED TO THE EMPLOYER, AND THE EMPLOYER HAS ISSUED MATERIAL INSPECTION &
CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE (MICC). SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THE FACTORY TESTS AND THE
EMPLOYER APPROVAL TO SHIP SHALL IN NO WAY CONSTITUTE FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE
SYSTEM OR ANY PORTION THEREOF. THESE TESTS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN THE PRESENCE OF
THE EMPLOYER’S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES UNLESS WAIVER FOR WITNESSING BY
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVES IS INTIMATED TO THE CONTRACTOR.
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS SHALL NOT PROCEED WITHOUT THE PRIOR DELIVERY TO AND
APPROVAL OF ALL TEST DOCUMENTATION BY THE PURCHASER.
THE FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST SHALL DEMONSTRATE THE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF

THE EQUIPMENT IN RELATION TO THIS SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVED DRAWINGS AND
DOCUMENTS. LIST OF FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM.
TERMINATION EQUIPMENT SUB-SYSTEM, NMS ARE GIVEN IN SPECIFIED TABLES IN THIS SECTION.
THIS LIST OF FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS SHALL BE SUPPLEMENTED BY THE CONTRACTOR’S
STANDARD FAT TESTING PROGRAM THE FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR THE OTHER ITEMS
SHALL BE PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
AND CONTRACTOR’S (INCLUDING SUB-CONTRACTOR’S/SUPPLIER’S) STANDARD FAT TESTING
PROGRAM. IN GENERAL THE FAT FOR OTHER ITEMS SHALL INCLUDE AT LEAST: PHYSICAL
VERIFICATION, DEMONSTRATION OF TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS, VARIOUS OPERATIONAL
MODES, FUNCTIONAL INTERFACES, ALARMS AND DIAGNOSTICS ETC.
FOR TEST EQUIPMENT & CLOCK, FAT SHALL INCLUDE SUPPLY OF PROPER CALIBRATION
CERTIFICATES, DEMONSTRATION OF SATISFACTORY PERFORMANCE, EVIDENCE OF CORRECT
EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION AND MANUFACTURER’S FINAL INSPECTION CERTIFICATE/REPORT.
14.6 Sampling for FAT
FROM EACH BATCH OF EQUIPMENT PRESENTED BY THE CONTRACTOR FOR FACTORY

ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE EMPLOYER SHALL SELECT RANDOM SAMPLE(S) TO BE TESTED FOR
ACCEPTANCE. UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED, ALL REQUIRED FAT TESTS IN THE APPROVED FAT
PROCEDURES, SHALL BE PERFORMED ON ALL SAMPLES. THE SAMPLING RATE FOR THE FACTORY
ACCEPTANCE TESTS SHALL BE MINIMUM 10% OF THE BATCH SIZE (MINIMUM 1) FOR ALL ITEMS.
THE PHYSICAL VERIFICATION SHALL BE CARRIED OUT ON 100% OF THE OFFERED QUANTITIES AS
PER THE APPROVED FAT PROCEDURE. IN CASE ANY OF THE SELECTED SAMPLES FAIL, THE FAILED
SAMPLE IS REJECTED AND ADDITIONAL 20% SAMPLES SHALL BE SELECTED RANDOMLY AND
TESTED. IN CASE ANY SAMPLE FROM THE ADDITIONAL 20% ALSO FAILS THE ENTIRE BATCH MAY
BE REJECTED. IN CASE A NUMBER OF EQUIPMENTS ARE REQUIRED FOR DEMONSTRATION OF THE
335
PERFORMANCE OF ANY EQUIPMENT DURING FAT, THE SAMPLE SIZE SHALL BE TAKEN AS THAT
NUMBER OF EQUIPMENTS WHICH ARE NECESSARY TO DEMONSTRATE THE PERFORMANCE,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE PERCENTAGE.
THE SAMPLING RATE FOR THE FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS SHALL BE 10% OF THE BATCH SIZE
(MINIMUM2) FOR FO CABLE DRUMS, FODPS JOINT BOX AND OTHER SIMILAR ITEMS.
SINCE FAT TESTING PROVIDES A MEASURE OF ASSURANCE THAT THE QUALITY CONTROL
OBJECTIVES ARE BEING MET DURING ALL PHASES OF PRODUCTION, THE EMPLOYER RESERVES
THE RIGHT TO REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO INVESTIGATE AND REPORT ON THE CAUSE OF FAT
FAILURES AND TO SUSPEND FURTHER TESTING/APPROVALS UNTIL SUCH A REPORT IS MADE AND
REMEDIAL ACTIONS TAKEN, AS APPLICABLE.
PRODUCTION TESTING SHALL MEAN THOSE TESTS, WHICH ARE TO BE CARRIED OUT DURING THE
PROCESS OF PRODUCTION BY THE CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE THE DESIRED QUALITY OF END
PRODUCT TO BE SUPPLIED BY HIM. THE PRODUCTION TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT AT EACH STAGE
OF PRODUCTION SHALL BE BASED ON THE CONTRACTOR’S STANDARD QUALITY ASSURANCE
PROCEDURES. THE PRODUCTION TESTS TO BE CARRIED OUT SHALL BE LISTED IN THE
MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN (MQP), ALONG WITH INFORMATION SUCH AS SAMPLING
FREQUENCY, APPLICABLE STANDARDS, ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA ETC.
The production tests would normally not be witnessed by the employer. However, the employer
reserves the right to do so or inspect the production testing records in accordance with
inspection rights specified for this contract.
14.7 FAT of communication equipments
Table 14.7
Factory Acceptance Testing for Fibre Optic Transmission System
Item Description
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE TO DRS, BOQ, DRAWINGS AND

APPEARANCE OF EQUIPMENT
2 OPTICAL OUTPUT POWER
3 TRANSMITTER LIGHTWAVE SPECTRAL ANALYSIS
4 LOW RECEIVE LEVEL THRESHOLD
5 GENERATION OF BIT ERROR RATE CURVE
6 MEASUREMENT OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL SERVICE CHANNEL PARAMETERS AS WELL

AS SERVICE CHANNEL FUNCTIONALITY
7 PERFORMANCE OF SUPERVISION, ALARM, CRAFTSPERSON INTERFACE, DIAGNOSTICS,

LOOP BACKS ETC.
336
8 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE TEST WHICH INCLUDE: OUTPUT AND INPUT JITTER, BIT ERROR
RATE, PULSE SHAPE, CABLE COMPENSATION, AND LINE RATE TOLERANCE FOR
MULTIPLEXERS
9 AT A MINIMUM TESTS ON ETHERNET INTERFACE SHALL INCLUDE DEMONSTRATION

OF PING TEST, THROUGHPUT TEST, LATENCY TEST, PACKET LOSS TEST AS PER RFC
2544
10 SIMULATION OF FAILURE CONDITIONS AND FAILOVER OF EACH REDUNDANT UNIT
11 VLAN (LAYER-2 SWITCHING) FEATURE TESTING WITH ATLEAST THREE EQUIPMENTS

CONFIGURATION
12 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC (ERPS)
13 TEST OF SPARE CARD SLOTS
14 CHECKS OF POWER SUPPLY/CONVERTER VOLTAGE MARGINS
15 RANDOM INSPECTIONS TO VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF DOCUMENTATION
16 TEST OF SPARE PARTS/MODULES/CARDS AS PER APPLICABLE TESTS
Table 14.8
Factory Acceptance Testing Requirements for Termination equipment (MUX & DACS)
Item Description
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE TO DRS, BOQ, DRAWINGS AND

APPEARANCE OF EQUIPMENT
2 PERFORMANCE OF SUPERVISION, ALARM, CONTROL AND SWITCHING SYSTEMS,

DIAGNOSTICS, LOOPBACKS, CRAFTSPERSON INTERFACE ETC.
3 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE TESTS WHICH INCLUDE: OUTPUT AND INPUT JITTER, BIT ERROR
RATE, PULSE SHAPE, CABLE COMPENSATION, AND LINE RATE TOLERANCE FOR THE
CHANNEL BANKS/LOW – LEVEL MULTIPLEXERS
4 FRAMING, SIGNALING, AND OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE TEST CONSISTENT WITH

APPLICABLE ITU-T REQUIREMENTS
5 SIMULATION OF FAILURE CONDITIONS AND FAILOVER OF EACH REDUNDANT UNIT
337
6 TEST OF SPARE CARD SLOTS AND TEST OF SPARE PARTS/MODULES/CARDS AS PER
APPLICABLE
7 CHECKS OF POWER SUPPLY/CONVERTER VOLTAGE MARGINS AND SHORT CIRCUIT AND

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
8 RANDOM INSPECTIONS TO VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF DOCUMENTATION
Table 14.9
FAT on NMS
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION OF NMS HARDWARE FOR CONFORMANCE TO APPROVED BOQ,

DRS & DRAWING
2 TEST TO DEMONSTRATE THE EXPANSION CAPABILITY OF THE NMS SYSTEM
3 TEST TO DEMONSTRATE THE FUNCTIONALITY OF NORTH BOUND INTERFACE
4 TESTING OF NMS TO DEMONSTRATE PROPER OPERATION OF ALL FUNCTIONS:

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT, PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT, FAULT
MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY MANAGEMENT. ALL STANDARD FEATURES AND
REQUIRED CUSTOMIZATION OF THE NMS SHALL BE DEMONSTRATED FOR PROPER
FUNCTIONING.
338
15.0 Factory acceptance test on approach cable
THE FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR APPROACH CABLE SPECIFIED BELOW IN TABLE 15.0
Table 15.0
Factory Acceptance Tests on approach cable
S.No. Factory Acceptance Test
1 ATTENUATION CO-EFFICIENT AT 1310 NM AND 1550 NM
2 POINT DISCONTINUITIES OF ATTENUATION
3 VISUAL MATERIAL VERIFICATION AND DIMENSIONAL CHECKS AS PER APPROVED

DRS/DRAWINGS
15.1 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST ON SPLICE ENCLOSURE (JOINT BOX)/FODP

The factory acceptance tests for Splice Enclosures/FODP as specified below in Table:
Table 15.1
Factory Acceptance Tests on Splice Enclosures (Joint Box)/FODP
Sl.No. Factory Acceptance Tests
1. VISUAL CHECK OF QUANTITIES AND SPECIFIC COMPONENT NUMBER FOR EACH

COMPONENT OF SPLICE ENCLOSURE/FODP AND DIMENSIONAL CHECKS AGAINST
THE APPROVED DRAWINGS
15.2 Factory Acceptance Tests on test equipment, Pigtail & other items
AS PER TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION AND APPROVED DRS/DOCUMENTS.
15.3 Site Acceptance Tests
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUBMISSION OF ALL EQUIPMENT & TEST
EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED IN THIS CONTRACT FOR SITE TESTS AND INSPECTION AS REQUIRED BY THE
EMPLOYER. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE TESTED ON SITE UNDER THE CONDITIONS IN WHICH IT
WILL NORMALLY OPERATE.
THE TESTS SHALL BE EXHAUSTIVE AND SHALL DEMONSTRATE THAT THE OVERALL PERFORMANCE
OF THE CONTRACT WORKS SATISFIES EVERY REQUIREMENT SPECIFIED. AT A MINIMUM SITE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING REQUIREMENT FOR FO CABLE, TELECOM EQUIPMENT, NMS ETC. IS
OUTLINED IN FOLLOWING SECTION. THIS TESTING SHALL BE SUPPLEMENTED BY THE
CONTRACTOR’S STANDARD INSTALLATION TESTING PROGRAM, WHICH SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH HIS QUALITY PLAN(S) FOR FO & TELECOM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
DURING THE COURSE OF INSTALLATION, THE EMPLOYER SHALL HAVE FULL ACCESS FOR
INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION OF THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK AND FOR CHECKING
WORKMANSHIP AND ACCURACY, AS MAYBE REQUIRED. ON COMPLETION OF THE WORK PRIOR
339
TO COMMISSIONING, ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE TESTED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE
EMPLOYER TO DEMONSTRATE THAT IT IS ENTIRELY SUITABLE FOR COMMERCIAL OPERATION.
15.4 Minimum Site Acceptance Testing Requirement for FO Cabling
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, EVERY SPOOLED FIBRE OPTIC CABLE SEGMENT SHALL BE TESTED FOR
COMPLIANCE WITH THE PRE-SHIPMENT DATA PREVIOUSLY RECEIVED FROM THE
MANUFACTURER. THIS REQUIREMENT WILL PRECLUDE THE INSTALLATION OF OUT OF
SPECIFICATION CABLE SEGMENTS THAT MAY HAVE BEEN DAMAGED DURING SHIPMENT.
15.5 Phase of Site Acceptance Testing
SAT SHALL BE CARRIED OUT LINK FROM FODP TO FODP. SAT MAY BE PERFORMED IN PARTS IN
CASE OF LONG LINKS.
THE TESTS, CHECKS, ADJUSTMENTS ETC CONDUCTED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO OFFERING
THE EQUIPMENT FOR SAT SHALL BE CALLED PRE-SAT ACTIVITIES. THE PRE-SAT ACTIVITIES SHALL
BE DESCRIBED IN THE INSTALLATION MANUALS AND FIELD QUALITY PLAN DOCUMENTS.
15.6 Phases for Site Acceptance Testing for communication equipments
THE SAT SHALL BE COMPLETED IN FOLLOWING PHASES:
15.7 Installation Testing
THE FIELD INSTALLATION TEST SHALL BE PERFORMED FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AT EACH LOCATION.
IF ANY EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN DAMAGED OR FOR ANY REASON DOES NOT COMPLY WITH THIS
SPECIFICATION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL REPLACEMENT PARTS AT ITS
OWN COST AND EXPENSE.
IN THE INSTALLATION TEST REPORT, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE A LIST OF ALL HARDWARE
OR COMPONENTS REPLACED OR CHANGED BETWEEN THE COMPLETION OF FACTORY TESTS AND
THE START OF FIELD TESTS AND SHOW THAT DOCUMENTATION AND SPARE PARTS HAVE BEEN
UPDATED.
THE MINIMAL INSTALLATION TESTING REQUIREMENTS FOR FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION

SUBSYSTEM, TERMINATION EQUIPMENT SUB-SYSTEM AND NMS ARE PROVIDE IN RESPECTIVE
TABLES IN THIS SECTION.
16.0 Link commissioning tests
THE COMMISSIONING TESTS SHALL VERIFY THAT COMMUNICATION CAN BE PERFORMED OVER
THE FIBER OPTIC LINK UNDER TEST. DELAY MEASUREMENT, BIT ERROR MEASUREMENTS &
SERVICE CHANNEL PERFORMANCE MONITORING SHALL BE MADE ON THE FIBRE OPTIC LINKS TO
VERIFY COMPLIANCE WITH DESIGNED LINK PERFORMANCE.
FOR ETHERNET INTERFACE: AT A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING TEST REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE

DEMONSTRATED
AS PER RFC 2544:
A) PING TEST
B) THROUGHPUT TEST
C) LATENCY TEST
D) PACKET LOSS
340
10% OF THE TOTAL LINKS (CHOSEN BY THE EMPLOYER, GENERALLY TO COVER LINKS FROM ALL
CONFIGURATIONS USED) SHALL BE TESTED FOR A DURATION OF 12 HOURS.
REST OF THE LINKS SHALL BE TESTED FOR 1 HOUR IN CASE A LINK DOES NOT MEET THE
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT DURING 1 HOUR, THEN THE DURATION OF THE TEST SHALL BE
INCREASED TO 12 HOURS.
IN CASE ANY LINK DOES NOT MEET THE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS DURING 12 HOUR, THEN
THE CAUSE OF FAILURE SHALL BE INVESTIGATED AND THE TEST SHALL BE REPEATED AFTER
RECTIFYING THE DEFECTS.
THIS PHASE OF TESTING SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND WITNESSED BY THE
EMPLOYER. FIELD ADJUSTMENTS SHALL BE MADE TO MEET ESTABLISHED STANDARD, HOWEVER
IF THE FIELD ADJUSTMENTS FAIL TO CORRECT THE DEFECTS THE EQUIPMENTS MAY BE RETURNED
TO THE CONTRACTOR FOR REPLACEMENT AT HIS OWN EXPENSE. IN CASE ANY ADJUSTMENTS
ARE REQUIRED TO BE MADE DURING THE INTERVAL OF THE TEST THEN THE TEST SHALL BE
REPEATED.
16.1 Integrated Testing
PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF INTEGRATED TESTING THE OVERALL SYSTEM SHALL BE

CONFIGURED AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ALL THE DATA AND VOICE CHANNEL REQUIRED TO
INTERCONNECT THE VARIOUS CONTROL CENTRES AND RTU. THE INTEGRATED TESTING FOR A
BATCH SHALL INCLUDE END-TO-END TESTING OF BACK-BONE NETWORK INCLUDED IN THAT
BATCH. INTEGRATED TESTING FOR LAST BATCH SHALL INCLUDE TESTING OF THE ENTIRE BACK-
BONE. THE INTENT OF INTEGRATED TESTING IS TO DEMONSTRATE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS
OPERATIONAL END TO END UNDER ACTUAL CONDITIONS, THAT ALL VARIANCES IDENTIFIED
DURING FACTORY AND FIELD INSTALLATION AND COMMUNICATIONS TESTING HAVE BEEN
CORRECTED, AND THAT THE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH OTHER
EQUIPMENT AT ALL LOCATIONS. THE INTEGRATED SYSTEM TEST SHALL INCLUDE ALL FIBRE OPTIC
TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT, TERMINATION EQUIPMENT, THE NETWORK MANAGEMENT
SUBSYSTEM AND OTHER COMPONENTS.
AT A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING TESTS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE INTEGRATED TESTING:
1) INSTALLATION TESTING FOR NMS AS PER TABLES BELOW
2) EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION SHALL BE CHECKED TO ESTABLISH THAT IT SUPPORTS

THE CHANNEL ROUTING.
3) END TO END TESTING OF ALL INDIVIDUAL VOICE CIRCUITS ORIGINATING FROM PLCC,
PABX OR PHONES AND TO ESTABLISH PROPER INTERFACING WITH
PLCC/PABX/PHONES AND TO DEMONSTRATE PROPER OPERATION OF CHANNELS
OVER WIDEBAND SYSTEMS. OPERATION SHALL BE CHECKED IN TERMS OF QUALITY
OF VOICE, CALL INITIATION AND CALL TERMINATION PROCESSES. THE
REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED TESTING FOR PLCC/PABX SYSTEM IS DESCRIBED
4) END-TO-END TESTING OF ALL INDIVIDUAL DATA CIRCUITS ORIGINATING FROM PLCC,

RTU AND SCADA FRONT ENDS AND TO ESTABLISH PROPER INTERFACING WITH
PLCC/RTU/FRONT END AND TO DEMONSTRATE PROPER OPERATION OF CHANNELS
OVER WIDEBAND SYSTEMS. OPERATION SHALL BE CHECKED IN TERMS OF
MONITORING OF BER/PACKET LOSS.
5) TESTING OF NMS TO DEMONSTRATE PROPER OPERATION OF ALL FUNCTIONS:

CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT, PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT, FAULT,
341
MANAGEMENT AND SECURITY MANAGEMENT. ALL THE STANDARD FEATURES OF
THE NMS SHALL BE DEMONSTRATED FOR PROPER FUNCTIONING.
6) DEMONSTRATION OF PROTECTION SWITCHING AND SYNCHRONIZATION OF

EQUIPMENT AS PER SYNCHRONIZATION PLAN.
Table 16.1
Fibre Optic Transmission system installation testing
Item Description
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE TO DRAWINGS, RACK ELEVATIONS AND

APPEARANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
2 STATION POWER SUPPLY INPUT AND EQUIPMENT POWER SUPPLY (DC-DC

CONVERTER) OUTPUT VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
3 TERMINAL TRANSCEIVER PERFORMANCE TESTING (TX POWER, TX SPECTRUM, RECEIVE

SIGNAL STRENGTH, CONNECTOR LOSSES ETC.)
4 SERVICE CHANNEL PERFORMANCE
5 CRAFTSPERSON INTERFACE, ALARM AND CONTROL FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE
6 RACK AND LOCAL ALARMS: NO ALARMS SHALL BE PRESENT AND ALL ALARMS SHALL
BE DEMONSTRATED TO BE FUNCTIONAL
7 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERFACE AND SUPERVISION PERFORMANCE
8 CORRECT CONFIGURATION, LEVEL SETTING & ADJUSTMENTS AND TERMINATION OF

INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACES
9 PROPER ESTABLISHMENT OF SAFETY AND SIGNALING EARTHING SYSTEM AND

RESISTANCE TO GROUND TO BE CHECKED.
10 SIMULATION OF FAILURE CONDITIONS AND FAILOVER OF PROTECTED COMPONENTS
Table 16.2
Termination equipment sub-system Installation testing
Item Description
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE TO DRAWINGS, RACK ELEVATIONS

AND APPEARANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
342
2 POWER SUPPLY/CONVERTER VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS
3 MULDEM PERFORMANCE TESTING
4 CRAFTSPERSON INTERFACE, ALARM AND CONTROL FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE
5 RACK AND LOCAL ALARMS
6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT INTERFACE AND SUPERVISION PERFORMANCE
7 CHANNEL PERFORMANCE
8 SAFETY AND SIGNALING EARTHING SYSTEM
9 SIMULATION OF FAILURE CONDITIONS AND FAILOVER OF PROTECTED

COMPONENTS
Table 16.3
NMS Installation Testing
Item Description
1 PHYSICAL INSPECTION FOR CONFORMANCE TO DRAWINGS, RACK ELEVATIONS AND

APPEARANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND CABLING
2 WORK STATION HARDWARE INVENTORY, CONFIGURATION AND CHARACTERISTICS
3 DEMONSTRATION OF PROPER OPERATION OF ALL HARDWARE, INCLUDING

WORKSTATIONS PERIPHERALS
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR

DIGITAL TELEPROTECTION COUPLER (DTPC) EQUIPMENT:
1. Make &Model :
2. Commands capacity :
3. Compatible to Optical Equipment : Yes / No
4. Type of Command Input Interfacing :
5. Type of Command output Interfacing:
6. No. of commands capability :
343
7. Type of Trip counters (event registers) :
8. Power Supply redundancy : Yes / No
9. Operating time for Protection couplers:
10 Interfacing through Potential free contacts: Yes / No
11 Monitoring through MUX NMS for the DTPCs offered.

12 Whether the offered DTPCs are an integral part of OLTE/MUX eqpt.
13 Visible counters for each command (Input/Output) provided : Yes/No.
Signature of the BIDDer
344
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR OPTICAL LINE
TERMINATION EQUIPMENT (OLTE) SDH STM-4

Manufacturer:
Model:
S.No Technical parameter Unit Particulars
1. CAPACITY MBPS
AGGREGATE BIT-RATE: NXE1
CEPT E-1 PORTS: NX10/100 ETHERNET

PORTS
2. CROSS CONNECT REDUNDANCY YES / NO
3 CONTROL UNIT REDUNDANCY YES / NO
4. PROTECTION
OLTE = 1:1 APS YES / NO
E-1 PORTS = 1:1 APS
5. UNPROTECTED SYSTEM GAIN

FOR
BER 10-3 : DBM
BER 10-6:
6. 1 + 1 APS SYSTEM GAIN FOR
BER 10-3: DBM
BER 10-6:
7. MTBF
UNPROTECTED: HOURS
1+1APS PROTECTED:
8. CODE FORMAT:
9. LIST OPTICAL COUPLING

OPTIONS:
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER:
10. SOURCE (LED OR LASER)
11. SOURCE WAVELENGTH: NM
12. SOURCE SPECTRAL WIDTH: NM
13. MEAN LAUNCHED POWER
MAXIMUM: DBM
345
NOMINAL:
14. LAUNCH POWER DURING DBM

SAFETY
POWER-DOWN DUE TO FIBRE

BREAK:
15. STABILITY (NOMINAL POWER %

VARIATION DUE TO
TEMPERATURE AND/OR
BIASING):
16. SOURCE RISE TIME:
17. SOURCE ESTIMATED LIFE SPAN: HOURS
18. SOURCE EXTINCTION RATIO:
19. LOW POWER ALARM
THRESHOLD:
FIELD ADJUSTABLE
optical receiver:
20. NOMINAL RECEIVE SIGNAL DBM
STRENGTH:
21 RECEIVER THRESHOLD DBM
BER 10-6:
BER 10-9:
22 RECEIVER OVERLOAD LIMIT: DBM
23 SPECTRAL BANDWIDTH (3 DB NM
POINT):
24 DIGITAL BANDWIDTH: MBPS
25 SIGNAL-TO-NOISE
@ CENTER WAVELENGTH:
@ 3 DB POINTS:
26 AGC RANGE:
SERVICE CHANNELS AND ORDER WIRE UNIT ENGINEERING ORDERWIRE
27 OMNIBUS CALLING AVAILABLE YES/NO
DESCRIBE:
28 SELECTED STATION CALLING YES/NO

AVAILABLE?
DESCRIBE:
346
29 SIGNALLING SCHEME DESCRIBE:
30 TX/RX LEVEL DBM
31 SPEECH CODING METHOD & BIT KBIT/S

RATE
31 DISTORTION: S/N
NOISE PERFORMANCE:
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS for Multiplexer

VOICE CHANNELS
1 ARE SERVICE CHANNEL YES/NO

REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFIED MET?
2 NO. OF VF CHANNELS: EA
3 PASS BAND: KHZ
4 SUBSCRIBER SIDE INTERFACE:
5 INPUT & OUTPUT LEVEL DBM
6 IDLE CHANNEL NOISE DBMOP
7 DISTORTION:
Data and Supervisory Channel
8 NO OF DATA CHANNELS: EA
9 INTERFACES/CONNECTORS:
10 DATA RATES: KBPS
347
ELECTRICAL INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACES
11 LIST ITU-T STANDARDS IN

COMPLIANCE WITH:
12 TRIBUTARY BIT RATE (NOMINAL): MBIT/S
13 TOLERANCE IN BIT RATE: PPM
14 LINE CODE:
15 NO. OF PORTS:
16 IMPEDANCE OF COAX CABLE USED OHMS

FOR
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT:
17 TYPE OF CONNECTOR
18 INPUT JITTER ACCEPTANCE UI (P-P)
100 HZ TO 10 KHZ:
10 KHZ TO 800 KHZ:
19 MAXIMUM OUTPUT JITTER IN THE UI (P-P)

ABSENCE
OF I/P JITTER
100 HZ TO 10 KHZ:
10KHZ TO 800 KHZ:
UI (P-P)
20 JITTER TRANSFER CHARACTERISTIC:
OUTPUT PORT
21 LINE IMPEDANCE
BALANCED:
UNBALANCED:
348
22 TEST LOAD IMPEDANCE
(UNBALANCED):
23 PEAK PULSE AMPLITUDE V DC
(NOMINAL + TOLERANCE):
24 PULSE WIDTH NS
(NOMINAL + TOLERANCE):
25 RATIO OF +VE & -VE PULSES AT THE
CENTER OF A PULSE INTERVAL
26 RATIO OF WIDTH OF +IVE
& -IVE PULSES AT NOMINAL HALF
AMPLITUDE
27 MAXIMUM INSERTION LOSS DB
INPUT PORT
28 ATTENUATION CHAR. OF INTER-
CONNECTING CABLE FOR DIGITAL

SIGNAL PRESENTED AT INPUT PORT
29 RETURN LOSS (AT 1.024 MHZ) DB
30 ADMISSIBLE I/P SIGNAL DB

ATTENUATION
31 CABLE LOSS EQUALIZATION RANGE DB
32 MAXIMUM INSERTION LOSS DB
PROTECTION SWITCHING
Manufacturer:
MODEL NAME :

1 SWITCHING MODES AVAILABLE Yes/No
AUTO?
MANUAL?
REMOTE/NETWORK MANAGEMENT?
2 SWITCHING PRIORITY:
3 TX SWITCHOVER & SWITCHBACK CRITERIA:
4 RX SWITCHOVER & SWITCHBACK CRITERIA:
349
5 INBUILT MUX (IF APPLICABLE) SWITCHOVER &
SWITCHBACK CRITERIA:
6 SWITCH OPTION MODE & STATUS

INDICATORS:
MECHANICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS
7 NUMBER OF CHASSIS (INCLUDING. DC/DC
CONVERTERS, O/W MULDEM ETC.,)

REQUIRED
FOR UNPROTECTED TERMINAL:
I: 1 PROTECTED TERMINAL
8 CHASSIS DIMENSIONS (L *W*H): CM
9 CHASSIS WEIGHT: KG
10 CHASSIS MOUNTING OPTIONS:
11 CHASSIS CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS M
TOP * BOTTOM * SIDES:
FRONT ACCESS:
REAR ACCESS:
12 CHASSIS COLOUR AND FINISH
13 RACK OPTIONS AVAILABLE
19" ETSI? YES/NO
SLIM RACK? YES/NO
OTHERS (SPECIFY)? YES/NO
14 PROTECTION CLASS (IP CLASS):
15 RACK COLOUR AND FINISH:
16 TEMPERATURE RANGE C
GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE:
350
OPERATION WITHOUT DAMAGE:
STORAGE/ TRANSPORT:
17 RELATIVE HUMIDITY %
MINIMUM:
MAXIMUM:
18 ALTITUDE M
INSTALLED:
TRANSPORT/STORAGE:
19 DESCRIBE VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS:
20 DESCRIBE DUST PROOFING PROVISIONS:
21 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (LIST

STANDARDS & SEVERITY LEVELS)
POWER supply unit (dc/dc converter)
Manufacturer:
Model name :
1. NOMINAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE: VDC
2. POWER SUPPLY VARIATION VDC
GUARANTEED PERFORMANCE:
OPERATION WITHOUT DAMAGE:
351
3. POLARITY:
+/-
4. POWER SUPPLY REDUNDANCY YES/NO
5. LIST DERIVED DC VOLTAGES: VDC
TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION (FULLY WATT

EQUIPPED INCL. SERVICE CHANNELS)
UNPROTECTED TERMINAL: 1+1
PROTECTED TERMINAL:
6. 1+1 APS PROTECTION PROVIDED? YES/NO
7. MTBF OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT: HOURS
8. ULTIMATE POWER DELIVERY CAPACITY WATT
9. ULTIMATE POWER DELIVERY CAPACITY WATT
10. ARE THE FOLLOWING PROTECTIONS YES
PROVIDED
OVER VOLTAGE?
UNDER VOLTAGE?
OVERLOAD?
REVERSE POLARITY?
OTHER(SPECIFY)?
Main Distribution Frames

Manufacturer:
Model name :

1. DIMENSIONS
HEIGHT: CM
WIDTH: CM
DEPTH: CM
352
2. WEIGHT; KG
3. COLOUR AND FINISH:
4. METHOD(S) OF MOUNTING
5. CLEARANCES REQUIRED FOR

INSTALLATION:
MTR.
CEILING:
MTR.
FROM:
MTR.
REAR:
6. CABLE ENTRY(S):
7. CABLE GLANDING:
8. FRAME MATERIAL & GUAGE:
9. LOCKING ARRANGEMENT
10. FRAME CAPACITY:
NUMBER OF HORIZONTAL ROWS:
NUMBER OF VERTICAL ROWS: EACH
NUMBER OF TERMINAL BLOCKS PER ROW:
11. PROVIDE DETAILS ON INSTALLATION, CABLING, CROSS CONNECTIONS AND PATCHING
FACILITIES (IF ANY)

Digital Distribution Frames
Manufacturer:
Model name :
1. DIMENSIONS
HEIGHT: CM
WIDTH: CM
DEPTH: CM
2. WEIGHT; KG
353
3. COLOUR AND FINISH:
4. METHOD(S) OF MOUNTING
5. CLEARANCES REQUIRED FOR

INSTALLATION:
MTR.
CEILING:
MTR.
FROM:
MTR.
REAR:
6. CABLE ENTRY(S):
7. CABLE GLANDING:
8. FRAME MATERIAL & GUAGE:
9. LOCKING ARRANGEMENT
10. FRAME CAPACITY: (NO. OF CO-AXIAL EACH

PANELS)
11. CO-AXIAL PANEL CAPACITY: EACH
(NUMBER OF PCM SYSTEMS)
12 NO. OF E1S TERMINATION CAPACITY
13. CO-AXIAL CONNECTORS:
TYPE:
CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE:
RETURN LOSS (UP TO 90 MHZ): DB
TRANSFER IMPEDANCE:
TEST VOLTAGE (1 MINUTE): V
MAXIMUM CURRENT RATING: A
PROVIDE DETAILS ON INSTALLATION, CABLING, CROSS CONNECTIONS AND
PATCHING FACILITIES (IF ANY).
BILL OF MATERIAL FOR IMPORTANT CARDS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
STM-4 OPTICAL LINE CARDS

1
FOR 1+ 1
2 CONTROL UNIT CARDS
3 CROSS CONNECT CARDS
4 POWER SUPPLY CARDS
354
5 32 X E1 TRIB. CARDS
6 8 X 10/100 MBPS ETH CARDS
7 4W E&M CARDS
8 HOT LINE CARDS
9 V.24 I/F CARDS
10 V.11 I/F CARDS
11 G.703 I/F CARDS
12 V.35 I/F CARDS
13 CHANNEL I/F CARD FOR DTPCS
14 EXT. ALARM I/F CARDS
ANY OTHER CARDS NEEDED TO

15
MEET SPEC. REQUIREMENT.
List of mandatory spares for OLTE / MUX
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
1 STM-4 OPTICAL LINE CARDS FOR1+ 1 2
2 CONTROL UNIT CARDS 2
3 CROSS CONNECT CARDS 2
4 POWER SUPPLY CARDS 2
5 32 X E1 TRIB. CARDS 2
6 8 X 10/100 MBPS ETH CARDS 2
7 4W E&M CARDS 2
ANY OTHER CARDS NEEDED TO MEET SPEC.

8
REQUIREMENT AS A MANDATORY SPARE
List of mandatory spares for Digital Teleprotection equipment
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
1. CONTROL UNIT CARDS 2
2. POWER SUPPLY CARDS 2
3. CHANNEL INTERFACE CARD. 2
355
ANY OTHER CARDS NEEDED TO MEET SPEC.
4
REQUIREMENT AS A MANDATORY SPARE
356
SECTION – X
EPAX (with E1 cards)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR EPAX& ELECTRONIC PUSH BUTTON TELEPHONES :
1. SCOPE:
This specification covers design, manufacture, testing, packing, forwarding and delivery FOR
destination of Electronic Private Automatic Exchanges and Electronic push button
telephones.
1.1. The EPAX shall support a capacity of 128 universal ports, which can be
programmed to the 4W &2W E&M trunks (both conventional & PLCC version), 2W
Loop interrupt trunks and 2W subscribers. The EPAXs shall be supplied fully wired
and equipped for all 128 universal ports as follows:
E&M trunks (PLCC version) : 16

Subscriber lines : 16
1.2 The E&M trunk requires 2 wires for signaling E & M and 4 wires for Tx/Rx speech. The
subscriber line supports 2-wire loop signaling.
1.3 The EPAX should support both pulse and DTMF signaling and compatible with the existing
switching equipment in the system.
1.4 The CPU card and PSU cards shall be duplicated for redundancy with hot switchover.In the
event of the failure of one or both of the cards, the stand-by card shall take over the
functioning of the EPAX with out any interruption.
1.5 The EPAX should support 3 Nos E1 channel cards.
1.6 The Electronic Push Button Telephones are intended to be connected to the EPAX for
providing speech on dialing network in the PLCC system provided on the 400 kV, 220 kV
and 132 kV transmission lines.
1.7 The telephones shall support dialing on 2-wire loop mode.
2. STANDARDS:
2.1. As there are no known IS standards, the EPAX and telephones proposed for purchase as per
clause 7.1.0 shall conform to the relevant CCITT recommendation and ITDs TEC
specification including latest revisions, amendments / changes adopted and published as
detailed below:
357
The EPAX and Telephones shall however be tested thoroughly for the EMC/EMI
compatibility as per the IS standards mentioned below:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Standards Title
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EPAX
TEC Specn.G/PBX TEC specification approved by DoT
-01/01/May'90. Electronic Push Button Telephones
TEC Specn.G/TEL- TEC Specification approved by DoT
01-02/June'96
IS 6873 Series Methods of measurement of Electromagnetic

interference from various electrical disturbance
IEC 60255-21-1-1988 Vibration tests (sinusoidal)
IEC 255-21-2-1988 Shock and bump tests.
IEC 60255-22-1-1988 1 MHz burst disturbance test.
IEC 60255-22-2-1996 Electrostatic discharge tests
IEC 60255-22-3-2000 Radiated electromagentic field disturbance tests.
IEC 255-22-4-1992 Fast Transient Disturbance Test
IEC 60870-(P1-P6). 1984-2000 Telecontrol Equipment And System
EN 55022 Radiated emission & conducted emission
CISPR Publication 22 (class A)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
358
S. No. Parameter Description
1 Technology (Type) PCM / TDM with 32 bit microprocessor based digital

technology Electronic Private Automatic Telephone
Exchange (EPAX) on E & M signaling and DC loop signaling
to work with PLC Communication System.
2 Control Stored Programme Control (SPC)
3 Back-Up Memory Flash ROM Based
4 System Capacity 128 Universal Ports Programmable to E & M, Loop Interrupt
Trunks and Subscribers.
Required capacity of E & M Trunks : 16
E & M Trunks / Subscribers Subscriber Lines : 16
5 Configuration Universal Slots for Extension / Trunk Interface
6 Priority Facility Shall be provided as per Clause 7.5.1.9
7 Communication Links 100 % Non-Blocking
8 Architectural Design Distributed Design
9 System Modularity Easy expansion by adding Modules
10 Approvals Required TEC with ISDN, BRI and PRI
11 Trunk Interface 4W / 2W E & M Interface with LED indication with DP /
DTMF E1 / R2 (2Mbps Digital Link) with BNC connector
VoIP Interface
CO Trunk Lines
ISDN BRI & PRI Trunk Lines
12 Alarm On Indication Self-diagnostics with alarm on fault condition shall be

provided.
13 Protection All the Trunk Lines and Subscriber lines shall be provided
with Surge Arresters on the MDF
14 Extension Interface Station Interface for normal analog PBT
Digital Extension Interface for Key Phones
Hybrid Station Interface for PBT / Key Phones
15 Redundancy System should have redundancy for PSU & CPU.
16 System Voltage -48V DC (positive ground) + 15%, -10% with MCB protection
17 Power Consumption Less than 300W
18 EMI / EMC As per IEC 17025: 2000 Standard
19 Programming Programming of the EPAX should be done using
Console/Laptop that should be part of the exchange at no
extra cost .
2.2 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standards, including IS,
which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be
considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder conforms to other standards, salient
points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this
specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such
standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.
3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The EPAX & Push Button Telephones called in this specification are required to operate
satisfactorily under climatic conditions given in the Specifications.
359
4. PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
4.1 Digital EPAX System:
.4.2 The microprocessor based EPAX should directly interface with communication transmission
systems like Power Line Carrier Communication, Optical fiber, Satellite and Microwave
radio communication links. The subscribers must be able to communicate with local
subscribers and far end subscribers through trunk lines. The EPAX should form a part of
Communication system and should be capable of switching speech paths on trunk routes.
The exchange should be compatible with the existing switching systems for its operation in
conjunction with electronic four wire group selectors and EPAXs of any other make at far
end stations. It would be the sole responsibility of the successful bidder to guarantee the
compatibility of the EPAX with the existing switching systems.
4.3 The exchanges shall be manufactured to the state of art technology and employ the stored
program technique by utilizing the principles of TDM/PCM. The system software shall be
posted in flash memory as per the international standards. The equipment should be
reliable and capable of giving service in adverse tropical temperature climatic condition.
The equipment should work in non air-conditioned environment at EHT sub-stations.
4.4 Exchanges are to be self contained and provided with conventional facilities like dial tone,
busy tone, ringing tone, ring back tone etc. The dialing pulse rate of subscriber for make
and break ratio 1:2 (33.3msec. / 66.66msec.) and for trunk dialing 1:1 (50 m sec./ 50 m
sec). The EPAX should be capable of working to single, two digit and three digit numbering
schemes.
4.5 Main Distribution Frame shall be provided. Subscriber lines and junction lines are to be
terminated on the MDF on one side of the terminal-block with the legend of the terminal
connections clearly indicated in alphanumeric. The MDF shall be provided with individual
surge protection.
4.6. Krone tag blocks are preferred to be used for the MDF. The supply of relevant wire
terminating tool for the type of tag block quoted towards MDF is covered in the scope of
this specification.
4.7. All the subscriber lines and the PLCC junction lines shall be provided with surge protection.
Invariably suitable surge protectors in the form of Gas discharge tubes and fuses are to be
provided to protect electronic circuitry of the exchange from the damages due to external
surges /spikes. Minimum maintenance and free workability on the equipment is to be
ensured.
4.8. The EPAX should be provided with self-checking diagnostic facility to monitor the exchange
continuously through software controlled program. The status of the call being established
is to be visually displayed suitably as the call is progressing and faults by audible and visual
indications. Reliability, security and quality of service must be the main features of the
EPAX. The EPAX shall have the priority feature for a particular subscriber.
The following state of art facilities are also to be provided.
i. Priority cut-in into an engaged extension/tie line.
ii. Automatic cut off on forced release condition.
iii. Barred access to tie lines
iv. Call transfer

v. Call consult
vi. Call forward etc.
360
4.9. The priority cut in facility shall be provided in three hierarchies as stated below.
i. Priority cut in into two busy local extensions.
ii. Priority cut in into one busy local extension and one local E&M tie trunk.
iii. Priority cut in into two busy E&M trunks in the same EPAX on transit call.
Subscriber access to the E&M Trunks shall be controlled through barred access
facility.
4.10. SPECIFIC TRUNK ACCESS: If more than one route is available from the same EPAX to an out
station EPAX and in case the main route is busy, the selection of alternate route shall be
made available on Automatic selection of at least two alternative routes apart from the
main trunk route. Specific trunk access shall also have to be provided. The subscriber shall
be able to access a specific trunk route by dialing a special access code followed by the
trunk route number.
The EPAX shall support exclusive Load Dispatch Express type communication network with
all to one and one to all type of trunk access. This feature shall be in addition to the normal
All to All type.
4.11. The equipment should be housed in a standard steel cabinet with proper ventilation, and it
should be dust and vermin proof housing. It should be painted as per relevant IS and must
have provision for access to the circuitry from both the front and rear sides. The
ventilation fan shall work on 48V DC only.
4.12 The EPAXs shall be got wired for a minimum capacity of 128 universal ports. Required
number of junction cards and line cards may be provided as per the schedule of materials.
4.13. Programming the required facilities on the EPAX with an ordinary telephone through the
service line is preferred. For EPAXs, which cannot be programmed with an ordinary
telephone, the Bidder shall include the supply of the required programmer (Example:
EPROM programmer or console) within the scope of supply with a detailed write-up of the
programming schedule through the operator console/ programmer.
4.14 The Bidders are requested to quote as mandatory for one set of spare PCB modules as
stated below:
i. Power supply unit
ii. Central processing unit
iii. Line interface card
iv. E&M trunk interface card
v. Switching matrix card
361
5. ELECTRONIC PUSH BUTTON TELEPHONES:
The Electronic Push button telephones (Desk top type) shall have the approval of Telecom
Engineering Centre of DoT and suitable to work with PLCC system.
5.1. a) Type : Electronic Push button Telephones (Decadic)
Supporting both
pulse and DTMF signaling and ring LED.
b) Dial speed : 10 PPS + 5%
c) Break make Ratio : 2:1
d) Inter digit pause : 800 ms.
f) Reliability : The performance of the instrument should be

very reliable and accurate with large MTBF as per TEC requirements.
5.2 The Telephones shall be provided with the following features:
i. Decadic / DTMF dialing
ii. Last number redial
iii. Redial capacity up to 32 digits
iv. Ringer with volume control
v. Interchangeable Transducers of electrodynamic type
vi. Electronic speech circuitry with regulated speech levels

vii. Speaker phone
6.0. TESTS
6.1. Type/acceptance and routine tests shall be carried out on the EPAX and Electronic Push
Button Telephones proposed for purchase under this package in accordance with TEC
specification applicable as per clause 7.2.1.
6.2 EMI / EMC Test
The EPAX is required to perform in a working environment of high voltage power system
with high level of Electromagnetic interference and calls for high degree of
Electromagnetic computability for achieving maximum throughout of traffic. The working
environment is riddled with fast transients, currents, high voltage lightning & switching
surges and severe short circuit current faults. The EPAX is therefore required to be tested
thoroughly for its functional performance as per the EMI/EMC standards mentioned in
clause No 7.2.1. Bids of bidders who do not enclose copy of authenticated certificate by
a reputed laboratory either in India or Abroad of testing the performance of the offered
EPAXs under severe Electromagnetic interference conditions will be rejected.
362
7 Type Tests:
The following type tests shall be conducted on a selected sample of EPAX
7.1 EPAX
i. Power supply test
ii. Protection test
iii. Engage pulse timing test
iv. Priority timing test
v. Digital pulse timing test
vi. Interdigit pulse timing test
vii. Releasing pulse timing test
viii. Test calls - Subscriber to Subscriber
Subscriber to Trunk
Trunk to Trunk
7.2 Telephones
i. Climatic test
ii. Vibration test
iii. Bump/Fall/Topple test
iv. Corrosion test
v. Protection test
8 Acceptance/Routine Tests
8.1 EPAX
i. Power supply test
ii. Pulses timing test
iii. Test calls - Subscriber to Subscriber
Subscriber to Trunk
Trunk to Trunk
8.2. Telephones
i. Climatic test
ii. Vibration test
iii. Corrosion test
iv. Protection test
363
9. Testing Expenses
9.1 The bidder shall furnish charges for conducting specified type tests as per Price schedule.
9.2 In case of failure in any of the type tests, the Supplier is required to modify the design of
the material and the material shall be type tested successfully for the modified design.
9.3 Bidders shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests.
They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time
schedule guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedul
9.3.a Entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture
specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of EPAX and
Electronic Push Button Telephones.
10. Additional Tests:

The Purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Bidder's premises, at site, or in any other place in addition
to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests, to satisfy himself that the material
comply with the specifications.
11. Test Reports:

a. i. Copies of the type tests shall be enclosed with the bid
ii. Before dispatch of the equipment at least six (6) copies along with one
original shall be submitted. One copy shall be returned duly certified by
the Purchaser only after which the material will be dispatched.
b. Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic
inspection or as and when desired by the Purchaser’s representative.
c. Test Certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the

Bidder. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Purchaser.
364
ANNEXURE I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR EPAX
(To be filled by the Bidder)
S. No. Parameters Description
1 Technology (Type)
2 Control
3 Back-Up Memory
4 System Capacity
Full capacity of trunks
Initially required capacity
Required Capacity of
E & M Trunks / Subscribers
5 Configuration
6 Priority Facility
7 Communication Links
8 Architectural Design
9 System Modularity
10 Approvals Required
11 Trunk Interface with LED indication for

all trunks
12 E1 Interface
13 Alarm On Indication
14 Protection
15 Extension Interface
16 Redundancy
17 System Voltage
18 Power Consumption
19 EMI / EMC
20 The EPAX shall be compatible to the

following codes for pulses in various
365
signaling circuits.
(i) Engage pulse
(ii) Priority pulse
(iii) Digit pulse
(iv) Inter digit pulse
(v) Release pulse
366
ANNEXURE II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PUSH BUTTON TELEPHONES
(To be filled by the Bidder)
Item No. Description Data
(a) Manufacturer's Name & Address / Supplier's

Name & Address
(b) Governing Standards
(c) Type
(d) Dial speed
(e) Break-make ratio (PPs with +/-)
(f) Inter digit pause (msec.)
(g) Reliability
(h) Ringing voltage (V DC)
(i) Hook-switch endurance (No. of operations)
(j) Operating temperature (deg. C)
(k) Tone/Pulse switchable
(l) Last no. redial facility
(m) Ringer OFF-LOW-HI facility
(n) Hold on music
(o) Pause facility
(p) Ring LED (Yes/No)
(q) Display
367

Polavaram Technical Scope

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Polavaram Technical Scope

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

TENDER SPECIFIVATION No.

(TWO PART BID)

FOR THE WORK OF

Design, Engineering, Manufacturing, testing at manufacturer’s works

VOLUME –III Technical Specification of E&M Works

SI.No. Description Page No.

5) Station supply (Dry type) Transformers. (2.5MVA,5 MVA)

7) 11 KV Indoor & Outdoor system

9) Unit auxiliary control panels.

10) 100 MVA Generator Transformers with NIFPS.

11) 400 KV Bus Reactors with NIFPS.

13) 220 V Stn. Battery, Battery charger & DC Distn. Boards.

14) Power House earthing & grounding.

17) Power Housing Lighting

18) A/C & Ventilation for Power House.

19) Internal telephone & Public Address system

21) 1000 KVA DG set

22) EOT cranes

23) Testing equipment.

25) 400 KV GIS switchyard

26) 400 KV Isolators with earth switch,CVTs, CTs, LAs.

27) Power evacuation structures..

28) Lightning protection

29) Mandatory & Commissioning Spares

30) Erection, Testing & commissioning of complete PH Equipment & GIS

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CRITICAL E&M EQUIPMENT

(To be furnished by the Bidder)

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF TURBINE

1 Type Vertical Kaplan Turbine.

i) --- m head (Max) (at guide vane opening %)

i) ----- m head (Max)

a) Guide vane opening and

Output (%) 100% 80% 80% 30% 110%

ii) 27.0 m head (rated)

Output(%) 100% 80% 60% 30% 110%

Output(%) 100% 80% 60% 30% Max

25. Guide vane servomotor & Oil Header assy

e) Range of adjustment of gate opening time

i) Capacity of pump L / min

b) Stand by Governor oil pump:

i. Guide vane strokes

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF GENERATOR

(The items with mark (*) are guaranteed particulars)

*3. Max. continuous rating (10% over load)

ii. Run away

c) Weighted Average Efficiency

11. Moment of inertia

15. Short circuit ratio

23. Generator air coolers

24. Cooling Type

27. Nature of Insulation

a) Synchronous (Direct axis) : (Saturated)

a) Armature winding per phase(at 20 Deg.C)

30. Characteristic curves to be furnished.

a) Direct axis transient, open circuit :

32. Name and location of part having the least factor of

a) Amplitudes of harmonics as a percentage of

34. NGT & Resistor

35. Thrust bearing

c) No. of bearing Pads & size

ii) H.P. and speed for each motor.

iii) Qty of oil & pressure

e) Largest assembly to be lifted by main crane.